Loading...
16B-003 (17) HVAC H101A NCRTWWEST HvAC FLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-110115 SOUTHWEST NVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-1101C SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-11010 NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR W102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W2O1 DETAILS W2O2 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL E101A NORTHWEST LIGHTMG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101B SOUTHWEST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E1010 NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A L!GHTMG PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWEST POWER A SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B SOUTHWEST POWER t SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER A SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2010 NCRTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAI'M E401 SITE ELECTRICAL OF 4" 40 A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT w* A414 ENLARGED POOL. PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A4* POOL FILTRATION DETAILS A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Aro01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS Aro02 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS AroO3 PLAN DETAILS Aro04 PLAN DETAILS ACoO5 PLAN DETAILS AroO(o ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATICNS Aro01 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS Aro08 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS 14101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A601A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8010 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT .. EQI EQJIPMENT EM EQUIPMENT EM ---GUIFMENT .� E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION F101A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST(ART I CCI"tl'1lAlITY) F1015 FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY I ADMINISTRATION) r F101C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) F101D FOUNDATICN PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATICN DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART I COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY I ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301C SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIU'1)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS no 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING ow PIOIA NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN • FIRST FLOOR P1015 SOUTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR go 101010 NORTHEAST PLLTIBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLLMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS am P202 PLUMBING DETAILS P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS COVER SWEET Cs01 GENERAL. INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,DWG.L15T LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATICN,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL w L101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADMG PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 51TE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L&01 SITE DETAILS - STOW,SANITARY,AND WATER L�o02 51TE DETAILS,STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL RI01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS 8102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS FI4101 PHASING PLAN ADOIA DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR 14DOIC DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR ADOID DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR A002 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF 4004 DEMOLITION WALL SECTIONS 14101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t COMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH (LEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINI5TRATICN) AIOIG FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETCRIUM) 141010 FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) 14102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN * 4104 ROOF - DETAILS 14201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FNISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE 14205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20ro DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS ! 14201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMIMNI STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTICNS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A4015 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ON IM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL on Litecontrol Cat . No. W-ID-66N24T8-PBSS, M„ or equal . 24 . Fixture "X" Surface mount vandal resistant prismatic 40 polycarbonate fixture for 2-13W TT lamps . To be Kennall Cat . No. 28-30-26-277, or equal . 25 . Fixture "Y" Four foot long, two lamp wall bracket with polycarbonate lens, T8 lamps and electronic ballast . To be Vista Cat . No. 3134-2Z-T8, or equal . 26 . Fixture "Z" Eight foot long, 4 lamp wall mounted direct/indirect fluorescent fixture with semi-specular parabolic baffles, elec- tronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Litecontrol Cat . No. W-ID-66N48T8-PBSS, or equal . 27 . Exit Light Die cast 120 volt LED stencil face exit so light with white frame, white face, red letters, number of faces and mounting as shown on Drawings . To be Prescolite Cat . No. LED-R-1-W, or equal . 28 . Fixture SL "A" Thirty-five foot round tapered steel pole with one 400 watt HPS luminaire, wide asymmetric distribution, including anchor bolts, templates, photocell, all mounting hardware, dark bronze finish, Kim Cat . No. DM/VLP25W3/400HPS208/DB-P/lA/PTRS35- 85129DM/DB-P, or equal . 29 . Fixture SL "B" Sixteen foot round straight steel pole with one 150 watt HPS luminaire, wide asymmetric distribution including anchor bolts, templates, photocell, all mounting hardware, dark bronze finish, Kim Cat . No. FM/VLP17W3/150HPS208/DB-P/lA/PRS16- 45120FM/DB-P, or equal . Electrical 16100-119 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 16 . Fixture "P" Eight foot long, four lamp (tandem) en- closed fluorescent with aluminum housing, wet location label, DR acrylic prismatic lens with cam latch, electronic ballast and T8 lamps . To be Metalux Cat . No. 8T- �• AVTL-432-DR-DL-T8, or equal . 17 . Fixture "Q" Same as Fixture "P" except four feet long, with two T8 lamps . To be Metalux Cat . No. AVTL-232-DR-DL-T8, or equal . 18 . Fixture "R" Enclosed HID downlight for 250 watt metal ' halide lamp. Fixtures marked with a "Q" shall also have quartz restrike feature with 150 watt quartz lamp. To be General Electric Cat . No. VBS25M1A5EA(Q) HCP120, or equal . 19 . Fixture "S" Surface cylinder HID downlight for 100 watt HPS lamp, clear reflector, white finish, Prescolite Cat . No. HCBC04-CR-W, or equal . •• 20 . Fixture "T" HID downlight for 400 - watt super metal halide lamp, with prismatic glass reflec- JIM tor, pendant mount, corrosion resistant enclosure, clear tempered glass gasketed bottom closure for chlorine atmosphere . To have 250 watt quartz standby lighting "" system for 120 volt operation where called for on Drawings . To be Holophane Cat . No. PRSL-400-MH-12-PD-B35 with spec- ified options, or equal . 21 . Fixture "U" Under water swimming pool light with two 250 watt tungsten halogen lamps . To be .w Paragon "Slimlite-50011 , or equal . 22 . Fixture "V" Polycarbonate wall-pack with 70 watt high pressure sodium lamp. To be Hubbell Cat . No. PVL-00705-511, or equal . 23 . Fixture "W" Four foot long, 2 lamp wall mounted di- .� rect/indirect fluorescent fixture with semi-specular parabolic baffles, elec- tronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Electrical 16100-118 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 8 . Fixture "H" Two foot by two foot, 2-U lamp enclosed and gasketed troffer, wet location label, electronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Gurth Cat . No. FG1-2224G-lTAK1, or equal . 9 . Fixture "I" Enclosed and gasketed HID downlight with widespread prismatic lens, 70 watt high pressure sodium lamp. To be Halo Cat . No. M6023-630-10012P, or equal . 10 . Fixture "J" Eight foot, four lamp channel with elec- tronic ballast and T8 lamps. To be Metalux Cat . No. 8TSS-432 , or equal . 11 . Fixture "K" Six foot, four lamp channel with elec- tronic ballast and T8 lamps. To be Metalux Cat . No. SS425, or equal . 12 . Fixture "L" Four foot long, one lamp fluorescent strip with electronic ballast, T8 lamps, Metalux Cat . No. SN-132, or equal . 13 . Fixture "M" Two lamp compact fluorescent downlight with electronic factor ballasts and 26 watt quad tube lamps . To be Kurt Versen Cat . No. P632 , or equal . 14 . Fixture "N" Eight foot long, four lamp (tandem) industrial fluorescent with uplight, OR spring loaded turret-type sockets, baked white enamel finish, channel and reflec- tor connectors, full end plates at end of l,,,r rows, shatter proof lamp sleeves, elec- tronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Miller Cat. No. IC-2111-08, or equal. 15 . Fixture 110" Four foot long, two lamp industrial fluo- rescent with uplight, spring loaded tur- ret-type sockets, baked white enamel 400 finish, channel and reflector connectors, full end plates at end of rows, shatter proof lamp sleeves, electronic ballast, we and T8 lamps . To be Miller Cat . No. IC- 2111-04, or equal . as Electrical 16100-117 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1 . Fixture "A" Two foot by four foot, 3 lamp fluorescent static troffer with parabolic semi-specu- lar non-iridescent aluminum baffles, electronic ballast, T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat. No. T8-P4-243G-43363-1-49, or equal . 2 . Fixture "B" Two foot by four foot, two lamp fluores- cent static troffer with parabolic semi- specular non-iridescent aluminum baffles, electronic ballast, T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat . No. T8-P4-242G-43263-1-49, or equal . .�. 3 . Fixture "C" Two foot by two foot, 2 - U lamp fluores- cent static troffer with parabolic semi- .., specular non-iridescent aluminum baffles, electronic ballast, T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat . No. T8-P4-2222UG-43333-1- 49, or equal . 4 . Fixture "D" Two foot by four foot 3 lamp fluorescent troffer with acrylic prismatic lens, ** flush aluminum door, electronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat . No. 4PS4G-52-243, or equal . ,. 5 . Fixture "E" Two foot by four foot 2 lamp fluorescent troffer with acrylic prismatic lens, flush aluminum door, electronic ballast, and T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat . No. 4PS4G-52-242, or equal . 6 . Fixture "F" Two foot by two foot 2-U lamp fluorescent .. troffer with acrylic prismatic lens, flush aluminum door, electronic ballast and T8 lamps . To be Columbia Cat . No. .� 4PS4G-52-222C, or equal . 7 . Fixture "G" Two foot by four foot, three lamp " enclosed and gasketed troffer, wet loca- tion label, electronic ballast, and T8 lamps. To be Guth Cat . No. FG1-2434G- .� 1TAK1, or equal . Electrical 16100-116 0 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and which is estimated by the awarding authority to cost in excess of Ten Thousand Dollars, and only each class of work de- scribed shall be a class of work for which a sub- bidder for that sub-trade must list the information required in the "Form for sub-bid" : E. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following Contract Drawings : 4 w go on ON 40 an ow 4■ on Electrical 16100-115 .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Alternate No. 2 is the additional Lump Sum Price for labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing a dual fuel burning system for the boilers . The additional electrical work involved is the feeder to the oil transfer pumps, the feeders to the oil burner air compressors, the branch circuit to the oil tank leak detection system panel and the wiring to the tank mounted sensors . C. Alternate No. 3 is the additional Lump Sum Price for labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing the eight Type "U" underwater pool lights, together with their switches and branch circuit wiring. D. Alternate No. 5 is the additional Lump Sum Price for labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental for providing the track lighting at the platform, together with its dimmers and branch circuit -* wiring. 3 . 08 TIME, MANNER, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed. ) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . B.. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER' S CHECK OR CASHIER' S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be *" rejected. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section ., shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authori- ty, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which, in the opinion of the Awarding Authority, based upon an *� investigation of the work involved, is customarily Electrical 16100-114 0 4► ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL on A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be go approximately 1811 above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height . At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect . Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Subcon- tractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences . B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket . C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending ww of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/411 back of finished surface . E . Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit . Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. 40 F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers . on 3 . 06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer' s printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor and be included in his bid. 3 . 07 ALTERNATE BID PRICES A. The Base Bid is the Lump Sum Price for all labor and materials specified and/or shown on the Drawings, less the work included in Alternates . Electrical 16100-113 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics . Lighting fixtures shall not be .. installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and ductwork is in place . Lighting fixtures layout shown on the Drawings is typical layout, but may be modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to final construction conditions . Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of all lighting fixture loca- tions . Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or ** recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling Subcontractor and Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor to co-ordinate lighting system with other trades . D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. E . Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-plated brass screws and gasketed. F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor and shall hang plumb. G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition ,. as to finish, etc . Check for proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances . 3 . 05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ON Electrical 16100-112 e» No 16 am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections . Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest National Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards . D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for con- tinuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting " fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. op 3 . 03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes . B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against �r entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof . Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections . ow D . Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibra- am tions and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings . This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to ` ` facilitate alignment of fixtures . 3 . 04 LIGHTING FIXTURES Electrical 16100-111 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades . B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall verify all measure- ments and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans . C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Subcontrac- tor finds that the work of other trades might inter- *� fere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans . The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems . The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the National -- Electrical Code and local inspection authorities . E . Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3 . 02 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment . *� B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract . Electrical 16100-110 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL w. bution will be arranged for by the Owner at a later a�. date. B. The local cable TV company shall furnish and install cable from street to entrance board and shall termi- nate the cable there . C. All costs of the local cable TV company for labor and materials furnished by them shall be included in the Electrical Subcontractor' s bid price . D . The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the conduit with pull cord, backboard, power outlets, and all other required components not provided by the cable company. E . Each television outlet shown on the Drawings shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and 3/411 conduit extended up in wall and out into space above corridor ceiling, terminating in a bushing within 2" of the wall line. 2 . 20 DATA CABLE SYSTEM A. The building' s internal data cable system will be wired by the School' s vendor. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install + . conduit, backboards, and sleeves as shown on the Draw- ings, leaving all conduit fished. C. Each data outlet shown on the Drawings shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate, 3/4" conduit extended up in wall and out into space above corridor ceiling terminating in a bushing within 2" of the wall line . 2 . 21 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY wr► A. Multi-outlet assembly shall be 20GB18 Wiremold Series 2000, or equal, complete with wire clips, couplings, cover, single receptacles 18" o. c . , and all other accessories required to complete the installation. Provide with blank series 2000 raceway at sink cabinets . PART 3 - INSTALLATION Electrical 16100-109 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL from pulling section to transformers, transformer secondary cable terminations, and shall furnish and "b install any additional material and labor required for a complete installation. E . The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electric Code. Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water pipe sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC. Also install a concrete encased electrode as required by that section. 2 . 17 DAMPER CONNECTIONS A. At all exhaust fans, furnish wiring between fan motor and motor operated damper. Damper to open when fan runs . 2 . 18 TELEPHONE SYSTEM �** A. The building' s internal telephone system is the integrated school communications system. .. B . The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install conduit, backboards, and sleeves as specified and shown on the Drawings, leaving all conduit fished, and .A he shall arrange for and co-ordinate the installation of new service by New England Telephone . He shall also provide cabling between integrated school communications system and the telephone network interface. C. New England Telephone will pull their cables in the .� conduit provided by the Electrical Subcontractor and will pre-wire to network interface (terminal strips) . D. Each public telephone outlet shown the Drawings shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate, 3/411 conduit extended up in wall and out into space above corridor ceiling, terminating in a bushing within 211 of the wall line. 2 . 19 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM A. Arrange for and co-ordinate the installation of cable television service to the building. Interior distri- Electrical 16100-108 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL between terminal cabinets, may, at the Contractor' s option, be a multi-conductor cable with each conductor numbered at 211 intervals . Cable connecting remote control console to control panel shall be 4 - #20 with overall jacket . Cable loop to detection devices shall be 2 - #16 shielded twisted with overall jacket . All wiring from terminal cabinets to alarm devices shall conform to the color code specification of the «r. manufacturer. All AC and DC portions of the system shall be installed in separate raceway systems . Final connections between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made under the direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. H. Final Test - The Electrical Subcontractor, in the presence of a representative of the manufacturer, the Northampton Police Department, and the Owner, shall operate every detector circuit . Every horn circuit shall be opened in at least two locations to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry. When this testing has been completed to the satisfaction of the local Police Department, the Electrical Subcon- tractor and the representative of the manufacturer, a letter from the Electrical Subcontractor co-signed by the manufacturer attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to the Owner. 2 . 16 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Electric service shall be size as shown on the Drawings, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, underground. B. Arrange for service from Massachusetts Electric Company. The Owner will pay all charges and fees in connection therewith. C. Massachusetts Electric Company will furnish and install the meter, current transformers, C.T. wiring, transformers, and will make transformer primary and secondary connections . D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install the current transformer compartment, pulling section, meter socket, conduit between the meter socket and C.T. compartment, service lateral conduit and wire Electrical 16100-107 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL reported on the alpha-numeric remote control console. Systems that use LED' s for annunciation are not sat acceptable. The control panel shall be of the multiplex type allowing each point of protection to be connected into a single twisted pair polling loop within the premises . The polling loop shall be supervised for shorts and opens . The control panel shall be capable of remote diagnostic programming. To be Silent Knight Model 4720, or equal . •*� C. Remote control console (security keyboard) shall be alpha-numeric display type and shall allow for the entry of user commands to control the system. In addition, the full status of all points of protection shall be indicated on the display in English language. User direct access programming mode to view points of protection and edit programming shall be accomplished at the console . D. Interior detection devices shall operate on the principle of passive infrared sensing using selectable pulse count technology and visible light rejection filtration with adjustable vertical and horizontal " detection for stability. Products of the dual or quad detection types shall be considered inadequate . Detection range and pattern shall be sufficient to provide detection in the area the device is located on the plans . The detection pattern must have a minimum of 1100, 40' x 50' short range for classroom area and 1400 for hallways . E. Perimeter detection devices (door contacts) shall be the reed magnetic contact type, designed for flush mounting in steel doors in a 111 self-locking style. They shall be suitable for heavy industrial use . F. On activation, the system shall sound an audible alert through all speakers of the school communication system in addition to activating the remote dialer. G. Provide, in accordance with manufacturer' s instruc- tions, all wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete system as described herein and as shown on the Drawing. AC supply to the control panel shall be on dedicated branch circuit . Circuit breaker locks shall be used. Any alarm wiring ." between control panel and remote terminal cabinets or Electrical 16100-106 ' 01 on ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL applicable at each microphone jack location. Demon- strate to Architect/Engineer and owner how the system meets Specifications . ADJUSTMENTS : 10 . 0 In case the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing, continue w,. work until the installation operates properly. If final acceptance is delayed because of a installation not in accord with the specifications, the contractor may remove (at his expense) the alternate equipment and supply/install the specified equipment . 10 . 2 Make control adjustments as directed by the Architect/Engineer/Owner. Provide covers, caps, or shafts locks for control settings for inclusion with the final documentation on all units with front panel volume controls . Use Avery colored labels to mark the normal level setting of system volume controls . Install security covers to protect controls from tampering. In the case of locking card cages or 4" tampering. cabinets, the Contractor is to supply the Owner with 2 sets of keys . The Contractor is to keep a third set of keys for use by their Service Depart- 40 ment personnel . 2 . 15 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM A. Furnish and install a complete functional Intrusion Detection System consisting of a combination of perimeter and interior detection devices that when activated shall sound an alert through the school communication system and also communicate to the Northampton Police Station using standard leased tele- phone lines, according to the following specifica- tions . All components shall be UL Listed for their intended purpose and the complete system shall be the product of a single manufacturer. The following products are those of the Silent Knight Company and are listed herein to establish a level of quality and operation only. Products from Radionics or Morse Products shall be considered as equal . B. Control panel shall be a microprocessor based EE Prom programmable 80 zone instrument . The status of all points of protection shall be constantly monitored and " ' Electrical 16100-105 MM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a* with the sound level meter at a height of 4 to 5 feet AFF at multiple locations . 5 . 2 All interior finishes and furnishings shall be in place, and system gain shall be adjusted to provide levels of 70-80dB and at least lOdB above back ground noise at the measuring locations for these tests, except as otherwise noted. 5 . 3 Testing shall include subjective evaluations by persons listening and viewing from various positions under various operating conditions . The objective of these tests will be to verify system functioning under conditions of normal operation. WORKMANSHIP: 6 . 1 The installation of all work shall be neat . Boxes and Equipment shall be plumb and square . Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment . Make joints and connections with rosin core solder or with mechanical connectors approved by the Architect\ Engineer. Execute wiring in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices . No SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION: 7 . 1 Co-operate with other trades and provide and execute 40 moderate moves for pleasing appearance in order to achieve well coordinated progress and satisfactory final results . .e, DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING: 8 . 1 After supplying diagrams and completing initial tests .p and adjustments specified, notify the Architect/ Engineer, in writing, that the installation fulfills this specification, and is complete and ready for inspection by representatives of the Architect/ "m Engineer and Owner. DEMONSTRATION: am 9 . 1 Demonstrate operation of each major component and the complete installation, using each microphone fur- on nished, required microphone positions, and other input equipment . Utilize each supplied microphone where Electrical 16100-104 l ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 9 Speaker cable shall be West Penn Wire #CL2-224 . Provide as required 3 . 10 Microphone Gooseneck Adapter shall be Atlas GN-18 . Provide one for each system. SECTION III EXECUTION Installation of sound system: 4 . 1 Furnish and install racks, furniture, wire, etc . , needed to provide a complete usable installation to the extent that such items are not included elsewhere in the building specifications . „ 4 . 2 All equipment, except portable equipment shall be firmly held in place. This includes loudspeakers, conduit, amplifiers, cables, etc . Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support their loads . 4M 4 . 3 Mark switches, connectors, jacks, receptacles, outlets, cables and cable terminations . to 4 .4 Take necessary precautions to prevent and guard against electro-magnetic and electro-static hum, to supply adequate ventilation, and to install the equipment to provide reasonable safety for the operator. Ground equipment racks to earth ground with a No. 8 AWG green ground THW (CU) in 1/2" conduit . 4 . 5 Run lines in separate conduits for microphone level circuits , and line level circuits . ow 4 . 6 Insulate microphone and 600 ohm lines from the conduit and each other for the entire conduit length. Line in 60 conduit shall not be spliced. Ground microphone shields only at the microphone frame and the control console input connectors only. Pw AUDIO SYSTEM EQUALIZATION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS 5 . 1 Measure system acoustical performance using a cali- O, brated ANSI Standard Type 1 or IEC precision sound level meter set for "slow" meter damping. Have system microphone in proper position. Measure the response Electrical 16100-103 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 3 General paging ceiling speakers as shown on plans shall be Rauland ACC1401 8"Speaker Assembly. The ■* assembly shall be a 8" Dual cone speaker with 25/70 volt line matching transformer and 10oz . ceramic magnet assembled to a Rauland ACC1003 baffle and ACC1112 backbox, or approved equal . Power rating shall be 15 watt RMS; voice coil shall have an impedance of 8 ohms and measure 1" in diameter. The circular baffle shall be 12 3/4" in diameter and 3/8" deep. It shall be constructed of 22 gauge cold rolled steel,with white baked on epoxy finish. 3 .4 Microphone outlets shall be Soundolier S501-13C and MRB-2 steel electrical plate for flush mounting. Quantity of outlets shall be as indicated on the Drawings . Cable shall be as specified herein. 3 . 5 The microphone shall be Rauland 1285 or approved equal dynamic cardioid microphone. Provide two for each aw system. The frequency response shall be 40-16, 000 hz,with an output level at 1000hz as follows : open circuit voltage, - 75db (0 . 178mV) (Odb=1V/microbar) ; ow power level, -55db (0db=1mW10/microbars) . Front to back ratio shall be 25db. An impedance of 250 ohms shall be provided. The microphone shall be equipped with a three-pin XLR type connector and a 5/8"-27 thread .b quick release stand adapter. The case shall incorpo- rate a low profile SPST slide switch which shall line short in the "Off" position. A screw adjustable switch lock shall be provided. The microphone shall be supplied with a detachable 25 foot heavy duty two- conductor shielded cable with a black A3F connector at the microphone . The overall size of the microphone shall not exceed 1 23/3211 in diameter, and 7 5/16" in length, nor shall it weigh more than 9 .5 ounces . Provide one for each microphone . 3 . 6 Microphone Desk Stand shall be an Atlas DS-7 . Provide one for each system. 3 . 7 Microphone Floor Stand shall be an Atlas MS12C. Provide two for each system. .� 3 . 8 Microphone cable shall be West Penn Wire #CL2-292 . Provide as required Electrical 16100-102 .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL of 105 to 130 volts, 60Hz A.C. , and shall include overload protective circuitry to prevent damage caused by shorted output lines and other overload conditions . The amplifier shall be the product of a manufacturer with at least ten (10) years' of experience in the manufacturing of solid state in wall amplifiers and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Re- examination service. 3 . 1 The main sound reinforcement ceiling loudspeakers speakers as shown on plans shall be Rauland ACC1401 8"Speaker Assembly. The assembly shall be a 8" Dual cone speaker with 25/70 volt line matching transformer and 10oz . ceramic magnet assembled to a Rauland ACC1003 baffle and ACC1112 backbox, or approved equal . Power rating shall be 15 watt RMS; voice coil shall have an impedance of 8 ohms and measure 111 in diame- ter. The circular baffle shall be 12 3/4" in diameter and 3/8" deep. It shall be constructed of 22 gauge cold rolled steel,with white baked on epoxy finish. 3 . 2 The Audio/Video Interface unit shall be capable of go taking line or speaker level outputs from audio sources and connecting them to microphone or auxiliary inputs of audio system. Three different types of input connectors - 1/4 inch phono, RCA type phono, and 3 .5 mm mini - jacks - simplify connections of most equipment . A LINE/SPKR attenuator switch allows the unit to be safely connected to the speaker outputs of older tube type equipment . A 16 ohm, 5 watt load resistor simulates the speaker impedance to prevent damage to the amplifier output stage, while a high frequency filter reduces hiss from noisy electronics . A Hi-Low attenuation switch allows greater flexibility for handling line output sources at either "hi-fi,, or professional db levels . The internal transformer provides a floating 150 ohm output with a standard 3 pin male XLR type connector, so connecting to most P.A. system mixers or mixer amplifiers requires only a standard microphone cable . A GND/LIFT switch shall be provided on the unit, to eliminate hum and buzz from AC ground loops between equipment . A ! /4 inch unbalanced line level output shall be provided. Provide one each for the Cafeteria, Pool and Gymnasium Sound Systems . Pro Co AV-1 . Electrical 16100-101 .a ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL volume control on microphone inputs and the auxiliary input . The precedence circuit shall permit muting of , auxiliary program material during microphone use. 2 . 3 The in-wall amplifier shall also include all the circuitry and controls necessary to provide complete system equalization for optimum sound reproduction and maximum gain before feedback. The equalizer filters shall be of 1-octave bandpass type having an individu- al range of 12db, plus or minus 3db. A total of 9 individual filters shall be provided, having center frequencies of 63 , 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, and 16, OOOhz . Filter controls shall be of the slide type . The equalization controls shall be concealed behind a removable cover panel to prevent control setting from being accidently disturbed. 2 .4 The amplifier shall also include a volume compressor in/out switch. Release time, slope and threshold •� controls shall be provided to properly utilize the built in compressor circuit . The volume compressor shall have an attack time of no greater than no greater than 2 milliseconds and a variable release time of . 2sec-2sec . . It shall provide full 30 db compression. Distortion at full compression shall be less than . 2$ A threshold, slope and release time no controls shall also be included for adjusting compres- sion level . 2 . 5 The amplifier shall also be include a master volume no control, a power on-off switch, a filter bypass switch, external input level control and a resetable circuit breaker. Reserve space and an easily remov- MP able blank panel shall be included to accommodate any additional controls the system may require . sm 2 . 6 All controls shall be protected against tampering or authorized use by a hinged and key locking front door. Amplifier status indicators shall include an external ,ft pilot light and an overload indicator, each of which shall be an LED to eliminate burnout and replacement problems . 2 . 7 The amplifier shall provide outputs of 4 , 8, and 16 ohms,plus 25 and 70 volt line connections; the 25 volt output shall be balanced and center tapped. It shall be designed to operate continuously on line voltages Electrical 16100-100 44 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F. K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the availability of warranty service and parts, the installing supplier shall be an factory authorized representative for the products they are supplying. A letter authorizing representation shall be supplied and included in the submittals . Any substitutions shall be requested in writing to the Architect and the Owner ten (10) days prior to bid. 1 . 4 Any request for substitution shall include detailed manufacturers data to substantiate that the proposed product is equal to that specified. A demonstration to the Owner and the Architect of the installed system comprised of the substitute products shall be provided no later than 10 days prior to the bid date. The demonstration shall provide the Owner and Architect with an assurance that the proposed substitute is equal in sound quality, function and appearance to that specified and demonstrate the ability of the contractor to properly install and tune an equal system in the manner specified later in this section. SECTION II PRODUCTS 2 . 1 Mixer amplifier shall be a Modular Solid State "In- Wall" Amplifier. It shall be flush mounted as shown on the Drawings and occupy a space no greater than 16 1/4" in width and 26 3/4" in height . The amplifier shall deliver an audio output of 120-watts RMS at less than . 025% distortion over a frequency range of at least 20Hz to 20, 000 Hz . Output regulation shall be in idb or less from no load to full load. The amplifier shall provide complete input and mixing ports for input modules, these modules shall be supplied as WE required. The low-z microphone pre-amp input module shall provide a transformer isolated mic . input, 58db nominal gain, low and high cut filters, +15 vdc switch- able phantom power Microphone inputs and shall have a noise level at least 58 db below rated output with controls fully "on" . Provide additional Auxiliary Input Module Pre-amp, and Line/Bridging Preamplifier as required. 2 . 2 Provisions shall also be included for individual microphone precedence over other controlled microphone inputs and over the auxiliary input, and for the remote Electrical 16100-99 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL sessions shall be broken into segments which will facilitate the training of individuals in •• the operation of this system. Operators Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training. .� B. Schedule training with Owner through the Archi- tect, with at least seven days advance notice . C. Occupancy Adjustments : 1 . When requested by the Architect within one ... year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transform- er taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions . Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose . 3 . 6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system compo- nents and protect from damage and deterioration. 2 . 14 CAFETERIA, POOL AND GYMNASIUM SOUND SYSTEMS SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..b 1 . 1 Provide 3 (three) complete and satisfactory operating sound reinforcement systems for the pickup, amplifi- cation, distribution and reproduction of voice and or other audio program material in the Cafeteria, Pool, and Gymnasium areas . 1 . 2 All equipment, except portable equipment, shall be held firmly in place . This shall include all loudspeakers and amplifiers . Fastenings and supports shall be •* adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. 1 . 3 All switches, amplifier equipment and microphone outlets shall be clearly, logically, and permanently marked using proper size engraved laminated plastic name tags fastened with screws for a permanent type of adhesive . In order to protect the Owner and to insure Electrical 16100-98 XW am f�t�l ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. The Contractor shall note in his system draw- ,,,, ings, the type and location of these protection devices as well as all wiring information. E. The Contractor shall furnish and install a dedicated, isolated earth ground from the cen- tral equipment rack and bond to the incoming electrical service ground buss bar. 3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer' s Field Services : 1 . Provide services of a duly factory autho- rized service representative for this project location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. B. Inspection: 1 . Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and inter- connecting wires and terminals are identi- fied. Provide a list of final tap settings of paging speaker line matching transform- ers . 40 C. Testing: 1 . Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and u" completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor' s expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and com- plies with applicable standards. 3 . 5 COMMISSIONING A. Train Owner' s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of (8) hours training. The contractor shall also provide a minimum of (8) hours of in-service training with this system for end users . These Electrical 16100-97 .4. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction, �+ pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures . G. Identification of Conductors and Cables : 1 . Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identi- fied in coordination with system wiring diagrams . H. Weatherproofing: 1 . Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to weath- er. I . Repairs : 1 . Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation , repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance . 3 . 3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for " integrated school communications network sys- tems as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds . B. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and ** other impairments . Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. .� C. The Contractor shall provide all necessary transient protection on the AC power feed and on all station lines leaving or entering the build- ing. am Electrical 16100-96 .. Im per ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL to 2 . The contractor shall mount a main distribu- tion frame behind the integrated school communications network systems console. All wires shall be laid down on terminal punch blocks and identified by the actual room location it serves . All the communi- cations points shall be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and identified by which line it is on and the point position it serves. .. 3 . All housings are to be located as specified and shown on Drawings . 4 . Make installation in strict accordance with approved manufacturer' s drawings and in- structions . 5 . The contractor shall provide necessary transient protection on the AC power feed, all station lines leaving or entering the building, and all central office trunks . All protection shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and referenced to earth ground. E . Wiring Within Enclosures : 1 . Provide adequate length of conductors . Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess . Provide and use lacing bars . 2 . Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level, ,.� speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum separation between conductors to speaker- microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide physical separa- tion as recommended by equipment manufac- turer for other programmable electronic communications network system conductors . F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations : '�' Electrical 16100-95 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other '** conditions affecting the performance of the integrated school communications network system work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 .2 INSTALLATION A. General : •v 1 . Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes . Install equip- ment in accordance with manufacturer' s written instructions . B . Wiring Methods : 1 . Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces, and in gypsum board partitions, where cable wiring method may be used. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings . Conceal wiring except in unfin- ished spaces . C. Impedance and Level Matching: 1 . Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces . Provide matching networks where required. D. Control Circuit Wiring: 1 . Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or specified. Electrical 16100-94 ..W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL protection, adaptive equalization, power up analog and digital loopback diagnostics & FCC registration. I . Equipment Racks 1 . Equipment racks shall be located in a climate-controlled area/room as shown on wr Drawings . Equipment racks shall be : a. Self - contained , specifically engineered racks with provisions for all present and future components as described and recommended by the manu- facturer within this specification. WA b. Racks shall be accessible from front and rear. C . All program, zone, and time circuitry, data, linkage, power, telecommunica- tions components, and circuitry to be !" located in racks configured as approved by the Engineer. 2 . Provide as described herein all equipment necessary to provide with properly installed, designed, and operating Rauland Central Switching Exchange . 3 . Equipment shall be provided in its entirety to meet all specified functions throughout this specification and shall include, as a minimum, the following component types : .■ a. Headend b . TER-7700 Equipment Racks C . MDF - Main Distribution Frame fo d. MPX - Main Power Supplies e. IA - Interconnect Adaptor f . Program Equipment g. All as specified herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 40 3 . 1 EXAMINATION '� Electrical 16100-93 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. All areas with 2 ' x 4' suspended ceil- ings shall be provided with Rauland ACC1101 backbox and ACC1104 bridge. �. b. All areas with finished ceilings shall be provided with Rauland ACC1110 back- box. 7 . Analog Secondary Clocks shall be Rauland synchronous types with full 1211 face for exceptionally high readability. The Analog Clock shall operate from a 24 volt 60 Hz AC source . Each Clock shall be powered by a 60 Hz synchronous motor. The clock shall be a standard 12 hour display with black numer- als at least 1 1/411 high. •� a. All Flush mounted clocks shall require the use of a Rauland 2471 wall box. b. All Surface mounted clocks shall re- quire a standard 2-gang electrical wall box for installation. C . Gymnasium, Cafeteria and Pool Analog Secondary Clocks shall be synchronous types with full 15" face for excep- tionally high readability in these larger areas . d. All Gymnasiums, Locker Rooms, Pool and Cafeteria secondary clocks shall be provided with shatterproof lens . *" e . Wire Guards shall be provided for the Secondary Clocks in the Gymnasium and Locker Room areas . 8 . Modem, provide required quantities of 2400 baud modems for remote diagnostics and system programming of the intercom/public address system, master clock system, and telephone system with the following capa- bilities; 2400/1200/300 baud, full or half duplex, auto dial/auto answer, monitor speaker with software volume control, non- volatile memory, tone detection, lighting Electrical 16100-92 "" ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL flush enclosure . Surface mount applica- tions shall be Lowell PC712 enclosures . 2 . Horn Speakers a. Reentrant type . b. Frequency Response: 375 to 14, 000 Hz . C . Power Handling: 30 Watts, 60 Watts Peak. d. Variable screw taps, 25 V transformer. e. Sound Pressure Level : 110 dB at 1 meter with 1-watt input . f . Mounting: Adjustable, horizontal, and vertical . g. Color: Beige. h. Rauland Model 3602 . 3 . Ceiling and Wall Mounted Loudspeakers a . 8" Cone . b. Frequency Response : 60 to 16, 000 Cycles . C . Power Rated: 15 Watts . d. Magnet : 10 Ounce . e . Axial Sensitivity: 93 dB at 1 meter with 1-watt input . f . 25-watt variable tap transformer. g. Rauland Model USO215 . 4 . All speaker housings for recessed wall mounting. a . Rauland ACC1003 Baffle with Rauland ACC1105 Backbox for flush mount appli- cations . 5 . All speaker housing for surface wall or surface ceiling mounting. a. Rauland ACC1003 baffle with Rauland ACC1112 backbox for surface mount applications . 6 . All flush ceiling-mounted speakers shall be provided with Rauland ACC1000 Ceiling Baffle. Electrical 16100-91 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Capacity for storing 350 events and up to 100 Holidays in non-volatile memo- ry. b. Ability to review, edit and delete events C. Review events from any entered time of day d. Events shall be programmable to any or all of (8) zone circuits e . Selection of any of (8) schedules to allow flexibility due to seasonal changes or special events f . Fully automatic Holiday program execu- tion. .� g. User programmable Automatic Daylight Savings Time Change h. Separate bell duration for each zone circuit i . Latched operation of zones to control lighting or other devices j . Interface with all types of Rauland secondary slave clocks whether syn- chronous wired or electronic . This shall be accomplished without the use of external synchronous adapters . The master time controller shall be capa- ble of correcting both analog and ■* digital style secondary clocks . k. User-programmable custom slave clock correction. Output relays rated at 5 amperes shall be provided on all zone circuits . H. Accessories 1 . Housings for all designated clock/speaker .� combinations . Rauland ACC1006 with ACC1106 Electrical 16100-90 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL b. During the review process, the media center personnel may use the telephone to release specific sources or to pre- assign a specific source to a specific classroom. 4W C . Classrooms which are connected to a video source shall have the capability to instantly gain contact with the media center telephone for adjustments and corrections to the video source by simply pressing a hookflash. d. It shall be possible to gain contact over either the speaker or the tele- on phone . Re-connection to the video source shall be accomplished by again pressing the hookflash. e . Classroom telephones equipped with Message Waiting lamps . 1) The lamp shall be illuminated "steady" when program source is ready. 2) Lamp shall be used for silent paging functions to allow office personnel to "page" into class- rooms without disturbing the class . G. Time Programming 1 . Time programming shall be accomplished by way of a microprocessor-based and user-programmable master control system integrated within the communications net- work. The unit will further permit pro- wl gramming, diagnostics, and activity logging through connection to an external computer. 2 . The master time controller shall provide the following functions : '"" Electrical 16100-89 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the duration of the sources use or that restrict the use of that telephone shall .. not be considered acceptable. 7 . The contractor shall note that the tele- media system video clock shall be correct- ed and synchronized on a daily basis by the integrated programmable communications network. Therefore the software must be -- proven compatible from that unit' s RS-232 port . Master Clock systems which do not automatically synchronize the on-screen electronic clock with the facility time signalling schedule will not be accepted under any circumstances . F. Media Center Telephone stations, present or future, indicated on the drawings shall provide functions as scheduled below: 1 . A Media Center Telephone and speaker shall be provided in the Media Center. The Media Center Telephone shall be a Type B tele- phone with digital readout . 2 . The telephone shall provide standard tele- phone communication functions . 3 . Media Center personnel shall have the capability through the Media Center phone to pre-assign media devices to specific rooms . a. Pre-assignment shall provide for media device "Privacy" and shall allow only the assigned "Owner" of the device control over the player' s functions . 4 . The digital display shall be used by media center personnel to review the status and assignment of each video source. a. The display shall indicate which sources are in use and which classroom currently has each source reserved. Electrical 16100-88 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 40 video source or the buttons on the univer- sal infrared remote control may be used. a. VCR Control Functions shall include: 1) Play 2) Fast Forward 3) Rewind 4) Stop 5) Pause b. Laser Disk Control Functions shall include : 1) Play 2) Step Forward One Frame 3) Fast Forward 4) Step Backward One Frame 5) Fast Reverse 6) Ability to index directly to a + . Chapter or Frame C . CDI Control Functions shall include: 1) All functions including cursor control 3 . Systems which do not allow full interactive control of the Video Source shall not be acceptable . 4 . Once connection is established with the video source, the source shall be reserved for that specific user and shall remain reserved until the user, or media center personnel, releases the source. It shall not be possible for another user to "break into" the operation of that source . 5 . While the video source is in use, the user may hang up the telephone without releasing the source to other users . While the tele- phone is on-hook, no link shall be occu- pied. 6 . The classroom telephone and/or speaker may be used for any normal function while the program is in process . Systems which re- quire that a link be maintained throughout Electrical 16100-87 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL from among any available program sources . ,. 1) The user may dial an access code and the first available program source will be heard in the re- ceiver of the telephone. 2) The telephone' s "*" key may be used to select among the avail- able program sources . 3) When the desired source is heard in the receiver, the user shall hang up the telephone . The se- lected source shall then be sent to the classroom speaker. e . The system shall provide dial-up pro- gram distribution via a DTMF telephone to any room station, zone or to all zones . E . Media Retrieval Switching Network 1 . The system shall provide the facilities for the future control of remotely located video sources, video sources and TV distri- bution system supplied by others, using the classroom telephones or handheld infrared remote controls as the controlling devices . Video sources which may be controlled shall include videocassette recorders, laser disks, CDI and other devices . 2 . Access to a specific video source is at- A tained, using the classroom telephone, by dialing the extension number of the desired source or by the use of the classroom universal infrared remote control . A low level confirming tone over telephone hand- set or LED on IR receiver shall be provided to indicate to the user that the connection has been made and that the source is ready. While the tone is present, the push buttons on the telephone may be used to control the Electrical 16100-86 04 "M ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL vw 5 . Capability for assigning speaker locations within any one or more of the zones for on zone paging or time signal reception; this assignment to be a programmable function. Systems without this feature will not be acceptable . 6 . Time signal tones shall be generated throughout zone selectable for time sig- nalling over programmed loudspeakers on a manual or automatic basis . 7 . Emergency tones shall be distributed from designated administrative control units . 8 . Power amplifiers shall meet all specifica- tions exactly as specified herein, includ- ing power capacity and count . 9 . School shall be equipped with Rauland MCX300 AM/FM cassette players, CD Player and dedicated antennas . 10 . The system shall provide facilities to distribute program material (i . e . music, radio broadcasts) in the following manner: a. The media operator shall insert a .� cassette tape or tune to the desired radio broadcast utilizing the rack mounted tuner/tape player. !�* b. From a classroom equipped with a "MU- SIC" selection push-button, the user can select from among the available program sources . Program sources shall be selected in sequence. C. Each time the "MUSIC" button is pressed, the system shall cycle through the program sources one at a time until the desired source is se- lected. d. From a classroom equipped with a Dial- ing Staff Phone, a user shall select Electrical 16100-85 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a) Play b) Fast Forward c) Rewind d) Stop e) Pause 5) Laser Disk Functions a) Play +�* b) Scan Reverse c) Stop d) Scan Forward e) Pause f) Step Forward g) Clear h) Step Reverse i) Enter j ) Go To Frame k) Go to Chapter ..� 1) Audio Channel Select m) Display Frame # n) Display Chapter # D. Programs 1 . System shall provide the maximum capacity of function as stated herein. 2 . School shall have the ability to provide programming selectable . 3 . Each school shall be provided with a mini- mum of one (1) program channel, eight (8) .s time channels, sixteen (16) zone page channels, and multiple linkage for tele- communications . .� 4 . Time zones may be easily selectable and easily accessed by designated administra- tive control units . A means of programming any or all loudspeakers for the separate zone functions shall allow for easily arranging and re-arranging zones . Simulta- neous administrative control unit functions and channel programming shall in no way cause system interference. Electrical 16100-84 RM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d. Receiver shall support Laser Disk Bar Code Reader. e . Provide IR detection and system con- nection status LED' s. f . IR hand-held remote control shall not interfere with the operation of the �• classroom communication station and shall not prevent staff from making and receiving announcements over the classroom loudspeaker and emergency call-ins through the classroom call-in switch. g. Universal hand-held remote control shall provide the following features and functions : 1) General Control Functions : a) Media b) TV c) Hang Up d) Quit �. e) Keep f) Numeric Keypad 2) TV Controls a) Power On/Off b) Vol +/- d) Random Access e) Volume Mute 3) CD I a) Play b) Stop c) Left d) Right e) Up f) Down 4) VCR Functions Electrical 16100-83 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL flush or surface mounting on a stan- dard single-gang electrical box. h. Transmitters shall be an electronic crystal controlled device, which when .. activated shall generate a continuous silent alarm signal . i . The transmitter shall be activated by pulling the pin from the bottom of the unit . j . Operation of transmitter shall be hands-free once the pin is pulled. k. Transmitter shall be small and light- weight, designed to be worn either as a pendant or attached to a pocket or belt by a steel clip. When worn prop- erly, the unit shall not be removable from the wearer without activating a signal . .. 1 . Facilities for low battery assurance indicator on transmitter. 7 . Capabilities for future classroom media control shall provide functions as sched- uled below: ow a. Infrared remote control via hand held remote control device for control of remotely located media devices . .� b. Permit access to and control of remote VCR, Laser Disk, CDI, and local TV controls via single "ACCESS" button on universal remote control . C . Receiver portion of device shall affix to any television mounted in room. Receiver module shall decode IR sig- nals from hand held remote control and automatically connect room to media control modules in the media center for remote control of VCR' s, Laser .� Disks, CDI, and other devices . Electrical 16100-82 �w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL media device is loaded with pro- ,,,, gram material and now available for use. j . Facilities to connect modems, FAX and answering machines through an integral module Data Port without modification to system. k. Facilities for use of three-pair ca- bling or fewer pairs . 1 . FCC certified. 6 . Facilities for Personal Alert shall pro- '" vide functions as scheduled below: a. Facilities for and electronic crystal- controlled, ultrasonic device to work in conjunction with an associated Personal Alert System Transmitter. b. Facilities to place an "EMERGENCY" level call on the PECN upon receipt of an alert signal from a Personal Alert "*Q1 Transmitter. C . PECN shall identify the location from which the alert signal has originated by architectural number and the word "EMER" on the digital display. d. Receiver shall illuminate an Assurance LED while an alert signal is being received. Receiver shall remain active for 15 seconds after transmitter sig- nal is silenced. „ e . Receivers shall be factory calibrated and shall require no adjustments upon installation. f . Receiver shall use call-in wiring and shall not require additional wiring. ,w. g. Device shall mount on a brushed stain- less steel face plate suitable for Electrical 16100-81 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL g. Provide "NORMAL" level call-in from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked "NORM" , route call- in to any one or more administrative telephones with an LCD Display for easy response. This function shall be accomplished through the station class-of-service and shall not require additional system wiring. h. Facilities for three user-programmable speed dial keys to permit single but- ... ton dialing of access codes or fre- quently dialed numbers . 1) Speed dial keys shall be program- mable to include "Pause" in the dial stream. 2) Programming keys shall be con- cealed to prevent unauthorized alterations of speed dial num- bers . 3) Speed dial programming shall be retained even when the telephone is disconnected from the line. i . Instrument shall include a standard *� high voltage "Message waiting Lamp" to provide visual indications of messages pending. 1) Lamp shall have a raised red lens with visibility of 360 degrees . 2) Lamp shall serve as visual indi- cation of ringing. 3) Lamp shall be used for "Silent Paging" . 4) Lamp shall be used for indication .. of "Voice Mail" messages . 5) Lamp shall be used by media cen- ter to notify staff member that Electrical 16100-80 .� eaw ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Provide one momentary contact push- button mounted to a single gang plate. b. Push-button shall activate a music source through the classroom loud- speaker. Each time the "Music" button is pressed the PEON shall select the next available program source until the desired program is selected. The user shall be able to select between four separate program sources and "Off" . Button shall be clearly marked with the word "MUSIC" . .�e 5 . Type H stations indicated on the Drawings shall provide functions as scheduled below: a. Facilities to connect one additional party into an existing conversation. b . Facilities for desk or wall mount without special adapters . C . Provide built-in soft tone ringer with 4W volume control . d. Instrument shall include "Transfer" no key to permit call to be transferred smoothly and efficiently without the need to use the hookswitch. e . Instrument shall include "Last Number Redial" key to permit user to automat- ically redial most recently dialed number. f . Provide "EMERGENCY" level call-in from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked "EMER" , route call-in to any one or more administra- tive telephones with an LCD Display for easy response . This function shall be accomplished through the station class-of-service and sh all +�* not require additional system wiring. Electrical 16100-79 ON ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL WW W. Provide ISDN Basic Rate Interface (2B+D) Protocol standard with instru- ow ment . Station shall operate on two twisted pair, Level III and provide voice and data to the desktop. Connec- 4. tion shall be via standard RJ-11C modular connector. No external power supply shall be acceptable. Instrument shall be line powered. X. Facilities for Do Not Disturb. .A Y_ Provide Off Hook Call Announce . Digi- tal station shall be configured to allow a call to be "announced" verbal- ly over the station speaker even when the station is off hook. Z . Provide Alarm Clock function. Station �**+ shall allow programming to ring at preselected time. Provide ability to program message to appear on LCD mod- ule . Clock function shall be synchro- nized with all other school event programming. aa. Provide automatic hold recall . ab. Provide call park with recall . .� ac . Provide call pickup directed/group. ad. Provide camp on/call waiting. ae. Provide personalized ringing. Eight unique sounds shall be available. " af . Provide saved number redial function. 4W ag. Provide message waiting. ah. Instrument shall be designed for desk or wall mounting. 4 . Facilities for a Music Button shall provide functions as scheduled below: Electrical 16100-78 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL have an associated LCD status indica- tor. o. Facilities to permit the distribution throughout the facility of emergency announcements, all-page announcements, zone-page announcements and emergen- cy/evacuation alert if authorized through class of service. P. Provide hold, ring volume and tone control, handset/speaker volume con- trol, microphone/handset mute but- tons . q. Instrument shall include two-way speakerphone which shall provide hands-free conversation and on-hook �* dialing capabilities . r. Facilities to enable use of features without the use of "hookswitching" . S . Facilities for automatic pre-selection of intercom or trunk by lifting hand- set . t . Facilities for exclusive hold. These calls shall be restricted from pick up by any other set . U. Facilities for hands-free operation which shall allow the user to partici- pate in a telephone call with the receiver on the hook by speaking into the telephone set in a normal voice and listening to the other party over the telephone set loudspeaker. The user may confer privately with people near the telephone by depressing the hands-free/mute button which suppress- es voice transmission to the other party. V. Facilities for receiving staff station and/or emergency calls with single button response . w.. Electrical 16100-77 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL e . Automatic line selection. When more than one call begins to ring at a .. telephone location at the same time, the telephone shall automatically select one call when the receiver is lifted. The call shall be answered in the following order: 1) calls on prime line 2) calls on outside lines 3) calls on inside lines f . Facilities for transferring calls to a determined extension. g. Facilities for multiple operations simultaneously without interference with an established pattern of priori- ties for all administrator/classroom communication capabilities . h. Facilities for conferencing up to ., thirty two parties together. i . Individual memory dialing; 1024 com- plete phone numbers; each phone num- ber will have a 46-digit capacity. j . Facilities for placing a call on hold. k. Facilities for privacy on all calls . 1 . Hands-free dialing and monitoring of calls . M. Complete station software assignment including class of service, speed call numbers, hunting assignment, extension number, and any other features assigned without any wiring changes being required. n. Provide 18 programmable keys for any combination of specialized features, trunk or station appearance, internal and external lines, speed call lists, and auto dial keys . Each button shall Electrical 16100-76 .s ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ton dialing of access codes or fre- quently dialed numbers . 1) Speed dial keys shall be program- mable to include "Pause" in the dial stream. 2) Programming keys shall be con- cealed to prevent unauthorized alterations of speed dial num- bers . 3) Speed dial programming shall be retained even when the telephone is disconnected from the line . i . Facilities for use of three-pair ca- bling or fewer pairs . j . FCC certified. 3 . Type D stations indicated on the Drawings shall provide functions as scheduled below: * a. Fully digital, multi-line telephone. b. Provide a 2 line, 24 character LCD module to display: 1) ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY INTERCOM CALL-IN' S from any an all class- room location. 2) number dialed and answered. 3) call progress . 4) system status . C . Facilities for receiving ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY INTERCOM CALL-IN' S from any an all classroom location with single button response . d. One button dialing of most commonly dialed number or numbers . Electrical 16100-75 �s ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . Type B stations indicated on the Drawings (to be all stations not labeled "Al' or IUD") shall provide functions as scheduled below: a. Facilities to connect one additional ... party into an existing conversation. b. Facilities for desk or wall mount without special adapters . C . Provide built-in soft tone ringer with volume control . d. Instrument shall include "Transfer" key to permit call to be transferred smoothly and efficiently without the need to use the hookswitch. e. Instrument shall include "Last Number Redial" key to permit user to automat- ically redial most recently dialed ,. number. f . Provide "EMERGENCY" level call-in from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked "EMER" , route call-in to any one or more administra- tive telephones with an LCD Display �* for easy response. This function shall be accomplished through the station class-of-service and shall not require additional system wiring. g. Provide "NORMAL" level call-in from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked "NORM" , route call- in to any one or more administrative telephones with an LCD Display for ..+ easy response . This function shall be accomplished through the station class-of-service and shall not require additional system wiring. h. Facilities for three user-programmable speed dial keys to permit single but- Electrical 16100-74 �s ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL �w access to other stations, or the pub- lic network. W. Provide ISDN Basic Rate Interface (2B+D) Protocol standard with instru- ment . Station shall operate on two twisted pair, Level III and provide voice and data to the desktop. Connec- tion shall be via standard RJ-11C modular connector. No external power supply shall be acceptable . Instrument shall be line powered. X. Facilities for Do Not Disturb. y. Provide Off Hook Call Announce . Digi- tal station shall be configured to allow a call to be "announced" verbal- ly over the station speaker even when the station is off hook. ®. Z . Provide Alarm Clock function. Station shall allow programming to ring at preselected time . Provide ability to program message to appear on LCD mod- ""' ule. Clock function shall be synchro- nized with all other school event programming. aa. Provide automatic hold recall . ab . Provide call park with recall . ac . Provide call pickup directed/group. ad. Provide camp on/call waiting. ae . Provide personalized ringing. Eight unique sounds shall be available . af . Provide saved number redial function. ag. Provide message waiting. ah. Instrument shall be designed for desk or wall mounting. .. Electrical 16100-73 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL o. Facilities to permit the distribution throughout the facility of emergency announcements, all-page announcements, zone-page announcements and emergen- cy/evacuation alert if authorized through class of service. p. Provide hold, ring volume and tone control, handset/speaker volume con- trol, microphone/handset mute but- tons . q. Instrument shall include two-way speakerphone which shall provide hands-free conversation and on-hook , dialing capabilities . r. Facilities to enable use of features without the use of "hookswitching" . S . Facilities for automatic pre-selection of intercom or trunk by lifting hand- .� set . t . Facilities for exclusive hold. These calls shall be restricted from pick up .. by any other set . U . Facilities for hands-free operation **" which shall allow the user to partici- pate in a telephone call with the receiver on the hook by speaking into the telephone set in a normal voice and listening to the other party over the telephone set loudspeaker. The user may confer privately with people near the telephone by depressing the hands-free/mute button which suppress- es voice transmission to the other party. V. Provide RS-232 data adapter integrated within the wedge at the back of the instrument . This port shall allow personal computers, terminals, or other DTE equipment to have switched ' Electrical 16100-72 0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL telephone location at the same time, the telephone shall automatically select one call when the receiver is lifted. The call shall be answered in the following order: 1) calls on prime line 2) calls on outside lines +� 3) calls on inside lines f . Facilities for transferring calls to a «. determined extension. g. Facilities for multiple operations simultaneously without interference with an established pattern of priori- ties for all administrator/classroom communication capabilities . w■ h. Facilities for conferencing up to thirty two parties together. i . Individual memory dialing; 1024 com- plete phone numbers; each phone num- ber will have a 46-digit capacity. 40 j . Facilities for placing a call on hold. k. Facilities for privacy on all calls . 1 . Hands-free dialing and monitoring of calls . M. Complete station software assignment including class of service, speed call numbers, hunting assignment, extension number, and any other features assigned without any wiring changes being required. n. Provide 30 programmable keys for any combination of specialized features, trunk or station appearance, internal and external lines, speed call lists, and auto dial keys . Each button shall have an associated LCD status indica- tor. A. Electrical 16100-71 �w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. A minimum of four independent program memory sets shall be provided. �• b. Choice of time of service change and active memory set selected shall be completely programmable. 1) Class of Service Changes shall be programmable by time of day and day of week. 2) A minimum of 64 unique classes of .« service shall be available imme- diately, expandable to a total of 164 classes of services . OR C. Devices 1 . Type A stations indicated on the Drawings am shall provide functions as scheduled below: a. Fully digital, multi-line telephone. b. Provide a 2 line, 24 character LCD module to display: 1) ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY INTERCOM CALL-IN' S from any an all class- *� room location. 2) number dialed and answered. 3) call progress . 4) system status . C. Facilities for receiving ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY INTERCOM CALL-IN' S from any an all classroom location with single button response . d. One button dialing of most commonly dialed number or numbers . e . Automatic line selection. When more than one call begins to ring at a Electrical 16100-70 CIA w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Or 6) Facilities for "911" Emergency on calls to automatically suspend Student Phone timing restric- tions . 7) Facilities to manually turn on and off Student Phones from any authorized administrative phone . w. 50 . System shall be equipped with internal end-to-end signalling. 51 . Provide a minimum of eight trunk groups for administrative telephones and four trunk groups for staff telephones for the selec- tion of outgoing lines . 52 . The system shall provide the ability to mute any loudspeaker associated with a telephone when that phone originates a paging announcement . 53 . The system shall provide "Call Park" with remote pickup. This shall enable the atten- dant to park a call and permit the paged party to remotely pickup outside calls from any telephone . 54 . The system shall provide "Flexible Class of Service" to allow changes in system fea- tures and functions during selected hours . The following program changes in Class of Service shall be possible: a. Trunk type assignments ■ b. Trunk routing assignments C . Restrictions on individual telephones including: -outside line access -toll restrictions -paging access restrictions -speaker first/phone first selection 55 . It shall be possible to initiate Class of Service Changes either manually or automat- ically on a per station basis using inter- nal clock set . Electrical 16100-69 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ware programmable) . Dialing a code from any telephone handset within the network shall allow an individual to answer this incoming call . b. It shall be possible during night mode to provide dial tone to all classroom staff telephones . This shall provide the ability to answer .. calls throughout the facility. 49 . Provide "Student Phone" operation. a. It shall be possible to program cer- tain phones in the system for Student Phone class-of-service . Phone shall perform only one function: provide students ability to make brief outside calls . 1) Facilities to program system to automatically turn off all Stu- dent Phones during specified times . 2) Facilities to program Student Phones for access to only certain local exchanges . 3) Facilities to prevent any Student Phone, once connected to a number dialed, from re-dialing that same number for a programmed period of time (one minute to one hour) . 4) Facilities to limit usage time of • Student Phone from 30 seconds to three minutes automatically through system programming. A warning tone shall beep 10 sec- onds prior to ending connection. 5) Facilities to connect Student Phone directly to outside line without the need to dial an ac- cess code. Electrical 16100-68 AI ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 40 . Facilities to notify a user that the inter- com number or trunk called earlier is now available. If a busy signal is obtained, user shall dial Call-Back feature code and hang up. System shall automatically call back user when extension or trunk is avail- able and complete call to that extension or trunk without any intervention by the user. 41 . Multiple trunk groups shall be dedicated for use by office and classrooms . 42 . Facilities for universal wiring for all telephone stations with three-pair or fewer wiring. 43 . Facilities to provide emergency instruc- tions to be broadcast to the entire school . This capability shall be restricted to certain authorized telephones . 44 . Facilities to predetermine as to whether to ring the telephone or loudspeaker at a classroom station. This shall be user selectable when dialing and shall not be dependent on the type of phone being used. 45 . Facilities for single button access to ®„ allow page announcements into speaker zones without interrupting others performing simultaneous functions . 46 . Facilities to automatically alter a station' s class of service on a phone-by- -phone basis by time of day and day of week as directed by the Owner. 47 . Facilities for a group of sets to share a group of external lines . 48 . System shall be capable of providing night answer. a. By placing the system in the night answer mode, an incoming call on any + ► designated trunk shall place a tone on the designated system speakers (soft- Electrical 16100-67 w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL assistance to change the numbering system will not be acceptable. .E 34 . This system shall be user programmable to accomplish the following features and functions : a. Night Answer (pick-up calls) b. Night Answer Feature On/Off (toggle) C . Selection of preferred method of com- munication with staff stations equipped with both telephones and speakers simply by dialing the station number. 1) User programming shall predeter- mine whether to ring the tele- phone or permit talk over the speaker. d. Manual Student Phone Control e . Set Time/Date f . Review Call-ins 35 . Facilities for recalling unanswered calls �. back to operator' s console . 36 . Facilities for multiple loudspeaker or telephone conversations to take place and not prevent announcements, educational, or music programs from being distributed to other areas of the building. 37 . Facilities to automatically send incoming calls to an alternate phone or group of phones if they remain unanswered for a predetermined amount of time . 38 . Facilities for private lines to individual "' phones . 39 . Facilities for private lines to be shared by a select group of phones . Electrical 16100-66 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL t� 25 . Facilities for the distribution of alarm signals to all areas equipped with speakers by single button access . a. Four (4) separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided with each activated by single button access. 26 . Capability for assigning speaker locations within any one or more of the sixteen zones for zone paging or time signal reception; this assignment to be programmable. Systems without this feature will not be accept- able . 27 . Facilities for the origination of both normal and priority calls from any staff location. 28 . Facilities for calls originating from any staff location to be programmed for assign- ,*, ment to any of up to 12 locations . 29 . It shall be possible to review all calls stored in memory in groups of four in the " order received. 30 . Facilities for answering calls registered + in the digital read-out display merely by pressing a single response button. This capability shall not prevent other calls .w from being placed or answered by dialing their numbers . 31 . Facilities for activating graphic display panels shall be provided. 32 . Facilities to cancel all staff station originated calls from any administrative telephone shall be available . 33 . Facilities for assigning or changing class- room numbers by architectural or any de- sired numbering system; Either three-digit or four-digit numbers may be assigned. Systems requiring rewiring or factory Electrical 16100-65 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d. Capability of checking each link and ability to remotely block a link from ** the system if found defective . e. Obtain results of statistics main- tained internally by the system to include: 1) Service requests 2) ADT' s that received dial tone 3) DISA lines that received dial tone 4) Incoming trunk calls 5) Outgoing trunk calls 6) Links in use at any time 7) Active lines 8) DTMF faults 9) Processor faults 10) Data faults 11) Interface resets 12) FIFO overflows 13) Active list traversals 22 . Facilities for private conference calls between telephones and/or speakers; such conferences to be established by any tele- phone. 23 . Facilities for executive override permit- �* ting an assigned telephone to "break in" on-going conversations in the system. This feature shall be programmable without requiring any modification or additional equipment . 24 . Facilities for the instantaneous distribu- tion of emergency announcements simulta- neously to all locations equipped with speakers by single button access . �. a. Emergency announcements originating from any assigned administrative tele- phone shall have priority over all regular system functions . Electrical 16100-64 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 17 . Facilities to restrict calls on a per station, per trunk, per area code and exchange basis . 18 . Facilities to connect two-wire DTMF trunks . 19 . Facilities to connect two wire ring down. W 20 . The central switching exchange shall pro- vide an RS-232 port for the connection of on-site or off-site diagnostics by distrib- utor or factory personnel . a. It shall be possible to determine circuit and software faults via these diagnostics to facilitate remote software repairs to the system. b. The system shall maintain in a history file with a running tally the number of operations of the main system func- tions for use by the individual ad- ministrating the system. C . This port shall be usable for the ow programming and saving of all pro- ' grammed data for each system with the utilization of an on-site or off-site computer. d. This port shall provide the capability of call-in logging and answer logging. 21 . Facilities for diagnostics of the system shall be as follows : rw a. Check active list of activity within the system. b. DTMF test to check the DTMF registers . C . IO diagnostics enables the checking of each line and each device connected in the circuit, eg. can determine if a telephone is off hook or if a speak- . er has been disconnected. Electrical 16100-63 op ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 8 . System shall support forced account codes . goo 9 . Provide automatic route selection on all outbound lines . 10 . Up to 64 individual trunk groups shall be goo available for administrative lines . 11 . Facilities to store diagnostic results and other system messages . These may be print- ed out upon request via local or remote access . 12 . Facilities for the main control unit to store information and give reports on features, restrictions, hunting patterns, etc . upon request either on site or remote- ly. 13 . Facilities for automatically sounding a warning tone signal over any loudspeaker selected for two-way communications to alert the station attendant (classroom teacher) to the call and prevent unautho- rized monitoring. 14 . Facilities for access to any single loud- speaker unit, zone loudspeaker unit, or all loudspeaker units . The warning tone signal + shall sound as soon as the station is selected and shall be automatically repeat- ed at regular intervals for the duration of the call if the voice circuit is not acti- vated. 15 . Facilities for telephones to automatically direct dial and be able to hold conferences with each other and include selected class- room speakers . ,. 16 . Direct Dialing, two-way amplified voice intercom between all locations equipped with administrative telephones and staff station speakers without the use of a press-to-talk or talk-listen switch. Systems requiring the use of such a switch will not be acceptable . Electrical 16100-62 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . Providing two (2) consoles or telephones at the attendant position shall be considered in direct conflict with the intent of this specification and therefore shall be deemed not acceptable. B. Central Switching Network System Adminis- tration. The Integrated School Communications Network shall have the following capabilities : 1 . Facilities for multiple operations simulta- neously without interference with an estab- lished pattern of priorities for all administrator/classroom communication ++" capabilities . 2 . Facilities for centralized attendant an- swering. 3 . Facilities for restricting use of the system on a per phone, per trunk basis. 4 . Facilities to enable a caller who is away from his desk to override any restrictions that phone may have, changing the class of service to that of his own phone for the duration of the call . a. The system shall provide Personal Identification Numbers for selected administrators . By dialing their PIN at any system telephone, the adminis- trator shall have access to the same capabilities assigned to their office telephone, regardless of the restric- tions on the phone he is currently using. 5 . System shall provide "Music on Hold" to parties awaiting transfer. 6 . Provide multiple attendant positions for answering outside lines . 7 . System shall support up to 1000 Digital lines . Electrical 16100-61 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 10 . Set the priority level and target display of "normal" calls . ■•• 11 . Set the priority level and target display of "emergency" calls top 12 . Assignment of architectural number. 13 . Class of Service . up 14 . Hunt pattern. 15 . Assignment of associated speaker to paging zone. 16 . Automatic Call-Back-Busy. 17 . Call forward-No Answer. 18 . Call forward-Busy. **� 19 . Call forward-Always . 20 . Unique Personal Identification Number code Y. The central communications system shall control all public and inter-school telecommunications . The unit shall decode all dial functions, using normal dial tone phones . Z . The Administrative phones shall be located in the office and where indicated on the plans, and these instruments shall be used for both public and inter-school communication. AA. Amplified two-way voice communication shall be available from any dial phone in the system, through any speaker in the system. This shall allow hands-free communication to any classroom or any individual loudspeaker unit . A warning tone shall sound and continue to sound at regular intervals when speaker monitoring is active . ow 2 .3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. General ** Electrical 16100-60 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . One zone for inside classroom speakers grade 8 . 3 . One (1) zone for inside classroom speakers grades 9 . 4 . One (1) zone for gymnasium speakers . ! * 5 . One (1) zone for common areas . 6 . One (1) zone for administrative area. 7 . One (1) zone for teachers' lounge and work- rooms . 8 . One (1) zone for outside speakers . V. The system shall be connected to the public telephone trunk lines through FCC approved central office interface. W. Public telephone calls shall be received by the system and routed to the designated telephones . X. Each telephone in the system shall be programma- ble for the following options : 1 . Allow access to C.O. or external system trunks . 2 . Allow toll calls . 3 . Allow zone paging. 4 . Allow All-Page announcements . 5 . Allow executive override. 6 . Allow emergency paging. 7 . Allow activation of Time Zone tones . 8 . Route all incoming calls to an optional speaker instead of ringing the phone. 9 . Allow direct access to media control lines . w Electrical 16100-59 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL conversations paths (links) . Those systems that utilize station grouping/linking technology that provides limited paths (links) per station or line card group, will not be considered as a global switching exchange and will not be ac- .. cepted under this specification. N. The system shall lend itself to expansion by simple addition of modules . 0 . The central switching system shall provide for automatic switching of the talk path to a telephone mode, during the course of a call, should the telephone associated with the speak- er in use be lifted from its cradle. P. The system shall be equipped with distinctive ringing which allows the party receiving a call to distinguish between an internal call and an outside call . Q. Two-way telephonic communication from any class- room phone to any office phone. R. Two-way telephonic communication between any two 4W phones in the system or any combination of phones in the system. S . Two-way communication between any telephone and any room speaker. T. Extension numbers shall be programmable and may be assigned any three or four digit number. Any extension may be reassigned at any time, and it shall not be dependent on wiring or circuit numbers . U. Sixteen (16) separate paging/class pass zones shall be provided; each location shall be pro- "R grammed in software to belong to any combination of software zones; initially, zones shall be provided and programmed as follows : , 1 . One (1) zone for inside classroom speakers grades 7 . Electrical 16100-58 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Off Premise Extensions (OPX) , WATS, CENTREX and TIE lines . F. Incoming Caller ID (ICLID) shall be supported on all inbound trunks . G. The system shall provide direct interface to T-1 Service without the need for channel banks . w� H. The system shall be ISDN ready, fully digital and shall provide ISDN to the desktop. I . The system shall offer full flexibility of software restrictions to station lines for calling capability. Features shall be allowed or denied at two levels : 1) on a system basis; and 2) individually for each set and/or trunk. J. The system shall allow system monitoring and administration from a terminal at a remote site. K. The system shall be a global switching, dual-tone, electronic network consisting of multiple amplified intercom channels, (class- room) speakers, and/or telephones, digital readout for display of call origination, NMOS microprocessor and memory, solid state logic and sensing, and shall also provide two-wire bal- anced transmission with dial tone, ringing, and busy signal capabilities to all stations . L. The central switching exchange shall provide a minimum of sixteen (16) simultaneous global full duplex telephonic conversations paths (links) available for use between any system telephones, there shall be no available linkage within the system that would restrict or block communica- tions . Systems which provide fewer than sixteen (16) simultaneous global full duplex telephonic conversations paths (links) or which use non- standard telephonic audio shall not be accept- able. M. Systems being proposed shall not have any limi- tations within the central switching exchange that restricts access to a minimum of sixteen ( 16 ) simultaneous global full duplex telephonic "" Electrical 16100-57 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . The system shall provide the state of the art in technology for all outside and internal communications programming, sec- ondary clock corrections and bell program- ming, building security monitoring, fire alarm, voice mail, homework hotline, auto- mated attendant, truancy notification, interactive voice response, data communica- tion and media retrieval ability. The system shall be easy to learn and operate. All standard system programming shall be user friendly to allow the system adminis- trator the ability to easily reprogram station features . B . Provide complete and satisfactorily operating, integrated school communications network sys- tems as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and perfor- mances as indicated. Use materials and equip- ment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturers standard design and construction, in accordance with published product informa- tion. Co-ordinate the features of all materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions . C. Features offered by this system shall be imple- mented and controlled by software programs that can be changed and expanded as customer needs evolve . D. The integrated school communications network systems shall provide for direct connection to central office telephone lines (outside trunks) . Initially the system shall have the capability of expansion to 64 outside trunks and be wired and equipped for ( 8 ) trunks . E. The system shall offer routing of outside trunks for Attendant Answer Incoming (AAI) , Direct Inward Dialing (DID) , Direct Inward Line Trunk (DIL) , Private Direct Inward Line (PDIL) , and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . It shall also provide all standard Telco signaling to interface with other special services such as Electrical 16100-56 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL from strict compliance with the require- „ ments of this specification. 3 . The Contractor for this work shall be held to have read all of the Bidding Require- ments, the General Requirements of Division 1, and Contract Proposal Forms; and in the execution of this work, he will be bound '+ by all of the conditions and requirements therein. The equipment furnished under this specification shall be equal in per- formance and technology to that manufac- tured by Rauland-Borg. 4 . The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete functional system including all necessary components whether included in this specification or not . 5 . In preparing the bid, the bidder should consider the following: a. No claim will be made against the Owner for any costs incurred by the bidder for any equipment demonstra- W" tions which the Owner requests . b. The system proposed must have been installed in a customer' s environment at least two (2) years and be demon- stratable. Experimental equipment will not be acceptable . 6 . Any prior approval of an alternate system does not automatically exempt the supplier from meeting the intent of these specifica- tions . Failure to comply with the opera- tional and functional intent of these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the expense of the Contractor. 2 . 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General : w. Electrical 16100-55 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL adequately staffed with factory-trained techni- cians for all of the specified equipment . The agency must have established business for and currently be providing all services for the equipment to be provided for a minimum of five (5) years . I . The contractor shall guarantee availability of local service by factory-trained personnel of �**° all specified equipment from an authorized distributor of all equipment specified under this section. On-the-premise maintenance shall be provided at no cost to the purchaser for a period of one (1) year from date of installation unless damage or failure is caused by misuse, abuse, neglect, or accident . J. The supplier shall visit the sites and familiar- ize himself with the existing conditions and �+ field requirements prior to submitting apropos- al . 1 . 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in factory containers . Store in clean, dry space in original containers . Protect products from fumes and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactures : The equipment specified herein is that of the Rauland-Borg Corporation. 1 . The intent is to establish a standard of quality, function and features . It is the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard set forth in these specifications . 2 . The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility, therefore, the acceptance of alternate manufacturers does not release contractor Electrical 16100-54 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 70 "National Electrical Code" including, but not limited t o: 1 . Article 250, Grounding. 2 . Article 300, Part A. Wiring Method. 3 . Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring. 4 . Article 725, Remote Control, Signalling Circuits . 5 . Article 800, Communication Systems . E . EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Elec- tronics Industries Association Standards : 1 . Sound Systems, EIA-160 . 2 . Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-A. 3 . Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A. 4 . Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, 5E-101-A. 5 . Speakers for Sound Equipment, 5E-103 . F. UL Compliance : Comply with requirements of UL 50 . The communication system supplied shall be listed by Underwriter' s Laboratories under UL Standard 1459 . A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor' s submittal . G. Installation and start up of all systems shall be under the direct supervision of a local agency regularly engaged in installation, re- pair, and maintenance of such systems . The supplier shall be accredited by the proposed equipment manufacturers and be prepared to offer a service contract for system maintenance on a . completion of the guarantee period and provide the names, locations, and size of FIVE (5) recent successful installations . H. The agency providing equipment shall be respon- sible for providing all specified equipment and mentioned services for all equipment as speci- fied herein. The agency must be a local autho- rized distributor of all specified equipment for single source of responsibility and shall provide documents proving such. The agency must provide written proof that the agency is 16100-53 Electrical ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4 . Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment . 5 . Provide a riser diagram for the system showing in technically accurate detail all connections, interconnections, and all provisions available and made for adapt- ability of all specified future functions and including all calculations, charts, and test data necessary to demonstrate that all systems and system components deliver the specified signals, grades, and levels at *■ all required points and locations . 6 . Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training. 1 . 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to func- tion as a complete system and shall be accompa- nied by the manufacturer' s complete service notes and drawings detailing all interconnec- tions . B. The Contractor shall be an established communi- cations and electronics contractor that has had and currently maintains a locally run and oper- ated business for at least five (5) years . The Contractor shall utilize a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied for this .� project location with full manufacturer' s war- ranty privileges . C. The Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that the supplier maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to "* the system. The supplier shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being sup- plied. D. Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of NFPA Electrical 16100-52 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . "Electrical Boxes and Fittings, " for boxes, cabinets and fittings used with communica- tions systems . 1 . 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General : Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with these Specifications and Drawings to provide a complete and operating Integrated School Commu- nications Network System. B. Telephone service with public utilities shall be arranged by the Owner, in conjunction with the equipment supplier. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifica- tion Sections : 1 . Submit equipment prints, inter-panel and intea-panel, full electronic wiring dia- grams and specification sheets for each item specified herein. Provide a tabula- tion of the specification clearly comparing the submitted item with the specified item, being able to refer to all written expressed functions and capabilities . Specification Sheets shall be submitted on all items including cable types . 2 . Shop Drawings, detailing the integrated school communications network system including, but not limited to, the follow- ing a. Built-in station arrangement . b. Equipment cabinet arrangement . 3 . Wiring diagrams, detailing wiring for power, signal, and control, differentiating clearly between manufacturer -installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation and maintenance . w�. Electrical 16100-51 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . 13 INTEGRATED SCHOOL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 . 2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes programmable integrated school communications network systems . It includes requirements for programmable integrat- ed school communications network systems compo- nents including, but not limited to, the follow- ing 1 . Classroom/Administrative Telephones . 2 . Ceiling Mounted Speaker Assemblies . 3 . Digital LCD Readout units . 4 . Digital Services Interface 5 . Controls, amplifiers, and terminal equip- ment . 6 . Power supplies . 7 . Battery Backup System 8 . Personal Alert System 9 . Wiring. 10 . Wall mounted Paging Horns . 11 . Integrated Master Clock and Secondary Clocks . 12 . AM/FM Roof Mounted Antenna. 13 . AM/FM Tuner, Cassette Player and CD Play- er. 14 . Integrated Telemedia Equipment B. Related Sections : The following Division 16 �* Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 . "Raceways, " for raceways used for the integrated school communications network systems cables . Electrical 16100-50 �r ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL positive operation. The following shall be provided: a. For three phase switches, all phases of the normal shall be monitored line-to-line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 72% to 100% of nominal, and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 70% to 98% of the pickup value . The transfer to emergency will be initiated P• upon reduction of normal source to 85% of nominal voltage, and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to ON 95% of nominal . 11 . Accessories ow a. Switches shall include a time delay to ignore momentary outages, It shall delay closing of the engine start contracts for a 40 fixed time of 3 seconds . b. Switches shall include a time delay on "M transfer from normal to emergency, field adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds . C . Switches shall include a time delay on 40 retransfer from emergency to normal, field adjustable from 1 to 30 minutes . The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is available . d. The switches shall include voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency source and shall be factory set to allow transfer to emergency when that source is at approx- imately rated voltage and frequency. e . Gold plated contacts rated 10 amps, 32 „ volts DC which close when the normal source fails shall be provided to initiate engine starting. Electrical 16100-49 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Overload and endurance per Tables 21 .2 and 23 . 2 of UL-1008 . b. Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current within the allowable tempera- ture limits of the insulation in contact with current carrying parts . C . Withstand current tests per Paragraph 25 of UL-1008 for 35, 000 amperes rms symmetrical, at 480 volts and X/R ratio of 6 . 6 . d. No welding of contacts . Transfer switch must be operable to alternate source after the withstand current tests . e . Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, mini- .. mum after the withstand current test . 8 . All production units shall be subjected to the following factory tests : a. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be tested to ensure proper operation *" of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings are in compliance with the Specification require- ments . b. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be subjected shall be subjected to a dielectric strength test per NEMA Standard ICS 1-109 . 05 . 9 . The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37 . 90A-1974) and the impulse withstand voltage test in accor- dance with the proposed NEMA Standard ICS 1-109 . 10 . The automatic transfer switch control panel shall utilize solid state sensing for automatic, *� Electrical 16100-48 .. 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . All contacts, coils, springs, and control ele- ments shall be conveniently removable from the front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power conduc- tors . 3 . The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and be mounted separately from ,.. the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid-state and mounted on plug-in printed circuit boards . �. Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade, plug-in type with dust covers and locking clips . 4 . The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-447 and Underwriters' Laboratories UL-1008 and shall be UL listed as follows : a. For use in emergency systems in accordance with Articles 517 and 700 of the National Electrical Code . b . Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric- discharge lamps, electric-heating and tungsten-filament lamp load. 5 . The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the 3 , 375 rms symmetrical short cir- cuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with the type of over current protection, voltage and X/R ratio as shown on W the plans . 6 . The automatic transfer switch shall be mounted in a Type 1 enclosure . Switch and accessory devices shall be Kohler Company, Cat . No. K168341-400 with No. 14C and 14D auxiliary contacts . 7 . Certified laboratory test data on a switch of the same design and rating shall be provided to confirm the following switching abilities : Electrical 16100-47 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PAW mended minimum cold-cranking amps required at OoF shall be supplied dry, along with separate 'W electrolyte which will be added just prior to start up. am 5 . 10 ampere automatic float battery charger with constant voltage regulation, current limiting capability, cranking disconnect relay, tempera- ture compensated for ambients from -200F, volt- meter and ammeter, equipped for conduit instal- lation. 6 . Gas proof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust connection, and engine exhaust silencer rated for residential application. Exhaust noise shall be limited to 85 dba as measured at 10' in a free field environment . 7 . Two flexible fuel lines . *" 8 . Fuel transfer tank of 25 gallon capacity with a 120 volt, 1 phase motor driving a positive displacement pump. Tank shall be equipped with float switch, sight glass or level gauge, low fuel level alarm contacts, and electric shut-off solenoid. To be Kohler No. 292249, or equal . J. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a control module, interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automat- ic transfer switch shall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single-solenoid mechanism energized from the source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and be inherently double-throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions - normal or emergency. The automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for use with emergency sources, such as an engine or turbine .. generator source, or another utility source. 1 . All main contacts shall be of silver composi- tion. The operating transfer time in either direction shall not exceed one-sixth (1/6) of a second. Electrical 16100-46 -111 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . Alarm horn with silencer switch. M. Dry contacts to indicate "Generator Run- ning" . "Low Oil Pressure" , "Over Tempera- ture" , "Over Speed" , and "Over Crank" for connection by Energy Management System Contractor. +•, H. Instrument Panel Gages 1 . Dual range voltmeter 3-1/2" 2% accuracy. 2 . Dual range ammeter 3-1/2" 2% accuracy. 3 . Voltmeter-ammeter phase selector switch. 4 . Lights to indicate high or low meter scale. 5 . Direct reading pointer-type frequency meter 3-1/211 , . 5% accuracy, 45 to 65 Hz scale . 6 . Panel illuminating lights . 7 . Battery charging voltmeter. !*� 8 . Coolant temperature gauge . 9 . Oil pressure gauge. 4. 10 . Running time meter. 11 . Voltage adjust rheostat . I . Accessories 1 . Block heater, 1, 550 watt, 120 volt AC. Thermo- statically controlled to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature to meet the start-up requirement of NFPA-99 regulation. 2 . Over voltage protection will shut down the unit after one second of 150 or more over voltage . w. 3 . Line circuit breaker of 400 amperes, 3 poles . r 4 . Battery rack, battery cables, 12 volt battery capable of delivering the manufacturer' s recom- a.. Electrical 16100-45 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL e . Cranking cycler with ten second "ON" and "OFF" cranking periods . f . Over crank protection designed to open the cranking circuit after 60 seconds if the .� engine fails to start . g. Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low oil pressure, or over speed are received. h. Engine cool down timer factory set at five minutes to permit unloaded running of the standby set after transfer of the load to normal . i . Three-position (AUTOMATIC-OFF-TEST) selec- tor switch. In the "TEST" position, the engine shall start and run regardless of " the position of the remote starting con- tacts . In the "AUTOMATIC" position, the engine shall start when contacts in the .. remote control circuit close and stop five minutes after those contacts open. In the "OFF" position, the engine shall not start even though the remote start contacts .. close . This position shall also provide for immediate shutdown in case of an emer- gency. Reset of any fault shall also be accomplished by putting the switch to the "OFF" position. j . Indicating lights to signal : Switch "OFF" Flashing Red Over Crank Red Emergency Stop Red High Water Temperature Red Over Speed Red Low Oil Pressure Red High Battery Voltage Red Low Battery Voltage Red Low Fuel Red System Ready Green k. Test button for indicating lights . Electrical 16100-44 40 00 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ON onds specified above to allow selective tripping ■. of downstream fuses or circuit breakers under a fault condition. This breaker shall not auto- matically reset preventing restoration of volt- on age if maintenance is being performed. Field current sensing breaker will not be acceptable . 5 . The generator, having a single maintenance-free 40 bearing, shall be directly connected to the flywheel housing with a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel . ow G. Controller s. 1 . Set-mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear shall be vibration isolated on the generator enclosure. The controller shall be capable of being remote-mounted. The micro- !" processor control board shall be conformal ccated. Relays will only be acceptable in high- current circuits . Circuitry shall be of plug-in fir0 design for quick replacement . Controller shall be equipped to accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance personnel to test con- Pa troller performance without operating the en- gine. The controller shall include : a. Fused DC circuits . 4. b. Complete two-wire start/stop control which shall operate on closure of a remote con- tact . C . Speed sensing and a second independent starter motor disengagement systems shall protect against engagement with a moving flywheel . Battery charging alternator voltage will not be acceptable for this purpose. d. The starting system shall be designed for restarting in the event of a false engine start, by permitting the engine to com- pletely stop and then re-engage the start- er. Electrical 16100-43 so MW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL No 4 . Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick, and ,m oil drain. 5 . Dry type replaceable air cleaner elements . Wo 6 . The turbocharged engine shall be fueled with No. 2 fuel oil, 6 cylinder, 4 cycle, liquid cooled by a unit mounted radiator, blower fan, water ... pump, thermostat, and radiator duct flange which shall properly cool the engine with up to 0 . 5" H2O static pressure on the fan. .. F. Generator 1 . The alternator shall be salient-pole, brushless, 12 lead reconnectable, self-ventilated of drip- proof construction with amortisseur rotor wind- ings and skewed stator for smooth voltage wave- form. The insulation shall meet the NEMA stan- dard (MGI-22 .40 and 16 .40) for Class F and be insulated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resis- tant per MILE-4970A. The excitation system shall be of brushless construction controlled by a solid-state voltage regulator capable of maintaining voltage within +/- 2s at any con- .A stant load from 0 to 1000 of rating. The regu- lator must be protected from the environment by conformal coating. 2 . Upon one-step application of any load up to 90% of the rated load at 0 . 8 power factor, the voltage dip shall not exceed 2001 and shall recover to 20 of rated voltage within one sec- ond. 3 . The generator shall be capable of sustaining at least 250% of rated current for at least 10 seconds under a 3 phase symmetrical short by inherent design or by the addition of an option- al current boost system. 4 . A resetable line current sensing circuit breaker with inverse time versus current response shall be furnished which protects the generator from damage due to its own high current capability. This breaker shall not trip within the 10 sec- Electrical 16100-42 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection + diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in these Specifications. C. An installation check, start-up, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer' s local representative. The Engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test . D. The stand-by generator set shall be rated continuous standby duty at 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 0 . 8 w. power factor, 100 KW, 125 KVA, 347 amperes at 500' altitude, 850F. The unit shall be Kohler, or equal, Model 100ROZJ radiator cooled, "fast response" type, Diesel engine driven, with all Kohler standard features and components . 1 . The generator set shall be capable of starting motor loads of 200 KVA inrush, with a maximum voltage dip of 120 . 2 . Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine generator and the welded structural steel base. +*� E . Engine : The 359 cubic inch displacement turbocharged engine shall deliver a minimum of 166 hp at a governed speed of 1, 800 rpm. The engine shall be equipped with the following: 1 . Engine-driven or electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6' , fuel filters, elec- tric solenoid fuel shut-off valve, and a fuel distribution system with an isochronous governor capable of + . 25% steady-state frequency regula- tion. 2 . 12 volt positive engagement solenoid shift- , starting motor. 3 . 35 ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulation. Electrical 16100-41 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL of the different wires shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Color code shall be used throughout . All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from grounds or crosses between the conductors . All junction boxes shall have nameplates identifying, "Fire Alarm" . Q. Final connections between control equipment and wiring system shall be made under direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. R. The manufacturer' s representative shall demonstrate .� the operation of the alarm system to the Architect and Owner, and if requested, to a representative of the Northampton Fire Department . .� S . The Electrical Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the system installation with the Northampton Fire Depart- ment and shall file application for fire alarm service, shall arrange for inspections and supervision by the Fire Department, and shall pay all fees in connection with the installation of the system. T. Connection to communication system will be co- ordinated with the communication system installers . 2 . 12 EMERGENCY GENERATOR A. Furnish a generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and Drawings, and specified herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable local codes and regulations . All equipment shall be new, of current production of a national firm which manufactures the generator and controls, transfer switch, and assembles the stand-by generator sets as a matched unit, so that there is one source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen. B. Submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring Electrical 16100-40 00 go ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ON 2 . All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labelled "Fire Alarm" . Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. 3 . Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcon- tractors . 4 . The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire �. alarm equipment after completion of the instal- lation. 5 . The manufacturer' s authorized representative shall provide on-site supervision of install- ation. w,.. N. Testing 1 . The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by the Elec- trical Subcontractor in the presence of the Owner' s representative and the Local Fire Marshal . Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor. 0. Warranty 1 . The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects f or a period of one (1) year f rom the date of the completed and certified test or from the + date of first beneficial use . 2 . The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the Owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72H w. guidelines . P. All wiring shall be in conduit and of the same approved type as used for electric light and power wiring, and shall meet the requirements of all national, state and local electrical codes . The sizes Electrical 16100-39 ON. ow ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 135°F, or a rate-of-rise of [15°F] [20°F] per minute for fire sensing. For utility sensing, a *� set point may be chosen within the stated range and the control panel programming will be cap- able of using that information to determine specific response such as warning of failure of local temperature controls . The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be doc- umented as compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount appli- cations . Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds) . When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the .. alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor' s base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condi- tion. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable . Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type iden- tification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type . The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition « until the proper type is installed or the pro- grammed sensor type is changed. The sensor' s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI . M. Installation 1 . Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all appli- cable codes and the manufacturer' s recommen- dations . All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Pro- tective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor. Electrical 16100-38 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4 . Photoelectric duct detectors shall be non- ' ' polarized 24VDC type, compatible with the Fire Alarm Panel and shall obtain its operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. Detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point . No radioactive material shall be used. The detector head shall be directly interchangeable with an ionization detector type. The 24VDC detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. Detector construction shall have a mounting base with a twist-lock detecting head that is lock- able . The locking feature must be field remov- able when not required. Contact between the base and head shall be of the bifurcated type utilizing spring type, self-wiping contacts . Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory current of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel . Detector design shall provide compati- bility with other normally open fire alarm detection loop devices (heat detectors, pull stations, etc . ) . It shall be possible to alarm the duct housing by using a test switch. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by access- ing them through the duct housing front cover. To minimize false alarms, voltage and RF sup- pression techniques shall be employed as-well-as a smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen. Auxiliary SPDT relays and/or remote LED alarm indicators and key operated test stations shall be installed where indicat- ed. 5 . The addressable smoke sensors shall be of the ► photoelectric or ionization type and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel . The addressable temperature sensors shall sense within a temper- ature range of 32°F to 158°F. The control panel will be capable of sensing either a set point of Electrical 16100-37 w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL strobe shall provide a minimum light output of 7 . 5 candela/seconds at 24VDC at a 45 flashes per minute rate . Xenon strobes shall provide a 4 wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including backbox. Audio/visual unit shall be UL Listed for its intended purpose. L. Addressable Device Types 1 . The system control panel, over its two wire ..� multi-drop channel, must be capable of commu- nicating with the types of addressable devices specified below. 2 . Thermal detector heads must be UL listed. They will be a combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature (135°F) type, automatically restor- able . 3 . Addressable pull stations will contain elec- tronics that communicate the station' s status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide power to the pull station. The address will be set on each .M station. The stations will be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering will be raised and painted white . The station will .� mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks . Pull stations will be single action. The front of the station is to be hinged to a backplate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control panels . Stations which use allen wrenches or special tools to reset, will not be accepted. The addressable manual station shall be capable of ..� field programming of its "address" location on an addressable signaling line circuit . There shall be no limit to the number of stations, .. detectors, or Zone Adaptor Modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. The addressable manual station shall be Under- writers' Laboratories Inc . listed. " Electrical 16100-36 .A 40 w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL power shall be 24VDC and be fused at the control panel . Point-wired annunciators will not be considered as equal . Status information of each device may be individually displayed to investi- gate specific point detail . Four programmable control switches with associated LEDs are avail- able for custom control functions . Manual Control Switches shall be provided for the following functions : a) System Reset b) Alarm Silence c) Trouble Silence d) Manual Evacuation e) Alarm Acknowledge [NFPA-72D] f) Trouble Acknowledge [NFPA-72D] g) City Disconnect K. Peripheral Devices 1 . Alarm horns shall be polarized and shall be operated by 24 VDC. Each horn assembly shall include separate wire leads for in/out wiring for each leg of the associated signal circuit . T-tapping of signal device conductors to signal circuit conductors shall NOT be accepted. The alarm horns shall be suitable for rear mounting. 2 . Visual indicating appliances shall be comprised of a Xenon flashtube and be entirely solid state . These devices shall be UL listed and be W capable of either ceiling or wall mounting. The LEXAN lens shall be pyramidal in shape to allow better visibility. Visual units shall be of the go stand alone type or be incorporated as part of the (Horn, Bell) unit . 3 . Audio/Visual units shall provide a common enclo- ON sure for the fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices . The housing shall be designed to accommodate either horns, bells, or chimes . The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped lexan lens with "Fire" letter- ing visible from a 1800 field of view. The front panel or bezel, which is constructed of UL Listed Noryl, may be inverted so that the lens is below the audible device . Integral Xenon Electrical 16100-35 MW we ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL essential to operation during a fire alarm condition. Although the keypad/keyboard can be "® used for control (firefighter/emergency) of the entire system, it shall only be used for main- tenance purposes . Keyboards or keypads shall , not be visible or required to operate the system during fire alarm conditions . A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory conditions . This audible device shall sound differently during each condition to distinguish one condition from another without having to view the panel . This audible device .� shall also sound differently during each key- press to provide an audible feedback (chirp) to ensure that the key has been pressed properly. 2 . The Control Panel' s display shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or there should be keypad activity. The display shall support both upper and lower case letters . Lowercase letters shall be used for softkey titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for System Status Infor- mation. A cursor shall be visible when entering information. 3 . Provide cabinet (s) of sufficient size to accom- modate the aforementioned equipment . The cabinet (s) shall be equipped with locks and transparent door panel (s) providing freedom from tampering yet allowing full view of the various lights and controls . J. Remote Annunciator 1 . The serial annunciator shall provide an alphanu- meric, 80 Character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) *� that provides clear language information as to the 4020 point status (alarm, trouble, etc. ) , type of alarm (smoke detector, pull station, etc . ) , number of alarms on the system, and a custom location label . The annunciator shall have a beige enamel finish. The annunciator shall communicate to the control panel over one twisted, shielded pair of wire and operating Electrical 16100-34 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a) Alarm b) Trouble c) Open d) Short e) Ground f) Device Fail/or Incorrect Device 2 . All addressable devices are to have the capabil- ity of being disabled or enabled individually. 3 . Up to 127 addressable devices may be multi- dropped from a single pair of wires . Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable . 4 . The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital . 4W A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission protocol . Systems that do not utilize full digital trans- mission protocol (i .e . that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc . ) will not be acceptable. 5 . Each addressable device must be uniquely identi- fied by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. The use of jumpers to set address will not be acceptable . 6 . Wiring types will be approved by the equipment manufacturer. The system must allow up to 2, 500 feet wire length to the furthest addressable de- ""' vice . To minimize wire routing and to facili- tate future additions, t-tapping of the communi- cations channel will be supported except where Class A wiring is required. I . Fire Alarm Control Panel 1 . Where shown on the plans, provide and install a Simplex type 4020 Fire Alarm Control Panel . Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics . It shall display only those primary controls and displays Electrical 16100-33 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 5 . The System Expansion Modules shall be electri- cally supervised for module placement . Should a •� module become disconnected from the controls, the system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound. 6 . The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes . Restoration of a disabled circuit initiates a 60 second count down time that is displayed on the front panel . During this time, the display will warn the operator if circuit restoration will result in an alarm condition. Additionally, when dis- abled, ground isolation is implemented to aid in location and repair of any ground fault condi- tions . G. Power Requirements + 1 . The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated fused .s disconnect circuit . 2 . The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of sixty (60) hours with 10 minutes of alarm operation at the .• end of this period. The system shall automatic- ally transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure . All battery charging and .� recharging operations shall be automatic . 3 . All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel . H. Multiple Addressable Peripheral Network (Mapnet II) ,. 1 . Communication with addressable devices : The system must provide communication with all initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel . Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point : Electrical 16100-32 +0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the automatic functions either selec- tively or throughout the system. 4 . Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system, the operator may scroll to display new alarms . 5 . The system shall have an alarm list key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of not only the most recent alarm but also may indicate the path that the fire is taking. 6 . The control panel shall be capable of supplying 7 Amps @ 24VDC power output for external system use. F. Supervision 1 . There shall be up to 12 independently supervised and independently fused notification appliance circuits for alarm horns and flashing alarm lamps . Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other cir- cuits . 2 . Each independently supervised circuit shall in- clude a discrete panel readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit . 3 . The incoming power to the system shall be super- vised so that any power failure must be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present . 4 . The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visibly indicated * at the control panel and the remote annunciator. ww Electrical 16100-31 AM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a) All audible alarm notification appliances shall sound a continuous fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel or the remote annunci- ator. .� b) All visible alarm notification appliances (Xenon Strobes) shall display a continuous pattern until Extinguished by the Alarm Silence Switch. c) A supervised signal to notify the local fire department or an approved central station is to be activated. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, the type of "city connection circuit" is to be on- site configurable to provide either a "reverse polarity" , "local energy" , "shunt" or dry contact connection. Provide 2080- " 9023 digital communicator. d) The mechanical controls shall activate the air handling systems per life safety speci- fication, NFPA-101 . r e) An alarm is to be displayed on the panel display per 1 .4 .0 of these specifications . The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged at the control panel or the remote annunciator. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. MW A subsequent alarm received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel and the remote annunciator until acknowledged. 2 . A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm notification appli- ances . Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a true alarm shall be processed as described previously. Electrical 16100-30 w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL included in the bid price shall pro- 40 vide the above listed procedures for a period of five years after Owner acceptance of system. No g) An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capa- bility to manually control the following for each sensor: - clear peak detection values on - enable or disable the point - clear verification tally 4W - establish alarm sensitivity control a sensor' s relay driver output h) It shall be possible to program the control panel to automatically change the sensitiv- ity settings of each sensor based on time-of-day and day-of-week (for example, to be more sensitive during unoccupied times and less sensitive during occupied periods) . There shall be seven (7) sensi- tivity settings available for each sensor. i) The control panel shall have the capability of being programmed for a pre-alarm or two-stage function. This function allows an indication to occur when, for example, a 30s sensor reaches a threshold of 1 . 5% smoke obscuration. j ) At least 254 individually identified sen- sors, as well as conventional initiating device and notification appliance circuits shall be supported within a single control panel . E. Alarm Sequence 1 . The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station or auto- "" matic detection device is to be as follows: Electrical 16100-29 «x+ ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL * Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that no inter- pretation is required by the operator. f) If the proposed system does not have the capabilities defined in paragraphs 1 . 04 .N. 1 through 1 .04 .N.5, a maintenance and testing service providing the following shall be included with the base bid: "! Bi-annual sensitivity reading and log- ging for each sensor. This is to be accomplished by use of a UL listed sensitivity calibration device per the requirement of NFPA-72E . w Scheduled bi-annual threshold adjust- ments to maintain proper sensitivity for each smoke detector. Threshold adjustment to any smoke detector that has alarmed the system .� without the presence of particles of combustion. This service shall be performed within 4 hours of any such occurrence . Scheduled bi-annual cleaning or replacement of each smoke detector or �^ sensor within the system. - If any device alarms the system with- out the presence of particles of com- bustion twice within 30 days, it shall be cleaned or replaced. Semi-annual functional testing of each detector using the manufacturer' s calibrated test tool (Unmeasured smoke .d or aerosol injection shall not be permitted) . - Written documentation of all testing, cleaning, replacing, threshold adjust- ment, and sensitivity reading for each automatic smoke sensing device within the system. The initial service Electrical 16100-28 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL c) The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor' s average value reaches a predetermined level, a "DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condi- tion shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To pre- vent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. For scheduling of maintenance, the control panel shall be able to generate an "ALMOST DIRTY" indication for any sensor approaching a "DIRTY" trouble condition. d) The control panel shall continuously per- ,,, form an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel . Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel . e) An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capa- bility to manually access the following information for each sensor: - primary status - device type - present average value • - present sensitivity selected - peak detection values * - sensor range (normal, dirty, etc . ) Electrical 16100-27 am ,tea ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL go g) The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: MW - Alarm Silence - System Reset .. - Set Time/Date - Manual Control - On/Off/Auto Control - Disable/Enable - Clear Historical Alarm Log - Clear Historical Trouble Log - Walk Test - Change Alarm Verification h) Acknowledge keys shall also require privi- leged access to acknowledge points . If the operator presses an acknowledge key with insufficient access, an error message will be displayed. The points will scroll with each key press to view the points on the list, but the points will not get acknow- ledged in the database . •• 14 . Detection Operation a) Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self contained alarm set point (fixed threshold) . The alarm decision for each sensor shall be determined by the control panel . The control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor .� value to the stored values . b) The control panel shall maintain a moving .. average of the sensors' smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations . The system shall automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors . Photoelectric sensor smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0 . 3% of either limit of the UL window (0 . 5% to 4 . O11) to compensate for any environment . Electrical 16100-26 re ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL system is not 1000 operational . Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the Owner' s application. 13 . Access Levels a) There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels . Pass codes shall consist of up to ten (10) digits . Changes to pass codes shall only be made by authorized personnel . Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these functions . Function key switches shall be keyed dif- ferently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. b) In order to maintain security when entering a pass code, the digits entered will not be displayed. All key presses will be acknowledged by a local audible momentary tones . c) When a correct pass code is entered, an "ACCESS GRANTED" message shall be displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator leaves the keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes or manually logs out . d) Pass code access shall be entered into the system history log and shall be available for review with pass codes of proper authorization. e) Should an invalid code be entered, the operator shall be notified with a message and shall be allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three unsuccess- ful tries, an "ACCESS DENIED" message shall be displayed. f) Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels . Electrical 16100-25 No �w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the alarm noti- fication appliances to sound for 4 seconds to indicate the trouble condition. Should the walk test feature be on for an inap- propriate programmable amount of time, it shall revert to the normal mode automati- cally. d) The control panel shall be capable of sup- porting up to eight (8) separate testing groups whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other (non-testing) groups may be active and operate as programmed per normal system , operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation. aw e) Should an alarm condition occur from an ac- tive point, not in walk test mode, it shall +� perform all standard programmed alarmed se- quences . f) Suppliers of systems not having this feature as functionally specified above shall include a testing agreement meeting the requirements of NFPA-72H in their base " bid quotation. As a minimum, two (2) years of scheduled testing shall be included. 11 . LED Supervision a) All slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement . Should a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location of that LED. 12 . System Trouble Reminder a) Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire alarm Electrical 16100-24 ow ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL appliance circuits, and battery charging. «•+ These values will be displayed digitally and in real time . Systems not capable of supplying this feature shall include system panel mounted voltmeters and ammeters for monitoring this information. 9 . History Logging a) In addition to any required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to ar store a minimum of three hundred (300) events in an alarm log plus a minimum of three hundred (300) events in a separate trouble log. These events shall be stored in a battery protected random access memory (RAM) . Systems not having discrete alarm and trouble logging memory shall include an ! alternate supervised (eg: floppy drive, tape cassette) historic recording method with battery backup. Real time and date shall accompany all history event record- ing. ■r 10 . Walk Test with History Logging a) The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode, the + + alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file . The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm. b) The momentary disconnection of an initiat- ing or notification appliance circuit shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file . The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition. c) Optionally, the walk test sequence will have the capability of activating the alarm notification appliances [for a maximum of 2 seconds] [to signal a unique code associated to the alarm zone] . If this option is selected, any momentary opening �a Electrical 16100-23 up woo ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 7 . System Reset a) The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. The �.. display shall step the user through the reset process with simple English language messages . Messages shall provide operator .� assurance of the sequential steps (i .e. . "IN PROGRESS" , "RESET COMPLETED" , and "SYSTEM NORMAL" ) as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared. �^ b) Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system will remain in an abnor- mal state . System control relays shall not reset . The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall be on. The display will indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the points . These points will not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged. c) Should the Alarm Silence Inhibit function be active, the "System Reset" key press will be ignored and a "RESET INHIBITED" message will be displayed for a short time to indicate the action was not taken. For operator assurance, a "RESET NO LONGER INHIBITED" message will be displayed when the inhibit function times out . .. 8 . Function Keys, Display of System Detail Informa- tion a) Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for all system points . As a minimum, the status data shall include Disable/Enable Status, Veri- fication Tallies of Initiating Devices, Acknowledge Status, etc. b) Operation of the function keys shall be capable of displaying system voltages and currents on the front panel display. These values will include those for notification db Electrical 16100-22 00 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d) Point status (i .e . alarm, trouble) . These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be displayed simultaneously in alphanumeric format . Systems not capable of such a display on the panel faceplate shall include a CRT display meeting the above requirements and battery backup for the CRT. 4 . Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or trouble condi- tion. The acknowledge functions may be pass code protected if the user has insufficient privilege to acknowledge such conditions . A message shall indicate insufficient privilege but allow the user to view the points without acknowledging them. Should the user have suffi- cient privilege to acknowledge, a message will be displayed informing the user that the condi- tion has been acknowledged. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these functions . Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or `"" locks used within the system. 5 . After all the points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. 6 . Alarm Silencing a) Should the "Alarm Silence" button be pressed, all notification appliances shall be deactivated. b) Notification appliances shall not be deactivated during alarm silence inhibit mode. Electrical 16100-21 LM to ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Im different duty cycles between 1/4 second and 5 seconds . 4 . To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, all hard-wired initiation and control circuits "• shall be individually configurable, on-site, in any combination, to provide either initiating circuit, notification circuit, or auxiliary con- trol circuit operation. 5 . All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer' s name on each component . The catalog numbers specified under this section are those of Simplex Time Recorder Co. and constitute the type, product quality, material, and desired operating features . 6 . If equipment of another manufacturer is submitted for approval, the contractor shall state what, if any, specific points of system operation differ from the specified points of the system operation. This differentiation report is to reference every paragraph of this specification. D. Operation 1 . Under normal condition, the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the cur- rent time and date. 2 . Should an abnormal condition be detected, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions . 3 . The panel shall display the following informa- tion relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system: a) Custom location label (40 characters mini- mum) . am b) Type of device (i .e. smoke, pull station, waterflow) . .o Electrical 16100-20 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. General 1 . Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual zone supervision, individual notifi- cation appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. Include a con- trol panel, manual pull stations (fire alarm ++ boxes) , automatic fire detectors, horns, lights, annunciator, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instruc- tions and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on-site programming to accommodate facilitate expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes . All software operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel . Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, timing and special ow coded operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the system. 2 . To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be individually con- figurable on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a non-latching circuit or a alarm verification circuit . 3 . To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, notification appliance circuits shall be individually configurable on-site to provide, upon activation, a fast march time, slow march time, temporal code, PNIS code or a master code until deactivated or reset upon any output circuit . The PNIS coded pulse on and off time may be selectable on-site to provide 16 Electrical 16100-19 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL (software driven) of equipment for at least ten (10) years, and has a fully-equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the installation. MP 3 . All control equipment must have transient pro- tection devices to comply with UL864 require- ments . a. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) : Furnish and install an isolated loop cir- cuit protector device on all fire alarm, alarm notification appliance circuit, and signalling line circuit wiring (including shields) , which extends beyond the main .. building by either aerial, underground or other methods . The ILCP is to be located as close as practicable to the point at .� which the circuits leave or enter a build- ing. The ILCP grounding conductor is to be a No. 12 AWG wire having a maximum length of 28 feet to be run in as straight a line as practicable and connected to a building ground electrode system (unified ground) per Article 800-31 of the (1993) National Electrical Code . The ILCP furnished is to have a line to line response time of less than one (1) nanosecond capable of accept- ing greater than 2000 amps (35 joules each line) to earth. Shield to earth current is to be 5000 amps maximum.The ILCP is to be protected by a high dielectric insulating material and of small enough size to mount in a standard 4" square 2-1/8" deep elec- trical box. Spark gap devices or devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of the specified ILCP are not acceptable. All Isolated Loop Circuit Protectors must comply with UL #497B requirements . In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement men- tioned above, the system controls shall be .� UL listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760 . All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23 . Electrical 16100-18 MW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL RD G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a 40 short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans . ON H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laborato- ries and bear the UL label . Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOD for 120/208 volts, or equal by an General Electric, Westinghouse, or ITE. 2 . 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM on A. Scope and Related Documents 1 . The work covered by this section of the specifi- cations includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the Draw- ings and as herein specified. 2 . The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72 , NFPA-71, Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760 . w 3 . The work covered by this section of the specifi- cations is to be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications . B. Quality Assurance 1 . Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire .. alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc . (UL) , and shall bear the "U.L. " label . All on control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit . Partial listing is not acceptable . 0M 2 . The equipment and installation supervision fur- nished under this specification is to be provided by a manufacturer (independent dealers on and/or distributors will NOT be considered) who has been engaged in production of this type OR Electrical 16100-17 on ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL required to add breakers . Breakers shall be such that downstream panelboards may be 10, 000 AIC construction, •• either by series rating, feeder impedance, or current limiting construction. 2 . 10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting panel- boards as indicated on the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans . Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the ■,,, schedule . B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multipole breakers . Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. + Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule . D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for .. the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor speci- fied. E . Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/411 high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit . The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit . Electrical 16100-16 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL shall consist of steel channels bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. The framework is to be formed of code gauge steel, rigidly welded together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices . Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individual removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit . Top and bottom conduit areas are to be clearly shown and dimensioned on the Shop Drawings . The wireway front covers shall be hinged to permit easy access to the branch circuit breaker load side terminals . C. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross- sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 on temperature rise . Through bus shall be extruded aluminum plated by the Alastan 700 or 800 process . The through bus shall have an ampacity as shown on the Drawings, and shall be braced to have a short circuit current rating of 50, 000 RMS symmetrical amperes, and shall have provisions for the addition of future sections . Busses shall be non-tapered, with full neutral . D. The complete switchboard shall be rated and tested for 50, 000 amperes interrupting capacity, based on tests conducted on similar equipment . E . The main service disconnect device shall be molded case circuit breaker totally front accessible and front connectable . Circuit breaker to be Type NA. F. The revenue current transformer compartment shall be located in the service entrance section of the switchboard, connected for metering sequence shown. Provisions for current transformers shall be supplied. The compartment shall be barriered and covered with a single hinged door with sealing provisions . G. Distribution circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connec- tors . The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF" . Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be Electrical 16100-15 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and interchangeable . The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure . b . All single phase magnetic starters shall be .R single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502 . C . A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt . d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact A. in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes . 4 . Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for the service. , E . Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. , 2 . 09 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARD A. Furnish and install service entrance switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated Electri- cal Drawings . The switchboard shall meet the latest requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories Standard No. 891, NEMA PB2, and the Massachusetts Electric Code, and shall be UL labeled. The entire switchboard is to be Square D "Power Style" construction, or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse, or ITE. To be for 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire service . B. The switchboard shall be dead-front with front accessibility required. The switchboard framework Electrical 16100-14 .� W, u. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position. 3 . Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general ,■ purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is specified on the plans . Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phos- ow steel, except as specified in Paragraph 6 . 4 . Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 or !w 600 volts AC, as shown. 5 . Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings . 6 . Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures, or equal . All switches in Natatorium, Filter Room or other areas containing pool related equipment shall have NEMA 4X (stainless steel) enclosures . C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings . w D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings . Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans . Starters located in Natatorium, Filter Room, or other areas containing pool related equipment shall have NEMA 4X (stainless steel) enclosures . 1 . Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy con- tacts . All contacts shall be replaceable with- out removing power wiring or removing starter from panel . 2 . Coils shall be of molded construction, replace- able from the front without removing the starter from the panel . 3 . Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module . Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction Electrical 16100-13 4W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by Massachu- setts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. .® E . Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings . Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect . ' 2 . 08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings . B . Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications . 1 . All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2 . Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break .w such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mecha- nism shall be an integral part of the box, not Electrical 16100-12 .� PW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 8 . Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat . No. 1221-PLR, or equal . 9 . Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat . No. 1222-2, or equal . A 10 . Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle switches. 11 . Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows : a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat . No. 279 . w b . Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat . No. 278 . 12 . Drop Cord Receptacles (Quad Outlet) - Two duplex receptacles as specified above mounted in a pendant outlet box, Ericson Cat . No. 6030 with 2-6031 cover plates . 13 . Occupancy sensors shall consist of wall/ceiling mounted passive infrared sensors with mounting bracket (adjustable for aiming) , single pole or 3-way manual-off wall switches, and power/slave packs as required. To be Watt Stopper No. CI-100 sensor with No. WM100 swivel, No. CM100 ceiling bracket, No. A120-E power pack, and No. 5-120/277-E slave pack, or equal . 14 . Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws . 2 . 07 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans . All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glass- ware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings . Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and Electrical 16100-11 a" ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Electrical Co. , General Electric Co. , Raco, or approved equal . . 2 . 05 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all .R apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches . The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of name- plate lettering for approval . 2 . 06 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install devices where shown on the plans . Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate . All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates . 1 . Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat . No. 5352-I, or equal . 2 . Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat . No. 6898-HGI, or equal . 4" 3 . Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat . No. w' 20-3-5-0, or equal . 4 . Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat . No. 5362-IG, or equal . 5 . Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat . No. 1221-2, or equal . 6 . Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat . No. 1223-2, or equal . 7 . Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat . No. 1224-2 , or equal . .. Electrical 16100-10 .� ON ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete . Use steel sweeps on conduit 3" and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections . 2 . 02 WIREWAYS ow A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code . To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. 2 . 03 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans . Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections . ! G. Wire and Cable to be by General Electric, Carol, American, AFC, or equal . ,■, 2 . 04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw- on cover and gasket . B. Other outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel as manufactured by Steel City Electrical 16100-9 ow .K ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . 16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of two (2) years after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials .� or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect . C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 . 17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . PART 2 — MATERIALS 2 . 01 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps . Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications . B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type . C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded Electrical 16100-8 aAw ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades . 1 . 13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc . C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc . , * resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1. 14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, ductwork, cable, and raceway (except surface metal raceway) shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechani- cal or electrical equipment rooms, except that in rooms without ceilings, horizontal runs only may be exposed. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1 . 15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance, Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete instructions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his Contract . These instruc- tions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers . B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use of all systems and all apparatus pertaining thereto. Electrical 16100-7 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . 09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500 . 1 . 10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The Electriea•1 Sub=contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Section 01500 . 1 . 11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate . These documents are intended to supplement .. the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract require- ments . B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall assume all respon- sibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings . D . Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical * Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the struc- tural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such , fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost . as 1 . 12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide for the am delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the Electrical 16100-6 am �w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. u. 1 . 07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimen- sions, capacities, etc . of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Subcontractor from any obliga- tion to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications . The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall X0 remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or ow samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Subcontractor will be required to remove such materi- on als and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect . Xw 1 . 08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract . He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. Electrical 16100-5 am am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL No Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by .o the Electrical Subcontractor installing such items . G. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for am the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All 4W pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times . All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means . .w H. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this am Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I . The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Architec- tural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrep- ancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .� A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements . B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Require- „ ments . 1 . 06 PRODUCTS no A. With the exception of items specifically noted other- wise, all materials used shall be U. S . made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without no defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment . Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Electrical 16100-4 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or ! " Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Subcontractor himself were present . The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins . C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontrac- tors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsi- bility incurred by the Electrical Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Subcon- tractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. e. D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish .. all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc . , hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place . In case of failure on the part of the Electri- cal Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure . E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this !�* work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof . Condi- tions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements . F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Electrical 16100-3 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 13 . Wiring devices and plates . �- 14 . Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connec- tions to equipment . 15 . Arrange for inspections and perform tests . 16 . Guarantee and instructions . 17 . Demolition and removal from site of all existing . heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. 18 . All existing electrical systems and equipment .a which are to remain in operation and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1 . 03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regula- tions, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. .w B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials, instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 . 04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. am Electrical 16100-2 MP ow M ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) 0M PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 INTENT IM A. The Subcontractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment necessary for completion of the electrical system, in accordance 4W with this Section of the Specifications and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract . ` 1 . 02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and + services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . New Electric Service and Service Entrance Equip- ment . 2 . Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit . 3 . Feeders . 4 . Panelboards . 5 . Lighting Fixtures and Lamps . 6 . Telephone System. 7 . Fire Alarm System. w. 8 . Communications/Master Clock System. 9 . Cable Television Service Entrance . 10 . Data cable system. 11 . Emergency generator. 12 . Security system. Electrical 16100-1 �w HyAC HI01A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-110115 SOUTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H10IC 5OUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HI01D NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H02A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W2O1 DETAILS W2O2 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL E101A NORTHWEST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E1015 5OUTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101C 50UT14EA5T LIGHTINCs PLAN - FIRST FLOOR �r E1,01D NORTHEAST LIG14TNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTNG PLAN - 5EC00 FLOOR E201A NORTHEA5T POWER A SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B SOUTHUJE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C 50UTHEAST POWER t 5YSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E20ID NORTHEAST POWER l SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER s SYSTEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAMS E401 51TE ELECTRICAL we go s .. A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS so A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A416 POOL FILTRATION DETAILS .m A501 NEW STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS Aro01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS .. A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A603 PLAN DETAILS Aro04 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS "" AroOro ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS AroOZ ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A606 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A701 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS ASOIA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR .. A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT EQI EQUIPMENT EQ2 EQUIPMENT +�w E03 EQUIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 ECUIPMENT wo FCUNMATIGN FI01A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTI4WEST (ART 4 COMMUANITY) F101B FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY 4 ADMINISTRATION) .. F101G FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) POID FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS fm F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL w 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY 4 ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN ow 5301C SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUPI)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 53010 NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS r" 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING am PI01A NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN • FIRST FLOOR P10115 SOUTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR go PI01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI01D NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOCR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS .o P202 PLUMBING DETAILS P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROCM PLANS 4 DETAILS -- COVER 5HEET C-01 GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,DUX-.LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 51TE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL 1-101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 51TE GRADING: PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 51TE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL Lro01 51TE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L&02 51TE DETAILS, STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL fa RIOI KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS 8102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS F=Hlol PHASING PLAN ADOIA DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR an ADOIC DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR ADOID DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR ,4D02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR ADO3 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF AC04 DEMOLITICN WALL SECT10N5 A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t COMMUNITY) A101B FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH UlE5T (LIBRARY AND ADMINI5TRATICN) A101C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EA5T (CAFETORIUM) A100 FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN ,4104 ROOF - DETAILS ,4201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20& DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A40ro WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A409 WALL SECTIONS ,4410 WALL SECTIONS �r ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 13 TIME MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed. ) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . B . Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be r accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER' S CHECK OR CASHIER' S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid delosit than those specified will be rejected. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authori- ty, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D . The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which, in the opinion of the awarding authority, based upon an investigation of the work involved, is customarily +*� performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and which is estimated by the Awarding Authority to cost in excess of Ten ww Thousand Dollars, and only each class of work de- scribed shall be a class of work for which a sub- bidder for that sub-trade must list the information required in the "form for sub-bid" : =r� 1 . Sheet Metal Work 2 . Insulation 3 . Automatic Temperature Controls E. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Heating and Venti- lating Subcontractor for determining the full extent ! " of his work as required by all Contract Documents . Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following Contract Drawings : Heating and Ventilating 15600-93 go am wr ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument . The *� engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid" , or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" „ high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3 . 11 COMMISSIONING A. The Owner will retain an independent contractor to perform commissioning of the building' s HVAC system. The methods used will be those outlined in ASHRAE Guideline 1-1989, "Commissioning of HVAC Systems" . B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor, Automatic Temperature Control Sub-Subcontractor, the Sheet Metal Sub-Subcontractor, and the Testing and Balancing Sub- Subcontractor shall provide all required labor and , materials required to support the work of the Commissioning Contractor. 3 . 12 ALTERNATE BIDS A. The Base bid is the Lump Sum Price for all labor and materials specified and/or shown on the Drawings, less * the work included in Alternates No. 2 and No. 12 . B. Alternate No. 2 is the additional Lump Sum Price for labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to installing a dual fuel burning system for the boilers, in lieu of a gas only system. This includes deleting the gas burners and adding dual fuel burners, oil piping system with transfer pump, oil tank, and all specified accessories . C. Alternate No. 12 is the additional Lump Sum Price for labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing a direct digital control , energy management system, as specified, in lieu of the Base Bid pneumatic system. Heating and Ventilating 15600-92 a JIM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean- .' up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas . D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas . 3 . 10 IDENTIFICATION W A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels . Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve . Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains . Heating and Ventilating 15600-91 w .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 07 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an MW independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business . am B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers . Longitu- dinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they Wo are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all ■" joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips . Insulation shall run through all hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 21' in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket . D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering , tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3 . 08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer' s printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the .. Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor and be included in his bid. so 3 . 09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurate- ly and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The " Heating and Ventilating 15600-90 on ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor affiliated with a national testing and balancing agency, using methods recommended by the national agency. C. Pump capacities shall be determined by differential pressure measurements . Water circuits shall be '~ adjusted by balancing cocks previously specified. All balancing cocks shall be permanently marked after balance is complete so that they may be restored to their correct position if disturbed. D. Total air quantities both supply and exhaust/return, shall be obtained by adjustment of fan speeds and outdoor air/return air dampers, including building static pressure . Branch duct air quantities shall be adjusted by volume or splitter dampers, and by adjustment of flow controls on VAV boxes (set maximum and minimum positions) . Dampers shall be permanently marked after air balance is complete so that they can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time . E . Volume adjusters may be used to balance air quantities at outlets and inlets providing final adjustments do not produce objectionable sound levels or objectional drafts . w F. . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall record and submit to the Architect for evaluation and approval six (6) copies of the complete air balance report . Replacement of adjustable pulleys, addition of balancing dampers or pressure taps required to effect proper air balance shall be furnished and installed by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Heating and Ventilating 15600-89 am AV ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means . All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, XMI fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. MW 3 . 05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water ,�► being circulated. Clean all strainers . B . Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Subcontractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours . The system shall then be .� drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Architect shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7 . 5 plus or minus) . If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be .. repeated. E . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. Heating and Ventilating 15600-88 W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifi- cally shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. ua. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1 . 5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test . Make a check to verify that_ the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 900 of specified minimum yield strength, or 1 . 7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31 . 9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D . After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage . Eliminate leaks by tighten- ing, repairing, or replacing components as appropri- ate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks . E . After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Architect shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative' s presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. Heating and Ventilating 15600-87 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL area be necessary, the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. �. 3 . 03 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout . Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops . All ow pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B . Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers . Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings . Reduc- tions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings . D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment *� of other trades . E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment . Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is .� placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements . G. Vent all high points and drain all low points through- !" out the system. Heating and Ventilating 15600-86 OF ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3 . 01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place . B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc . before the units are turned on, and .W clean filters shall be installed. 3 . 02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 4" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions . All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc . shall be checked by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor, who shall make the correc- tions as his own expense. B . Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers . Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Architect . D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an 40 Heating and Ventilating 15600-85 im W Im ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .� fan delay cycle adjustable from 10 to 20 seconds and an actual shaker cycle adjustable from 6 to 60 seconds . Overall system control shall be designed for .. initiation by a hand-off auto switch. G. The shaker control board shall be panel mounted with a suitable transformer and starter to match the fan motor voltage. Panel shall be factory installed in the shaker enclosure mounted, and wired to the shaker motor. ., H. The collector shall be assembled in major sub-sections and ready for installation and wiring. Protective packaging shall consist of plastic wrap and wood crating. The unit shall be American Air Filter Company Model AR Arrestall Self-Contained Dust Collector, or equal, with capacities as specified below: 1 . Model AR-35, 1, 750 cfm. at 6 . 1" static pressure, with 3 horsepower, 208 volt, 3 phase motor. I . Unit shall be furnished complete with all required JIM motor starters or contactors, factory pre-wired. J. Furnish unit fully weatherized for outdoor instal- lation, including motor cover, hood and blank-off panel . 2 . 32 DUAL WALL GAS VENT A. All vent, from draft diverter to termination shall be Type "B" gas vent . Vent shall be dual-wall galvanized , steel (outer) and aluminum type, UL listed for installation with ill clearance to combustible enclo- sures . B. Vent shall be Metalbestos Type QC or equal by Hart and Cooley, Ameri-Vent, or Metal-Fab, complete with elbows, supports, tees, straight sections, tall cone flashing, storm collar, and weatherproof top. Heating and Ventilating 15600-84 .� ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. The fan shall be backwardly inclined for non- overloading operation. It shall be constructed of ws aluminum and shall be fitted with a scroll for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. It shall be belt driven by a 1, 750 rpm TEFL motor and both fan and �. motor shall be dynamically balanced for smooth vibration free operation. The outlet area shall be lined with a strong, smooth fiberglass laminated mat for sound attenuation. This liner shall be designed for operation at velocities up to 5, 000 fpm and temperatures up to 250OF and shall meet the fire resistance requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. C. For additional silencing, furnish a "hush kit" , including silencer and necessary transition piece, field installed to the manufacturer' s recommendations . D . The filter cartridge shall consist of individual pockets sewn from one piece of 8 . 2 ounce cotton sateen fabric, designed to deliver in excess of 99% efficien- cy by weight on fine industrial dusts . The cartridge shall be wide spacing consisting of 16 pockets . The filter cartridges shall have rigid corrugated separa- rators to prevent pocket collapse and to channel the cleaned air in a laminar flow profile into the fan inlet cone. Adjacent pockets shall be positioned by steel bars at the top and flat shaker "fingers" at the bottom to prevent mutual blank off and to maintain the dust cake collection area. E . The cartridge fabric shall be fitted over a galvanized steel locking frame and all separators securely positioned by a galvanized steel retainer. Each cartridge assembly shall be locked in place by two lever actuated over-center cam assemblies which force the steel header frame securely against a 3/4" x 1-1/4" neoprene gasket surface. F. Shaking action shall be delivered by a horizontal W contact system that distributes shaking force through- out the entire surface of each individual filter pocket . Pockets shall be held tightly by flat shaker Ift "fingers" which impart an acceleration equal to a minimum of 7 "G"s from a motorized eccentric driven shaker assembly. Operation of the automatic shakers shall be controlled by a printed circuit board using !W complimentary metal oxide, semi-conductor (CMOS) technology in a dual timer mode . It shall include a Or Heating and Ventilating 15600-83 PW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 6 . Motor starter shall have three ambient compen- sated bi-metal overload relays . Fan on/off/auto switch, if supplied, shall be oil and water tight . 7 . MCC enclosure door shall have coin-operated AN latches and defeaters to ensure door cannot be opened without the defeater being deliberately voided. go K. Lifting brackets shall be factory installed on single piece units . On multiple section units, removable lifting hangers shall be provided to permit unit to be lifted without slings . L. Return air safety grates shall be provided to protect service personnel and to ease in the filter removal and replacement . M. Curbs shall be provided by the unit manufacturer. Curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel and have a wood nailing strip factory installed. Jointers, gasketing and bolts for assembly shall be provided as required. A pipe nipple for condensate drainage system shall be provided for each coil section. The unit condensate drainage system shall be properly trapped to provide adequate condensate drainage at specified fan suction pressures . Curb design shall be such that the unit will be installed level . 2 . 31 DUST COLLECTOR A. The dust collector shall be completely self-contained fabric type unit consisting of a collector housing, fan, motor, filter cartridges and automatic shakers . .� The unit shall also include a funnel bottom for dust disposal, weather hood, and final filter. Overall construction shall be of galvanized steel . The exterior shall be finish coated with vinyl lacquer. Air inlet shall be right, and air outlet top front through machine cut grille openings in the housing steel . Cartridge and fan access shall be through full .. height doors with quick opening, flush latches . The unit shall also include a 1/4" plate motor mounting bracket assembly with lifting lug openings . Heating and Ventilating 15600-82 M PM ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . Belt speed shall be between 1, 000 and 5 , 000 feet per minute. 4 . The area of the belt contact on the smaller sheave shall not be less than 1200. All adjust- able pitch drives with four grooves shall have matching companion sheaves . tw J. Electrical Wiring 1 . Fan motor shall be wired through electrical metallic tubing to a weatherproof junction box on the inside wall of the fan section. A short piece of liquid tight, flexible conduit shall be provided near the fan motor to allow for proper �. fan isolation. 2 . Motor control centers shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer, for all units . The motor control centers shall be pre-wired and factory tested to assure field performance . Motor control center shall be UL listed and meet National Electric Code requirements for the application. 3 . The basic motor control center (for powering the exhaust fan) shall consist of a NEMA 4 cabinet containing a line voltage industrial type mag- netic starter and motor circuit protector mount- ed on a common panel . 4 . The deluxe motor control center (for powering the supply fan) shall consist of a NEMA 4 cabi- net containing a common panel on which is mount- ed a 120 volt industrial type magnetic starter, motor circuit protector, 120 volt transformer, and on/off/auto switch and contacts to permit operation of return/exhaust fan. 5 . Motor circuit protector shall be magnetic trip, UL approved for motors with an "off/on" handle accessible from outside the enclosure . Continu- ous current ranges and adjustable trip ranges must meet NEC requirements for full load and locked rotor current . Adjustable instantaneous trip point shall be provided for fault protec- tion without nuisance tripping. Handle shall be able to be padlocked in the "off" position. 4M Heating and Ventilating 15600-81 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . Coils shall have a supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each 5/8" O.D. tube. •• 3 . Coils shall be proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with air pressure under water. G. Refrigerant cooling coils shall be enclosed in an insulated coil section. U-bends shall not be exposed. Suction and distributor headers shall be made of copper tubing and penetrate coil cover panel to allow for sweat connection of refrigerant lines . 1 . Coils shall be proof tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig, air pressure under water. Coils shall be dried after testing and filled .� with a 10 psig holding charge of nitrogen. 2 . Coils shall have an equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure that each coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant liquid. H. Units shall be furnished with medium efficiency .+ pleated media, disposable type filters . Each filter shall contain not less than 4 . 6 square feet of media per 24 x 24 x 2 size, 16 pleats . Media shall be reinforced, non-woven cotton fabric, treated with adhesive and continuously laminated to a supported steel wire grid. Filters shall have rated average dust spot efficiency of not less than 351W when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52-68 test standard. I . Motors shall be mounted on integral isolated fan assembly furnished by the unit manufacturer. Motors shall be mounted inside the basic casing. Motors shall be 200 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz open "T" frame types . Motor mounts shall be adjustable to permit drive belt tensioning. 1 . Drives shall be selected at 1 .2 service factor and shall be variable pitch, suitable for ad- justment within +/- 50 of specified rpm. 2 . Center line distances shall not exceed three (3) .� times the sum of the sheave diameters and should not be less than the diameter of the larger sheave. Heating and Ventilating 15600-80 .. go ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the fan) shall be covered with a steel safety grate. Return air and outside air dampers are opposed blade type and rotate on rustproof nylon bushings . Damper motor mounting brackets are provided inside the unit casing for center �. driving of the damper sets . D. Fans shall be double width, double inlet, multi-blade forward curved centrifugal type as manufactured by the unit manufacturer. 1 . Fans shall be equipped with self-aligning, anti- „ friction bearings . Bearings shall be equipped with grease lines allowing lubrication from one side of the fan. Bearings shall be selected for a 100, 000 hour average operating life . 2 . Fan and motor assembly to be internally isolated from unit with spring isolators, furnished and •■ installed by unit manufacturer. E . Face dampers shall be opposed blade type; bypass dampers shall be parallel blade type. Both shall rotate on rustproof nylon bearings . Dampers shall be center driven to minimize twisting. Bypass dampers face area shall be at least 250s of entire face and bypass damper area to ensure sufficient air mixing and low pressure drops . Low leak F/B dampers shall have rolled stainless steel jam seals and CPVC edge gasket on all blades . F. Water heating coils shall be designed with continuous configurated aluminum plate fins and seamless 5/8" O.D. copper tubes, . 020" thick. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes . No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process . Coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with the same end connections to be accessible for service and can be removed from the unit through the roof, pipe chase or fan door. Capacities, pressure drops and w. selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 . 1 . Heating coils shall be pitched in the unit w casing for proper drainage . Heating and Ventilating 15600-79 no w.. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL rw stainless steel jam and CPVC edge gaskets on all blades . Low leak dampers must have cataloged leakage rates of 16 cfm/sq. ft . or less at 411 no w.g. 9 . Air handling units shall be furnished with a nameplate which includes the model number, serial number and unit tag number. C. The unit shall have powered exhaust and economizer capability. The exhaust/return fan economizer section shall be constructed of heavy gage galvanized steel and shall have the same height and width as the unit ., casing. The section shall be leak-tight with sloped roof overhangs for drainage . Casing shall be protect- ed with a chlorinated vinyl lacquer and all internal welds shall be coated with red oxide or zinc chromate primer. 1 . The unit shall be lined with 211 , 1-1/2 pound density insulation. Access doors shall be hinged and gasketed and have quick opening latches . Exhaust/return section shall have one multi-blade, double width, double inlet, for- ward-curved fan and motor assembly. 2 . The exhaust opening shall contain a low leak discharge damper. The discharge damper will have parallel blades in a vertical configura- tion. Blades are made of galvanized steel with gasketing and side seals to help prevent leak- age . 3 . Fan wheel, motor drives and belts shall be dynamically balanced as a complete assembly at the factory. Fan/motor assembly shall ship installed, with belts and sheaves aligned, requiring no additional field set-up other than normal belt tightening. MW 4 . The fan shaft must be of solid steel and shall not pass through its first critical speed as the unit comes up to rated rpm. Fan bearings shall be grease-lubricated ball bearings . ` 5 . Exhaust/return fan section shall be provided with a full sized access door for easy access to ■*° the fan. The return air opening (except under Heating and Ventilating 15600-78 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL al weather protection. Use of sheet metal screws to fasten side walls to unit framework is not permitted. 1 . Galvanized roof shall be pitched for drainage and shall overlap the side panel on all four sides . The roof shall be gasketed and secured to the wall panels with zinc coated steel screws . 2 . All exterior surfaces shall be finished with vinyl chlorinated lacquer for corrosion protec- tion. 3 . Unit shall have an insulated drain pan extending under coil and fan/motor assembly for leak protection. Drain pan shall be constructed of galvanized steel . An insulated "P" trap with connections shall be provided by the manufactur- er to provide proper condensate drainage . 4 . Three man-sized gasketed access doors with quick release, spring loaded latches and hinges, shall be provided in the fan, coil and filter section. Door tieback shall be provided. Doors attached by screws or not continuously gasketed are not acceptable . 5 . Metal brackets shall be provided for mounting of damper operators and shall be welded to the w casing. Brackets secured by screws penetrating the outer casing are not acceptable. 6 . Pipe chase for heating and cooling coils shall be factory assembled and located inside the unit casing in order to permit coils to be piped inside roof curb. Pipe chase compartment shall be insulated and factory assembled. 7 . The complete casing, from the entering air side to the leaving air side, shall be factory insu- lated with 2" thick, 1-1/2 pound density, matt- faced or neoprene coated insulation. 'w 8 . Return air and outside air dampers shall be provided to mix the two air stream. Low leak, return air dampers shall be parallel blade type and rotate on rustproof bushings . Dampers shall be center driven. Dampers shall have rolled Heating and Ventilating 15600-77 .. am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .. B. Expansion Compensators : Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping .. systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems . Provide internal guides and anti-torque .. devices, and removable end clip for proper position- ing. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with require- ments, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div. ; UOP, Inc . Hyspan Precision Products, Inc . Keflex, Inc . Metraflex Co. .. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc . D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with re- quirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc . Metraflex Co. 4W 2 . 30 ROOF-TOP CENTRAL STATION UNITS A. Furnish and install outdoor central station air handling units as shown and scheduled on the Plans . The unit shall be installed in strict accordance with the Specification. All units shall be complete with weatherproof fan section, coil section and accessories specified. Units shall be Trane "Penthouse Climate Changer" , or equal . B. Unit shall be designed and built for outdoor installa- tion. Unit casing shall be leaktight up to 3" negative static pressure . All roof and wall panels shall be made of heavy gage galvanized steel welded to a 10 gage welded, galvanized steel base channel . All seams shall be welded or bolted and sealed with a rubber based mastic . External vertical seams shall be covered with a "U" clip, welded in place for addition- .. Heating and Ventilating 15600-76 po ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL limited warranty. Furnish and install a protection proving system consisting of anode, test point, Hsu mounting bracket, interconnecting cables, sidewalk box (P.U. size "B" ) and digital volt meter. B. Furnish Type 1 spill container and Type 61 overfill prevention valve for oil tank, Preferred Utilities Mfg. Corp. , or equal . C. Furnish screened vent for tank, Preferred Utilities Mfg. Corp. , or equal . D. Furnish and install oil tank gage in tank, lever float hydraulic type equal to Model TG-HY-30, Preferred Utilities Mfg. Corp . , or equal . Run gage lines in 2-1/2" E.M.T. conduit and long sweep ells . E . Furnish secondary containment system for all fuel oil suction and return lines installed underground outside the building. System shall be as manufactured by Total Containment, Inc . , or equal, and shall include sump box, straight and flex pipe, and all required fittings and hardware. F . Provide electronic interstitial space leak detection system. System shall be Mass . approved by TCI, or equal . G. Furnish and install duplex fuel oil transfer pump set complete with mounting base and oil drip pan, dual 1 H.P . , 208 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1 .725 rpm oil pump motors, oil pressure relief valve, drive couplings with coupling guards, check valves, pressure gauges, dual strainers, motor starters, control cabinet, pilot lights, manual on/off switch, and automatic pump alternating and automatic back-up pump changeover controls . Pump set to be Gordon-Piatt No. ID5D300/270 with a capacity of 300 gph, or equal by Preferred Utilities or Webster. 2 .29 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS w A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion in joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors . Heating and Ventilating 15600-75 am ,.A ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL im tive maintenance necessary to keep the burners, fuel pumps, nozzles, orifices, combustion air fans and other parts clean and functioning a* properly. The Heating and Ventilating Subcon- tractor shall be required to lubricate as necessary, check couplings and pilot systems and adjust, repair, or replace as necessary, perform turndown tests, conduct performance tests for flame safeguard, combustion efficiency, draft measurements, limit control tests and safety valve tests all until such time as the Owner accepts the equipment, issues the final certifi- cate of payment and assumes the full obligation of Ownership. 7 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall maintain a permanent log book in the Boiler Room accompanied with an established maintenance schedule which shall be adhered to by his qualified personnel, signed as performed. Combustion efficiency tests shall be conducted monthly during the heating season and burner tune-up shall be performed whenever operating efficiency/performance tests fall below satis- factory levels as previously specified. 8 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall note that any such warranty service as may be absorbed by the boiler/burner unit manufacturer shall in no way absolve the Heating and Venti- lating Subcontractor from any and all legiti- mate responsibility for the routine care, service and preventive maintenance and materials furnished to this Contract, while the heating system is under his control, and until final acceptance by the Owner. 2 . 28 FUEL OIL SYSTEM (ALTERNATE NO 2) A. Furnish and install one 12, 000 gallon, 8' -0" dia. x + 31' -1111 long full double wall steel fuel oil tank as shown on Drawings, UL labeled for underground use. Tank shall be complete with 16" dia. manhole, shelf plates, hold down system, tank tapping, and Sti-P3 protection system consisting of tank coating, dielec- tric bushings, and cathodic protection. The corrosion control system shall be applied by an Sti-P3 licensee and shall be furnished with their twenty (20) year Heating and Ventilating 15600-74 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL card, one per burner and similar to Lynn Products, which he shall post at each burner and upon which he shall transcribe all pertinent combustion data, posted conspicuously to allow for a running record of service adjustments to accumulate. I . Warranty Burner Service 1 . The boiler/burner unit manufacturer shall provide the initial light-off and one (1) year of warranty service for the burners and controls . This requirement shall not be waived, nor shall the responsibility for the warranty service be assumed by any other party. ON 2 . Boiler/burner unit manufacturer shall furnish one (1) year of warranty service on the burners and controls which shall commence from the date 00 of substantial completion or beneficial occupancy. 3 . Warranty service shall include labor and materials to replace any parts or controls which might fail in service as the result of a defect in material or manufacture . Boiler manufacturer shall provide warranty service through a local burner service organization which shall respond to any and all legitimate burner service calls on a 24-hour basis . 4 . A letter of transmittal from the boiler/burner unit manufacturer to the Owner shall be required attesting to the fact of burner light-off by the factory and it shall also inform the Owner of all pertinent data regarding the warranty burner service arrangement . 5 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall guarantee the entire installation for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. 6 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall maintain all apparatus in satisfactory operating condition including the performance of periodic burner tune-up and cleaning the boiler fire side surfaces when dirty, provide any and all preven- Heating and Ventilating 15600-73 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Make all necessary adjustments to oil and gas pressure regulators, firing rate control valves, combustion air dampers to .. properly set and maintain the required rate of input . b. Adjustment and check-out of all temperature controls, limit switches, operating con- trols, pressure switches, LWCO devices, manual reset functions, gas valves/ actuators, pressure regulators, combustion controls, interlock and lockout devices . C . Supervise purging of the boilers and conduct pilot turndown tests . Perform all necessary tests for venting which shall include setting and adjusting the boiler outlet dampers to manufacturer' s specifica- tions and provide up to two days instruc- tion to Operating Personnel . ., d. Gas train pressures including manifold pressure readings, manifold pressure drop, adjustment of the gas pilot ignition assembly, air/fuel ratio adjustment, combustion air damper/linkage adjustment, throttle ring, and proper selection of the nozzle assembly. e . The final results of a combustion test .. including the percentage of carbon dioxide or oxygen at the breaching, draft/pressure measurement over the fire and at the breaching and the net stack temperature. .. Burners shall be adjusted to provide the best quality combustion for which they are designed and in no instance shall be less than 10% CO2 . 4 . Upon completion of the burner light-off, Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall provide a copy of the boiler manufacturer' s light-off sheet to the Architect providing documentation for job file and to prove compliance with the Specifications . 5 . In addition to the above, Heating and Ventilat- ing Subcontractor shall furnish a reference Heating and Ventilating 15600-72 .w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Magnetic starter with two overload relays . b. Pre-purge and draft safety switch. C . Twelve (12) point terminal block. d. Red warning light for "Low Draft" condi- tion. "* 6 . Furnish and install a draft sample tube of 1/2" I . P. S . iron pipe with tee fittings at each turn with cleanout plugs installed. Draft sample tube shall be connected to and extend from the boiler smoke hood on the suction side of the fan to the respective draft control switch at the auxiliary draft control panel . Sample tube shall be supported to prevent displacement or mechanical damage . H. Burner Light Off/Adjustment 1 . The boiler/burner unit manufacturer shall provide the services of their own factory burner service group in the form of a licensed burner service technician who shall. actually perform the initial burner light-off, final adjusting and testing of the burners and controls in the presence of the Heating and Ventilating Sub- contractor, Architect, and Operating Personnel . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall provide and perform all necessary communication between the above specified individuals in order to co-ordinate the burner light-off with at least 10 working days' notice to all parties in advance of the proposed date of burner light- off . 2 . As specified, burner light-off shall include flue gas sampling utilizing either batch type or electronic analyzing instruments and shall include flue gas testing, pilot operating tests, burner operation tests, tests for venting and instruction to Operating Personnel . 3 . Testing procedures and burner adjusting shall include no less than that specified above and • shall include all of the following: Heating and Ventilating 15600-71 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 10 . All main gas pressure regulators and high and low gas pressure switches shall be vented in accordance with the requirements set forth in the previously specified Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code . Vent lines shall be of steel or wrought iron pipe, 3/4" IPS minimum with a maximum length as directed by Code and shall discharge to outside atmosphere. All main gas pressure regulators shall be independently vented to a safe outdoor location. Vent lines from regula- tors shall not be connected into a common line with the bleed line from gas operated diaphragm lines or from pressure relief valves . G. Induced Draft Fan 1 . The flue gas openings in the back section of the boiler shall be connected by a self-supporting steel smoke hood arranged to accommodate the induced draft fan as specified herein. 2 . Smoke hood shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with welded seams and shall be equipped with flanges for bolted connections . Gasketed cast iron adapter frames shall be provided to assure a tight fit to the rear section and shall be provided with cleanout hand holes equipped with bolted cover plates . 3 . Boiler shall be installed with an Auburn 18B-100 induced draft fan having a capacity of 2, 970 cfm at 0 . 96" s .p. standard air. Draft inducer shall be arranged for vertical discharge with two double acting field M&MG2 barometric dampers attached to an adapter flange and installed on the smoke hood. 4 . Induced draft fan motor shall be 1 HP wired for operation on 3 phase/208 volt/60 Hz . with ther- mal overload protection. Induced draft fan • shall be electrically interlocked at the auxil- iary draft control panel to prevent burner operation when the induced draft fan is not in .� operation. 5 . Auxiliary draft control panel shall be furnished with the following components factory installed and wired: Heating and Ventilating 15600-70 No ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and shall comply with the previously specified requirements and recommendations for gas and oil fired boilers, and shall include not less than the following: a. Pilot and main gas pressure regulators . b. Pilot and main manual shut-off gas valves . Manual shut-off gas cock larger than 2" shall be of the lubricated plug or ball type with stops . a•• C . A motor driven reset safety shut-off gas valve shall be provided in the main gas line to each burner. In addition, an auxiliary safety shut-off gas valve shall be provided downstream from the motor driven main gas valve . d. A manually operated lubricated plug cock shall be located downstream of both safety shut-off gas valves to permit leakage testing of the valves . e . One-quarter inch (1/411 ) plugged tappings shall be provided, one of which shall be located upstream of the main gas pressure regulator and another located near the burner head to permit gas pressure readings during operation. f . Gas pressure supervision shall be provided by the use of listed pressure switches interlocked to accomplish a non-recycling safety shutdown in the event of either a w high or low gas pressure. 8 . Gas valve train components shall be furnished as specified above with the pilot gas train, firing • rate control valve and combustion air damper/ actuator installed and wired at the factory. All other valve train components shall be fur- nished loose for field assembly. 9 . Gas valve train assembly shall be furnished sized for minimum acceptable pressure drop with 10" w. c . inlet gas pressure upstream of the main gas pressure regulator. Heating and Ventilating 15600-69 4W M w.. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d. Control circuit transformer, fuse block and fuse for protection. Furnish an additional eight (8) spare fuses for each burner. •• e . Pilot lights to indicate the following conditions : i "POWER ON' ii "CONTROL LOCKOUT" iii "HIGH LIMIT" iv "LOW GAS PRESSURE" v "HIGH GAS PRESSURE" vi "LOW WATER ■,. f . Lead/Lag switch for multiple burner lead/lag control system. wo g. Four inch diameter alarm horn with silencing switch and relays - wired to alarm any of the specified lockout condi- SM tions . Alarm shall also energize dry contacts within the control panel to initiate "BOILER OFF" alarm to the energy .. management system specified under another portion of this Contract . h. Proven low fire start switch and combustion air flow interlock switch. Provide auxil- iary contacts from which to energize a combustion air damper open on a call for �• heat . i . Light oil/heavy oil selector switch. 6 . Burners shall provide fully modulating fire to vary the firing rate as the load varies . Burner shall always return to the low fire position for ignition and a combustion air-proving switch shall be mounted on each burner and interlocked to close the main fuel valve in the event of loss of combustion air. Burner shall be equipped with gas/electric ignition complete with transformer, electrodes, and pilot assembly installed and wired at the factory. 7 . Gas firing equipment and components shall be provided in accordance with UL-795 requirements for commercial/industrial gas heating equipment Heating and Ventilating 15600-68 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4 . All controls, motor starters, relays, switches and pilot lights shall be installed within a burner mounted control cabinet constructed of 18 gage steel with continuously welded seams and fully gasketed to meet or exceed NEMA-1 ± . standards . Control panel shall be complete with a top indicator section which shall house the specified indicating lights and operating switches . Indicator section shall be hinged to allow full access to all panel mounted compo- nents . External lights, switches and components shall be identified with engraved laminated plastic nameplates . Door shall be fitted with a small plexiglass observation port to allow immediate viewing of the primary control annun- ciator. Control cabinet shall be burner mounted at the factory and wired as an integral part of the burner control system. External lights, switches and components shall all be wired to a numbered terminal strip without splices and shall be color coded to facilitate field wiring connections . 5 . Burner mounted control panel shall comply with the following control and device requirements : a. Fireye E-100 Micro Computer primary control shall provide for electronic flame safe- guard protection with first-out annuncia- tion and multi-function annunciator display with sequence status lights . Provide 10 second trial for pilot; 10 second trial for main flame; safe start circuit and continu- ous circuit component check of the flame verification primary circuit and the flame detector throughout the flame proving period. Control shall provide 4 second flame failure response time with non- recycling safety shutdown upon loss of main flame at point of supervision. b. Four pole double throw fuel changeover switch with center "OFF" position. C . Manual/Automatic modulation selector switch with manual firing rate potentiomar. Heating and Ventilating 15600-67 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL tion upon satisfactory completion of the inspec- tion process . 4 . Issuance of a Certificate of Inspection for the new heating boiler shall be considered mandatory to the fulfillment of this Contract . After ..o receipt of Certificate of Inspection, the Heat- ing and Ventilating Subcontractor shall furnish a suitable glass front frame within which to place said Certificate, which shall then be placed in or posted on a suitable location within the Boiler Room. F. Combustion System 1 . Boilers shall be furnished with a forced draft nozzle mix, multi-port/low pressure air atomiz- ing burner utilizing the flame retention con- cept . Burners shall be approved by the State Fire Marshall, tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and listed as approved by the Massachusetts Gas Regulatory Board. 2 . Each burner shall be listed by the boiler manu- facturer as a compatible component of the boiler/burner unit and shall be as manufactured by Industrial Combustion, Model DEG 843 ; Blower motor shall be five (5) horsepower, three phase, 208 volt, 60 Hz . with thermal overload protec- tion; air compressor motor shall be 3 HP, 208 volt, 3 phase; oil metering pump motor shall be 1/2 HP, 208 volt, 3 phase . Primary control circuit shall be obtained from the secondary side of an isolation transformer when a three phase motor is furnished and both sides of the two wire primary circuit shall be fused; or from a two (2) wire branch circuit, one side grounded and not exceeding 150 volts line to line when single phase motor is furnished. 3 . Burners shall operate fully automatically controlled by operating controls as hereafter specified. All Boiler Room wiring from the main disconnect switch to the burner control panel, fuel oil pump, limits, gas valves, switches and control devices shall be furnished and installed under this section of the work. Heating and Ventilating 15600-66 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL cutting oils, and thread sealants have been sufficiently eliminated from the boiler and to 0" produce a condition of the boiler water that is clean and until finally considered acceptable. 4 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall furnish to the Owner, two (2) copies of the previously specified ASME Section VI Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code which shall be utilized as standard operating and maintenance procedures for this boiler installation. This material shall be furnished in addition to the usual manufacturer' s directives normally furnished with the boiler, burner, and controls . E . Pressure Testing 1 . All field tests after the boiler has been erected and connected to the system shall be limited to not more than the maximum working pressure for which the boiler is intended. Installing Contractor shall be required to furnish all labor, equipment, piping, staging, fittings, hoses, and valves and, he shall pay all necessary permit fees as may be required in order to perform such tests as may be directed by the Architect, Boiler Inspector, and these Contract Documents . 00 2 . A hydrostatic pressure test of 40 psig shall be conducted on this boiler for a period of not less than 5 hours . These tests shall be of such duration as necessary and as directed by the Architect to ensure that the boiler has been field assembled and installed correctly with no leaks or other unacceptable operating condi- tions . 3 . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall be required to notify the Commonwealth of Massa- chusetts Boiler Inspections Division of the Department of Public Safety when the installa- tion of the boiler, burner, controls and system piping is substantially complete, and shall officially request an inspection of the boiler to be conducted by the State Boiler Inspector and to have him issue a Certificate of Inspec- Heating and Ventilating 15600-65 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the sealing of joints between sections, between sections and foundation, around the front plate, at smoke hood connections and all other locations using the rope wicking and insulating cement furnished with the boiler. C. Boiler shall be installed with not less than the following trim and controls : 1 . A.S .M.E . Pressure relief valve set at 40 psi . .� 2 . High limit temperature control with manual reset switch. 3 . Operating temperature control . 4 . Proportional modulating temperature control . 5 . Theraltimeter, dial thermometer, dip tube and air removal fittings . 6 . McDonnell & Miller No. 63M, low water cutoff with manual reset . 7 . Cleaning tools and two (2) spare locknut wrenches for the 2" nipple/locknut assemblies . Wo D. Boiler Cleanout 1 . After final assembly and connection, the boiler „® shall be thoroughly cleaned internally as described in Section VI, Article 7 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . 2 . The process of cleaning the boiler shall include the use of a boil-out compound of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate at the rate of one pound of either chemical for every 50 gallons of total water in the system being cleaned. This process of coiler cleaning shall include a boiler clean- out, a surface blowoff and skim, a blowdown and a wash with a high pressure hose as directed and detailed within the previously specified ASME Section VI . 3 . Boiler cleaning shall be repeated as often s necessary and as directed by the Architect to .R ensure that all scale, rust, debris, dirt, Heating and Ventilating 15600-64 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F .K. MIDDLE SCHOOL least 1" I . P.S . , and a cross shall be placed in the piping connections at every right angle to facilitate cleaning and inspection, with clean- out plugs installed. 8 . Low water cutoff shall have installed a 1" vertical pipe with blowdown valve located at the lowest point in the water equalizing pipe connection so that the sediment chamber and the equalizing pipe can be flushed and the device tested. Blowdown valves shall each be brass, ball type, and not less than 1" I . P. S . and discharges shall also be piped to floor drains . Pipe ends shall be cut at 450 angle to prevent them from being fitted with a cap or plug. 9 . Boiler shall be provided with a pre-cut flexible return yoke consisting of pre-fabricated pipe and fittings with running thread and Hy-Temp hydronic seals permitting quick, easy and strain free assembly to the boiler headers . Furnish and install capped tees at all turns to provide for cleaning of the interior of the return piping at or near the boiler. Nipples with running thread shall be extra heavy pipe; other nipples standard weight . Fittings shall be 125 psi cast iron. Furnish and install 2-1/2" I . P. S . short steel nipples and caps in the mud drum front ends . 10 . Insulated metal jacket shall consist of struc- tural steel and aluminum frame with panels for sides, roof, front and back insulated with 1-1/2 pound density glass fiber blanket attached with adhesive . All metal jacket parts shall be finished with factory applied blue hammertone paint, baked on. Nipple clamps shall be painted with heat resisting aluminum paint . 11 . Boiler shall be furnished knocked down for field assembly and connection on site and it shall be equipped with all castings, fittings, accesso- ries and appurtenances necessary for the assembly, connection and operation of the boiler as specified. Boiler shall be assembled in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions and recommendations furnished with the boiler. Particular care shall be paid to Heating and Ventilating 15600-63 o s am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL bolted cleanout covers for top flues in the back section. Doors shall have gasketed joint for gas-tight seal to the front section when fastened in place with winged nuts and stud bolts . Insulation shall be mineral wool blanket under high temperature insulating board applied at the factory. 5 . All boiler drains and their discharges shall be piped to floor drains as shown on the Contract Drawings, or as indicated by the Consulting Engineer. Furnish and install all pipe and fittings necessary to connect the relief valve discharge full size to floor drain. Relief valve discharge piping shall be arranged so that there will be no danger of scalding boiler room personnel in the event of a pressure relief situation. Size and arrangement of safety valve discharge piping shall be such that any pressure that may exist or develop shall not reduce the relieving capacity of the relief valve below that required to protect the boiler. All relief discharge piping shall be firmly supported by hangers and standoff supports to prevent the valve body from enduring undue stress or strain. 6 . Boiler drain valves shall each be connected to the lowest water space available and shall be installed with pipe and fittings to connect and carry the bottom blowdown full size to floor drain. Each blowdown valve shall be not less than 1-1/211 I .P.S . minimum, and they shall be rated equal to the pressure stamped on the boiler and to a temperature rating of not less than 250OF and all such discharges shall be arranged so as to allow the operator to view the water that is discharged to drain. 7 . Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary 11, I .P. S . pipe, nipples, crosses, vents, plugs, bushings, caps, fittings, unions and other accessories as may be required to arrange the water line control devices on the water column and equalizing pipe as scheduled and as detailed by previously specified Code requirements and in accordance with the control manufacturers recommendations and instructions . "W Water column piping and connections shall be at Heating and Ventilating 15600-62 .w 4W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL mance tested and listed by I=B=R at 12 . 25% CO2 and -0 . 02 in. water draft as follows : a. Develop an I=B=R gross output of not less than 6, 000 Mbh when fired at a rate of 7, 702 cu. ft . per hour of natural gas at 0 . 6 specific gravity and 1, 000 Btu/cu. ft . or 49 . 5 gph of No.4 fuel oil . b. Boiler shall be a negative draft boiler. Draft loss shall not exceed 0 .38" w.c. at rated capacity. w. 5 . Boiler shall be Model GHO-4500-W-18 (Base Bid) or GHO-4500-W-18 (Alternate No. 2) manufactured by Smith Cast Iron Boilers, or equal . B. Boiler Construction/Installation 1 . Boiler shall be constructed and tested for 40 psig maximum water working pressure in accor- dance with the ASME Section IV Rules for the Construction of Heating Boilers . Individual ON sections shall have been subjected to a hydro- static pressure test of 100 psig at the factory before shipment, and they shall be marked, ON stamped or cast with the ASME code symbol . 2 . Safety controls and limit devices shall be provided and installed in accordance with the requirements of the Massachusetts 527 CMR 4 . 00 Oil Burner Code and 522 CMR 16 . 00 Controls and Safety Devices Code requirements, and 248 CMR 7 . 00 Code for Gas Utilization Equipment in Large Boilers . Boiler installation shall be in accordance with the recommended practice and installation requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3 . Boiler shall be set on a heavy duty foundation 24" high consisting of cast iron sidewall sec- tions bolted together and cast iron or steel back ends. Erecting bars shall be provided to secure front ends of sidewalls prior to instal- lation of front plate . 4 . Boiler shall be provided with adjustable double- hinged insulated flue doors on the front and Heating and Ventilating 15600-61 o .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL WA Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials . 20 . Gaskets for Flanged Joints : ANSI B16 .21; full- faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. ,o 2 .27 BOILER - BURNER UNITS A. General Description "m 1 . Furnish and install two new boiler/burner units designed for forced hot water heating and Am arranged for automatic operation, firing natural gas and No. 2 or 4 fuel oil . 2 . Boiler shall be of cast iron sectional construc- tion with screw nipples connecting sections to single supply and dual return manifolds . Boiler shall be furnished complete with 3/8" thick steel foundation front plate complete with fire door/frame and liner to be located above the burner. 3 . Boiler shall be furnished with an insulated metal jacket; steel smoke hood with reducer fitting; combustion chamber consisting of pre- cast fire brick shapes, pre-cut block insula- tion, hollow ventilating floor tile, and refrac- tory floor pellets; flexible return yoke; forced draft, multi-nozzle, flame retention gas burner with burner mounted control panel (Base Bid) ; forced draft, nozzle mix pressure atomizing dual fuel burner with burner mounted control panel (Alternate No. 2) ; pressure/altitude gauge; ASME schedule pressure relief valve set at 40 psi; McDonnell & Miller No. 63M LWCO with manual reset; 4-1/211 remote reading dial thermometer; dip tube and air removal fittings; high limit aquastat, with manual reset; operating aquastat; ..+' modulated firing rate aquastat, and additional instruments, controls and other devices as hereafter specified. 4 . Boiler shall be rated in accordance with the Hydronics Institute Testing and Rating Standard for Heating Boilers . Equipment shall be perfor- Heating and Ventilating 15600-60 MW 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL by Installer to comply with installation re- quirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or "Threadolets" , ± +, or equal . 8 . Pipe Nipples : Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/211 , and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples) . 9 . Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water pip- ing; soft temper for oil piping. 10 . DWV Copper Tube : ASTM B306 . 11 . ACR Copper Tube : ASTM B280 . 12 . Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings : ANSI B16 . 22 . 40 13 . Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings : ANSI B16 .23 . 14 . Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings : ow ANSI B16 . 29 . 15 . Red Brass Pipe : ASTM B43 . 16 . Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings : ANSI B16 . 15 . 17 . Welding Materials : Except as otherwise indicat- ed, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation require- ments . Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials . 18 . Soldering Materials : Except as otherwise indi- cated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation re- quirements . 19 . Brazing Materials : Except as otherwise indicat- ed, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation require- ments . Comply with SFA-5 . 8 , Section II, ASME Heating and Ventilating 15600-59 40 ow am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings . 3 . Generator Exhaust Piping: Black steel pipe, Schedule 80, or Yoloy, Schedule 40, size 211 and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded. 4 . Refrigerant : Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. 5 . Condensate Drain (from cooling coils) : Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings . 6 . Generator Fuel Lines : Type "K" soft copper, with flare fittings . No joints allowed under- ground. C. Materials 1 . Black Steel Pipe ASTM A53 , A106 or A120 ; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2 . Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings : ANSI B16 . 3 ; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for .o Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80 . 3 . Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4 ; Grade IV. 4 . Steel Flanges/Fittings : ANSI B16 . 5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as .�. otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80 . a. Material Group: Group 1 . 1 b. End Connections : Buttwelding C . Facings : Raised-face M0 5 . Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings : ANSI B16 . 9, except ANSI B16 . 28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. am 6 . Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings : ASTM A714 . 7 . Forged Branch Connection Fittings : Except as 40 otherwise indicated, provide type as determined Heating and Ventilating 15600-58 4W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL joints in block covering with insulating cement and allow to dry. Over the wired on block insulation, apply a 1/4" thick scratch coat of insulating cement and allow to set . Finally, a 1/4" thick coat of insulating cement shall be trowelled on to a smooth finish. Access covers shall be left exposed, flanges shall be left uncovered and care shall be exercised so as to not allow the insulating material to interfere with the operation of the barometric damper. H. Kitchen hood exhaust duct shall be insulated with a 2" thick layer of Pabco "Super Firetemp" or equal, applied according to the manufacturer' s printed recommendations, giving full duct coverage. 2 . 26 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1 . Reference is made to specifications of recog- nized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bid- , , ding shall be in force. 2 . All piping shall have manufacturer' s name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe . 3 . All threads for screwed joints shall be National s Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2 . 1-1968 . 4 . Qualify welding procedures, welders and opera- tors in accordance with ASME B31 . 1, or ASME B31. 9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. !" B. Application 1. Hot Water Supply and Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2- 1/2" and larger welded, or Type 11L1' copper. At Subcontractor' s option, hot water supply and return piping sized 2-1/2" and larger may be roll-grooved schedule 40 black steel utilizing Victaulic, or equal, couplings and fittings, installed according to the manufacturer' s pub- lished recommendations . Heating and Ventilating 15600-57 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 .25 INSULATION A. All hot water heating system piping shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with self-sealing lap, 1-1/2" thick. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type, Certainteed 115000 Snap-On" or ,A equal by Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning. B. Fittings shall be insulated with PVC jackets applied over fiberglass blanket with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapp- ing surfaces to form a vapor barrier. Jackets shall be Certainteed "Snap-On" or equal . C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer' s recommendations . Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Insulate boiler and water heater flues in Boiler Room with two 1" thick layers of calcium silicate securely *�* wired on and finished with two coats of reinforced insulating cement, with finish coat troweled smooth and hard. , E . Refrigerant suction and indoor condensate drain piping shall be insulated with 1/2" thick foamed plastic closed cell pipe insulation, Armstrong "Armaflex II" , or equal by Manville or Owens Corning. Insulation shall be installed unslit as much as possible, according to the manufacturer' s recommendations, using 520 adhesive, and slit covering shall be further secured with vinyl tape wrapping, 24" o. c . Any gaps or fishmouths shall be resealed. F. All air supply ducts connected to air conditioning units and all fresh air intake ductwork shall be insulated. Insulation shall be 2" thick, 1 . 0 pound density Manville, "Microlite" glass fiber (Flexible) duct insulation with factory applied FSK jacket, or equal . Lap jacket 2" at all seams and secure flaps awe with staples and adhesives to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, duct insulation shall be mechanically fastened at 18" centers on the bottom of the duct where ducts exceed 24" in width. G. Steel smoke hood of boilers shall be covered with 2" thick magnesia block insulation cut, fitted and wired on with a 1-1/4" galvanized wire mesh. Point up Heating and Ventilating 15600-56 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL G. Balance valves shall be Bell & Gossett or equal, Model CB, threaded for use in steel pipe, solder end for use in copper tube . H. Install a suction diffuser on each base mounted pump r suction connection, Bell & Gossett or equal . I . Triple duty valves shall be combination non-slam check - balance - stop valve, Bell & Gossett, or equal . J. Pressure reducing valve (fill valve) shall be capable of reducing an incoming pressure of approximately 60 psi to 20 to 30 psi, the heating system pressure. Reduced pressure shall be adjustable from 10 to 35 psi . Valve shall have built-in strainer and check valve. To be Watts No. U5, or equal by Taco or Bell & Gossett . 2 . 24 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal . on B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals . so C . For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6 ' intervals for tubing 1-1/411 or less, 10, intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. so D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. po E . Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 00 F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all refrigerant piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. Heating and Ventilating 15600-55 .% .W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ow B. Model number, size and range to be as follows : 1 . Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped point- .. er with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale . 2 . 21 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832 , 0834, 0835, 0836 or „ 0838 . In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint . 2 . 22 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or schedule 40 PVC sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry �* walls or partitions . Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size . Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2 . 23 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES am A. Expansion tank fitting shall be Taco "Taco-Troll, No.438 . .m B. Tank drainer shall have drain body with air vent tube, Taco No. 440, with hose end drain valve . C. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded am steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Taco "Air Separator" Series ACF, line size, with drain valve and "" strainer. D. Expansion tank shall be diaphragm type, size as noted no on Drawings, all steel, A. S .M.E . construction, by Amtrol Model 600-L. E. Equivalent products for items A through D as manufac- No tured by Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, or equal will be approved. am F. Air vents shall be brass pet-cocks . Heating and Ventilating 15600-54 .� 4" ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1 . Gate - 2-1/2" and smaller Jenkins Figure 370 Gate - 3" and larger Jenkins Figure 650-A or 651-A 2 . Globe - 2-1/2" and smaller Jenkins Figure 106-A 3 . Check - 3" and smaller Jenkins Figure �.► 92-A D. In lieu of gate valves on water lines, the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor has the option of installing "Apollo" or equal brass or bronze solder end ball valves, with teflon seats and full line-size ports, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2 . 19 THERMOMETERS 04 A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale 0" length, 20F subdivisions . Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer 40 shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, posi- tioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator' s position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer' s standard closest to the following: 1 . Hot water heating system: 25-240OF 2 . 20 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U. S . Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, to accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095) . Heating and Ventilating 15600-53 ow PW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL AW 2 . 17 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall be of the vertical and horizontal am blow-through propeller fan type with hot water heating coil . Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings . B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture No steel . It shall be phosphatized and completely dip painted with a heavy duty baked enamel . C. Coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine copper tube. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically attached to the coil by expansion. All connections ., and U-bends shall be electrically induction-brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for 100 psi . D. Fan shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be factory balanced. E . Motor shall have electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings . Motor shall be equipped with permanent lubricated bearings . F. Horizontal units shall be equipped with horizontal and vertical discharge louvers . G. Unit heaters shall be Modine, Trane, AAF, or equal, as shown on Drawings . 2 . 18 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Lunken, Fairbanks, Walworth, or Jenkins manufacture, based on the following Jenkins valves . B. Solder end valves are as follows : 1 . Gate Valves Jenkins Figure 1240 2 . Globe Valves Jenkins Figure 1200, 1201 or 1202 with #110 disc 3 . Check Valves Jenkins Figure 1222 4 . Drain Valves Jenkins Figure 112 or 113 globe valve with #110 disc, ^ cap and chain Heating and Ventilating 15600-52 0* ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL OR D. Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett Series 60, or equal by Armstrong or Taco. 2 . 16 CABINET TYPE UNIT HEATER A. The unit heater shall be of the blow-through cabinet type with hot water heating coil . The capacity of the unit heater shall be as shown on the Drawings . B. The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gage furniture grade steel . All exposed corners and edges shall be rounded. The front panel shall be fastened by quick- acting allen head cam locks for easy access . Metal surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, prime coated, and all exposed surfaces shall be finished in a baked enamel , color to be selected by the Architect . Units shall be floor, ceiling, or wall mounted, as sched- uled. !w C. Fan shall be all steel, multi-blade, forward curved, centrifugal type fan which has been statically and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibration. Fans shall be assembled to a fan board and mounted below the coil in the unit casing. D. The motor shall be of the PSC open type, sleeve bearing with resilient mount in the unit . The motor shall be suitable for electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings . E . The heating coil shall be serpentine connected and shall be of the f inned copper tubing type and shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the working pressure . F. Provide two (2) sets of throw-away filters located in a frame in the return air stream. The filters shall be easily removable by removing the front access panel . One (1) set shall be installed during con- struction phase . Immediately following substantial completion and/or beneficial occupancy, the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall install the second, clean set . G. Provide units with fresh air capability, including damper with seals and wall box, as scheduled. H. Units shall be American Air Filter, Trane, Modine, or equal . Heating and Ventilating 15600-51 me ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am the Drawings . The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor 000 service factor. D. Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor, and shaft, and shall be constructed of cast iron or welded steel . A concrete base 611 higher than the surrounding floor shall be provided. Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the Drawings . dw E. After completion of the system and before start-up of the pump, the pump shall be lubricated in strict am accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions . A metal instruction plate shall be attached to the pump in a location where it is clearly visible. These instructions shall indicate the recommended lubricant, go the points of lubrication, and the recommended frequency of lubrication. F. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall check, test, and start each base mounted pump and shall align the pump with a dial indicator within 0 . 002" . Discharge and suction readings shall be recorded and forwarded for record purposes . G. Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett Series 1510 Universal, or equal by Taco, Armstrong, Weinmann. 2 . 15 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type) A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Draw- ings . Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze fitted. B . Pumps shall be of the vertically split case type making possible complete servicing without breaking piping connections . The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a ceramic seat . C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1, 750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The horse- power of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. .� Heating and Ventilating 15600-50 rn ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as 4, to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness . Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel . Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners . Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both r directions . E . The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors . F. Convectors shall be Sterling Type SFA/RF-A or equal '" by Trane, Airtherm, AAF, McQuay, or Vulcan. 2 . 14 CIRCULATING PUMPS (Base Mounted Type) so A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal base mounted type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Draw- ""' ings . Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze fitted. B. Pump shall be of the vertically split case, end 00 suction design, making possible complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections . Motor to pump connection shall be of the flexible coupler type . The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a Tungsten Carbide insert . The pump shall be equipped with oil lubricat- ed bronze sleeve bearings for smooth and quiet ow operation. C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1, 750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The electri- cal characteristics of the motor shall be as shown on Heating and Ventilating 15600-49 40 «m ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL per foot at 170OF A.W.T. , with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle. C. Type "B" shall be same element mounted in two tier flat top enclosure, Sterling "Versa-Line" Style "E" , rated at 740 Btuh per foot at 170OF A.W.T. , with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle. D. Type "C" shall be same element, without cover, with pedestal support assembly with 2' -0" leg, pedestal bracket assembly, and ball bearing slide cradle, rated at 900 Btuh per foot at 170OF A.W.T. E. Type "D" shall be same as style "B" except to be a.» single tier element with single tier cover. F. Where "cover" is called for to conceal wall hung piping feeding unit ventilators, it shall be Sterling "Versa-Line" Style JVA-T, 14" high, with ball bearing cradle brackets . ,. G. Enclosures shall be manufactured of 16 gauge cold rolled steel enamel finish, with color selected by the Architect . H. Support brackets shall be die formed for rigidity and must be designed to support both the element and enclosure . Ball bearing cradles shall be provided for movement of element during expansion and contraction. Brackets to be furnished at a maximum of 3 ' -0" on .. centers, with a minimum of two support brackets for each radiator. Roller bearing pipe hangers shall be used to support supply or return piping under covers . 2 . 13 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the floor mounted or semi- recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards . B . Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars . Tubes Heating and Ventilating 15600-48 .� ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL temperature in tank. A separate time clock shall allow setting a different time sched- ule for master control of hot water genera- tor and hot water recirculating pumps . b. Should boilers be off, a manual changeover switch shall cause gas water heater to fire and hot water generator circulating pump CP-3 to run to maintain water temperature in tank. Interlock flow switch, operating aquastat, and high limit aquastat with heater ignition control . C . Time clock called out in paragraph a. shall cause hot water recirculating pump CP-1 to run. 11 . Roof Ventilators a. Roof ventilators not associated with spe- cific air handling units and not under local manual control shall be controlled from the master 7-day time clock. 12 . Packaged Dehumidifying System. a. Install and wire all remote sensors fur- nished with the unit . b . Interlock main Natatorium circulating pumps with condenser water pump P-3 . C . Provide aquastats and wiring to cause pool heat exchanger circulator to cycle as required to maintain pool water tempera- ture. 2 . 12 FINNED RADIATION �w A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings . Radiator assemblies shall be I=B=R rated, Ted Reed Thermal, Sterling, Vulcan, or equal . B. Type "A" shall be Sterling "Versa-Line" Style "S" with 4-1/4" square steel fins, 40 per foot, 1-1/4" iron pipe element, single tier element, three tier slope top cover, full backplate, rated at 1, 060 Btuh 15600-47 Heating and Ventilating OR- NNNOMMOMW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 6 . Combustion Air Control : When any one of the boiler-burner operating controls calls for heat, the main combustion air outside air intake damper shall open. End switch on damper motor shall allow completion of ignition or pre-purge circuit . When the domestic hot water heater operating control calls for heat, both combus- tion air outside air intake dampers shall open. End switch on damper motor shall allow comple- tion of ignition or pre-purge circuit . 7 . Hot Water Reset Control : The temperature of the hot water supply to the heating system shall be .„ reset inversely proportional to changes in outside air temperature. The controller shall modulate the three-way mixing valve to maintain the required supply water temperature . 8 . Emergency Generator Dampers : When emergency generator starts, intake and exhaust dampers shall be opened and remain open as long as generator runs . 9 . Hot Water Heating Circulating Pumps : . a. Pumps shall run continuous during occupied cycle if outdoor temperature is below 65OF (adjustable) and be off above that tempera- ture . b. Pumps shall be off during unoccupied cycle except when outdoor temperature drops below 350F, when pumps shall run continuously. C . Zone night thermostats shall cause their respective pumps to run upon sensing low space temperature. d. Indexing any air handling unit, unit ventilator, or packaged roof top unit to occupied shall cause its respective zone pump to run. 10 . Hot Water Generator/Recirculating Pumps : " a. Aquastat in separable well located in hot water generator tank shall cycle pump �* existing circulating pump to maintain water Heating and Ventilating 15600-46 .. 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the mixed air temperature from dropping below 550F. The low temperature thermostat shall open the face damper and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set point . C . Unoccupied Cycle: The system shall remain r off, except that unit ventilators shall run, with outside air dampers closed and exhaust fans off, to maintain reduced space temperature. d. Unit ventilators incorporating DX cooling with air-cooled condensing units shall be controlled as above except that an outdoor air temperature sensor shall allow either economizer operation, or, if "free" cooling ► is not available, the unit shall be re- turned to minimum outdoor air condition and mechanical refrigeration shall be ener- f* gized. 3 . Booster Coils : Room thermostat shall sequence (modulate) hot water radiator and booster coil valves in sequence to maintain setpoint . 4 . Radiators and Convectors : a. Occupied: The room thermostat shall open and close (two position) its radiator valve to maintain the desired occupied tempera- ture . b. Unoccupied: The room thermostat shall open and close (two position) its radiator valve to maintain its reduced unoccupied tempera- ture . 5 . Fan Coil Unit and Cabinet and Unit Heater Con- trol : The room thermostat shall cycle the unit fan on a call for heat . A strap-on aquastat shall prevent the fan from running if hot water flow is not available . During unoccupied cycle, the room thermostat shall cycle the unit fan to maintain its reduced unoccupied temperature. Heating and Ventilating 15600-45 at ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Unoccupied Cycle : The system shall remain off, except that unoccupied thermostat shall cycle unit fans with outside air damper closed, and shall cycle zone hot water pump. d. On units provided with DX cooling coils and .� condensing units, provide a manual "Cooling ON/Off" switch on face of main control panel . Switch shall prevent or enable refrigeration systems to run. Furnish interlock to prevent compressors from running when there is no call for cooling or when air handlers are of f . On a call for cooling, outdoor air damper shall be returned to minimum position and room thermostat shall open liquid line solenoid valve or directly cycle the condensing unit . 2 . Unit Ventilators : The units shall be indexed between occupied, warm-up, and unoccupied cycles of operation from the master time clock. In addition, thermostats shall be provided with manual night-cycle overrides to allow individual rooms to be reset to occupied cycle . Multiple units in the same room shall have only one thermostat . a. Warm-up Cycle : The units shall be started and shall run continuously. The outside air dampers shall remain closed, the face damper shall remain open to the coil, and the exhaust fans shall remain off . The units shall remain in the warm-up cycle until the room temperature sensed by the room thermostat reaches 68OF at which time it shall revert to the occupied cycle . b. Occupied Cycle: The outside air dampers shall open to their minimum position, and the system shall come under control . The room thermostats shall modulate the unit face and bypass dampers to maintain set temperature. On a continued increase in room temperature, the outside air dampers shall be modulated to full open (ASHRAE Cycle 2) . A mixed air sensor shall prevent Heating and Ventilating 15600-44 +0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Sequence of Operation 1 . Air Handling Units : The systems shall be indexed between occupied, warm-up, and unoccupied cycles of operation from the master 7-day time clock. Each unit shall have an occupied-clock-unoccupied selector switch on the master control panel face to override the clock. This selector switch shall also cause the appropriate zone heating pump to run, subject to outdoor temperature override. a. Warm-up Cycle : The unit supply and return fans shall be started from the time clock and shall run continuously. The outside air damper shall remain closed, the coil face and bypass dampers shall operate in "occupied" mode, and the exhaust dampers shall remain closed. The unit shall remain rsr in the warm-up cycle until the return air temperature reaches 68OF at which time it shall revert to the occupied cycle . b. Occupied Cycle : The outside and return air dampers shall open to minimum position, and the system shall come under control . An occupied-unoccupied room thermostat shall reset the setpoint of a discharge air submaster controller which shall sequence the coil face and bypass dampers to main- tain discharge temperature . Should dampers go to full bypass and discharge temperature continue to rise, outdoor-return air damp- "" ers shall be modulated toward 1000 outdoor air (economizer control) . The low temperature thermostat shall open the face damper full to the coil and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set point . A duct type smoke detector located down- stream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on sensing smoke; provide auxiliary contacts for connection to build- ing fire alarm system by Electrical Subcon- tractor. Heating and Ventilating 15600-43 AW- dW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .w, trolled devices shall be operated by pilot positioners of the full relay type with interconnecting linkages to provide posi- tive mechanical feedback. 8 . Control Panels : 40 a. All controllers, relays, switches, etc . , for equipment shall be mounted in enclosed factory piped and wired control panels with " hinged lock type doors . Control settings, adjustments, and calibrations shall be made at the system control panel . Panel mounted devices shall be coded and labeled to correspond with "as-built" control schematics . .0 b. Master panel is to be located in Mechanical Room. Air handling unit panels are to be located at the units . Engraved nameplates shall be provided beneath each panel face mounted device identifying said device. 9 . Low Temperature Protection: a. A two position, snap-acting, manual reset low temperature protection thermostat will be provided for all unit ventilators, cabinet heaters, and air handling units with outdoor air intakes . The thermostat .�. capillary shall have a minimum sensitive length of 20 feet, and shall be installed in serpentine fashion not less than 2411 downstream from the coil it is protecting. " Each square foot of coil shall be protected by a section of low temperature detection thermostat capillary. Where coil size of multiple oil construction precludes this coverage, additional units shall be added and placed in series so that the above Aw specified coil area coverage is maintained. Upon detecting a coil leaving temperature below its set point, the thermostat shall stop the fan and close the outside air ON damper. oft Heating and Ventilating 15600-42 .R ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL pressure drop and noise generation. Damper blades shall be fabricated from two sheets OW of No. 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal, spot welded together and not exceeding 6" in width. The damper units shall be pro- vided with replaceable seals along the inside surface of top, bottom, and sides of the frames, and along each blade edge . Air leakage through the damper shall not exceed 1/2 of 1 percent of system capacity at 4" water static pressure . Damper leakage specifications and flow characteristics will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer prior to approving dampers . 7 . Damper Operators : a. Damper operators not specified to be fur- nished as a factory component of other r equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Automatic Temperature Control Sub- contractor. b. All damper operators shall be of the rubber diaphragm piston type and shall be fully proportioning unless otherwise specified. They shall have ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air pressure acting on the louvers . The damper operator mounting arrangement shall be outside the air-stream wherever possible . C . The operators shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and vari- able load requirements . The operator shall be capable of operating in sequence when required. The operators shall have exter- nal adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction. d. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers as required. e . Actuators on modulating dampers that are to be sequenced with other dampers or con- Heating and Ventilating 15600-41 .A ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL shall also have adjustable ratio range. These instruments shall be provided with calibrated dials for set point and/or ratio ., reset range adjustment . 5 . Automatic Control Valves : a. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning with modulating plug or V- port inner guides, unless otherwise speci- fied. The valves shall be quiet in opera- tion and fail-safe in the event of control air failure. All valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when required. All control valves shall be sized by the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor and shall be suitable for the system pres- sure conditions, and shall close against the differential pressures involved. Valves 2" and smaller shall have screw connections, while valves 2-1/211 and larger shall have flanged connections . Valve operators shall be of the molded rubber diaphragm type . Body pressure rating and connection type (screwed or flanged) shall conform to pipe and valve schedules else- where in the specification. b. Modulating valves that are to be sequenced with other valves or controlled devices .. shall be operated by pilot positioners of the full relay type with interconnecting linkages to provide positive mechanical feedback. 6 . Control Dampers a. Dampers not specified to be furnished as a component of other equipment shall be furnished by the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor and shall be single or multiple blade as required. All damper frames are to be constructed of No. 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal with flanges for duct mounting. Where damper sizes are not indicated on the Plans, dampers shall be properly sized by the Automatic Tempera- ture Control Subcontractor for minimum Heating and Ventilating 15600-40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Oft 2 . Pneumatic Transmission: a. Pneumatic duct and immersion temperature transmitters shall be used for all control and specified indicating applications and shall be of the liquid filled capillary type incorporating a pneumatic feedback signal to insure exact and proportional relationship between the measured tempera- """ ture and the transmitted signal . Where the transmitter is used for sensing of mixed air temperature or coil discharge tempera- ture, and/or the duct area is in excess of 14 sq. ft . , the instrument shall incorpo- rate an averaging element with a minimum sensitive length of 96" . b. The transmitter shall poroduce a 3-15 psi signal over a 250F, 50 F, 100OF or 200OF range as required to suit each variable. Transmitters of 200OF range shall be used only where the variable changes more than 00, 750F. Where transmitters are used for sensing liquid temperatures, they shall be furnished with brass wells . 0-9 3 . Pneumatic Indication: a . Pneumatic thermometers as well as humidity a-0 and pressure indicators shall be of the dial type with a minimum diameter of 2-1/211 . Thermometers shall be furnished in 250F, 500F, 1000F, or 200OF ranges to match the range of the transmitter with which it is associated. Pneumatic thermometers and/or indicators shall be furnished for all control transmitters and shall be panel mounted. 4 . Controllers : a. All temperature, pressure and humidity receiver/controllers and submaster receiver/controllers shall be high volume type utilizing a pneumatic relay with pneumatic feedback. All receiver/ controllers shall have adjustable set point and gain. Submaster receiver/controllers Heating and Ventilating 15600-39 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d. Inside panels and unit enclosures : Poly FR tubing. 7 . Submit eight (8) copies of the following for approval before starting work: a. Control system drawings containing all pertinent required data to properly de- scribe a functional system. b. Valve and damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment . 8 . Upon completion of the project, the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor shall : a. Check, validate and calibrate where re- quired all controllers, controlled devices, valves, transmitters, auxiliary devices and relays, etc . provided under this Section. b. Furnish three (3) instruction manuals covering the function and operation of the control system on the project for use by the Owner' s operating staff . A competent technician shall provide these manuals at the time of instruction. There shall be two 8-hour instruction sessions provided. C . Warranty all parts and labor for a period of twelve (12) months . B. Products 1 . Room Thermostats : a. Room thermostats and transmitters shall be of the miniature type, two-pipe with pneu- matic relay, pneumatic feedback, adjustable +� sensitivity, calibrated dial and high impact plastic covers with tamper proof screws and concealed adjustment . Room thermostats shall be single temperature or dual temperature day/night type as required by the sequence of operation. Heating and Ventilating 15600-38 ..r ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL walls for service to control equip- ment . 5 . Furnish and install where indicated on the Plans a duplex air compressor with each compressor sized to provide total system requirements while operating not more than 33% of the time. The unit shall be provided with the following acces- sories : a. Starters/alternator to change operating unit after each cycle, mounted in an en- closed panel, pre-wired. b. Enclosed belt guard. C . Vibration isolation. d. Combination filter PRV station. e . Oil filter. f . Automatic drains . g. Refrigerated air dryer. 00 6 . Compressed air tubing will be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly sized and periodically tested until proved to be leak- free . All tubing shall be concealed except in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is run exposed. Tubing shall be seamless copper or flame retardant polyethylene provided as fol- lows : a. Exposed: Hard copper tubing or single or multi-tube poly in a protective carrier system. Multi-tube bundles shall be termi- nated in panels or junction boxes . Final termination to control devices may be made with a short run of single tube poly. b. Concealed: Hard or soft copper tubing, single or multi-tube poly tubing. C . Concrete buried: Not allowed. Heating and Ventilating 15600-37 .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL b. The Sheet Metal Subcontractor shall : 1) Install all automatic dampers and provide safing as required to install non duct size dampers . 2) Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for externally mounted damper motors . 3) Provide and locate sheet metal baffle ," plates as required to eliminate strat- ification. Affix baffles permanently in place after stratification problem has been eliminated. 4) Provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment . 5) Mount air flow measuring stations in duct work as directed. C . The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish, install and terminate all power wiring. " Power wiring shall be defined as follows : 1) Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120V. 2) Wiring of power feeds to all discon- nects, starters and electric motors . 3) Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for dryer. +w 4) Power wiring to 120V single phase motors . d. The General Contractor shall : 1) Provide all necessary patching and painting. 2) Provide access doors or other approved +� means of access through ceiling and Heating and Ventilating 15600-36 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL component, such as, but not limited to: P.E. ' s and high and low limit protective devices . b. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components such as solenoid air valves . C . All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices . d. All wiring to the "auto" side of hand-off- auto switches on units being controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control Subcon- tractor. e . Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels . f . Wiring of 120V AC power feed to all temper- ature control panels where required. Feeds to be taken from spare breakers in panel- boards . 4 . The following work shall be performed by the designated Subcontractor under the supervision of the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor: a. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall : 1) Install all line size and non-line size automatic valves and separable wells furnished by the Automatic Tem- perature Control Subcontractor. 2) Furnish and install all necessary valved pressure taps and steam, water, drain, wells, and overflow connections and piping. ' 3) Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow indicating devices . Heating and Ventilating 15600-35 4W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . A nine (9) year extended parts warranty shall be provided on the all-copper evaporator, condenser and auxiliary hot water heating coils . 3 . These warranties are contingent on proper main- tenance of pool water chemistry including a PH of between 7 . 2 to 7 . 6, Free Chlorine not exceed- ing 2 . 0 ppm and Combined Chlorine maintained at less than 0 .3 ppm. These parameters are to be measured and recorded daily and be available for review upon request . 2 . 11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (BASE BID) AM A. General Requirements 1 . The automatic temperature control manufacturer shall furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services necessary for the proper installa- tion of a complete pneumatic system of automatic •• temperature control as hereinafter specified. The control system shall consist of all room thermostats, air stream thermostats, pneumatic controllers, relays, valves, dampers, damper motors, P.E. switches, E.P. valves, control panels, compressor, air dryer and all other equipment necessary for a complete pneumatic system, together with the required air piping and electrical wiring to fulfill the intent of these specifications . 2 . The Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor shall be a direct, wholly owned branch of a national controls manufacturer, or an indepen- dent control contractor whose firm can demon- strate five (5) year' s successful installation experience on control projects similar to this *w one. The control system equipment shall be Johnson Controls, Inc . or approved equal in Honeywell, Powers, or Barber Colman. 3 . All temperature control wiring shall be the responsibility of the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor. Control wiring shall be defined as follows : a. All circuits which are activated or deacti- vated by a temperature control system Heating and Ventilating 15600-34 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . Install unit where shown on Drawings . Provide adequate clearance around unit for air flow and service . 3 . Provide and install all water piping, drains and controls for proper operation of unit . V. Start-Up 1 . Start-up service shall be provided by the equip- ment manufacturer' s authorized representative and shall include complete testing of all con- trols and unit operation. The agency responsi- ble for start-up shall record the air and water flow and electrical operating data. Copies of this data are to be supplied to the Owner. 2 . All units shall be thoroughly cleaned in accor- dance with the manufacturer' s instructions prior to being placed into service . 3 . A complete operating and maintenance manual, including wiring diagrams, start-up and oper- ating sequence and material list shall be turned over to the Owner. 4 . Provide full instruction to Owner of operating and maintenance procedures . W. Warranty 1 . In addition to the standard one (1) year parts and material and labor warranty, a four (4) year extended compressor warranty shall be provided on the following: a) Compressors b) Compressor Motor Starters c) Return Fan Motor d) Return Fan Motor Starters e) Supply Fan Motor f) Supply Fan Motor Starters g) Pool Water Condenser " h) Pool Water Condenser Solenoid Valve & Coils i) Liquid Expansion Solenoid Valves & Coils j ) Air Condenser Solenoid Valves & Coils k) Blowers, Wheels & Housings Heating and Ventilating 15600-33 ..rt ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL R. Operating and Safety Controls 1 . Each unit shall be provided with a complete operating and safety logic control system. The control system shall shut down the unit in case of high refrigerant pressure, low refrigerant pressure and/or oil failure conditions . The water pump supplying each system will be inter- locked (by others) with the pool water pump to provide safe operation. Operating and safety .. control system shall include all relays, contac- tors, sensors, and switches necessary to operate complete unit . S . Power Requirements 1 . Unit shall be 208 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase with 120 volt and 24 volt control transformer mounted and wired. T. Selection 1 . Unit shall be PoolPak, Inc . , - PoolPak SWHP 190, or equal . Moisture removal rate shall be a maximum of 163 lbs . /hr. Supply and return fans shall be 12, 000 cfm each at . 1 . 25" ESP supply and . 75" ESP return. Supply fan shall be 15 HP and return fan shall be 15 HP. Both fan motors shall be 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz . Pool water condenser flow shall be 100 gpm at 32 feet of pressure drop through condenser, associated piping and three way control valve. Air heating auxiliary coil shall have 620, 000 Btuh heating capacity with 180°F EWT, 140°F LWT, 54 . 10F EAT "` and 9 . 9 feet pressure drop through coil, piping and valve assembly. Compressor electrical characteristics shall be 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz . U. Installation 4" 1 . Comply with manufacturer' s printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufac- 4W turer' s technical representative directs other- wise. Heating and Ventilating 15600-32 ,m ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL prevent condensation on the cold wall surfaces . g. Occupied/Unoccupied Control Mode Time clock for 7-day, 24-hour operation "* with disciplined night mode operation during heating season. During unoccupied times, the outside air and exhaust dampers stay in closed position to minimize the air heating load. h. Flywheel Air Conditioning This air conditioning control strategy used the thermal storage capacity of the swim- !'" ming pool . During occupied times, the PoolPak cools the Natatorium air by remov- ing the sensible and latent heat from the air in the evaporator. This heat is put into the pool water. The pool water' s temperature is allowed to rise a maximum of 20F above its normal setpoint . Automatic staging of cooling capacity is in response to air conditioning load. *a During the unoccupied time, if the pool water is above its setpoint, full ventila- tion is used to evaporatively cool the 40 pool . This mode of operation continues until either the pool water goes loF below its setpoint or an occupied period starts . 44 The changeover from heating to air condi- tioning as a function of dry bulb cooling demand in the Natatorium is automatic. A 0 normal changeover deadband of 1 .50F between heating and cooling is used. This cycle is repeated as long as the requirement to provide air conditioning during the occupied periods exists . If the dehumidifier is not equipped with flywheel air conditioning, then the dehu- midifier shall be equipped with remote air w cooled condenser, cooling tower-water cooled condenser or a chilled water coil . 15600-31 Heating and Ventilating ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL air off the evaporator coil . . . . . 100% of the cold air from the evaporator is ex- hausted. 100% warm fresh dry air is drawn into the PoolPak with its supply fan. The warm fresh dry air is heated further as it passes over the condenser coil and supplied to the Natatorium. If the Natatorium requires cooling and the outside air is cooler and dryer than the air off the evaporator coil . . . . . 100% of the air from the evaporator is exhausted. 100% cool fresh air is drawn into the �. PoolPak with its supply fan. d. Pool Water Heating If the space temperature is at or above setpoint and the pool water temperature is below the set point, hot gas and pool water are directed to the pool water condenser when the compressor is running. At other times, if the pool water requires heat, the PoolPak activates main pool water heater. e. Humidity Control aa.. Full proportional control of relative humidity by staged unit capacity, with dry bulb override . Humidity controller ener- gizes the compressor and directs hot gas to the air condenser if space needs heating or water condenser if pool water temperature is below setpoint . The economizer is activated if dehumidification is required and the air and water temperatures are satisfied. f . Wall Temperature Sensor Humidity Reset Control to Eliminate Condensate of Walls •.• When the temperature of the interior sur- face at the wall sensor drops to within 50F of the dew point temperature of the space air, the relative humidity setpoint is offset downward. This condition causes the dehumidifier system to activate humidity control lowering the space dew point and Heating and Ventilating 15600-30 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and controls shall be capable of providing full heating capacity to either air or water. Con- trols shall be capable of proportional control of heating and dehumidification by loading stages of compressor capacity as necessary. As building requirements are satisfied, unit shall unload and shut off . As a minimum, unit shall provide the following functions : 40 a. Economizer/Ventilation: Providing outdoor air ventilation as a function of indoor and outdoor conditions . b. Space Heating: Full proportional control of space dry bulb temperature by staging compressor loading of unit capacity, with humidity override . Automatic mechanical heat recovery from pool room return air as required by building and/or water tempera- ,,, ture . Return/exhaust air must pass through mechanical heat recovery system and shall be exhausted at its lowest heat content . Automatic switching and proportioning outputs for control of auxiliary air heat- ing coil shall be performed. At Setpoint: Economizer, if outdoor temperature higher than return air. At a drop from Setpoint : Valve directing hot gas to air condenser energized. At a further drop from Setpoint : First stage of compressor energized. Smart Economizer (See c . , below) , if outdoor air warmer than air leaving the evaporator. At further drop from Setpoint : Second stage of compressor energized. Smart Economizer At further drop from Setpoint : Auxiliary Heat Energized. C . Smart Economizer If the Natatorium requires heating and the outside air is warmer and dryer than the Heating and Ventilating 15600-29 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL wd a. Outside air dry bulb temperature and Rela- tive humidity (to be installed as shown on Drawing) , Natatorium wall temperature .M (mount on north wall, 5' -0" A. F.F. , with vandal resistant cover) . P. Auxiliary Air Heating Hot Water Coil 1 . Coil shall be constructed with copper tubes, . 006" thick, copper fins and copper end sheets, frame and intermediate supports . All nuts, bolts and lock washers shall be empigard coated and cadmium plated. Coil construction of dis- similar metals such as copper/aluminum or plas- tic/vinyl coated coils shall not be acceptable. 2 . All tubes shall be expanded into fin collars . All joints shall be brazed. The coil shall be tested to 320 psig while submerged in water. The coil shall be dried and sealed. Its inside shall be commercially free of oxides and foreign matter. Coil assembly shall be approved for 1, 600 psig ultimate strength. 3 . Hot water flow through or by-passing this coil shall be controlled by a factory installed proportional three way flow valve . This valve ••� shall be controlled by the unit' s control sys- tem. Q. Environmental Logic Controls 1 . All operating and logic controls shall be facto- ry mounted and wired in the unit . Control sequences shall be disciplined to control swim- ming pool environmental conditions and respond to changes in space requirements . ., 2 . As a minimum, control system shall provide full modulation of heat recovery/heating system by proportional control of dry bulb temperature, relative humidity, building skin temperature based humidity reset and ventilation air volume. ..w 3 . Controls shall automatically operate hating, dehumidification and heat recovery system in response to greatest requirement and adjust unit outputs to maintain building conditions . Unit Heating and Ventilating 15600-28 `" $0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL d. occupied/unoccupied schedule e . damper positions 2 . The micro computer control panel can be remotely mounted and/or accessed by modem. The following LCD readouts and/or annunciation lights shall be provided: Power on; Space temperature; Space relative $0 humidity; Pool water temperature; Outside air temperature; Outside air relative humidity; Compressor circuit fault; Com- pressor in pump down; First, second and third stage of compressor on; Unit in air heating mode; Unit in dehumidifying mode; Auxiliary air heating coil on; Pool water heating on; Economizer on; Smart economizer on; Unit in humidity override based on wall sensor input; Time of day/day of week. 3 . Control panel shall be integral to the unit with separate compartment isolated from air flow. Blower motors and compressors shall be equipped with contactors and protected with motor start- ers, adjustable magnetic trip, push button operation. Dry contacts shall be provided for alarm and fan interlock. Power block terminals shall be provided for different wire size con- nections . Compressor shall have an auto-recycle timer to prevent short cycling. 4 . All wiring and electrical controls shall be done and installed in accordance with UL regulations and Massachusetts Electric Code. 0. Control Sensors 1 . The unit shall be factory equipped with the following control sensors : a. Space dry bulb temperature, Space relative humidity, Air-off-evaporator dry bulb temperature and Relative humidity and pool water temperature. 2 . The unit shall be delivered with the following factory supplied sensors to be installed in the field: Heating and Ventilating 15600-27 rN. am. ,., ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL K. Fan Motors 1 . Fan motors shall be premium efficiency, induc- a" tion type, totally enclosed fan cooled with Class F insulation, pre-lubricated ball bearings and shall be mounted on an adjustable base. Motor to be UL approved. Supply and return fan motors shall each be provided with individual code approved motor starters . L. Drain Pan 1 . Drain pans shall form the entire air side floor of unit . Each drain pan shall be constructed of galvanized steel and painted with a protective coating suitable for use in pool environment after fabrication. Drain pans shall be fully insulated and piped to a common drain that may be accessed from either side of the unit . All drain lines within the unit shall be insulated with minimum 3/411 closed cell foam. M. Refrigeration Circuit 1 . Shall have a replaceable core liquid line filter dryer, liquid receiver, thermostatic expansion valves, pump down solenoid vales, two manual valves to isolate filter drier for fast drier core replacement and two manual valves to iso- late the liquid receiver. Suction lines shall `° be fully insulated with closed cell foam insula- tion. High and low pressure controls and re- frigeration service access valves shall be located outside of the air stream. All refrig- erant piping shall be copper Type L and in accordance with BOCA Standards ASTM B88 for copper tubing, and M-702 . 0 for joints and con- nections . N. Control Panel ., 1 . The controller shall be micro computer based. The following functions/set points shall be programmable at the panel : a. air temperature b. relative humidity C . pool water temperature A* Heating and Ventilating 15600-26 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . The evaporator and condenser coil shall each be equipped with an air filter system. The filters shall be 2" thick, multigraduated, laminated construction, throw-away type. The filters shall have a non-migrating tackifier encapsulat- ed between the second and third laminates . They shall be totally non-toxic, non-allergenic, resistant to corrosive acids and not support the growth of bacteria and fungus . H. Mixing Box 1 . The mixing box shall be integral to the unit and physically located between the evaporator and condenser coils . The mixing box shall be equipped with three dampers to control the amount of exhaust, outside and recirculated air. The exhaust damper shall be downstream of the evaporator coil to allow full heat reclaim prior to exhaust of the air. The air condenser coil shall be located downstream of the outside air intake to allow utilization of outside air when available or necessary. I . Dampers 1 . Air mixing compartment shall be provided with opposed blade, low loss (1°s) , neoprene tipped, anodized aluminum air foil section dampers . Each damper section shall be operated by a separate motor fully wired into unit control panel, and be capable of modulating the dampers from 0 to 1000 . ,op J. Supply Fan and Return Fan 1 . The units shall be factory equipped with a supply fan and a return fan. These fans shall be multi V-belt driven, double inlet centrifugal type with multi-blade forward curved wheels . Construction shall be galvanized steel, painted and baked with an epoxy coating suitable for use in pool environment . The fans shall be dynami- cally and statically balanced and tested after they have been epoxy coated. Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated, self-aligning ball bear- ings selected for 200, 000 hours average life . Heating and Ventilating 15600-25 p ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . All tubes shall be expanded into fin collars . All joints shall be brazed. The coil shall be tested to 320 psig while submerged in water. -n All brazing shall be done with nitrogen gas inside tubes to give clean internal surfaces . The coil shall be dried and sealed. Its inside shall be commercially free of oxides and foreign matter. Coil assembly shall be approved for 1, 600 psig ultimate strength. 3 . The coil shall be sectioned to provide propor- tional air-to-refrigerant latent and sensible heat removal capacity. This capacity modulation shall be accomplished by utilizing multiple thermal expansion valves (TEV) for the evapora- tor. Each TEV shall be equipped with a refrig- erant flow control solenoid valve and refriger- ant sight glass . F. Condenser Coil 1 . Coil shall be constructed of copper tubes, . 006" thick, copper fins with copper end sheets, frame and intermediate supports . All nuts, bolts and lock washers shall be cadmium plated, empigard coated steel or monel . Coil construction of dissimilar metals such as copper/aluminum or plastic/vinyl coated coils is not acceptable. 2 . All tubes shall be expanded into fin collars . , All joints shall be brazed. The coil shall be tested to 400 psig while submerged in water. All brazing shall be done with nitrogen gas inside tubes to give clean internal surfaces . The coil shall be dried and sealed. Its inside shall be commercially free of oxides and foreign matter. Coil assembly shall be approved for +* 2 , 000 psig ultimate strength. 3 . The coil shall be manifolded into sections to provide incremental refrigerant-to-air heat transfer capacity stages . This capacity modula- tion shall be accomplished by utilizing multiple solenoid valves to control the flow of the hot refrigerant gas to each of the manifolds . G. Air Filters , Heating and Ventilating 15600-24 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Compressor 1 . Compressor shall be a heavy duty industrial semi-hermetic, six cylinder, three stage, ser- viceable type with suction gas cooled motor, suitable for R22 refrigerant, equipped with internal solid state sensor thermal protection, service valves, easily removable external crank- case heater for liquid slugging protection, i spring mounted muffler plates on the discharge, pumpdown cycle protection and oil failure pro- tection. 2 . Capacity control shall be electro-hydraulic, allowing reduced load starting and variable load operation. Capacity control through hot gas by- pass is absolutely not permissible . Forced feed lubrication system shall include self-priming, positive displacement, replaceable oil pump, oil strainer, sight glass and crankcase oil heater. The compressor shall use ring plate, stainless steel valves, large diameter, high strength nodular cast iron crank shaft and have external heat removing discharge gas manifold. D. Pool Water Heater 1 . Pool water heater shall be compact, parallel, counter flow, tube-in-tube type . Water side shall be Type L, 0 . 049" wall thickness, self- cleaning cupro-nickel . Pool water heater shall be insulated with minimum 3/4" closed cell foam. Pool water heating is controlled by a refriger- ant solenoid valve which directs hot refrigerant gas into the pool water heater on a call from the control system. Water circuit shall be sup- plied with standard 2" CPVC pipe stub-outs . Water heater shall be UL listed. E. Evaporator Coil 1 . Coil shall be constructed of copper tubes, . 006" thick, copper fins with copper end sheets, frame and intermediate supports . All nuts, bolts and lock washers shall be cadmium plated, empigard coated steel or monel . Coil construction of dissimilar metals such as copper/aluminum or plastic/vinyl coated coils is not acceptable . Heating and Ventilating 15600-23 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . The unit shall be specifically designed, manu- factured, and tested for enclosed swimming pool duty. Field assembled or modified standard commercial grade equipment is not acceptable. Complete unit shall be weatherproofed for out- door installation and also suitable for indoor mounting. B. Unit Casing 1 . All panel work and structural steel members shall be of galvanized steel, treated and paint- ed after fabrication to provide a chlorine and pool chemical resistant finish. Structural steel frame shall be 3/16" steel channel base with 3/16" steel cross bracing. Vertical sup- port posts for removable panels shall be formed from 14 gauge galvanized steel and painted. All nuts, bolts and lock washers shall be cadmium plated, empigard coated steel or monel . 2 . The paint shall be epoxy based powder coating, applied . 003" (3 mils) thick, and baked and bonded at 350F until it forms a hard vinyl textured surface . 3 . Top panels and removable side panels shall be formed from 16 gauge galvanized steel . Access panels shall be secured by two or more key operable latches . All side panels shall be insulated with minimum 1" duct liner insulation secured to panels by adhesive and side clamps . The insulation shall be approved for 35OF oper- ating temperature . The fire resistance rating shall conform to NFPA Standard 90A and 90B. The thermal conductivity shall not exceed .29 BTU/hr/F/sq. ft . /in. at 750F. All seams shall be welded, bolted, and sealed to prevent leaks . The roof shall be gasketed and secured to frame with empigard coated zinc treated screws . All screws and fasteners exposed to the Natatorium return and supply air shall be empigard coated galvanized steel . Compressor, pool water heat recovery unit, and controls, including solenoid and expansion valves and refrigerant sight glasses shall be located in compartments isolat- ed from unit air stream. .W Heating and Ventilating 15600-22 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL sub-cool refrigerant a minimum of 20OF below satura- tion temperatures . E . Compressors shall be a single serviceable hermetic on units over 10 tons, full hermetic on smaller sizes, designed for R-22 operation. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and have forced feed lubrication, hot gas muffler in the discharge line, and immersion type crankcase heaters . The compressors shall have also spring loaded valve heads for protec- tion against liquid "slugging" and automatic oil pressure actuated internal cylinder unloaders . Ok Unloaders shall be arranged for unloaded start and shall allow unloading down to 33% capacity. Compres- sors shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating compart- ment . F. Controls shall be factory wired and mounted in a control panel in exterior of the casing. Control panel shall be wired complete with magnetic contactor for both compressor and condenser fan. For 440/480 volt application, provide an across-the-line starter. G. Condensing units shall be Trane Model TTA and BTA Series, or equal, with capacities as scheduled. H. Furnish and install a refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 0 2 . 10 PACKAGED HEATING/DEHUMIDIFYING UNIT A. General 1 . Furnish and install a factory assembled, en- closed swimming pool environmental control/ energy recovery system. System shall include mechanical heat recovery, supply and return/ exhaust fans, outdoor, exhaust and recirculated air dampers, pool water heater, air heater, tee moisture disposal and complete solid state logic control system, factory installed and wired in a single unit enclosure . 2 . The complete unit shall be listed by Underwriter Laboratories under the title of "Swimming Pool Air Conditioner" and carry the appropriate label . Heating and Ventilating 15600-21 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4 . Filler panels and end panels with cutouts to be provided, where required, for a complete wall- to-wall installation. 5 . Shelving unit module to have a rear filler section to allow a casework depth of 21-7/811 . Standard 15-1/411 cabinet to be used with a filler piece to accommodate a pipe chase behind the casework to feed the unit ventilator with piping. Grille shall be located in the top at the rear of the cabinet without damper and shall be stamped steel grilles . 6 . Shelving unit module to have one (1) adjustable center shelf . 7 . Shelving unit module to have an adjustable kick plate. 0. Units shall be American Air Filter or equal by Trane. • 2 . 09 CONDENSING UNITS A. The air cooled condensing units shall have all operating components assembled on one common base . These shall include : compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor, charging valves, moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, hot gas muffler, all controls, and a holding charge of R-22 . The units shall be designed for , outdoor installation. B. Casing shall be of 14 gage zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components . ** C. Condenser Fan(s) shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by permanently �. lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built- in thermal overload protection. D. Condenser Coil shall have copper tubing with heavy- duty aluminum fins . The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided to Heating and Ventilating 15600-20 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL air to 100% fresh air. Dampers shall have air sealing edges, and positively prevent blow-through of fresh air to all intermediate positions . K. Bypass dampers shall be aluminum and insulated for sound attenuation and to prevent formation of conden- sate . Dampers shall be tight sealing and designed to minimize heat pick up in the bypass position. L. The total overall noise level of the unit ventilator, when delivering its rated capacity shall not exceed 51 decibels when measured at a point 5 feet from the front of the unit on the centerline and 3 feet from the floor. M. Outdoor air intakes shall be constructed with horizon- " tal or vertical chevron louvers . Intakes shall be of the demountable type so louvers may be removed from the frame . Frame and louvers shall be of dark bronze anodized aluminum. A 1/2" square mesh galvanized screen shall be provided in back of the louver. The louver size shall be co-ordinated with the architec- tural Drawings and shall be submitted for approval with the unit ventilator Shop Drawings . Note that not all unit ventilators require manufacturer furnished intake louver. See Drawing. N. Metal casework to be Classroom Air Conditioner Metal Casework System as manufactured by the Trane Company, or equal . Refer to Architectural Drawing for type, size and location. The Classroom Metal Casework shall have the following characteristics : 1 . 16 au e cabinet steel g g painted. Color to be selected by the Architect . 2 . Casework shall be equipped with a decorative and protective aluminum trim strip along the front edge and shall have a damage resistant Westing- low house (Micarta) material on the top surface of the casework. 3 . Casework sections to be in three, four, or five foot modules, as shown on the Architectural Drawings . Heating and Ventilating 15600-19 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Vol D. Fans shall be forward curved DWDI centrifugal blow- through or draw-through type of bonderized and painted steel mounted on a single steel shaft and dynamically ,.^ and statically balanced. Fan shaft to be graphite- bronze flange mounted sleeve bearings capable of 2, 000 hours of operation on one oiling. Furnish with pencil-proof screen between fan discharge an casing grille on draw-through units . E . Motors shall be non-radio interfering constant speed, split-phase, open type, mounted out of the air stream on resilient rubber isolated mounting. Motors shall have thermal overload protection with automatic reset and shall be suitable for the current characteristics "" shown on the Drawings . Motors shall be controlled by a key operated on/off switch operable through the unit casing. F. Each hot water coil shall be constructed of copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes . The minimum fin thickness shall be 0 . 008" ; the tubes shall be not less than 1/2" O.D. ; the minimum wall thickness shall be 0 . 020" . Provide an air vent and drain plug in the coil . Coil shall be tested at 300 psi while submerged in water. G. Direct expansion coils shall consist of seamless copper tubes with aluminum plate fins . All joints shall be silver brazed. The coil shall be tested at 300 psig air pressure under water, dehydrated, pressure tested with refrigerant, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen at 10 psig. Furnish coil with thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer. H. The unit must be capable of delivering room air or outdoor air up to full capacity. Unit must be capable of automatically providing all room air, a predeter- mined quantity of outdoor or up to full capacity of outdoor air, as required by the thermal needs of the room. I . Each unit shall be furnished with a ill thick easily removable permanent filter, filtering all the air " before the unit coil . J. Multileaf dampers in the cabinet base shall be capable of varying the proportion of mixed air from 100% room Heating and Ventilating 15600-18 Ak .ft ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen at 10 psig. H. Vibration isolators shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the unit manufacturer' s recommenda- tions . Isolators shall be designed to provide 900 efficiency, except that units mounted above ceilings shall be 95% and auditorium unit shall be 980 . I . The filter mixing box shall be of the high efficiency type with parallel blade dampers with edge and end seals . The mixing box shall be especially designed to provide high efficiency mixing of two air streams at different temperatures . The dampers shall have extended shafts suitable for the control sequence specified. The filter mixing box shall contain 2" throw-away filters, and a pull-out hook shall be provided. J. Unit shall be Trane Climate Changer, or equal by Carrier, American Air Filter, or equal . 2 . 08 UNIT VENTILATORS A. The unit ventilators shall be of the coil face and bypass damper control type suitable for heating and ventilation utilizing hot water. Unit depth shall be 21-7/8" nominal . B. The unit shall have capacity as shown on the Drawings . The unit cfm shown shall be standard air and not anemometer rating. The air delivery shall be based on the ASHRAE Standard Code for Testing and Rating Unit Ventilators . All units shall be tested and rated in accordance with this Code . C. Cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge furniture grade steel on a solid base pan, with all exposed edges rounded. All external surfaces shall be finished in baked enamel in one of six manufacturer' s colors after being cleaned, phosphatized and prime coated. Access panels shall be provided to all areas requiring maintenance and access panels shall be provided with quick-acting cam locks . Color shall be selected by Architect . Furnish end caps for all units, with cut-out for feed through piping where required. Furnish units with feed through pipe chase. Heating and Ventilating 15600-17 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. The air moving and coil capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings . , C. The casing shall be constructed of heavy sheet steel adequately reinforced with structural members and provided with sufficient access panels for proper Wft lubrication and maintenance . All components shall be of the arrangement shown on the Drawings . Removable panels in fan and coil sections shall provide access to all internal parts . All unit panels shall be insulated with 1" glass fiberboard and shall be chemically cleaned, spray painted, baked, and coated with an additional exterior coat of enamel after final *� assembly. Units with cooling coils shall include one- piece drain pan with 1/2" foamed-in-place, cellular insulation extending under coil and fan sections with drain connections on both sides . D . Motor and drive shall be belt drive with guard and adjustable motor sheave . Motor nameplate horsepower " shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5% with airfoil or BI fans and 20o with forward curved fans . Belts shall be of the oil resistant type, in matched .» sets . Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation. E . The unit fans shall be double width, double inlet type . Airfoil fan wheels shall be used on all units with greater than 10 square feet outlet area. Fan shaft bearings shall be 200, 000 hour life-lubricated. All rotating parts shall be dynamically balanced, individually and after final assembly. Bearing shall be mounted externally for servicing without disman- tling of unit . F. The hot water heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type, assembled in a zinc-coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. G. The direct expansion cooling coil shall be of the continuous plate fin and copper tube type assembled in a zinc-coated steel frame. The coil shall have an equalizing type distributor to assure that each coil circuit receives an equal amount of refrigerant . The coil shall be tested at 300 psig air pressure under water, dehydrated, pressure tested with refrigerant, Heating and Ventilating 15600-16 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Coils shall have fully flanged frames, Temtrol type "All , or equal, with capacities as shown on the Drawings . 2 . 05 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Registers and diffusers shall be sizes as shown on Plans . Volume dampers shall be allen key operated. ,f, Wall mounted registers shall have sponge rubber gasket at perimeter of frame. B . Ceiling Diffuser (CDA) - Louver face adjustable type, Titus Model TDCA-1/AG-95 (steel) , off-white finish, throw pattern as shown on Drawings, with throw reducing vanes where called for on Drawings . C. Ceiling Diffuser (CDB) - Louver face adjustable fire rated type, Titus Model TDCA-FR/AG-95 (steel) , off- white finish, throw pattern as shown on Drawings, with throw reducing vanes where called for on Drawings . D. Ceiling Diffuser, Return (CDR) - To be same as CDB, less adjustable feature, with 4-way pattern, Titus Model TCD-FR/AG-95 (steel) . *A E. Return and Exhaust Register (CER, CR, TER, CRR) - Titus Model 355 FL/AG-15 all aluminum deflected blade register, off white finish. F. Equivalent products by Barber-Colman, Tuttle and Bailey, or equivalent will be approved. 2 . 06 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construc- tion, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model . 1 . Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen, and acrylic enamel finish. 2 . 07 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Air handling units shall be of the draw-through type with fan section, hot water heating coil, DX cooling coil (when called for on schedule) and filter-mixing box. Heating and Ventilating 15600-15 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL F. Fan and curb shall be Greenheck Model G and GB with Type GPF curb or approved equal by Penn or Jenn Air. 2 . 03 ROOF VENTILATORS. UPBLAST A. Roof ventilators shall be of the belt drive upblast centrifugal type, with spun aluminum housing for roof mounting and shall be completely weatherized with built-in grease trough and drain. Capacity shall be AMCA certified. B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. C. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed, weatherproof housing outside of the air stream. " Furnish with factory installed 3 pole weatherproof disconnect switch mounted outside motor compartment . D. The fan shall be installed on a solid metal lined aluminum roof curb. Curb to be of sufficient height so the fan outlet will be 40" above the roof, with wood nailer. E . Fan and curb shall be Greenheck Model CUBE with UNI-18 curb or approved equal by Penn or Jenn Air. 2 . 04 HOT WATER HEATING COILS A. Provide duct mounted hot water heating coils as shown. Coils shall be designed seamless 5/8" o.d. copper tubes, . 020" thick. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes . No soldering or tinning shall be used in the casing. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410-72 . 1 . Heating coils shall be pitched for proper drain- age and venting. ••� 2 . Coils shall have a supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each 5/8" o.d. tube. 3 . Coils shall be proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with air pressure under water. Heating and Ventilating 15600-14 0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Tees on suction side in dust collecting systems shall be 450 straight tap type . V. Make final connections from dust collection system ductwork to all shop equipment as shown on Drawings : 1. Furnish blast gates at all welding hood duct connections and at all dust collector system OW equipment connections . Blast gates shall be Car-Mon Products, No. BG, or equal, 16 gage construction, sized as shown on Drawings . 2 . Furnish floor sweeps with snug fitting foot operated doors, 16 gage construction, sized as shown on the Drawings . To be Car-Mon Products, No. 55-C, or equal . 2 . 02 ROOF VENTILATORS " A. Roof ventilators shall be of the belt or direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings, with spun aluminum housing for roof mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be AMCA certified. Direct drive ventilators shall be fur- nished with manufacturer' s standard solid state speed controller. B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and * dynamically balanced at the factory. C. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed weatherproof housing outside of the air stream. Furnish with single or 3 pole disconnect switch mounted in motor compartment, with factory wiring from disconnect to motor. Provide wiring raceway from motor compartment to curb cap. D. The fan shall be installed on an acoustic lined to aluminum roof curb as detailed on the Drawings . Motor operated low leakage backdraft dampers with edge and end seals shall be installed in the curb of the unit . Curb to be 12" high, without cant . Furnish wiring pigtail on damper motor. E. The entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by 1/211 x 1/211 aluminum mesh securely installed in place. Heating and Ventilating 15600-13 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ow Minimum Gage Method of Diameter Gal . Steel Aluminum Manufacture 3" to 14" 26 . 025" Spiral Lock - seam w 15" to 26" 24 . 032" Spiral Lock - seam 27" to 36" 22 . 040" Spiral Lock- seam a. Fittings and couplings shall be constructed of minimum gages listed. Provide continu- ous welds along seams . Minimum Gage Diameter Galv. Steel Aluminum 3" to 36 20 . 063" 2 . All branch take-offs from trunk ducts shall be made with conical tees . 3 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of the following: Semco Mfg. , Inc . United Sheet Metal Div. , United McGill Corp. 4 . Fasteners used in conjunction with Natatorium ductwork shall be monel . U. Round duct for dust collection system shall be as previously specified, except as follows : ., Duct Size Sheet Metal Gage W" 3" to 8" 20 ga. 9" to 18" 16 ga. 19" to 30" 14 ga. Heating and Ventilating 15600-12 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL age to the dampers . Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Apply duct liner thermal-acoustic insulation in low velocity duct systems as shown on the Drawings . 1 . Duct lining shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Subcontractor. Material shall be 111 nominal thickness, 3 pound density, non- combustible lass fiber with UL approved pproved neo- prene coating on air side . 2 . Insulation shall be applied with 1009.- adhesive coverage, plus stick clips on all sides of duct, 24" on center in direction of air flow, 12" to 18" on center at right angles to air flow. Coat leading edge of each insulation section with adhesive . 3 . Lining shall be Certainteed No. 300 "Ultralite" , or equal . Q. Boiler flues and water heater flue in boiler room shall be 16 gage continuous welded black steel, extending from boilers to masonry chimney. Paint steel (after cleaning) with two coats high temperature enamel, Rust-Oleum No. 4200 or equal, primed as recommended by the manufacturer. R. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1 . To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal . Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps . Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps . S . Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor. T. Factory-Fabricated High Pressure Ductwork: 1 . Round ductwork shall be constructed of galva- nized sheet steel complying with ASTM A527 for the dust collection system and of aluminum for the Natatorium by the following methods and in minimum gages listed. Heating and Ventilating 15600-11 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers . K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8' -0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point . L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings . M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc . for wo rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum of 5% leakage of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1$ for round and oval ducts . All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classi- fied United Duct Sealer, or equal . N. Duct system shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and w at each diffuser or grille . Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade . All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant . Dampers 25" in width and longer shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft . Bearings on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws . Maximum width of single blades shall be 14" . Splitter dampers shall not be used. .n. 0. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with A UL-555 continuing inspection service . Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops . Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8 11 £ returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchor- Heating and Ventilating 15600-10 4 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor' s option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets . Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30" . Where sides are over 4211 , the ` standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/211 x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles . Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints . fwr Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4" . H. Sheet metal screws 3/411 #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 1211 or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre- erection attachment of fittings . I . Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device . Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches . Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 10" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices . J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft . in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/411 x 1/8" angles under the ducts . Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black ill x 1/16" strap iron bent 11, under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using Heating and Ventilating 15600-9 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 2 - MATERIALS 2 . 01 SHEET METAL WORK IWO A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, no duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures . B . All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galva- nized steel sheet of bend forming quality, except that all supply, return, and exhaust ducts serving locker and/or shower areas and Natatorium shall be aluminum. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports . All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance . Cadmium ^ plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off . D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor without first obtaining approval from the Architect/ Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any +* duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards . E . The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct . Where building condi- tions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acousti- cal attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections 1' -6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide . Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint . Heating and Ventilating 15600-8 4 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. All piping, ductwork, cable, and raceway (except surface metal raceway) shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechani- cal or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings . B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade . 1 . 14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance, the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete instructions for the repair, maintenance, and opera- tion of all systems installed under his Subcontract . These instructions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers . B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use of all systems and all apparatus pertaining thereto. 1 . 15 GUARANTEE A. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in go all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect . C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 . 16 RECORD DRAWINGS ! " A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . Heating and Ventilating 15600-7 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings . D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and acces- sories that may be required. The Heating and Venti- lating Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnish- ing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and acces- sories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost . 1 . 11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall + provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades . 1 . 12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and trans- portation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor. B . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc . C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc . , resulting from his work shall be removed by the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor. 1 . 13 WORK CONCEALED Heating and Ventilating 15600-6 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications . The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substi- tute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect . 1 . 08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract . He is to assume 0 all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 . 09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . 1 . 10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate . These documents are intended to supple- ment the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifi- cations and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements . Heating and Ventilating 15600-5 0M ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL I . The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. -M Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements . B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements . 1 . 06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be U. S . made, new, full ow weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or Aft category of material or equipment . Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, •• listings, or labels shall conform to their require- ments and be so labeled. so 1 . 07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc . of all materials to be furnished on the project . B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall check .� the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. Heating and Ventilating 15600-4 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall co- operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc. , hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor 00 may build them in place . In case of failure on the part of the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such fail- ure. E . The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the 7r actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof . Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements . F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items . G. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times . All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means . H. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. Heating and Ventilating 15600-3 no _. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . 03 CODES , ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regula- tions, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. ■* B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instruc- tions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 . 04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. Ak B. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor himself were present . The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced , without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins . C. The Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor shall be ' held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution *� of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Heating and Venti- lating Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Heating & Ventilating Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be 0tv Heating and Ventilating 15600-2 ffix ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 15600 - HEATING AND VENTILATING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 INTENT A. The Subcontractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment necessary for completion of the Heating and Ventilating system, in accordance with this Section of the Specifications and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract . 1 . 02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all heating and venti- lating work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the follow- ing; 1 . Gas/oil fired boiler-burner units, including oil tank, transfer pump, and piping. 2 . Unit ventilators, with shelving units, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, radiators, make-up air units, air handling units, and condensing units . 3 . Natatorium dehumidification unit . 4 . Piping systems for hot water including pumps, valves, and specialties . 5 . Duct systems for supply, return, and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal boxes . 6 . Exhaust fans . 7 . Insulation for piping, ductwork, and boiler flues . 8 . Automatic temperature control system, including replacement/reconditioning of existing controls . ' " Heating and Ventilating 15600-1 HyAC H1O1A NORTHWEST HvAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-11O15 SOITHWEST HvAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-11O1C SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR � 141010 NORTHEAST HYAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR µ102A HYAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR H2O1 DETAILS H2O2 HVAG SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL 40 EIO1A NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EIO1B 5011THWEST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EIO1C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR ,�. VOID NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E1O2A LIGHTNG PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E2O1A NORTHWEST POWER I SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2O1B SOUTHWEST POUTER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2O1C SOUTHEAST POUTER s SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2O10 NORTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2O2A POWER s SYSTEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E3O1 DIAGRAMS E4O1 SITE ELECTRICAL 4m on A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT �* A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS ,4415 POOL SECTIONS A41ro POOL FILTRATION DETAILS A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Aro01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS Aro02 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS ,4(003 PLAN DETAILS A604 PLAN DETAILS Aro05 PLAN DETAILS Arocro ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS Aro01 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATICNS Aro08 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A601A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A601C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8010 REFLECTED CEILNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A602 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT �•• ECI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT EM MIP PENT ` E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION .� FIO1A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST(ART I CCt`MNITY) FI015 FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY { ADMINISTRATION) ow F1OIG I FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETCRIUM) NOV FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYt" 4A51V) F501 FOUNDATICN DETAILS F5O2 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS an STRUCTURAL or 52O1A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 520113 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY i ADMN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 53O1A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301- STHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMINCs PLAN *" OU 53O1D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING PIOIA NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P1O115 SOUTHWEST PLLVBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PIOIC SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOCR �* PI01D NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOCK P1O2A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P2O1 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P2O2 PLUMBING DETAILS P2O3 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS -- COVER SWEET Cs01 GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,Ma LIST LANCSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 51TE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL 1-101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 517E GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STOR1,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L&01 SITE DETAILS - 5TORM,SANITARY,AND WATER Lro02 SITE DETAILS,STORM,MISC. go ARCHITECTURAL R101 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS R102 KEY PLAN - FIFE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS F=1 4101 PHASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITION PLAN5 1ST FLOOR e . AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR A001D DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF AD04 DEMOLITION WALL SECTIONS ,4101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t COMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN • 5CUTW WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINI5TRATION) No A101C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETORIUM) A101D FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR no A103 ROOF PLAN A104 ROOF - DETAILS ,4201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FiNISW SCHEDULE o• A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS ON 420(0 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS P* A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATICNS on A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS ` A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A409 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS om ADDITION/RENOVATIONS — J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL under this Section is shown on the following Contract Drawings : W Plumbing 15400-29 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 13 ALTERNATE BID PRICES A. The Base Bid is the Lump Sum Price for all labor and materials specified and/or shown on the Drawings . B. None of the Alternate Bids involve work of the Plumbing Subcontractor. 3 . 14 TIME MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed. ) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER' S CHECK OR CASHIER' S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS . A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be .rejected. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authori- ty, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The following describes by class of work, each class of work requiring labor and materials which, in the opinion of the Awarding Authority, based upon an investigation of the work involved, is customarily performed in that sub-trade under subcontract with a sub-bidder for the sub-trade, and which is estimated by the Awarding Authority to cost in excess of Ten ..® Thousand Dollars, and only each class of work de- scribed shall be a class of work for which a Sub- bidder for that sub-trade must list the information required in the "Form For Sub-bid" : 1 . Insulation E . The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as .� required by all Contract Documents . Work to be done Plumbing 15400-28 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3 . 08 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3 .09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer' s printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and be included in his bid. 3 . 10 ROOF DRAINS A. Roof drains shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and installed by the Roofing Subcontrac- tor including flashing. 3 . 11 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for access to valves, shock arrestors, trap primers, etc . , Panels shall be installed by the General Contractor. 3 . 12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as per regula- tion 310 CMR 22 . 22, with pressure gauges on inlet and outlet of backflow preventer. Furnish Watts TK-9 Model A test kit . The Plumbing Subcontractor shall act as the Owner' s Agent in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit all Plans, Specifications and permits required for approval and pay all fees . Approvals shall be secured prior to purchase and installation. Plumbing 15400-27 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 5 . Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in Machine Rooms where indicated or, if not other- wise indicated, where directed by Architect . 3 . 04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time .. to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contrac- tor. 3 . 05 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent insula- tion contractor regularly engaged in that business . B . Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls . Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds . C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3 . 06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe and insula- tion passing through same . Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where uninsulated .. pipes pass through walls . 3 . 07 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems : Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Sub- contractor and approved before acceptance . Under- ground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing 15400-26 ""� ■w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL !fib b . Near each branch in mains . C . Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non- accessible enclosures . d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of con- cealed piping. e. Spaced intermittently at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, except reduce ,. spacing to 20' in congested areas of piping and equipment . C. Provide manufacturer' s standard brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbrevia- tion in approximately 1/411 high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices . 1 . Provide 1-1/2" round by 19 gage tags with let- tering as selected by Architect . 2 . Provide manufacturer' s standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type) , or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attach- ment of tags to valves, and manufactured specif- r ically for that purpose . 3 . Submit valve schedule for piping system, type- written and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag) , location of valve (room or space) , and variations for identification (if any) . Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags" , in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, fur- nish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 . 4 . For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mount- ing on masonry walls . Provide frames of fin- "' ished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB- grade sheet glass . Plumbing 15400-25 on am ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions . Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services . B . Expansion and Contraction of Pipe : Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe . 3 . 03 BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc . Brady (W. H. ) Co. ; Sigmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co. , Inc . Seton Name Plate Corp . Emed Co. , Inc. B. Provide manufacturer' s standard pre-printed, semi- rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13 . 1 . , 1 . For external diameters less than 6" , provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened as follows : a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi- rigid plastic pipe marker. 2 . Lettering: Manufacturer' s standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect in cases of variance with name as shown or speci- fied. 3 . Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows : a. Near each valve and control device . Plumbing 15400-24 .. ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3 . 01 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1 . Drainage and Vent Pipes : Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/411 per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 311 . All openings of the system shall be protected by a 2" (min. ) water seal and vent piping installed to allow a maximum internal pressure fluctuation of +/- 1" of water column. 2 . Fittings : Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings . Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 450 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings . Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to verti- cal . 3 . Union Connections : Slip joints will be per- mitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps . Use of bushings will not be permitted. B . Joints : Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer' s recom- mendations . Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads . 3 . 02 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs : Piping shall be in- stalled as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Subcontractor and shall be worked into place Plumbing 15400-23 oft ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B . Type "A" - pressure type to be used for can wash supply piping, Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves . C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant pressure . 2 . 24 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Furnish and install reduced pressure backflow preventer as manufactured by Watts, Model U909S-QT, with ball valves, strainer, vent kit and spare parts kit . Size as indicated on Plan. .� 2 . 25 SEDIMENT/PLASTER TRAP A. Under counter type cast iron body solids interceptor with removable aluminum or stainless steel sediment basket . B. Trap shall be installed in lieu of P-trap and supported from the bottom, not hung from the piping. Provide one (1) trap for each sink. C. Sediment trap shall be Zurn A-1180, or equal J. R. Smith, Wade, Josam. no 2 . 26 GAS SERVICE A. Apply for, pay all fees and charges in connection with, and co-ordinate the installation of the new gas service . B . All labor and materials required for a complete installation which are not furnished by the utility company shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontrac- tor at no extra cost to the Owner. ..� C. The natural gas service will be furnished by Bay State Gas Company at no cost . Plumbing 15400-22 ""� ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . 19 THERMOSTATIC WATER CONTROLLER A. Controller shall consist of an assembly of two thermostatic water controllers with checkstops, pressure regulating valve, thermometers, pressure gauges, valves, pipe and fittings, all factory assembled into a single unit . To be Leonard Model TM-186-12520-PRV-CP-0, or equal . 2 . 20 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, and gas « * connections to kitchen equipment . Install solenoid gas valve on gas line feeding cooking equipment . B. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, vent, and gas connections to classroom and laboratory equipment and fixtures furnished and installed by others . 2 . 21 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers where indicated on the Drawings . Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir as indicated on the Drawings . Valve shall conform with A.S . S .E. Standard 1018 . B . Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc . , or equal . 2 . 22 ROOF DRAINS A. RD1 (new construction) : Zurn ZC-100-EARC cast iron body, underdeck clamp, flashing collar, gravel guard, roof sump receiver, adjustable extension, cast iron dome . B. RD-2 (existing drains) : Zurn Z-20-RRD replacement +" roof drain with stainless steel body, cast iron dome, and clamping collar. 2 .23 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal . Plumbing 15400-21 No ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Meter shall be Neptune "Tru Flow" , Rockwell 3" size meeting City of Northampton Water Department require- ments . 2 . 17 RECIRCULATING PUMPS A. Hot water recirculating pumps shall be all bronze construction, in-line type, maximum working temper- ature of 2250F, maximum working pressure of 125 psi, Bell and Gossett, or Taco series, or equal . The pump sizes shall be as follows : Bldg. Sys . CP-1 : Taco Model 112 to deliver 5 , gpm at 20 ft . head with 3 , 450 rpm, 1/3 hp, 120 volt, single phase motor, 1-1/4" flanges . Kitchen CP-2 : 2 gpm at 15 ft . head, Taco Model 008 , 1/25 hp, 120 volt, single phase, 3 , 250 rpm. B. Hot water generator circulating pump CP-3 shall be as follows : 1 . Bell & Gossett No. HD3 , all bronze construction, delivering 58 gpm at 14 ft . head, with 1, 750 rpm, 1/3 hp, 120 volt, single phase motor. 2 . 18 ACID NEUTRALIZING TANK A. Furnish and install one acid neutralizing tank, Orion .w Cat . No. 530-A, or equal, 150 gallon capacity, constructed or high density polyethylene. B. Furnish a trap door with frame and flange, Orion Cat . No. OR-36 . (To be installed by General Contractor) . C. The neutralizing material shall be marble or limestone in pieces of not less than 111 nor more than 3" in size . These materials shall be either calcium or magnesium carbonate or both. This material shall fill the sump from the bottom to the invert of the inlet . Plumbing 15400-20 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Access panels shall be Boico Style C, or equal, size 8" x 8" or larger. 2 . 14 HOT WATER GENERATOR A. Vertical hot water generator, 150 psi, ASME Code, 1000 gallon capacity, 60" diameter x 93" high, cement lined interior, primered exterior, with tank coil to heat 968 gph of water at 100OF temperature rise (40oF - 140oF) using 86 gpm of boiler water entering at 180OF and leaving at 1600F, 2 pass, 12" diameter x 60" long, with 104 s . f . heating surface, steel cap and tube- "'" sheet, 3/411 od, . 062" wall copper tubing, with pipe legs . B. Furnish and install properly sized vacuum breaker and temperature/pressure relief valve for water heater. To be Watts M12 P & T relief valve and Gadren 2" vacuum breaker. C. Unit shall be Raypak Model T-60-93-C-150, or equal by Ace Buehler, Patterson-Kelley, or RECO. 2 . 15 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER NO. 1 A. Heater shall be gas fired and rated at 724, 000 BTU input with 697 gph recovery at 100OF temperature rise, and shall be equipped to burn natural gas . Heater shall be AGA, ASME and NSF certified, and shall "" include all non-ferrous waterways, finned copper heat exchanger, bronze headers, flow switch, control valve, intermittent ignition, gas pressure regulator, draft on diverter, P & T relief valve, vacuum breaker, outer jacket with baked enamel finish, operating aquastat, and manual reset high limit aquastat . B. Heater shall be Raypak Model W-724, or equal by Lochinvar or Teledyne Laars . 2 . 16 WATER METER A. Water meter shall be single register magnetic type compound meter, with hermetically sealed register, magnetic drive couplings, sealed co-ordinator module. B. Meter shall accurately register flows of between 1/2 gpm and 320 gpm, and be calibrated to present readout in gallons . Plumbing 15400-19 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL low 2 . 11 FLOOR DRAINS A. FD-1 (General Use) so 1 . Cast iron drain with invertible membrane clamp- ing flange, adjustable 6" round Type "B" pol- ished nickel bronze strainer. Zurn ZNB-415 or am equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. Provide flashing clamp for drains in slabs above ground floor level . Use for toilet rooms and other finished areas . Size to Drawings . B. FD-2 (Pool Deck) 1 . Cast iron sump body with anchor flange and 8-1/2" square polished chrome plated secured grate and frame, Zurn Z-800 or equal . C. FD-3 (Boiler and Mechanical Rooms) 1 . Heavy duty cast iron deep sump body with seepage pan, combination membrane flashing clamp, sus- pended sediment bucket and heavy duty cast iron grate, Zurn No. Z-541 or equal . .w. D. FD-4 (Lab Floor Drains) 1 . To be same as FD-1, but with deep seal trap. E . FD-5 (Backwash Sump) 1 . Same as FD-1, but with blank strainer drilled with a single ill diameter hole (sharp edge orifice) . 2 . 12 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Shock absorbers shall be installed on each branch feeding fixtures with flush valves and at top of risers shall be Precision Plumbing Products Model PPP, , line size, or equal, by Zurn, Josam, Smith, or Wade . 2 . 13 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for all locations where clean- outs, valves, or other items requiring operation or maintenance are located in finish walls . Access .., panels will be installed by other trades . Plumbing 15400-18 .m, e0 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL S . Wash Fountain (P-17) 1 . Bradly 5411 , Model No. 2704FA-LSD, bowl to be 300 Series stainless steel with No. 4 finish. Spray head to be stainless steel equipped with four stainless steel spray heads with adjustable metering valves . Unit base to consist of stain- less steel scuff base and two stainless steel access panels secured with vandalproof fasten- ers . Unit to be complete with stops, check valves, mixing valve and two liquid soap dis- pensers . T. Service Sink (P-18) 1 . Basin - American Standard "Arkron" 7696 . 016 acid-resistant enameled cast iron inside sur- face, with wall hanger, rim guard, plain back. 2 . Supply Fitting - American Standard #8344 . 111 faucet with top brace, vacuum breaker, bucket hook on spout and screw driver stops on inlet shanks . 3 . Trap - American Standard #7798 . 176 3" trap standard cast iron with rust inhibitive coating, integral grid strainer and cleanout . U. Single Bowl Sink (P-19) 1 . Same as Fixture P-5 , except supply fitting to be gooseneck type with wrist blade handles, Delta No. 3579 WF HDF. V. Bar Sink (P-20) 1 . Sink - 15" x 15" self rimming single bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening undercoat, Just SB-1515-A-GR. 2 . Faucet - Single lever swing spout deck faucet and heavy chrome plating, Delta No. 101 WF HDF. 3 . Stainless steel cup strainer, 1-1/2" tailpiece and P-trap with cleanout nipple . Chrome plated supplies with wheel handle stops and chrome plated escutcheon plates . Plumbing 15400-17 NO em ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am. Cat . No. 1-25-FSB-G, or equal . Provide Type FD-1 floor drain with each P-10 . M. Water Cooler (P-11) 1 . P-5 : Single wall hung barrier free water cooler .� with front and side activation bars . Integral air cooled compressor rated at 350 w. , 4 .5 FLA, 1/5 HP motor with capacity of 8 gph water at 500F, Elkay Model EBFSA-8, or equal . Color to be selected by Architect . N. Hose Bibb (P-12) . . 1 . Chicago Faucet Company No. 293 polished chrome plated faucet with No. E-97 hose end vacuum breaker, with No. 293-6 removable tee handle, or equal, by Wade or Woodford. O. Wall Hydrant (P-13) Freezeproof, Cold Water Zurn Z-1300 - 3/4" anti-siphon, non-freeze wall hydrant with bronze casing, polished bronze , face, and loose key handle, or equal by Wade or Woodford. P. Drinking Fountain (P-14) 1 . Single face mounted stainless steel frost-proof outdoor water fountain, Halsey Taylor 5905AC, or equal . Q. Wall Hydrant (P-15) 1 . Zurn Z-1330 - 3/4" anti-siphon, encased wall hydrant with nickel bronze casing, polished stainless steel face, and loose key handle, or equal by Wade or Woodford. R. Floor Hydrant (P-16) 1 . Zurn Z-1375-10-17 ground hydrant, encased for flush floor installation, with hinged, lockable scoriated cover, polished nickel bronze box and cover, drain port, loose key handle . Provide reduced presser zone backflow preventer in branch line at accessible point . .a Plumbing 15400-16 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL supplies with wheel handle stops and chrome plated escutcheon plates . MW H. Urinal (P-6) Standard Mounting 1 . Urinal - American Standard "Washbrook" No. 6501 . 010 vitreous china, wall hung fixture with washout flushing action. 2 . Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" No. 186 with angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges . 3 . Carrier - Zurn ZR-1222, plate type system with lower bearing plate . I . Mop Receptor (P-7) 1 . Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2 . Faucet - Fiat No. 830 AA supply fitting with vacuum breaker, pail hook, hose end and wall bracket . 3 . Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. . 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1239BB bumperguard. J. Urinal (P-8) Handicapped Access 1 . To be same as P-6, except mounted with rim of basin 15" above finished floor. ` K. Standard Shower (P-9) 1 . Valve shall be Symmons "Super Safety Mix" No. 54-500-X pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, volume control and integral stops . Head shall be heavy duty rigid mount, adjustable spray pattern and 3 gpm flow restrictor, Symmons 4-295-3 , with mounting bracket and fasteners . Provide Tye FD-1 floor drain with each P-9 . L. Handicapped Access Shower (P-10) 1 . Valve shall be same as for P-9 . Head shall be FSB hand-held unit with 5' metal hose, 24" wall bar, and wall fitting, less thermometer, Symmons Plumbing 15400-15 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL uprights, concealed arms and sleeves mounted on adjustable headers, complete with cast iron feet, alignment truss and mounting fasteners . E . Water Closet (P-3) Handicapped Access 1 . Same as P-1, except mounting height shall posi- tion top of seat at 18" A.F.F. F. Lavatory (P-4) Wall Hung, Handicapped Access ,.. 1 . Basin - American Standard "Wheelchair Patients" No. 9140 . 013 , 27" x 20" elongated flat slab, vitreous china front, overflow lavatory punched for spread fitting and concealed arm support . 2 . Supply Fitting - 5-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow, blade handle, and grid strainer, „ Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers . 3 . Drain - American Standard No. 7723 . 018 tailpiece offset 4-1/211 for wheelchair, chrome plated. 4 . Trap - Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated with cleanout plug. •W 5 . Support - Zurn ZR-1231 dura coated cast iron "Rigid System" carrier with rectangular steel 4 uprights, concealed arms and sleeves mounted on adjustable headers, 2" cast bronze chrome plated escutcheons . Complete with cast iron feet, alignment truss and mounting fasteners . "" G. Single Bowl Sink (P-5) No 1 . Sink - 17" x 20" self rimming single bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening undercoat, punched for three (3) holes on ledge, Just .w SL-2017-A-GR. 2 . Faucet - Single lever swing spout faucet with 8" centers and heavy chrome plating, Delta No. 100 . *w 3 . Stainless steel cup strainer, 1-1/2" tailpiece and P-trap with cleanout nipple . Chrome plated AN Plumbing 15400-14 Am AW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Olsonite; stainless steel sinks shall be Just or Elkay. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc . for proper installation of all fixtures requiring supports . They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses . The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures . C. Water Closet (P-1) Standard Mounting 1 . Closet - American Standard "Afwall" No. 2257 . 103 , vitreous china wall hung, rear outlet, 1 . 5 gpf . , elongated bowl, siphon jet toilet with 1-1/2" top spud. 2 . Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111 with 111 angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges . 3 . Seat - Olsonite #95-SS white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge . 4 . Mounting - Standard roughing, Zurn "Monolithic" chair carrier Z-1203 , No. 1204, No. 1209 or No. 1212 series as required. D. Lavatory (P-2) Standard Mounting 1 . Basin - American Standard "Lucerne" No. 0355 . 012 vitreous china lavatory with back and side shields, punched for center set fitting, con- cealed arm wall mounting. 2 . Supply Fitting - 5-60-G Symmons, Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stop, time limit stop with 0 . 5 gpm flow, and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers . 3 . Trap - Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated with cleanout plug. 4 . Support - Zurn ZR-1231 dura coated cast iron "Rigid System" carrier with rectangular steel Plumbing 15400-13 AW ... ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .w applied 1/4" thick in one coat, trowelled to a smooth finish. G. Insulate all vertical and horizontal rain conductor piping and fittings the same as for cold water piping. 2 . 08 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with ., aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 20F subdivisions . Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one- third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulat- ed pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator' s position. B . Ranges shall be manufacturer' s standard closest to the following: 1 . Hot water: 25OF - 2400F. so 2 . Cold water: OoF - 100OF 2 . 09 PRESSURE GAUGES w. A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale . To be U. S . Gage Co. , or approved equal . 2 . 10 PLUMBING FIXTURES o° A. General Requirements : References made herein are to establish type and quality of materials . Exposed ON traps and supply pipes for all fixtures shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall . Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated on nickel plated brass with polished, "" bright surfaces . Vitreous china and acid-resisting enameled cast iron fixtures shall be American Stan- dard, Kohler, or Eljer; toilet seats to be Church or .. Plumbing 15400-12 "W am so ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel- bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-6 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN- 1405-2 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for Ok carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2 . 07 INSULATION an A. All new and construction damaged water piping shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass pipe insula- tion with self-sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water up 0W to 1-1/2" and 1-1/2" thick insulation on piping 2" and larger, 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type, Certainteed 115000 Snap-On" low or equal by Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning. B. Fittings shall be insulated with PVC jackets applied over fiberglass blanket with joints taped. Cold water on piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlap- ping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. Jackets shall be Certainteed "Snap-On" or equal . all C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer' s recommendations . Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. OR D. Install an 18" length of rigid (load bearing) insula- tion at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. To be calcium silicate, or equal . E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav- Guard" insulation system, Model 102 w/105 offset, or equal . 40 F. Insulate shell of hot water generator with two layers of i" thick calcium silicate block insulation, securely banded in place, tightly butted, joints 40 staggered and secured with No. 16 gauge galvanized or stainless steel wire or 1/2" x . 015" galvanized steel bands on 12" maximum centers for large areas . Where OR required, welded studs, clips or angles shall be provided as anchors for wires and bands . Over the insulation, 1" hexagonal mesh wire shall be tightly stretched in place with edges laced together. Finish OR shall be a hydraulic insulating and finishing cement Plumbing 15400-11 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . Valve shall be rated to reduce the 90 psi inlet pressure to 70 psi outlet pressure, with a maxi- mum flow of 160 gpm. Valve size is to be 3" manufacturer shall determine proper valve size prior to ordering. Valve shall be rated for minimum working pressure of 200 psi . 2 . Install in parallel with the main valve a small Watts pressure reducing valve, Model U5-3/4" with inlet and outlet ball valves . Pressure reducing valve shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi . Flow rate shall be 10 gpm or less . 2 . 05 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron and steel pipe - Grinnell Fig. #260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at 10' intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot and cold water and copper waste and vent piping - Grinnell Fig. #70 at 6' intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; 10' intervals for piping at 1- 1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in- stalled outside the insulation. Steel hangers may be used with shields on outside of pipe insulation. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 6" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. E. Gas piping shall be supported by steel clevis hangers, Grinnell Fig. #260 . 2 . 06 CLEANOUTS A. Accessible cleanouts shall be provided in all soil, waste, and drainage piping at maximum 50' intervals and at every change in direction. Co-ordinate locations with Architect . AM Plumbing 15400-10 m ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Wrought copper solder joint fittings, ASTM-214, 95-5 tin/antimony solder. C. Below floor slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type "K" soft rolled or with silver solder joints . 2 . 03 GAS PIPING A. Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable iron ± fittings . Provide necessary square head shut-off cocks and drips where shown or required. All joints for malleable iron fittings shall be made with "Rectoseal" and tested with 10 lb. air pressure for a period of 6 hours and made up in accordance with NFPA, state and local rules and regulations . Piping to be supported by pipe hangers so that there will be no pockets or depressions . Piping 3" diameter and larger shall have welded joints . 2 . 04 VALVES A. Valves shall be manufactured by Fairbanks, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Hammond, Crane, Powell, or Stockham. (Federal Specifications : WW-V-54c, Class A, Type 1) . 1 . Gate : 125 lb. WSP, all bronze, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece wedge, designed to permit repacking under pressure, Lunkenheimer Cat . No. 2133 , or equal . 2 . Check: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze horizontal swing type, screwed caps, bronze disc designed to permit regrinding of seat without removal of body, Lunkenheimer Cat . No. 2145, or equal . B . In lieu of gate valves on water lines, the Plumbing Subcontractor has the option of installing "Apollo" or equal brass or bronze solder end ball valves, with teflon seats and full line size ports, unless specifi- cally noted otherwise. C. Furnish and install on water service entrance Watts Series ACV pressure reducing valve figure 115-7 globe, angle and downstream surge control valve . The valve body shall be cast iron with FDA approved fused epoxy coating, internal and external . Provide with factory inlet strainer. Valve shall be equipped with ball valve to isolate pilot system from the main valve. Plumbing 15400-9 ..a ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL instructions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers . B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use , of all systems and all apparatus pertaining thereto. 1 . 16 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial .. completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. MW B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials Im or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect . C . Acid waste and vent piping above and below grade shall be polypropylene Schedule 40 with heat fused joints . 1 . 17 RECORD DRAWINGS " A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . PART 2 - MATERIALS 2 . 01 SOIL WASTE VENT AND DRAINAGE PIPING A. Below grade - standard weight bell and spigot cast iron, with lead and oakum, or approved resilient gasket joints . B. Above grade - standard weight, no hub, cast iron, with approved clamps over elastomeric sealing sleeve, or .' Type DWV copper with cast brass or wrought copper drainage pattern fittings . 2 . 02 WATER PIPING .. A. Type "L" copper tubing, hard drawn. Plumbing 15400-8 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost . 1 . 12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades . 1 . 13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc . , Ma resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. 1 . 14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, ductwork, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, except that horizontal runs at the ceiling in rooms that have exposed structure may be exposed. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, except where installed on the room side of continuous wall insulation. 1 . 15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete instructions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his Subcontract . These Plumbing 15400-7 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract . He is to assume all responsibility ,. regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 . 09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . 1 . 10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1 . ., 1 . 11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall refer to the Archi- tectural Drawings of interior details, plans, eleva- tions, and structural layout in preparing his esti- mate . These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements . , B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall assume all respon- sibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings . D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Sub- contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as Plumbing 15400-6 ..N ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . 06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U. S . made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment . Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 . 07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) clean and legible sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all specific details, dimensions, capacities, etc . of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. "* C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications . The responsi- bility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Subcontractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Subcontractor will be required to remove such materi- als and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect . 1 . 08 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS WA A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be Plumbing 15400-5 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. Existing systems and piping are shown in their approximate locations, but shall be worked on or connected to where found. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof . Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements . F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items . G. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times . All fixtures and • operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means . H. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I . The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the Archi- tectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrep- ancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements . B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Require- ments . Plumbing 15400-4 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . 04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS " A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Subcontractor himself were present . The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins . C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contrac- tors, work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsi- bility incurred by the Plumbing Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Subcontrac- tor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc . , hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place . In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the Plumbing 15400-3 MrA ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 6 . Provide and install water meter, and pressure reducing valve station at domestic water service entry. 7 . Acid waste and vent system including acid neu- tralizing tank. 8 . Furnish and install sediment, grease, and/or plaster traps or interceptors as required. 9 . Provide back water preventers (point-of-use types) where shown on Drawings, specified, or required. 10 . Furnish access panels . low 11 . Disconnect and remove all existing plumbing systems and equipment made obsolete by new construction. 12 . All existing plumbing systems and equipment which are to remain in operation and which interfere with new construction shall be relo- ..w cated and reconnected as required. 13 . Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. "" 14 . Guarantee and instructions . go 1 . 03 CODES ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials, and the installation thereof, shall ,m conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Massachusetts Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the ow Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable ■s codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall comply with the Local 06 Code Enforcement Officials, instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. ow .W Plumbing 15400-2 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECCTION 15400 - PLUMBING '*®! (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 INTENT 4W A. The Subcontractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and equipment neces- sary for completion of the Plumbing System, in accord- ance with this Section of the Specifications and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract . 1 . 02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . New and revisions to existing sanitary, drain, waste and vent systems and storm drain conductor piping inside the building and connection to site sanitary sewer and storm drain systems 10' outside of the foundation wall, or as specifi- cally called out on the Drawings . 2 . New and revisions to existing hot and cold water distribution and hot water recirculation sys- tems, water heater, and hot water generator. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports, valves, and pumps, as well as gas fired water heater, heat exchanger, and storage tank. 3 . Natural gas piping system per Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, including connections to kitchen equipment, water heater and boilers (both prima- ry combustion and secondary lines to gas burner pilots) . 4 . Plumbing fixtures, trim and supports. 5 . Connections to fixtures and equipment furnished and installed by others. Plumbing 15400-1 �r 00 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS—J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .mm 5.02 CLEANING UP amp A. All debris and surplus materials resulting from installation work shall be removed promptly as work progresses by this Subcontractor, to a location indicated by the General Contractor. No B. Following completion, and before final acceptance by the Owner, clean finished surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and leave specified work free of imperfections. Ak 5.03 PROTECTION OF WORK 4W A. Protect specified work from damage during transportation to the project site, storage at the site, during installation, and after completion until acceptance by the Owner. oft B. Protect adjacent work under other contracts during installation until completion of specified work. After completion, the contractor for other work shall be responsible for the protection of his work until 4M acceptance by the Owner. C. Damaged work as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired or ..% replaced as determined by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 00 ow .ew. w seR Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-36 AN ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4.04 MISCELLANEOUS CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT: MC-01 FULL-HEIGHT STORAGE SEMBLY ON (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Tech. Wood Shop #1005 Dimensions: 4'-0" x 24 11D x 84 11H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884TW. OR MC-02 FULL-HEIGHT STORAGE & COUNTER ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Tech. Ed #1027 Dimensions: 13'-6" x 24"D and 27"D per plan x 30"H at work surface and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 2-4884GS. so 1-Apron frame assembly 5'-0"L x 25"D x 5"H with two (2) pairs of legs. Cut apron on long side to reduce apron height to 211. 1-Top (Type-E) 5'-5" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash and left endsplash. MC-03 FULL-HEIGHT STORAGE ASSEMBLY O (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Tech. Ed. #1027 Dimensions: 8'-0" x 24"D x 84"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884GS. 1-4884TW. OR MC-04 FULL-HEIGHT STORAGE & COUNTER ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Tech. Ed. #1027 an Dimensions: 15'-0" x 24"D and 27 11D per plan x 30"H at work surface and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884GS. 1-Apron frame assembly consisting of two (2) 5'-1"W x 25"D x 5"H apron sections with three (3) pairs of legs. Cut apron on long side to reduce apron height to 2". 1-Top (Type-E) 11'-0" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4 11H backsplash, left and right endsplash. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Examine space in which specified work is to be installed to assure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of specified work. Report in writing to the Architect, any deficiency in the work of other contractors affecting specified work. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of space conditions. B. This Subcontractor shall obtain and verify all measurements and conditions on the job, and shall assume all responsiblity in respect to same. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-35 W ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL AW AC-10 FULL-HEIGHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY-"L" SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED ..P Location: Art Room Dimensions: 6'-0" x 18'-0" x 24"D and 30"D per plan x 36"H at couner and 84"H along wall; and 4'-6" x 4'-6" x 36"H at peninsula section. Description: Same as for Item AC-01, except reverse per floor plan. AC-11 WORKTABLE SIX (6) REQUIRED AMIN, Location: Art Room Dimensions: 7'-0" x 3'-6" x 30"H. Description: Same as for Item AC-03. am AC-12 COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 19'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2"H and 36"H per plan x 84"H o overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-48DC. „m 2-42DC. 1-48C. 1-48HAS. 3-4830WC. AW 2-4230WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 19'-0" x 30"D x 1-1/4" thick with a dropped section at sink location, with a 4"H backsplash and one (1) sink .ek cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. AC-13 COUNTER & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 8'-0" x 12'-6" x 24"D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge on outside wall x 30"H. • Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 3-42OS/18. 2-36OS/18. 1-3636WC. IM 2-3036WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 8 '-0" x 12'-6" x 24"D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge x 1-1/4" thick. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" top material with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 2-Bar diffuser grilles 5'-0" x 4"W. .�r AC-14 COUNTER ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 19'-8" x 31'-6" x 18' with a 6"H x 6"D box ledge on outside wall x 24"D per plan x 30"H. we Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 4-48OS/18. 9-42OS/18. Mr 1-Top (Type-D) 19'-8" x 31'-6" x 18"D plus a 6"H x 6"D box ledge on outside wall x 24"D per plan x 1-1/4" thick. ..a Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-34 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL crossbraces and top (Type-E) 7'-0" x 3'-6" x 1-1/4" thick. Provide legs with adjustable floor glides. AC-04 COUNTER & WALL ASSEMBLY-11T." SHAPED ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 31'-6" x 19'-6" x 24 11D to include a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge x 30"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 3-48OS/18. 10-420S/18. 1-Top (Type-E) 31'-6" x 19'-6" x 18 11D x 1-1/4" thick plus a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge and left endsplash. Provide box ledge with Type- "BIT material and cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. AC-05 COUNTER & WALT AS MB Y-'' l' S H P D ON (1 ) RFQTTTREn Location: Art Room Dimensions: 13'-0" x 8'-0" x 18 11D with a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge x 24 11D per plan x 30 11H at work surface and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-48OS/18. 2-42OS/18. 2-36OS/18. 1-3636WCO. 2-3036WCO. 1-Top (Type-E) 13'-0" x 8'-0" x 18"D plus a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge x 24"D per plan x 1-1/4" thick. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" material and cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. AC-06 OPEN SHELVING ASSEMBLY ON (1 ) R O TRFD Location: Kiln Room Dimensions: 7'-6" x 24"D x 84"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 3-30840S. AC-07 FULL-HETGHT STQ AQF ASSEMBLY O (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Storage Dimensions: 17'-6" x 24"D x 84"H. 1*r Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 4-4284GS. 1-4284VT. AC-08 OPEN SHFLVTNG ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REO TRFD Location: Kiln Room Dimensions: 7'-6" x 24"D x 84 11H. u Description: Same as for Item AC-06. AC-09 FULL-HEIGHT STORAGE A S MBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Storage Dimensions: 17'-6" x 24"D x 84"H. Description: Same as for Item AC-07. +�► Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-33 ow ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL w� HC-12 FOUR-STATION WORKTABLE SIX (6) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Clothing Lab #1001 Dimensions: 6'-0" x 4'-0" x 30 11H at work surface. Description: Worktable shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph 2.05H of this Section of the Specifications, with one (1) apron frame assembly, two (2) pair of legs with crossbraces and stretcher, and top (Type-D) 6'-0" x 4'-0" x 1-1/4" thick. Provide legs with adjustable floor glides. Cut aprons on two (2) long sides to reduce apron height to 2 11H. 4.03 ART CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT: AC-01 FULL-HEIGHT COUNTER SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY-"L SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 18'-0" x 6'-0" x 24"D and 30"D per plan x 36"H at counter and 84 11H along wall; and 4'-6" x 4'-6" x 36"H. " Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884TW. 1-3684GS. w 2-54SC. 1-42DC. 1-36DS. MR 1-24C. 1-4230WC. 1-3630WC. 1-2430WC. ow 1-Framed tackboard panel 4'-6 11W x 30"H with oak hardwood frame, and top and bottom returns to wall. 1-Top (Type-D) 13'-0" x 30 11H x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backslash .,e, and right endsplash. 1-Stainless steel top assembly 4'-6" x 4'-6" x 1-1/4" thick with raised marine edges, and two (2) integral stainless steel single bowl sinks #SS-3. ow AC-02 COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) RE0TTTRRn Location: Art Room Dimensions: 20'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2"H and 36 11H per plan x 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: ..� 3-48DC. 1-48C. 1-48HAS. 5-4830WC. ow 1-Top (Type-D) 20'-0" x 30"D x 1-1/4" thick with a dropped section at sink location; with a 4"H backsplash, and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. AC-03 WORKTABLE SIX (6) REO TIRED Location: Art Room Dimensions: 7'-0" x 3'-6" x 30"H. Description: Worktable shall be constructed in accordance with the construction paragraph of this Section of the Specifications, with awe two (2) apron frame assemblies, three (3) pair of legs with Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-32 ox ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL An 1-SMA overhead swivel mirror assembly. Note: Mount bench on four (4) casters, two (2) with locks. HC-08 F T,L.-H T�HT TO A ASSFMB Y ON (1) FO TRFD Location: Home-Ec./Food Lab #1003 Dimensions: 2'-0" x 24" x 84"H. do Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-2484CU. HC-09 OPEN SHELVTNQ, ASSEMBLY ON (1 ) REQUIRED ON Location: Home-Ec./Clothing Lab #1001 Dimensions: 14'-0" x 18"D with a 6"D x 6"H box ledge x 30 11H at work surface and 36 11H at top of box ledge. OW Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 4-42OS/18. 1-Top (Type-D) 14'-0" x 18"D with a 6"D x 6"H box ledge of Type- "B" top material with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H left endsplash. HC-10 OPEN SHELVING ASSEMBLY ON (1) REQUIRED +o Location: Home-Ec./Clothing Lab #1001 Dimensions: 16'-6" x 18"D with a 6 11D x 6 11H box ledge x 30"H at work surface and 36 11H at top of box ledge. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 4-42OS/18. 1-Top (Type-D) 16'-6" x 18"D with a 6"D x 6"H box ledge of Type- "B" top material with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles x 1-1/4" thick with a 4 11H endsplash. 1-Base scribe filler panel 2'-6 11w. HC-11 F T L-H .TGHT, COUNTER SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Clothing Lab #1001 Dimensions: 30'-0" x 19'-0" x 24"D and 25"D per plan x 36"H at counter and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884TW. 3-4884TT. 1-4284GS. 2-3684GS. 1-3684CU. 1-3684IB. 1-1884GS. 2-42DC. 1-42HAS. 2-4230WC. 1-4224WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 10'-6" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, left endsplash, and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. 2-Full scribe filler panel 9 11W, with top closure panel. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-31 MW ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL HC 05 COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Foods Lab #1003 Dimensions: 9'-0" x 11'-6" x 25"D with a 6"D x 6"H box ledge on outside wall per plan x 36"H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: r 2-36DC. 1-36SC. 1-36C. 1-18D4. 2-3630WC. 1-2430WC. 1-3624WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 11-6-1/2" x 25"D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge of Type-"B" material x 1-1/4" thick. 1-Top (Type-D) 5'-0" x 11'-0" x 25"D to include a 6"D x 6"H box ledge of Type-"B" material along window wall x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash along inside wall with right endsplash; one (1) stainless steel inset (15" x 18") and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-2. 1-Wall scribe filler panel 6"W with top closure panel. Appliances: Provide assembly with the following appliances: wlao 1-RE-30 HC 06 F LL HEIGHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Foods Lab #1003 low Dimensions: 12'-9" x 24"D and 25"D per plan x 33-1/2"H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: w 1-2784WO. 1-36HAS. 1-54HAS. 2-18D4. 00 1-3636WC. 3-1836WC. 1-3630WC. OWN 1-Top (Type-D) 10'-6" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash and left endsplash; one (1) stainless steel insert (15" x 18"; one (1) cutout for electric cooktop and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. Appliances: Provide assembly with the following appliances: 1-EMWO Microwave/Double Ovens. 1-RC-36 Electric Cooktop. 1-VH-36 Ventless Hood Assembly. HC-07 MOBILE DEMO BENCH ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Food Lab #1003 Dimensions: 5'-2" x 27" x 36"H at work surface and 84"H overall. Description: Mobile demo bench shall consist of the following components: $ft' 1-24D4-M (M=less toe-base) . 1-36C-M (M=less toe-base) . 1-Top (Type-D) 5'-2" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick. go Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-30 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL HC-03 FT ­HrTrH CouNTFg. SINK & WALL AS RTV "L"SHAPED ON (1) REQUIERn Location: Home-Ec./Food Lab #1003 Dimensions: 19'-9" x 9'-0" x 24"D and 25"D per plan x 36"H at counter and 84"H overall. ru Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4284FS. 2-36DC. 1-36SC. 1-36C. 1-18D4. 2-3630WC. 1-2730WC. 1-3624WC. 1-3615WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 11'-0" x 5'-0" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick, with a 4"H backsplash and left endsplash; one (1) stianless steel insert (15" x 18") , and one (1) sink cutout. Backsplash at stub- partition to be 9"H. 1-Top (Type-D) 11-6-1/2" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 9"H backsplash. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-2. 1-Duplex electric receptacle. Appliances: Provide assembly with the following accessories: 1-RF-36 1-RG-30 Note: This Equipment Subcontractor shall provide stub partition 8'-0- 1/2"L x 46"H between Items HC-01 and HC-02. Provide partition with a solid oak cap 81-0-1/2" x 6"W x 1" thick, and end finished so to match casework. Stub partition shall be fully enclosed with high-pressure plastic laminated panels. HC-04 COUNTER, SINK & WATT A MRTY-"T" SHAPED ON (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Foods Lab #1003 Dimensions: 9'-0" x 11'-9" x 25"D x 36"H at counter and 84"H overall. Mwr Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 2-36DC. 1-36SC. 1-36C. 1-18D4. 2-3630WC. 1-3624WC. 1-2730WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 11-6-1/2" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 9"H backsplash. 1-Top (Type-D) 5'-0" x 11'-6" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick, with a 4"H backsplash and left endsplash; one (1) stainless steel insert (15" x 18") and one (1) sink cutout. Backsplash at stub- partition to be 9"H. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-2. 1-Duplex electric receptacle. 1-Wall scribe filler panel 6"W, with top closure to wall. 1-Base scribe filler panel 6"W. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-29 .r ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL srs 4.02 HOME-ECONOMICS CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT: HC 01 FULL HEIGHT COUNTER,, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY-111,11 SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-EC./Foods Lab #1003 Dimensions: 14'-3" x 9'-0" x 24"D and 25"D per plan x 36 11H aT counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-3684TW. 2-36DC. 1-36SC. 1-36C. 1-18D4. +� 2-3630WC. 1-2730WC. 1-3624WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 11'-0" x 5'-0" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick, with a 4"H backsplash and left endsplash; one (1) stainless steel insert (15" x 1811) and one (1) sink cutout. Backsplash at stub- partition to be 9"H. ... 1-Top (Type-D) 11-6-1/2" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 9"H backsplash. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-2. 1-Duplex electric receptacle. Appliances: Provide assembly with the following appliances: 1-RE-30 Note: This Equipment Subcontractor shall provide stub partition 8'-0- 1/2"L x 46 11H between Items HC-01 and HC-02. Provide partition with a solid oak cap 81-0-1/2" x 6"W x 1" thick, and end finished to match casework. Stub partition shall be fully enclosed with high-pressure plastic laminated panels. HC 02 FULL HEIGHT COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY-"L"SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Home-Ec./Foods Lab #1003 Dimensions: 9'-0" x 16'-3" x 24"D and 25"D per plan x 36 11H at counter and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: . , 1-3684GS. 2-36DC. 1-36SC. 1-36C. 1-18D4. 2-3630WC. 1-2730WC. `ow 1-3624WC. 1-Top (Type-D) 11-6-1/2" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 9"H backsplash. on 1-Top (Type-D) 5'-0" x 11'-0" x 25"D x 1-1/4" thick, with a 4"H backsplash and right endsplash; one (1) stainless steel insert (15" x 18") and one (1) sink cutout. Backsplash at stub- partition to be 9"H. All 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-2 . 1-Duplex electric receptacle. Appliances: Provide assembly with the following appliances: 1-RE-30 Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-28 III ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SC-299 LECTURE BENCH ONE (1 ) REOUT En Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 12'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-01. #�r SC-30 F7 HETQHT COUNTER,,RTNK & WALL ASSEMBLY "L" SHAPED ON (1) REO I RD Location: Science #2042 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 6'-0" x 18'-6" x 12"D x 24"D and 33"D to include a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge x 30 11H and 36 11H at counter per plan x 84"H overall. Description: Same as for Item SC-27, except reverse per floor plan. 'w SC-31 COUNTER & SUNK ASSEMBLY ON (1) FO T ED Location: Science #2042 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 11'-6" x 33 11D to include a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge x 33- 4W 1/2"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-26. SC-32 COUNTER & RTNK A MBT v " SHAPED ON (1) REQUIRED ' Location: Science #2042 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 24'-4" x 26'-6" x 27"D x 36 11H. Description: Same as for Item SC-25, except reverse per floor plan. SC-33 WORKTABLE T (1 2) REQUIRED Location: Science #2042 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 4'-6" x 24"D x 30"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-19. SC-34 SAFETY CABINET ON (1) R O IR n + * Location: Science #2042 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 36" x 24"D x 84"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-18. 40 SC-35 FULL-HEIGHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ON (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Science Prep #2039 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 14'-6" x 24"D and 27 11D per plan x 36"H at counter and '00 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884GS. 1-42DC. 1-42SC. 1-18DC. 3-4230WC. 1-Top (Type-A) 10'-6" x 27 11D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4 11H backsplash, left endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Epoxy resin sink assembly Type-"A". 1-Double gas turret. Accessories: Provide assembly with the following accessoies: 1-24GW Undercounter Glassware Washer. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-27 sill ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .. 1-Top (Type-A) 26'-6" x 24'-4" x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, four (4) sink cutouts, and column cutout per plan. 4-Epoxy resin sink assembly Type-"B". 8-Upright rod assembly. SC 26 COUNTER & SINK 1OORMRT v ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 11'-6" x 33"D to include a 6"H x 6 11D box ledge x 33- 1/2"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-36HAS. 2-Apron frame sections 3'-9" x 25"D x 5 11H with one (1) pair of legs per plan and elevation details and in accordance with the Specifications. 2-PED, pedestal support. a. 1-Top (Type-A) 11'-6" x 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6 11D box ledge x 1- 1/4" thick with left endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" top material and cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4, of acid resistant stainless steel #316. 2-Bar diffuser grilles 4'-0" x 4"W. 2-Upright rod assembly. 2-Single gas turrets. SC 27 FULL HEIGHT,CQUNTER,SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY—"L" SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 18'-6" x 6'-0" x 12"D x 24"D and 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6 11D box ledge x 30 11H and 36 11H at counter per plan x 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-3684OS. 1-2484TW. .en« 1-30SC. 3-2430WCO. 2-Apron frame sections 4'-3" x 25"D x 5"H with one (1) pair of legs. 1-Apron frame section 3'-6" x 25"D x 5"H with two (2) pair of legs. Reduce apron height to 2 11H along front edge per elevation detail. 1-Top (Type-A) 11'-6" x 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge x 1- 1/4" thick with right endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" top material with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 1-Top (Type-A) 4'-0" x 33"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4 11H backsplash, left and right endsplashes. 2-Bar diffuser grilles 4'-0" x 4 11W. N, 2-Upright rod assembly. 1-Epoxy resin sink assembly Type-"B". SC-28 WORKTABLE TWELVE (12) REQUIRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 4'-6" x 24"D x 30 11H. Description: Same as for Item SC-19. *" Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-26 .", ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SC-19 WORKTABLE TWELVE (1 2) REQUIRED Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 4'-6" x 24"D x 30"H. Description: Worktable shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph 2.05H of this Section of the Specifications, with one (1) apron frame assembly, two (2) pair of legs with crossbraces and top (Type-C) 4'-6" x 24"D x 1-1/4" thick. Ar Provide legs with adjustable floor glides. SC-20 F .-HET HT COUNTER, SINK & WALL A SEMRTY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science Prep #2005 (EQ-1) ON Dimensions: 14'-0" x 24 11D and 27 11D per plan x 36 11H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Same as for Item SC-13. OR SC-21 FULL-HEIGHT O TNT R, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science Prep #2033 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 14'-0" x 24 11D and 27 11D per plan x 36 11H at counter and 84 11H overall. Description: Same as for Item SC-13. w EC-22 FULL-HEIGHT COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Storage #2045 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 14'-6" x 24"D and 27 11D per plan x 36 11H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884GS. 1-42SC. (Iw+ 2-42DC. 3-4230WC. 1-Top (Type-A) 10'-6" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, on left and right endsplashes and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Sink assembly Type-"A". 1-Double gas turret - 90 degrees. SC-23 LECTURE B •N H ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 12'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-01, except reverse per floor plan. SC-24 SAFETY CABINET ON (1) R OTTRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 3'-0" x 24"D x 84"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-18. SC-25 COUNTER & SINK ASS MB Y ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2043 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 26'-6" x 24'-4" x 27 11D x 36"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 4-30SC. 8-4'-0" x 25"D x 5"H apron frame sections with a total of six (6) pairs of legs, per plan and elevation details, and in accordance with the Specifications. 1-2'-3" x 25"D x 5"H apron frame section. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-25 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ..k S(' 15 FULL HEIGHT TER ASSEMBLY-"L" SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 6'-0" x 8'-0" x 12"D and 33"D to include a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge per plan x 30 11H at work surface and 84 11H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: ..s 1-3684OS. 1-3636WCO. 1-Apron frame assembly 7'-0" x 25"D x 5 11H to be fabricated in two (2) sections with three (3) pair of legs, in accordance with the Specifications. Reduce apron height to 2" along front edge per elevation detail. 1-Top (Type-A) 7'-0" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 6"H x 6 11D box .� ledge with cutout to accept bar diffuser grille. 1-Bar diffuser grill 4'-0" x 411. 16 COUNTER & SINK ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 23'-4" x 33 11D to include a 6 11H x 6 11D box ledge x 33- 1/2"H and 36 11H per plan. �* Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-30SC. 1-36HAS. 2-Apron frame assemblies 4'-6" x 25"D x 5 11H with one (1) pair of legs in accordance with the Specifications. 2-Apron frame assemblies 3'-10" x 25"D x 5"H with a total of one (1) pair of legs per plan and elevation details and in accordance with the Specifications. 2-PED, Pedestal support. 1-Top (Type-A) 12'-0" x 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6 11D box ledge x 1- 1/4" thick with one (1) sink cutout. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" top material and cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 1-Top (Type-A) 11'-4" x 33"D to include a 6."H x 6"D box ledge x 1- *•! 1/4" thick with right endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. Provide box ledge with Type-"B" top material and cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. 1-Epoxy resin sink assembly Type-"B". 4-Bar diffuser grilles 5'-0" x 4"W. ow 4-Upright rod assembly. 2-Single gas turret. SC 17 COUNTER & SINK ASSEMBLY "L" SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED ers Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 24'-4" x 29'-8" x 27"D x 36 11H. Description: Provide assembly with the following components: 1-3684TW. 4-30SC. SC 18 SAFETY CABINET ONE (1 ) REQUIRED Ago Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 36" x 24 11D x 84"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: am, 1-3684SC. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-24 40 4% ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SC-07 LECTURE BENCH ON ( ) REQUIRED Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 12'-0" x 30 11D x 33-1/2"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-01. SC-08 COUNTER & SINK ASS MRTY-''L" SHAPED ON (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 16'-4" x 25'-6" x 27"D and 33"D to include a 6"H x 6"D " " box ledge per plan x 36"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-02, except reverse per floor plan. oft SC-09 COUNTER & SINK ASSEMRTY ON (1) R O iT FD Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 23'-0" x 33"D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge per plan x 36"H. Description: Same as for Item SC-03 reverse P , except p per floor plan. SC-10 FULL-HEIGHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 17'-0" x 24"D and 27 11D per plan x 33-1/2"H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Same as for Item SC-04, except reverse per floor plan. SC-11 WORKTABLE TWELVE (1 2) REQUIRED Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 5'-0" x 2'-0" x 30 11H. Description: Same as for Item SC-05. SC-12 FULL-HEIGHT, SHELVING COUNTrg & WAT.T. ASSEMRTY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2055 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 6'-6" x 12"D and 30 11D per plan x 30"H at counter and 84 11H overall. Description: Same as for Item SC-06. SC-13 F L j,-H •TQHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY Y ON (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Science Prep #2025 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 14'-0" x 24"D and 27 11D per plan x 36 11H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-4884GS. 1-48SC. 2-36DC. 1-4830WC. 2-3630WC. 1-Top (Type-A) 10'-0" x 27 11D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, left endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. 1-Sink assembly Type-"A". 1-Double gas turret - 90 degrees. SC-14 LECTURE BENCH ONE (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Science #2004 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 12'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2 11H. No Description: Same as for Item SC-01. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-23 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .. SC-03 COUNTER & SINK ASSEMBLY ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 23'-0" x 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge x 36"H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 2-30SC. ' 1-Apron frame assembly consisting of four (4) apron frame sections 4'-6"W x 25"D x 5"H with three (3) pair of legs, all in conformance with the construction paragraph of this Section. w� 1-Top (Type-A) 23'-0" x 33 11D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge x 1- 1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, right endsplash; and two (2) sink cutouts. Provide box ledge with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 2-Epoxy resin sink assembly, Type-"B". 4-Upright rod assembly. SC-04 FULL-HEIGHT, COUNTER, SINK & WALL ASSEMBLY ONE (1 ) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 17'-0" x 24"D and 27"D per plan x 33-1/2 11H at counter and 84"H overall. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-3684SC 1-2484TW 'AM 1-36HAS 2-PED, Pedestal support. 2-Apron frame assemblies 4'-3" x 25"D x 5"H, each with one (1) pair of legs, all in conformance with the construction paragraph of this Section. 1-Top (Type-A) 12'-0" x 27"D x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, right endsplash and one (1) sink cutout. *** 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4. 2-Single gas turret. 2-Upright rod assembly. SC-05 WORKTABLE TWELVE (12) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 5'-0" x 2'-0" x 30 11H. Description: Worktable shall be constructed in accordance with Paragraph 2.05H of this Section of the Specifications, with one (1) apron frame assembly, two (2) pair of legs with crossbraces war and top (Type-C) 60" x 24" x 1-1/4" thick. Provide legs with adjustable floor glides. SC-06 FULL-HEIGHT SHELVING & COUNTER ASSEMBLY ON (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 6'-6" x 12"D and 30"D per plan x 30"H at counter and 84"H overall. w.a Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-3684OS. 1-4230WCO. 1-Apron frame assembly 3'-6" x 30"D x 5"H with two (2) pair of legs. Apron shall be cut on long side to reduce apron height to 2". Legs shall be secured to floor. 1-Top (Type-A) 3'-6" x 30"D x 1-1/4" thick with 4 11H backsplash and left endsplash. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-22 .. 46 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 4 - ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED O 4.01 SCIENCE CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT: AA SC-01 LECTURE BENCH ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 12'-0" x 30"D x 33-1/2"H. 40 Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 1-36D5, with one (1) lock, 32-1/4"H. 1-36DC, 32-1/4 11H. 1-24DC, 32-1/4 11H. 1-Apron frame assembly 48"W x 30"D x 5 11H. 1-Left end pedestal support 3" wide consisting of flat stud-frame sandwiched between two (2) layers of 3/4" thick oak-veneered plywood with edge enclosed with same material. 1-Top (Type-A) 12'-0" x 30"D x 1-1/4" thick with one (1) sink cutout. 1-Stainless steel sink assembly #SS-4, of acid resistant stainless steel #316. 1-Double gas turret - 90 degrees. 1-Duplex electrical receptacle pedestal box. 1-Upright rod assembly. 1-Continuous, flush back panel of 3/4" thick oak-veneered plywood, extending entire length of assembly. 1-Rear recessed, vertical kneespace panel 48" wide located 19" ' from top front edge, extending from finished floor to a height 6" below top work surface. Rear panel shall be removable and provided with service cutouts as required. SC-02 COUNTER & SINK ASSEMBLY-"L" SHAPED ONE (1) REQUIRED Location: Science #2054 (EQ-1) Dimensions: 25'-6" x 16'-4" x 27"D, and 33 11D to include a 6 11H x 6"D box ledge on outside wall, per plan, x 36 11H. Description: Assembly shall consist of the following components: 3-30SC. 40" 6-Apron frame assemblies 4'-6"W x 25"D x 5"H with a total of four (4) pairs of legs, all in conformance with the construction paragraph of this Section. *a 1-Apron frame assembly 2'-9"W x 25"D x 5"H with one (1) pair of legs, all in conformance with the construction paragraph of this Section. 1-Top (Type-A) 25'-6" x 16'-4" x 33"D to include a 6"H x 6"D box ledge on outside wall x 27"D per plan x 1-1/4" thick with a 4"H backsplash, left endsplash; and three (3) sink cutouts. Provide box ledge with cutouts to accept bar diffuser grilles. 3-Epoxy resin sink assembly, Type-"B". 6-Upright rod assembly. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-21 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 36HAS Handicap Accessible Station 36 11W to consist of a 2 11H apron frame panel; a solid Oak hardwood sloped panel from the rear of apron frame panel to a dimension 6-1/2" below top work surface; and a rear recessed, vertical kneespace panel located 19" from top front edge, extending from finished floor to a height 6" below to work surface. Rear g p panel shall be removable and provided with service cutouts as required. 42HAS Handicap Accessible Station 42 11W, as described herein under .ow 36HAS. 48HAS Handicap Accessible Station 48 11W, as described herein under w 36HAS. 54HAS Handicap Accessible Station 54 11W, as described herein under 36HAS. PED Pedestal Support 3" wide consisting of flat stud- frame sandwiched between two (2) layers of 3/4" thick oak-veneered plywood with end encased with same material. Height and depth shall conform to assembly requirements. Provide integral toe- space recess to match casework components. ate. .w Am No w. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-20 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL EMWO Electric Oven and Microwave Wall Unit, equal to General Electric #JKP76GP, with dual wave microwave upper oven with 1.4 cu. ft. capacity; black glass door; electronic touch front-mounted controls; automatic cooking control with sensor; automatic roasting and defrosting; electronic digital display and clock timer; time- controlled cooking; temperature cook/hold; 99-minute cooking timer; ten (10) power levels; and interior oven light. Full- size lower oven shall be provided with self-cleaning interior; two (2) oven shelves; electronic touch controls; electronic meat thermometer; two-temperature broil setting; oven door on with window; and lift-off oven door. Power requirement shall be 4 . 9 K.W. , 208V/60C/1 phase, direct connection. Cut out dimensions shall be 25 11W x 41-1/4 11H x 23-1/2 11D. ow RC36 Four-Burner Electric Cooktop Unit 36 11W, equal to General Electric #JP622R, porcelain-enameled lift-up cooktop, with two (2) 8" and two (2) 6" plug-in Calrod heating elements; one- piece chrome drip bowls; heating element "on" indicator light; support rod; upfront black glass control panel, and infinite heat rotary controls. Power requirement shall be 7 .3 K.W., so 208V/60C/1 phase, direct connection. Controls shall be top mounted at the center-front of cooktop. RF36 Refrigerator/Freezer, equal to General Electric #TFX22ZAS. Provide refrigerator/freezer with 21.8 cu. ft. total capacity; 6.89 cu. ft. freezer capacity; 14 . 92 cu. ft. fresh food capacity; and 24.3 sq. ft. shelf area; steel doors and case; foam cabinet insulation; baked enamel-on-steel cabinet liner; Permalon II door liner; automatic energy saver; adjustable rollers; door stops and coil-free back. Refrigerator section shall be provided with three (3) glass and three (3) adjustable shelves; one (1) sealed vegetable pan; one (1) adjustable temp. meat pan; utility bin; sealed snack pack; four (4) refrigerator door shelves (two (2) adjustable with "t gallon storage) ; dairy compartment; and one (1) wire rack. Freezer section shall be be provided with one (1) sliding storage bin; four (4) compartment shelves (three (3) 00 adjustable) ; six (6) door shelves; two (3) ice trays; and ice storage bin. VH36 Ventless Hood, equal to General Electric #JN635R, to be mounted beneath wall cabinet per elevations. Provide unit with two (2) speed fan control, one (1) removable grease filter, one (1) charcoal odor filter, cooktop light with night light setting, light cover, rocker switches, 2.5A, 120VAC. MISCELLANEOUS ASSEMBLIES SMA Overhead Mirror Assembly, 66" long x 84"H above finished floor. Mirror shall be provided with a channel aluminum frame mounted on vertical upright supports which shall be firmly attached to bench top and side panels. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-19 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2430WC Wall Cabinet 24"W x 12"D x 30 11H. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves, and hinged door (hinged left or right) . 2730WC Wall Cabinet 27"W x 12"D x 30 11H. Unit description same as for .. 2430WC. 3630WC Wall Cabinet 36"W x 12"D x 30"H. Unit description same as for 2430WC. 4230WC Wall Cabinet 42"W x 12"D x 30 11H. Unit description same as for 2430WC. 4830WC Wall Cabinet 48"W x 12"D x 30 11H. Unit description same as for 2430WC. too 1836WC Wall Cabinet 18"W x 12"D x 36 11H. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves, and hinged door (hinged left or right) . `"R 3036WC Wall Cabinet 30"W x 12"D x 36 11H. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves, and hinged, double doors. oft 3636WC Wall Cabinet 36 11W x 12"D x 36 11H. Unit description same as for 3036WC. .m 3636WCO wall Cabinet, open front, 33 11W x 12"D x 36"H. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves. wo APPLIANCES RE30 Electric Range-30 11W, equal to General Electric #JBP55GS. owl Provide electric range with all standard construction and features to include lift-up porcelain-enameled cooktop, with two (2) 8" and two (2) 6" plug-in Calrod heating elements; self-cleaning oven with two (2) shelves; full-width black A° glass oven door with extra large view window; Clean-Well cooktop system; audible preheated signal; electronic clock and minute timer; automatic oven timer; removable one-piece porcelain-enameled drip bowls; and full,-width fluorescent cooktop night light. Power requirements shall be 8 .3 K.W., 208V/60C/1 phase, with cord and plug. RG30 Gas Range-30"W, equal to General Electric #JGBP32GES. Provide gas range with all standard construction and features to include porcelain-enameled cooktop; extra large self-cleaning oven with towel bar handle; full-width black glass oven door with extra large view window; electronic ignition system; interior oven light; six (6) rack positions; extra large broiler pan/rack; removable oven door and storage drawer; black cast square burner plates; black procelain one-piece drip pans; analog clock/timer; automatic oven timer; and four (4) leveling legs. Power requirements shall be BTU/hr.; 120V/1 ' phase, with cord and plug. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-18 low ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 18DC Drawer & Cupboard Base Cabinet 18" x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with one (1) drawer and cupboard below with one (1) adjustable shelf and hinged door (hinged left or right) . 24DC Drawer & Cupboard Base Cabinet 24" x 22"D. Unit description same as for 18DC. 36DC Drawer & Cupboard Base Cabinet 36" x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with two (2) drawers and cupboard below with one (1) adjustable shelf and hinged, double doors. 42DC Drawer & Cupboard Base Cabinet 42" x 22 11D. Unit description same as for 36DC. ow 48DC Drawer & Cupboard Base Cabinet 48" x 22"D. Unit description same as for 36DC. 36OS Open Shelving Base Cabinet 36 11W x 18"D. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves. 42OS Open Shelving Base Cabinet 42 11W x 18"D. Unit description same as for 36OS. 48OS Open Shelving Base Cabinet 48"W x 18"D. Unit description same as for 36OS. 30SC Sink Base Cabinet 30 11W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with hinged, double doors; and a oak veneered false drawer panel, to be flush with door. 36SC Sink Base Cabinet 36"W x 22"D. Unit description same as for 30SC. 42SC Sink Base Cabinet 42"W x 22 11D. Unit description same as for 30SC. 48SC Sink Base Cabinet 48 11W x 22 11D. Unit description same as for 30SC. 54SC Sink Base Cabinet 54"W x 22 11D. Unit description same as for 36SC, except add an oak-veneered center vertical panel between doors. Doors shall be 22" wide. WALL CABINETS 00 3615WC Wall Cabinet 36 11W x 12"D x 15 11H. Unit shall be provided with hinged, double doors. 3624WC Wall Cabinet 36 11W x 12"D x 24"H. Unit shall be provided with one (1) adjustable shelf, and hinged, double doors. 4224WC Wall Cabinet 42"W x 12"D x 24 11H. Unit shall be provided with one (1) adjustable shelf, and hinged, double doors. tl�t Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-17 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4884TW Wardrobe Storage Case 48"W x 24 11D x 84"H. Unit description same as for 3684TW. 2784WO Wall Oven Case 27" x 24"D x 84 11H. Unit shall be provided with two (2) cupboards each with hinged, double doors. Center panel shall be cut out to accommodate wall oven and microwave unit, Yom specified elsewhere under this Section. 3684VT Vented Metal Storage Cabinet 36"W x 24"D x 84"H. Cabinet shall be constructed of 18 gauge enamelled steel and provided with five (5) adjustable shelves. Shelves and case bottom shall be covered with 1/4" thick non-asbestos transite. Double doors shall be provided with a three-way locking device, with lock. Provide cabinet with exhaust duct collar 6" diameter. Cabinet shall be of welded construction with 18 gauge double-pan construction on sides and doors. Doors shall be welded together with all exposed welds ground smooth. All cabinet bottom shall be flush for easy cleaning. Shelves shall be 18 gauge with all edges flanged down and under. Provide doors with louvers for air circulation. BASE CABINETS Base cabinets for counters 36 11H shall be 34-3/4"H. Base cabinets for counters 33-1/2"H shall be 32-1/4"H. Base cabinets for counters 30 11H shall be 28-3/4"H. wo 24C Cupboard Base Cabinet 24 11W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves and hinged door. (Door hinged left or right.) 36C Cupboard Base Cabinet 36 11W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves and hinged, double doors. 48C Cupboard Base Cabinet 48 11W x 22"D. Unit description same as for 36C. 36DS Damp Storage Cabinet 36"W x 22 11D. Unit shall be entirely galvanized metal lined and furnished with two (2) adjustable perforated metal shelves. Provide unit with double, hinged doors. Cabinet shall be air tight. 18D4 Drawer Base Cabinet 18"W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with four (4) equal-size, full-width drawers. 24D4 Drawer Base Cabinet 24 11W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with ,. four (4) equal-size, full-width drawers. 36D5 Drawer Base Cabinet 36 11W x 22"D. Unit shall be provided with two (2) half width drawers and three (3) full-width drawers. °w Provide with lock. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-16 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4284GS General Storage Case 42"W x 24"D x 84 11H. Unit description same A as for 3684GS. 4884GS General Storage Case 48"W x 24 11D x 84 11H. Unit description same as for 3684GS. 3684IB Ironing Board Storage Case 36 11W x 24"D x 84 11H. Unit shall be provided with a full width horizontal shelf; a vertical divider 8" clear from left side of cabinet; and five (5) 8" wide shelves covered with transite; and a full-height, hinged, door with one (1) lock. 3084OS Open Shelving Storage Case 30"W x 12 11D (unless indicated otherwise under assembly description) x 84"H, with one (1) fixed shelf and four (4) adjustable shelves. 3684OS Open Shelving Storage Case 36 11W x 12 11D. Unit description same as for 3084OS. 3684SC Safety Cabinet 36"W x 24"D x 84"H. Unit shall be provided with eye wash fountain and an emergency shower, and two (2) 10" shelves . Base shall be open to allow for handicap accessibility. Emergency deluge shower shall be equal to Speakman #SE-225 "Lifesaver" unit to consist of shower head, self-closing valve with chain and pull ring, and interconnecting fittings. Eyewash shall be equal to Speakman #5E-460 counter top mounted consisting of mounting bracket, handle sleeve through top, 1/2" full flow valve, push handle, IN supply line strainer with removable element and 1-1/4" O.D. tailpiece. Provide base with recessed kneespace panel, back 19" from front edge of counter, with cutouts as needed. 4884TT Tote Tray Storage Case 48" x 24" x 84 11H. Unit shall be divided into two (2) equal compartments by a fixed horizontal divider shelf. Each compartment shall be divided into twenty-four (24) !! subdivisions, per elevation for storage of tote trays. Furnish unit with forty-eight (48) high-impact polystyrene tote trays 19" x 13-3/4" x 3 11H with label holders, equal to Fabri-Form of Indiana #T-105-3. Provide both upper and lower compartments each with hinged, double doors and one (1) lock. 2484TW Wardrobe Storage Case 24"W x 24"D x 84 11H. Unit shall be divided into two (2) compartments by a vertical divider. Left compartments, 15 11W, shall be provided with one (1) fixed shelf, a 1" diameter chrome hanging rod. Right compartment shall be provided with five (5) adjustable shelves. Provide unit with two (2) full-height, hinged, double-doors, and one (1) lock. Provide unit with a 12" x 15" mirror mounted on inside face of left compartment. 3684TW Wardrobe Storage Case 36 11W x 24 11D x 84 11H. Unit description same as for 2484TW. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-15 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Nitric Acid 20% or 30% will show moderate color change and spotting, but shall not result in film failure. Sodium Hydroxide 10%, 20%, or 40% saturated Sulfide and Furfural shall cause very slight color change, but no less of reagent .. resistance. Thermal Shock Test: Finish shall be unaffected by thermal shocks of minus 15 degrees to 80 degrees F. 3.03 FINISH AND COLOR SELECTIONS: A. All finish and color selections shall be made by the Architect Not from a full range of wood finishes; and high pressure plastic laminates manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, or Wilsonart. The Architect shall not be limited to Equipment manufacturer's standards. 3.04 COMPONENT UNIT DESCRIPTION: ow A. The following is a description of the units specified under Part 4 - Items to be Furnished and Installed. Only the unit designation will appear in the item description with the quantity .a required for that assembly. TALL CASES 2484CU Cleaning Utensils Case 24"W x 24 11D x 84"H. Compartment shall be provided with one (1) fixed shelf and, pegboard lined back and sides, and a galvanized metal bottom 8" high. Provide unit with full-height, hinged oor and one (1) lock. 3684CU Cleaning Utensils Case 36 11W x 24"D x 84"H. Unit description same as for 2484CU. 4284FS Food Storage Case 42 11W x 24 11D x 84"H. Unit shall be divided into two (2) equal compartments by a fixed horizontal divider "° shelf. Upper compartment shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves. Lower compartment shall be provided with two (2) adjustable shelves; three (3) tote trays, each 10- 1/2"W x 3-1/2"H x 19"D; and six (6) polystyrene storage bins 11"W x 6 11H x 17-3/4"D with a baked enamel steel frame. 1884GS General Storage Case 18 11W x 24"D x 84"H. Unit shall be divided into two (2) equal compartments by a fixed horizontal divider shelf. Provide both upper and lower compartments, each with two (2) adjustable shelves; hinged door and one (1) No lock. (Doors shall be hinged left or right) . 3684GS General Storage Case 36"W x 24 11D x 84 11H. Unit shall be divided into two (2) equal compartments by a fixed horizontal divider ""' shelf. Provide both upper and lower compartments, each with two (2) adjustable shelves; hinged, double doors; and locks. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-14 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL of the metal shall be accomplished by washing with a hot alkaline cleaner followed by thorough rinsing. The clean metal shall then be treated with a complex metallic phosphate solution followed by a thorough water rinse and a chromic acid rinse to set the phosphate surface. The resulting uniform fine grained, crystalline phosphate surface shall provide excellent bond for the finish coats and provide increased protection against humidity and corrosion. Immediately following the complete five-step phosphate treatment, a corrosion-resistant synthetic resin primer shall be applied to all surfaces and baked at a high temperature. Primed units shall then be cooled, inspected, and sanded where necessary, prior to the application of the durable finish coat of the color selected. A specially formulated, high-bake, synthetic resin finish coat shall be applied over the primed surfaces and baked at the required high temperature schedule to produce optimum coating properties. G. Black Acid Resistant Finish: Black acid resistant finish for countertops A and B specified herein, shall be same or equal to the following: The finish shall be applied in a minimum of three coats with sanding 8% and baking between each coat; resulting in a smooth satin glass surface resistant in accordance with the following tests: One cc puddle of each reagent covered with watchglass to be left on the surface up to 24 hours and then washed off with soap and water, then cleaned with naptha and wiped dry for inspection. Tops to show only slight loss of lustre and discoloration, but no change of original stability and reagent resistance when subject to the foregoing tests by the following reagents: ACIDS ALKALIES 77% Sulphuric 28% Ammonium Hydroxide Flake 90% Formic Caustic Soda 60% Chromic Calcium Hypochlorite 0* 37% Hydrochloric Sat. Sodium Carbonate 98% Acetic Sat. Zinc Chloride 83% Phosphoric Sat. Sodium Chloride 48% Hydrofluric 33% Sulphuric SOLVENTS 88% Phenol Benzine Acetone Gasoline Cresol Kerosene Ether Toluene Ethyl Acetate Xylene Emyl Acetate Mineral Oil Butyl Alcohol Chloroform Ethyl Alcohol Carbon Tetrachloride Methyl Alcohol Formaldehyde Mon-Chlor Benzine Dioxane Trichlorethylene Cotton Seed Oil Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-13 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. Case and Cabinets (Interiors) : Interior surfaces and unexposed exteriors shall receive a double-pass coat of resinous wood sealer. E. Performance Tests: Chemical spot test shall be made by applying 10 drops (approximately 1/2 cc) of each reagent to the surface at 77 degrees F. - three degrees and covered with an upright Fisher number 2-892 wide mouth bottle, 2 oz. capacity, to regard evaporation. Spot tests of volatile solvents marked with an * shall be tested as follows: A one inch diameter ball of cotton shall be saturated with the solvent and placed on the surface to be tested and covered with an inverted Fisher number 2-892 wide mouth bottle, 2 oz. capacity, to regard evaporation and keep the surface wet with solvent for duration of tests. All reagents shall remain on the surface for a period of one hour. At the end of the test, bottles are removed, excess solvents swabbed with cotton ball, and entire test surface rinsed thoroughly, dried carefully and examined. There shall be no effect other than slight discoloration, change of gloss, or temporary slight softening of the film. 00 Reagents Used Hydrochloric Acid, 37% Methyl Alcohol* Sulfuric Acid, 70% Ethyl Alcohol* ONO Nitric Acid, 30% Ethyl Acetate* Acetic Acid, Glacial Acetone* Phosphoric Acid, 75% Methyl Ethyl Ketone* Ammonium Hydroxide, 28% Benzene* Sodium Hydroxide, 10% Toluene* Gasoline* Chloroform* Naptha* Carbon Tetrachloride* .� Heat Resistance: Hot water (190 degrees-205 degrees) shall be allowed to trickle onto the surface, which shall be set at an angle of 45 degrees from horizontal for a period of 5 minutes. After cooling and wiping dry, the finish shall show no visible effect from the hot water. Moisture Resistance: A cellulose sponge (2" x 3" x 1") shall be soaked with water and placed on the surface of the finish for a period of 100 hours. The sponge shall be maintained in a wet condition throughout duration of tests. At the end of the test, the surface shall be dried and upon examination, shall show no blushing or whitening of the finish. Impact Resistance: A one pound steel ball (approximately 2" in diameter) shall be dropped for a distance of one foot onto the finished surface of a 1/4" thick plywood panel supported underneath by solid surface. There shall be no evidence of cracks or checks in the finish due to impact upon close examination. F. Metal Finish: After units have been completely welded together and *� before finishing, they shall be given a pre-paint treatment to provide excellent adhesion of the finish system to the metal and to aid in the prevention of corrosion. Physical and chemical cleaning .� Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-12 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Bottom Rail: 1-1/16" x 4-1/4" Solid Oak (without toe space) . Bottom Rail: 3/4" x 3-15/16" Solid Oak (with toe space) . Bottom Rail: 3/4" x 3-7/16" Solid Oak (without toe space) . G. Wall Cabinets: Construction and materials shall be the same as for full height cases with the following exceptions: The base rail shall be 1-1/16" x 2-1/2" high with a 1/4" Oak plywood soffit rabbeted into bottom front rail and ends, set flush and secured, wherever case M� bottoms are exposed. Doors and adjustable shelves shall be a described in Paragraphs 2.05E and 2.05F, herein. H. Open Frame Tables and Counters: Legs shall be 4-piece construction, 2-1/2" square with all corners radiused 1/41'. Legs shall be secured to apron frame by heavy-duty corner bolt and a 14 gauge metal corner brace. Brace shall be locked into apron rails by accurately located grooves and securely fastened with screws. All apron frames shall be 3/4" thick x 5" high Oak hardwood (unless otherwise noted) with bottom edge radiused 1/4" and top edge grooved for securing top fasteners. Leg stretchers, 1-5/16" x 2-1/211, are to be provided, secured to legs through a heavy-mortise and tenoned joint as well as 4" long chromium plated bolts. All open frame counters shall be securely fastened to wall and floors utilizing concealed fastening methods. Movable tables shall be provided with floor leveling glides. Fixed legs shall be provided with leg shoes. 3.02 FINISHES: A. Wood Finish: Cabinet surfaces shall be smoothly sanded, removing loose fiber, scratch marks and abrasions with all dust thoroughly removed with compressed air. Any metal parts shall be completely degreased. ► B. Application: Finishes are to be applied in a dust-free area under ideal atmospheric conditions, and cured after application in a modern humidified oven at 140 degrees F. and 30% relative humidity. C. Case and Cabinets (Exteriors) : Case and cabinet exposed exterior surfaces, including interiors of glazed cases and open shelving, shall be finished in an acid, alkali, solvent, water and abrasion- AQ0 resistant finish. Surfaces shall be stainless with a non-fiber lifting stain, except where wiping stain or toner must be used to secure desired color. The color coat shall be thoroughly dried. A wash coat of Poly-vinyl Butyral Resin shall then be applied, thoroughly dried, sanded and carefully dusted with tack rags. Mineral filler of proper color shall next be applied, carefully wiped across grain and thoroughly dried. Next a sealer coat shall be applied, thoroughly dried, sanded and carefully dusted with tack rags. Finally, a double pass coat of chemical resistant synthetic varnish shall be applied and thoroughly dried, providing a semi-gloss finish. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-11 .m ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Bottom Horizontal: Front Member 3-3/4" x 3/4" Oak Side and Rear 1-3/4" x 3/4" Hardwood Center Mullion 2-1/2" x 3/4" D. Drawers: All drawers shall have applied plastic laminated drawer front panels 3/4" thick with 45 pound density particleboard core, overlapping openings on four sides to assure dustproofing of cabinet interior. Drawer box sides and front shall be solid hardwood, 1/2" thick, with sides multiple dovetailed and glued to drawer front. Drawer backs shall be 1/2" thick. Drawer bottoms shall be 1/4" thick welded fiber set into 1/4" deep grooves on four (4) sides. Drawers shall be of box construction as described herein with plastic laminated front panel securely screwed to wood front. Front panel edges shall be edged with 3 MM impact-resistant PVC edging with matching colors to surface. Drawer boxes shall be full-height width and depth of opening allowing minimal clearances to assure for proper operation. E. Doors: Doors shall be 3/4" thick and shall be of balanced plastic laminate construction with both interior and exterior faces of matching plastic. Doors shall be edged with 3 MM impact-resistant PVC edging with matching colors to surface. Core materials shall be of 45 pound density particleboard. Doors shall be guaranteed against warping, sagging and binding. F. Full Height Cases: Full height cases shall be integrally constructed to provide a fully enclosed cabinet, and designed to insure dustproofing. All exposed woods shall be Oak, exposed end panels - 3/4" Oak plywood, unexposed end panels - 3/4" Birch plywood, both faced with 3/4" x 3-15/16" wide Solid Oak end facing. Top and bottom front rails shall be grooved and tenoned into end facing, and secured by gluing and countersunk screws. Glue blocks, 3" long, shall be used to assure further support at corner joints. Cases 18" wide and over shall have 2-1/2" x 4 high toe space same as base cabinets. Case bottoms shall be 1/4" Oak plywood where exposed, and 1/4" Birch plywood where unexposed, rabbeted, glued, and securely fastened to case members. All shelves shall be 3/4" thick Oak plywood, faced with 1" x 3/4" Solid Oak where exposed to view, and 3/4" Birch Plywood with Solid Oak facing where unexposed. Center shelf shall be 1" thick . , tenoned into grooved end panels, and securely glued. All other shelves are to be adjustable on applied shelf standards and supports. Doors shall be either plastic laminated as described in Paragraph 2 .05E, herein, glass framed, hinged or unframed glass sliding doors on display storage (DS) units. Hinged doors shall overlap case on four (4) sides. Frame sizes shall be as follows: End Panel: 3/4" Oak plywood with Oak facing (exposed) . End Facing: 3/4" Birch plywood with Oak facing (unexposed) Top Rail: 1" x 3-15/16" Solid Oak. Base Rail: 1-5/8" x 3-7/16" Solid Oak. Base Rail: 3/4" x 3-1/2" Solid Oak (with toe space) . Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-10 40 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. In general, all cabinets and cases shall be completely framed with a top and bottom four-sided horizontal structural frame blind mortised and tenoned into sides and front framing. All cabinets shall be self- supporting, modular units to permit efficient handling and possible rearrangement in the future. The casework shall be square, flush overlap construction with plastic laminated faced door and drawer fronts. Plastic for door and drawer fronts shall be of best grade ' 0.03" thick, vertical grade, high pressure plastic laminate as manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, or Wilsonart. Plastic finish pattern and colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the full range of Formica, Nevamar, or Wilsonart colors available from the laminate manufacturer. B. All casework component construction provided under this Section shall be equal to, or exceed, the construction specified herein as manufactured by the following companies and provided to the specific reference projects listed. Wood-Metal Industries, Inc. : Windham WT-1094 Design. Conco Industries, Inc. : Webster #3-8330 Design. Taylor Division, American Desk: Groveton #4059 Design. Kewaunee Mfg. Co. : Arlington #9922 Design. Campbell-Rhea Co. : Somerville #5001 Design. Materials, hardware and accessories shall be as specified herein. C. Base Cabinets: Base cabinets shall have solid ends and backs, flush overlap doors and drawers, and fully-enclosed top space, protecting all interiors against dust and vermin. Cabinet end panels shall be 3/4" Oak plywood (exposed) , 3/4" Birch plywood (unexposed) with all panels faced with 1" x 3/4" Solid Oak. All end panels shall be glued 4W to top and bottom horizontal frames, as well as any intermediate frames through blind mortise and tenon joints, and further secured with countersunk screws. All backs shall be 1/4" Birch plywood. Cupboard bottoms shall be 1/4" welded fiber and shall be easily removable for replacement purpose. Lock shelf panel on all base cabinets for which locks are being provided shall be 3/16" black welded fiber. Base cabinet shelves shall be full-width adjustable, and made up of 3/4" Birch plywood with 1" x 3/4" Solid Oak facing. All toe spaces shall be 2-1/2" deep x 4" high, fully enclosed and an integral part of the cabinet. Frame sizes shall be as follows: Top Horizontal: Front Member 2-1/8" x 1-1/4" Oak Side and Rear 1-5/8" x 1-1/4" Oak Center Mullion 2-1/2" x 1-1/4" Oak Intermediate Horizontal: Front Member 1-3/4" x 3/4" Oak Side and Rear 1-3/4" x 3/4" Hardwood Center Mullion 2-1/2" x 3/4" Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Welded Fiber Tops (Type-B) : Welded fiber tops shall be built-up of seven plies of tempered welded fiber, laminated under pressure with a highly moisture resistant, resin glue. Top and bottom plies shall be equal to Masonite "Duolux." Exposed edges shall be radiused 1/4" around top edge and exposed corners. Finish shall be per Paragraph 3.02G. C. Molded Epoxy Resin Tops (Type-C) : Molded epoxy resin tops shall be molded from a modified epoxy resin that has been compounded and cured to provide the optimum physical and chemical resistant properties required for labortory use. Top shall be of a uniform mixture throughout their full thickness, and shall be black in color. D. Plastic Laminated Tops with Oak Edging (Type-D) : Plastic laminated tops shall be factory fabricated of best grade 0.05" thick, horizontal grade, high-pressure plastic laminate equal to Formica, Nevamar, or Wilsonart sheets bonded with semi-rigid (PVAC) contact adhesive, or rigid (ureas, recorcinol) adhesives to 45 pound density particleboard core. Overall finished thickness of tops shall be 1- "t 1/4". Underside of tops shall be laminated with a suitable balancing sheet equal to Formica Corp. -91/BLS or -92BGS backing sheet to minimize warpage. All cutouts shall have radiused (1/8" minimum) inside corner to avoid stress cracking. All exposed top edges shall be provided with a solid Oak edge 1" x 1-1/4" with top and bottom radiused 1/411. Plastic finish, pattern and colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a full range of Formica or Wilsonart colors available from the laminate manufacturer. Assembled tops shall meet the Standards of DLPA (Decorative Laminate Products Association) ; ANSI #A-161.2-1979; and Architectural Woodwork Quality , Standards. E. Solid Color-Thru Plastic Laminate Top with Oak Edging (Type-E) : Solid color-thru plastic laminate tops shall be factory fabricated of best-grade 0.062" thick, horizontal grade, surfacing material equal to Formica Corporation "Color-Core", or Wilsonart "Solicor"; bonded with semi-rigid (PVAC) , or non-pigmented contact adhesives in hydraulic presses to 45 pound density particleboard core. Overall finished thickness of tops shall be 1-1/411. Underside of tops shall be laminated with a suitable balancing sheet equal to Formica Corp. rya #12HGP to minimize warpage. All cutouts shall have a radiused (1/8" minimum) inside corner to avoid stress cracking. All exposed top edges shall be provided with a solid Oak edge 1" x 1-1/4" with top and bottom radiused 1/4". Plastic finish, pattern and colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a full range of Formica or Wilsonart colors available from the laminate manufacturer. Assembled tops shall meet the Standards of DLPA (Decorative Laminate Products .+ Association) ; ANSI #A-161.2-1979; and Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards. A, Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-8 am ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL satin finish. Interior corners of sink shall be rounded to minimum so of 1-3/4" radius. Sound dampening shall be applied to underside of all sink basins and tops. Stainless steel sinks in stainless steel tops shall be welded integrally into counter. Counters shall have 4" high integral backsplashes where called for in equipment list. Stainless steel sinks in other than stainless steel tops shall be self-rimmed and shall have a raised edge of 7/16". Stainless steel sinks, specified herein, shall be equal to that manufactured by Elkay Mfg. Co. Refer to drawing for sink schedule. C. Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures shall be of modern design and materials specifically designed for laboratory use equal to Chicago Faucet Company, T & S Brass Company, or Water Saver Faucet Company, with chrome laboratory type finish, unless otherwise noted. All bw resin sinks shall be furnished with 1-1/2" I.P.S. outlets, overflows, tailpiece, and bead adaptor of black epoxy resin. All water fixtures of the gooseneck type and any others normally furnished or so specified with laboratory serrated hose nozzles shall be furnished with integral vacuum breakers. Fixtures shall be all from one manufacturer. Refer to drawing for fixtures schedule. All faucets shall be provided with 2-gallon per minute flow regulators. D. Electrical Fixtures: Electrical fixtures shall be furnished with required holes or cut-outs where indicated on all cabinetwork or table tops. Pedestal boxes shall be cast aluminum type. Plates shall be polished stainless steel. Receptacles shall be equal to Arrow-Hart #GF-5342, duplex, 20.0 amp./120V GFI protected type; unless otherwise specified. Light fixtures shall be furnished "a complete per these specifications mounted in place with switch and lamps. Refer to drawing for fixtures schedule. 06 2.04 COUNTERTOPS: Countertops shall be 1-1/4" thick with 4" high backsplash, unless otherwise indicated, and of material and construction the same or equal to that specified below. Laboratory tops shall be in as large pieces as possible, complete with drip grooves machined into underside of perimeter edges. Joints shall be sealed with a catalytic epoxy resin cement in all laboratory or wet areas. A. Impregnated Natural Stone Tops (Type-A) : Impregnated natural stone tops shall be processed from a natural quarried stone free of veins, laminations and stratifications and impregnated throughout with a highly chemical and heat resistant resinous coating shall then be applied to all exposed surfaces and the impregnated resin and surface coating polmerized by heat in one operation to cure the resin, toughen the stone and provide uniform black finish. All exposed sides shall have a 1/4" radius along exposed top edge and a 1/4" radius at exposed corners. Table tops shall be 1-1/4" thick, and thickness tolerances shall be held to plus or minus 1/32". Finish shall be per Paragraph 3.02G. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL H. Base Moulding: Base moulding shall be of a pliable, chemical rubber or vinyl material, 4" high, coved at bottom, and shall be cemented tightly against cabinet work with waterproof adhesive. Interior and exterior of corners shall be neatly mitered. Color to be selected by Architect. I. Glides: Floor glides where specified for movable open-leg tables shall be non-marring material at least 1-1/2" diameter to prevent indenting composition flooring and have at least 1" adjustment. .rya J. Upright Rod Assemblies: Upright rods, cross rods and ring support rods, where specified, shall be anodized Duralumin 3/4" diameter. Rod sockets shall be chrome plated brass secured through table tops with locknut and spring washer. Rod clamps shall be heavy-duty, designed to securely hold rod assembly in position. A� K. Shelf Standards: Shelf standards and shelf support clips shall be mounted on interior of case to provide shelf adjustment on 1/2" centers. Shelves longer than 3' shall be supported at the center by an additional standard and a full width bracket. L. Tote Trays: Tote trays where specified shall be molded one-piece high-impact polystyrene plastic with all top edges turned down. Trays shall be furnished with label holders and in the sizes specified. Trays shall be as manufactured by Fabri-Form of Indiana. M. Bar Diffuser Grilles shall be equal to that manufactured by Register & Grille Mfg. Co. Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y., Model #EP-15 with #SE5 Flange. Grille shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Perimeter flange/frame shall be 11/16"W x 3/16" thick. N. Toe-Space Grilles shall be continuous with a height of 411, equal to that manufactured by Register & Grille Mfg. Co. Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y., Model #EP-15 with #L-1 frame. Finish shall be black. Grilles and frames shall be provided in continuous lengths for assemblies where cabinet toe-spaces have been cutout. All cabinet toe-spaces , shall be painted black prior to installation of grilles. 2 .03 SINKS AND MECHANICAL SERVICE FIXTURES: A. Epoxy Resin Sinks and Drain Fittings: Epoxy resin sinks, and drain fittings shall be non-glaring, and black in color. Sinks shall be molded to one degree dishing to outlet in bottom and have a minimum of 1/2" thick side walls and 5/8" thick bottoms. Materials shall be heat resistant up to 350 degrees F., water absorption of 0.05 in 24 hours, tensile strength of 12,700 P.S.I., and a density of 1.90 GR/CC and a Rockwell-M-Hardness rating of 114. Sinks and drain fittings, specified herein, shall be equal to that manufactured by the Durcon Company, Dayton, Ohio. Refer to drawing for sink schedule. B. Stainless Steel Sink and Tops: Stainless steel sinks and tops shall be welded, ground and polished of #18 gauge nickel bearing #18-8 Type 302 stainless steel. Exposed surfaces to be 180 grit-No. 4 uniform Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-6 An ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Hinges: Hinges shall be steel, of 2-1/2", five-knuckle, wrap-around to institutional type heavy-duty with offset wings designed to locate hinged side door at 7/16" from cabinet end. Hinges shall be mounted to door and case with nine (9) #7 flat head screws per hinge. Doors OR 48" in height and over shall be fitted with three (3) hinges per door. Finish shall be as selected by Architect. C. Locks: Locks shall be applied to all doors and drawers as shown on the drawing or called for in the equipment list. All locks, for the purpose of cordinating keying systems, shall be Illinois or equal, offering two (2) sets of four (4) tumblers locking in opposite splines. Positive tumbler operations shall be accomplished by cam action without the aid of springs. The lock system shall guarantee security which restricts the duplicating of keys to registered locksmiths. Exposed surface of locks shall match other cabinet trim. Furnish two (2) keys with each lock plus masterkeys. Locks shall be installed within drawer or door pull specified in Paragraph 2 .02A above. Proposed keying systems shall be determined by the Architect and approved by the Owner. Such keying systems shall offer multiple master-keyed series. In general, all teacher wardrobe units (TW) shall be within a series, keyed differently and ON master-keyed; all locks within a room, except for teacher's wardrobe units and any individual type storage component, shall be keyed the same and different than all other rooms; and individual storage components specified with locks shall be keyed differently and different than all other locks. The number and groupings of keying series shall be as determined by the Architect and approved by the Owner. D. Magnetic Latches: Magnetic latches shall be used on all swinging doors. Latches shall be enclosed in a plastic case and shall operate on a plated steel strike plate screwed to door. Double doors shall use latches on both doors, and full height cases shall also have a latch at bottom of right-hand door. Latches shall be heavy-duty with 15-pound pull. 1f► E. Catches: Elbow catches and strike plates shall be used on left-hand doors of double door cases where locks are used, and are to be heavy- duty steel, cadmium plated. F. Drawer Slides: Drawer slides shall be Grant Model #335 or equal, of cold rolled steel, zinc plated, clear chromate. Each slide shall be in two (2) sections with a load capacity of 100 pounds per pair. Slides shall provide a positive closing position, and positive stop in extended position. G. Leg Shoes: Leg shoes shall be provided on all counter legs unless otherwise specified, to conceal shims or fastening devices. Shoes are to be 4" high and of chemical rubber, or vinyl, and coved at bottom. Color to be selected by Architect. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.08 GUARANTEE: ,.e A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced. D. Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements. PART 2 - MATERIALS so 2.01 GENERAL: ern A. Wood Components: All woods shall be carefully and thoroughly air dried before kiln drying, and then kiln dried under the control of the equipment manufacturer to a moisture content of 4-1/2%. All kiln dried lumber shall then be tempered to a moisture content of 6% before use. This moisture content shall be maintained throughout production. B. Exposed Plywoods: Plywood used for exterior surfaces exposed to view after installation, and the exposed interiors of open cases or cases having glazed doors, shall have an Oak face. Plywood used in all case and cabinet finished ends shall be 3/4" thick. Cross bands shall be 1/16" poplar, exterior faces 1/24" plain sliced select Grade A Oak, and back faces 1/24" Sound Oak. C. Interior Plywoods: All interior plywood used in cabinets and cases except plywood used in interiors of open or glazed door cases shall be Birch. 1/4" thick plywood shall be three-ply Birch with a Grade 2 „ . face and Grade 2 back. 1/2" and 3/4" thick plywood shall be five-ply Birch with Grade 2 face and a Grade 2 back. 2.02 HARDWARE AND TRIM: ' A. Drawer and Door Pulls: Drawer and door pull to be Amerock-National Lock #FO-1107-001-6, or equal, of zinc die cast material with face dimensions of 5-3/8" x 1-7/8", and satin chrome finish. Provide pull with steel backplate with overall dimensions of 6-3/8" x 1-7/8", and black enamel finish. Pulls shall accommodate locks as specified herein. Provide pull with a 1/4" indent for embossed tape identification labels. 0 Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-4 w No ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Drawings shall be at not less than 1/4" scale and shall show the layout of all equipment, all plumbing, electrical, gas, water, ventilating and other service connections as required by the equipment. 1/2" scale drawings shall be submitted for all fabricated or shop-made equipment, elevation details of all assemblies, and construction and material details of all casework components included in the project. at C. The exact location of all connections shall be dimensioned for all equipment and labeled with the necessary information. This Sub- contractor shall obtain and verify all dimensions, measurements and conditions, and shall assume all responsibility in respect to same. D. No fabrication, shipment, or installation shall take place until drawings and manufacturer's cuts have been approved and returned to the Equipment Subcontractor. 1.05 SAMPLES: A. Submit samples of all materials requested by the Architect. Such samples shall be full size and indicate the exact materials, construction and hardware components being proposed for use on this project. B. Samples shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with iox requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.06 PERMITS, LAWS, ORDINANCES AND CODES: N1► A. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of all local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the local electric code, and applicable accessibility standards. 1.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: A. Instruct to the Owner's satisfaction such persons as the Owner designates, in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and their parts. B. Furnish in accordance with GENERAL CONDITIONS, operating and maintenance manuals and forward same to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner. C. For maintenance purposes, provide Shop Drawings, parts lists, Specifications and manufacturer's maintenance bulletins for each piece of equipment. D. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment, so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL G. Furnish and provide all materials and services as may be additional and/or separately described under other Sections of this Specification. H. Remove all debris, dirt and rubbish accumulated as a result of this installation, and leave the premises clean and ready for use. This shall include cleaning equipment interiors, exteriors, and worktops. I. Verify and confirm all building dimensions relative to equipment to be furnished and installed by taking actual field measurements at the job site prior to equipment fabrication. J. Become familiar with job conditions and building measurements to coordinate the planning, design, connections, delivery and installation of equipment furnished under these Specifications, with all other related trades and associated work during the term of this contract. K. The Equipment Subcontractor shall supply an installation of equipment that is equal to or exceeding the quality and function described in this minimum Specification and shown on the Drawings. 1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. Connecting all plumbing and electrical service fixtures to building services. B. Furnishing, installing, and connecting all service lines, traps, drainlines, vents, piping and conduit within equipment, in service .w turrets or tunnels, through, under, or along the backs of work surfaces. C. Furnishing of all building plumbing, electrical and vented roughing- in within the area of the equipment to accommodate all services called for in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. D. Furnishing of framing and reinforcement for walls, floors, and ceilings to support the equipment and all bricks and material grounds required for proper anchoring of equipment. .A E. Furnishing, installing and connecting all ductwork, blowers, blower platforms, switches and other exhaust system components from the equipment duct stub connection to the atmosphere on all equipment requiring mechanical exhausting, such as vented storage cabinets. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: ,f A. Prepare and submit Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and in the manner described therein. .wG B. One (1) complete set of Shop Drawing sepias and six (6) complete sets of prints, and of manufacturer's cuts shall be submitted to the Architect for approval in accordance with the requirements. Shop + Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-2 w ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 11600 - FIXED CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL !Aw 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections apply to this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.02 INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION: A. Furnish all items of equipment listed in this Specification and/or me shown on the Equipment Drawings. Include delivery to the building, unpacking, setting in place, leveling and scribing to walls, soffits, and floors as required. on B. Furnish plumbing fixtures, including nipples and locknuts, required for mounting in or on the equipment. Furnish all fixtures unattached and unassembled to the Plumbing Subcontractor properly tagged and identified with installation information. C. Furnish sinks, including overflows, plugs, strainers and tailpieces which occur above the floor and required for mounting in the equipment. Furnish sink basins installed in the cabinet work. Furnish fittings unattached and unassembled to the Plumbing Subcontractor properly tagged and identified with installation information. D. Furnish electrical service fixtures, including nipples, required for mounting in or on equipment. Furnish all fixtures unattached and unassembled to the Electrical Subcontractor properly tagged and identified with installation information. E. Furnish light fixtures including switches, integral convenience receptacles and other components, as required, for installation in or on the equipment. Fixtures and fittings that are a functional integral part of the equipment shall be factory installed and prewired. F. Furnish all items requiring air exhaust, such as vented storage cabinets, with duct connection stub 1-1/2" high. Fixed Casework and Equipment 11600-1 on ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to installing curtains, supplier shall ensure that the curtains and track system are constructed as per approved shop drawing and that no conditions exist that will detract from the function or interfere with its operation. B. The folding-slope curtain supplier shall not deliver or install this product until the • General Contractor can insure storage and protection through the duration of the Project. + C. The curtain shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers installation instruction and by an authorized Porter distributor. GYMNASIUM FOLDING CURTAINS 11480-3 40 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am PART 2 - PRODUCTS ow 2.01 MATERIALS we A. The folding gymnasium curtains, quantity three(3) shall be a#665 SLOPE FOLD CURTAIN manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Co., Broadview, Illinois, or approved equal. .. B. Curtain shall be solid and mesh. Solid portion shall use Flexvide 18 ox. fabric and 1 3/4"square knotless nylon mesh. The solid portion shall be 10'-0" high. Im C. Curtain shall be hoisted by a 1/8" dia. vandalproof, galvanized aircraft cable (2,100 lb. breaking strength each cable, spacing not to exceed 12'-0") passing go through D-ring type cable guides secured to the solid and mesh sections of the divider on approximate 19" centers. Bottom end of cables to terminate in heavy 3/8" chain weight concealed in bottom pocket hem or divider. am D. Upper ends of hoist cables shall pass through equipped with needle roller bearings to minimize friction and drag during operation. Cables shall be individually routed to the electric hoist system by means of special idler pulley assemblies, as required by building conditions. E. Each hoist cable shall terminate in individual hoist drums on remote electric operator. Each hoist drum shall be sized with a variable diameter ratio system to allow divider curtain to raise and store into sloped ceilings, peaked or arched structure to conform to existing building conditions to maximize clearance for all sports. Wo F. Hoist system shall be powered by means of a heavy-duty 3/4 H.P., 115 V, C- faced-type double reduction gearmotor furnished with automatic overload protection. Gear reducer shall be filled with oil and equipped with high-quality go Buna-M lip seals for long life and maintenance-free service. Special rotary counting limit switches to limit up-and-down operating limits of the divider shall be an integral part of the operation. * GYMNASIUM FOLDING CURTAINS 11480-2 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL OR SECTION 11480 - GYMNASIUM FOLDING CURTAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INTENT A. The Contractor under this section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment necessary for completion of the Gymnasium Folding Curtains, in accordance with this section of the specifications, and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all items listed in this specification and/or shown on the drawings. Include delivery to building, unpacking, setting in place and all leveling, adjusting, as required. B. Field Verify and confirm all dimensions relative to equipment to be furnished and installed prior to fabrication. ••. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in the specifications. B. Shop drawings must clearly indicate any deviations from the specifications. +** C. Shop drawings must clearly indicate the installation requirements, dimensions, track support details, type of stacking, track arrangement hardware, partition materials, lining details, as well as tabulation listing the dimensions and locations of all curtains. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty. B. The curtain and installation shall be warranty for one year against defects in material or workmanship. • GYMNASIUM FOLDING CURTAINS 11480-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.02 CLEANING UP A. All debris and surplus materials resulting from installation work shall be removed promptly as work progresses by this Equipment as Subcontractor, to a location indicated by the General Contractor. B. Following completion, and before final acceptance by the Owner, clean finished surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and leave specified work free of imperfections. 3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK go A. Protect specified work from damage during transportation to the project site, storage at the site, during installation, and after so completion until acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect adjacent work under other contracts during installation until completion of specified work. After completion, the contractor for other work shall be responsible for the protection of his work until acceptance by the Owner. �w C. Damaged work as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired or replaced as determined by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 40 taw on w Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Evaporator Coil LSF-070A2 , T.D. 10 degrees BTU/Hr. 7,000 Power (2) 1/20 H.P.-120/1 Defrost --- Type Timed Ambient W -03 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS - WALK-IN COOLER ONE (1) LOT REQUIRED Location: Existing Walk-In Cooler Make & Model: Climate Control as noted herein. Description: It is the responsibility of this Equipment Subcontractor to remove existing refrigeration components from existing walk-in cooler and replace such components with units as called for herein. All work, components and accessories relating to the refrigeration system shall be as described herein under Item WR-01. Component go requirements are as follows: COOLER we Room Temperature +35 degrees F. Condensing Unit TRH-010-M2 Horsepower 1 H.P.-208/3 BTU/Hr. 10, 690 Evap. Temp. +25 degrees F. Ambient Temp. +90 degrees F. Receiver 6 lbs. Refrigerant R-22 Evaporator Coil LSC-105A1 T.D. 10 degrees BTU/Hr. 10,500 Power (2) 1/20 H.P.-120/1 Defrost --- Type Timed Ambient PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Examine space in which specified work is to be installed to assure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of specified work. Report in writing to the Architect, any deficiency in the work of other contractors affecting specified work. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of space conditions. B. This Equipment Subcontractor shall obtain and verify all measurements and conditions on the job, and shall assume all responsiblity in respect to same. Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-8 on ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Evaporator Coils Walk-In Cooler Evaporator for this box shall be of the unit cooler type, designed for installation at the juncture of wall and ceiling. Unit shall be so constructed that air is drawn in through the finned surface and discharged parallel to the ceiling. Finned coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins, 6 per inch. Fan motor shall be drip proof, continuous fan duty type, operating at no more than 100 R.P.M. Casing shall be aluminum. The unit cooler hardware shall be stainless steel. A suction-liquid heat exchanger shall be provided and mounted within the casing. Coil shall be N.S.F. approved. Units shall be as manufactured by Climate Control. Furnish and install 3/8" diameter threaded nylon mounting rods with stainless steel washers and nuts, and reinforcing angle at the exterior top of the rooms for the mounting of the unit evaporators. ON FREEZER Room Temperature -10 degrees F. Condensing Unit TRH-030L5 w0 Horsepower 3 H.P.-208/3 BTU/Hr. 13,540 Evap. Temp. -10 degrees F. Ambient Temp. +90 degrees F. Receiver 6 lbs. Refrigerant R-502 Evaporator Coil LSF-140A2 T.D. 10 degrees BTU/Hr. 14,000 Power (3) 1/20 H.P.-120/1 as Defrost --- Type Timed Ambient WR-02 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS - WALK-IN FREEZER ONE (1) LOT REQUIRED we Location: Existing Walk-In Freezer Make & Model: Climate Control as noted herein. Description: It is the responsibility of this Equipment Subcontractor OR to remove existing refrigeration components from existing walk-in freezer and replace such components with units as called for herein. All work, components and accessories relating to the refrigeration system shall be as described herein under Item WR-01. Component ON requirements are as follows: FREEZER on Room Temperature -10 degrees F. Condensing Unit TRH-015L5 Horsepower 1-1/2 H.P.-208/3 BTU/Hr. 6, 680 ON Evap. Temp. -10 degrees F. Ambient Temp. +90 degrees F. Receiver 6 lbs. Refrigerant R-502 Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL The year's service shall be provided by the installer, and under no ,. circumstances will the service policy be sublet to another refrigerant contractor. The name of the installer/service agency for the guarantee period shall be located in a prominent place on the condensing units. Any leaks that occur during the first year period of operation after acceptance by the Owner, shall be repaired and necessary refrigerant added during this period at no expense to the Owner. The condensing units shall be provided with an additional four-year warranty to commence upon the completion of the aforementioned guarantee. Equipment shall be guaranteed to maintain the following temperatures: FREEZER -10 degrees F. Condensing Units The condensing units shall be designed for operation with refrigerant 22. Capacity, horsepower, design suction and condensing temperatures of each unit are specified in the equipment schedule contained hereinafter. Each system shall consist of a motor, compressor, refrigrant, condenser, liquid receiver, compressor service valves and a dual high-low pressure control. The compressor shall be of the serviceable semi-hermetic type with motor, built-in suction gas filter, oil sight glass and shall be mounted on a steel base. Compressor speed shall not exceed 1750 R.P.M. with a �► maximum piston speed of 600 F.P.M. The condensing units shall be supplied with an air cooled condenser constructed of copper tube and aluminum fin condensers together with a fan motor assembly. Condensing Unit Housing The units shall be provided with a factory mounted prewired control panel complete with circuit breakers and NEMA size compressor motor starters, 208V/60C/3 phase control voltage and defrost clock. Unit shall also include a liquid line assembly consisting of a filter-drier, sight glass and a shut-off valve, a factory mounted liquid line as vibration eliminator and a suction line vibration eliminator. The unit shall be provided with proper controls and crankcase heater for outdoor installation. The units shall be mounted on steel legs with flanged feet and shall be protected with a weatherproof cowl constructed of aluminum with hinged compressor compartment cover, and weatherproof hinged electrical panel. Units shall be as manufactured by Climate Control. The condensing unit shall be roof mounted and secured to structure provided by the General Contractor. Related sub-trades shall make the final electrical and drain connections and the interwiring between the terminal clocks and the evaporator coils. Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-6 on ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL w Insulation Above Freezing Areas All suction lines for refrigerated areas having a temperature above freezing shall be covered with 1/2" Armaflex insulation which shall be applied to these lines as they are being installed so that insulation will not have to be split, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Condensate Lines All condensate lines passing through the refrigerated areas shall be similarly insulated with 1/2" Armaflex insulation. Thermometers Furnish and mount a Trerice 4690, 12" aluminum back wall thermometer with a -30 degree F. to +130 degree F. scale at eye level on the wall adjacent to the thermostat. � Controls Temperature The temperature in refrigerated area shall be controlled by means of a remote bulb thermostat wired to actuate a solenoid valve in the liquid line with the compressor operation controlled by the low-pressure cut- out switch. Thermostat shall be adjusted to maintain the room temperature specified. Defrost Refrigerated area shall be provided with a time initiated defrost cycle. The defrost time clock shall be located at the condensing unit. on Contacts shall be provided, capable of handling electric load of electric defrost evaporator coils. Mounting and Wiring The thermostat shall be mounted on the wall behind the evaporator coil by the This Equipment Sub-Contractor. The Electrical Sub-Contractor to the General Contractor shall interwire between the condensing unit defrost clock, thermostat, liquid line solenoid valve and the evaporator coil. This Equipment Sub-Contractor shall provide adequate wiring diagrams and guidance to achieve correct operation of system. Refrigerant Testing The entire system shall be pressure and leak tested at no less than 100 P.S.I.G., cleaned and dehydrated by maintaining a vacuum of 50 microns or lower for a period of five hours. The required operating charge of refrigerant and oil, if necessary, shall be added and the entire system tested for performance. on Each system shall be marked clearly as to the refrigerant type required. Guarantee All the mechanical refrigerant equipment shall be mechanically guaranteed for a period of one year after date of acceptance by the Owner, and emergency service shall be provided, free of charge, whenever + * necessary on a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week basis during the guarantee period. Pe Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-5 Aw ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION am Scope This Equipment Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install complete refrigeration system for the walk-in box in accordance with the plans. "" The systems shall include condensing units, evaporator coils, piping, and all accessories as specified herein, and as required to provide complete and satisfactory systems in accordance with accepted am refrigeration practice. Piping Refrigerant Piping so Furnish and install all of the interconnecting piping between the condensing units and their respective unit coolers. Piping shall be installed in a heat and workmanlike manner with adjustable hangers w spaced at no more than 10 foot intervals on all horizontal runs, or 6 foot intervals on vertical runs. Line sizes shall be in accordance with equipment manufacturer's 'f" standards and best refrigeration practice, to assure proper refrigerant feed to evaporators, avoid excessive pressure drop, prevent excessive amounts of lubricating oil from being trapped in any part of the system, ow protect the compressors from loss of lubrication at all times, prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor during operating or idle time, and maintain a clean and dry system. .W All refrigeration piping to be Type L, ACR grade, hard drawn seamless copper tubing, wrought type copper fittings with silver bearing soldered joints. Each refrigeration system shall include liquid and suction shut off valves at the evaporator, with a thermostatic expansion valve and solenoid. Furnish and install all necessary sleeves for refrigerant and evaporator condensate piping wherever piping passes through a ceiling or wall. Sleeves shall be non-conductive gray plastic tubing, sized at least 1/4" larger than piping or conduit and shall be neatly packed with brine putty after installation. Condensate Drains Furnish and install all condensate drain piping from the unit coolers to open drains that will be provided by others outside of the refrigerated areas. Condensate piping shall consist of not less than 7/8" Type L. hard drawn copper tubing, rigidly supported at the wall 3'-0" O.C. maximum, in such a way that there will be 1" clearance space between wall and drain, and equipped with a clean-out tee near each unit cooler. Drain piping shall be adequately pitched toward floor drain and carried through wall of refrigerated area and discharged within 2" of floor drain. The exposed drain piping shall be trapped and chrome plated. Whenever refrigerant piping and drain piping pass through refrigerator, .� they shall be equipped on both sides with chrome plated escutcheon plates. Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-4 .e� ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Description: Walk-in shall be installed in 91-6-1/2" x 12'-5" x 7" deep I.D. recess below the finished floor. The recess depth shall allow for use of a 1" bed of sand for levelling and 4" for insulated floor panel. Box shall be set level on a layer of clean, dry mason's sand by this Equipment Sub-Contractor. Construction: The box shall be constructed using a 4" thickness of frost foamed-in-place urethane insulation with a K factor of .13" between die-formed metal pans with materials as contained hereinafter. Edges of metal pans shall be flanged in on all sides and panels shall have gasketed joints. Sections shall be joined by means of cam actuated joining devices. Distance between locks shall not exceed 46". Each locking device shall consist of a cam-action, hooked locking arm placed in one section, and a steel rod precisely positioned in the adjoining section so that by rotating the locking arm, the hook engages over the rod with cam-action draws the sections tightly together. Both the locking arm which is housed in an 18 gauge cold rolled steel pocket, and the steel rod which is housed in 20 gauge cold rolled steel pocket are set into urethane insulation. These steel pockets are rigidly connected from one joining edge of the same section by using 22 gauge cold rolled steel straps, a minimum of 2" wide, set into the insulation, forming perimeters of steel for extra strength. Locks are actuated from inside the walk-in. An aligning device is provided in at least one joining device per vertical section. Entrance door shall be flush, infitting type with 4" insulation same as walls, and shall have a 2'-10" x 6'-4" high clear opening, balloon type gasket on three sides and adjustable sweep gasket on the bottom. Doors shall have two cam lift positive closing polishing aluminum hinges with nylon bearings, and a polished aluminum latch assembly with cylinder lock. The inside safety release handle shall operate on no more than a quarter turn, and shall be effective for all locking methods U� employed by manufacturer. This Equipment Sub-Contractor shall provide 14 gauge stainless steel threshold. Heater wires shall be built into the front of door sections under the metal at the point of gasket contact. A vision panel shall be provided for door, approximately 14-1/2" x 23" and shall be constructed of three panels of tempered unbreakable glass with sealed air spaces between an heated outer layer on freezer. The boxes shall be constructed in accordance with N.S.F. Standards, and provided with the standard dial thermometer. Materials: All exterior surfaces of walk-in box assembly, except exposed surface of walk-in cooler and freezer, shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel; all interior surfaces (with the exception of interior floors) , and exposed exterior surface of walk-in cooler shall be stucco patterned .042" aluminum; interior floor shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel; and door shall be of stainless steel on both sides. Accessories: Each box shall be provided with two (2) interwired vapor go proof light fixtures and guards which shall be operated from an outside light switch and pilot light. This Equipment Sub-Contractor shall provide and install 18 gauge trim angles at the sides and a close panel from the box to the adjacent finished ceiling at the front. Panel at top shall be fabricated and shall support finished ceiling provided by the General Contractor. Vp Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and also are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of all Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction; the rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters' and applicable electrical, mechanical and plumbing, accessibility and other codes. C. All materials shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for a period of not less than one year from Substantial Completion. A written guarantee shall cover all defects in materials and workmanship. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING , A. Protect all equipment during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage. B. On the protective crating, or on a concealed but accessible surface of each item of Work of this Section, plainly mark an identifying code or tag to aid in rapid and efficient location of each item's specific installation point within the building. 1.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Instruct to the Owner's satisfaction such persons as the Owner designates, in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and their parts. B. Furnish operating and maintenance manuals and forward same to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner. wr C. For maintenance purposes, provide Shop Drawings, parts lists, Specifi cations and manufacturer's maintenance bulletins for each piece of equipment. w� D. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment, so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained. PART 2 - MATERIALS wee 2.01 ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WR-01 WALK-IN FREEZER ONE (1) REQUIRED w. Location: Freezer #1233 (EQ-4) Make & Model: Bally Case & Cooler; or Thermo-Kool. Dimensions: 8'-8-1/2" x 11'-7" x 8'-6"H overall x 7'-10"H inside. Power: 1.0 K.W., 120V/60C/1 phase to light, door defrost and pressure ' relief port. Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-2 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 11400 - WALK-IN REFRIGERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections apply to this Section. ' B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. Im 1.02 INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION: so A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services, etc., required to furnish and install all walk-in refrigeration and related hardware and accessories as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or otherwise required for a complete and proper job. B. Verify all building dimensions and conditions relative to equipment to be furnished and installed by taking actual field measurements at ON the job site prior to equipment fabrication. C. Thoroughly review the Drawings and note that all walk-in refriger- ation is shown on Drawing EQ-4, plan and details of walk-in unit Room #1233. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings and/or manufacturer's specifications and details of all materials specified herein. P" B. Shop Drawings shall be drawn at not less than 1/4" scale and shall show the layout of all equipment, all plumbing, electrical, and other service connections as may be required by the equipment. C. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper interface between walk- in refrigeration requiring coordination with work specified in DIVISION 15000: MECHANICAL and DIVISION 16000: ELECTRICAL. Walk-In Refrigeration 11400-1 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the PVC pipe shall be Class 200 weight regardless of size. G. Flushing Pipe lines leading to the pool shall be thoroughly flushed clean before the pool is filled and placed in use. H. Testing Pool recirculation system piping is to be tested at a pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum operating pressure. The Pool Contractor shall submit to the Owner, a schedule of the piping incorporated int he pool, listing the normal operating pressures, test pressures to be used and the method and duration of each test. 3.06 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION A. Start pool recirculation system, adjust and verify performance in accordance with specifications with specifications and applicable code requirements. B. Instruct Owner's designated representative in proper operation and maintenance. C. Monitor operation of system until pool water is clear, chemically balanced and .� suitable for use. 3.07 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Deliver through bound sets of written instructions, equipment literature and parts lists. END OF SECTION 11300 SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-22 w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL F. Solvent-Welded Joints Provide in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. However, the following directions are considered minimum standards. 1. Fittings shall fit easily on the pipe before applying cement. Outer surface area of pipe and inner wall of fitting shall be clean and dry. Apply primer and glue in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. When the outside surface area of the pipe end is satisfactorily covered with cement, allow ten (10) seconds open time to elapse before inserting pipe into fittings, turning fitting about the pipe end approximately 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Wipe off excess cement at the joint in a neat cover bead. Use only approved cement and thinner for making joints. Joints shall remain completely undisturbed for a minimum of ten (10) minutes from time of joining the pipe and fitting. If necessary to apply pressure to a newly made joint, limit of ten (10%) percent of rated pipe pressure, four (4) hours after the joint has been made. 2. Carefully handle pipe and move as little as possible so that the cement seal shall not be broken before it is completely dry and for a time of at least twenty-four (24) hours. 3. Full working pressure shall not be applied until the joints have set for a twenty-four (24) hour period. 4. Installation made during hot weather shall provide for expansion by snaking in ditch or running line on open discharge until it contracts to operating length. 5. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated 4W hydrocarbons and most of esters and ketones that attack the material. Protect all pipe from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage. 6. Make threaded pipe joints with Permatex #2 compound or approved equal, applied sparingly to the male threads only. P0 7. Connections between PVC metal pipes must be fanged, plastic flange to metal flange. DO NOT use threaded connections between plastic and metal pipe, except where specifically noted otherwise and in which case SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-21 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Placing and Laying 1. Before installation, pipe shall be inspected for defects. 2. The interior of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and shall be kept clean during laying operation. 3. Pips shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. 4. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the pipe is installed. 5. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings. D. Pipe Support and Bracing 1. Provide hangers and supports as recommended by pipe manufacturer. ., 2. Provide bracing as required to prevent damage from water, hammer and excessive vibration. 3. Hangers and bracing in balance tank to be of non-corrodible materials. E. Threaded Joints 1. After cutting and before threading, pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert filter and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. ,. 2. Threads shall be full-cut and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe remain exposed. .• 3. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of exposed piping. 4. Unicons will be permitted where access is possible. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-20 M ■w ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.03 DECK EQUIPMENT A. Verify layout and setting dimensions in accordance with codes and standard cited in Section 1 of these specifications. Notify architect of discrepancies and resolve before embedding anchors in concrete. B. Verify electrical bonding of equipment and anchors before concrete embedment. C. Erect equipment straight, true and plumb. Clean and leave ready for use. D. Mount Cleaning and rescue equipment on non-corrodible wall brackets, as directed by Owner/Architect. E. Check operation of vacuum cleaners and instruct Owner's representative in proper operation, care and maintenance. 3.04 FILTRATION AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT A. Provide in accordance with approved shop drawings clearances, as required for access, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Set filter tanks and major components plumb, straight, and true with neat appearance and clean. C. Provide fanged connections, "Spool pieces," and quick disconnects as required for easy removal and replacement of major components. w■ 3.05 PIPIN A. Handling Pipe and accessories shall be handled in such a manner as to insure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. B. Cutting of Pipe 10 Cutting shall be done by means of mechanical cutter in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-19 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Inspect adjacent work by other contractors which might affect the work of this section. Report discrepancies or conflicts to Architect. Do not start work until instructed by Architect in writing. 3.02 Prefabricated Stainless Steel Perimeter System A. Shop Drawings: 1. The manufacturer shall furnish detailed shop drawings showing the exact placement of anchorages, box-cuts for gutter convertors and clearances and tolerance necessary for the proper installation of the perimeter recirculation system. B. Installation: " 1. The field fabrication of the gutter system shall be accomplished by the gutter manufacturer or an authorized and experienced licensee of the manufacturer acting as a subcontractor of the manufacturer. 2. Installation is to be accomplished by welders with at least five (5) years experience in the field welding and fabrication techniques of similar stainless steel recirculation systems. If required, the supplier shall submit the installer's experience in writing for approval to system manufacturer. All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's technical bulletins and instructions. 3. Ferro-cement setting bed and ceramic tile inlay on pool face of gutter channel to be installed after system installation on pool wall is completed. C. Engineering Services Adjustment and Instruction 1. The manufacturer shall supply the services of a competent and experienced Field Engineer to inspect the completed installation, adjust automatic controls and insure that the system operates in concert with the balance of MW the pool recirculation and filtration systems and in accordance with the specification requirements. Proper printed operating instructions will be delivered in customized forms for this installation. .f SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-18 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Equipment and pool fittings shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemicals or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, the fittings/materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and adjusted for proper operation. B. Pipe Materials: 1. Buried pool piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC. 2. Piping within filter room shall be PC4VC/Schedule 40 with flange connections, as required to facilitate servicing and replacement of pumps and valves. Provide pipe hangers or stands where required. C. Pipe Fittings: 1. Wherever plastic pipe is used, all fittings shall be heavy weight, Schedule 40, same manufacturer as PVC pipe used. 2. Pipe and fittings for bypass connections to pool heat exchange shall be CPVC or copper. "Pipe, fittings, valves, supports and hangers in surge tank shall be of non-corrodible materials suited for immersion in chlorinated water. Valves to be fitted with extensions and deck box keys for operation at deck level." D. Valves: 1. Valves up to 2" in size shall be ball valves, bronze, bronze disc, teflon seat, 300 WOG. • 2. Valves over 2" in size shall be butterfly iron body, bronze disc, 316 stainless steel stem, Buna-N rubber seal. 2.06 UNDERWATER POOL LIGHTS (Furnish only) A. Furnish eight (8) "wet niche" type underwater lights to be installed in pool wall as indicated on Drawings by the Electrical Contractor. Lights shall be 500 Watt, 120V equal to Catalog #B 555-13, as manufactured by K.D.I. Paragon Inc. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-17 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL F. Pool Heater: ., Pool heater shall be a shell and tube type exchanger capable of 600,000 BTU/HR output with 180 degree heat source. Shall be a carbon steel (ASME Code) with cast iron head and copper-tubes. Exchanger shall be furnished complete with hot water circulating pump and aquastat as manufactured by Byron/bh-24-32P or equal. 4W G. Chemical Feed Pumps: am 1. Hypochlorite Solution Feeder shall be a positive displacement solenoid type capable of 4.5 gallons per hour against 50 p.s.i. Pump shall be adjustable over the full range from zero to maximum and shall be equal to Liquid Metronics B-73. 2. pH control solution feeder shall be same as specified for hypochlorite • solution. 3. Solution Crocks--furnish two (2) polyethlene solution storage crocks with +* fiberglass covers each 50 gallons capacity. 4. Connection of feed pumps to recirculation system piping to be with polyethylene tubing and PVC fittings and check valves to prevent siphoning and backflow. 2.05 FILTER ROOM PIPING AND VALVES A. General: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of the pool plumbing. Details of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Architect for review. The Pool Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment as indicated without substantial alteration. 2. No installation shall be made that will provide a cross-section or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking purposes or sanitary sewer and the swimming pool that will permit a backflow. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-16 *� so ur ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 6. Pool Drain Modulating Valve (One Required): Furnish float operated wafer type 8" modulating valves for pool drain pipe in surge tank. Valve body to be of PVC and fitted for standard ASA fanged connection of piping. Disc, pivot shaft, float and all hardware to be of T304 stainless steel. 7. Anti-Vortex Plate (One Required): Furnish anit-vortex plate for pump suction pipe in surge tank. Plate shall be fabricated of T304L stainless steel fitted for connection to standard ASA flange for 8 inch pipe. Connecting bolts to be 304 stainless steel. 8. Vacuum Gage (One required): Vacuum gauge shall be furnished for installation at pump suction port to indicate excessive restriction in hair and lint strainer. Gauge shall be calibrated to 30" hg vacuum and dial shall be not less than 3" diameter. 9. Filter Vent (One required): A 3/4" vent valve shall be furnished for installation at tope of each filter tank. 10. Flowmeter (One required): Flowmeter shall be installed in the filtered water return line to the pool. Flowmeter shall be a direct reading analog type with positive displacement, self-powered flow sensor electrically connected to a 4 -1/2" dial instrument calibrated to read in gallons per minute from 0 to 1000 GPM. Sensor shall be installed in pool return piping according to supplier's drawings and dial to be located on filter tank. 11. Fill Funnel Furnish and install a rectangular fill funnel fabricated of T304 stainless ,. steel. Open top 12" square tapering to a 3" 1.P.S. opening at the opening at the bottom - depth 24". SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-15 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL E. Pumps, Gauges, Sumps, Valves, Meters & Hardware 1. The filter system shall be furnished with a centrifugal recirculating pumps each capable of 530 GPM against 60 feet TDH. Pumps shall be of cast iron construction with bronze fitted impellers, and mechanical seals. Pump motor shall be open, drip-proof construction, 10 HP, 3 Phase, 1750 RPM and capable of continuous running without undue heating or indication or overloading at any point on the characteristic curve of the Aw pump. Pump shall be Marlow 4-9SC or equal. 2. Hair and lint strainer shall be furnished for installation on 8" suction piping to the pump. Trap body shall be of heavy cast iron construction with a readily removable top to facilitate cleaning. Trap shall be fitted with a stainless steel basket having a total open area not less than 4 times the cross-sectional area of the pump suction piping and openings not greater than 1/8". One extra stainless steel bracket shall be supplied with the strainer. 3. Pressure gauges for influent and effluent pressure readings shall be mounted on a single panel attached to the filter tank(s) so as to be readily observed and easily read. Gauges shall not be less than 4" in diameter and shall be calibrated in p.s.i. from 0-60. One pressure gauge to be installed at pump discharge port with "snubber" fitting. 4. Backwash Sight Glass (One required): Backwash sight glass shall be furnished for installation on backwash line. Gauge body shall be of all bronze construction with a 1-1/2" male threaded connector for mounting on backwash line. 5. Pool Drain Sumps & Fittings (Two required): Pool drain sumps shall be prefabricated stainless steel boxes 18" x 18" x 18" deep by 12 gauge fitted with concrete waterproofing flanges and standard ASA fanged piping connections for 6" piping. Cover grates shall be of PVC with non-corrodible tamperproof fasteners. Sump body to be of 12 gauge/t304 stainless steel, all joints welded and pretested watertight. Sumps shall be fitted with 2 inch bronze hydrostatic relief valves and perforated PVC underdrains. Open area of grates shall be not less than 90 square inches each with openings not to exceed 3/8 inches. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-14 go ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL concrete grouting of the bottom cell, if required. The underdrain system shall be constructed of extra heavy, schedule 80, high impact PVC or 304L stainless steel. Headers and laterals to have 316 stainless steel sand retainers to prevent bypass of sand media. The underdrain system shall be properly secured to the filter cell floor with T304L stainless steel anchors and supports. 5. Each filter cell shall be provided with a minimum 18" depth of filter sand. The filter sand must be practically pure silica, free from appreciable quantities of foreign material, and the particles shall be round or angular and not flat or elongated. The sand will have an effective size of 0.45 to 0.65, depending on the filter manufacturer's recommendation with a uniformity coefficient of 1.45 maximum. Certification of filter size and uniformity coefficient specific to this project must be forwarded to the Architect prior to its arrival on site. 6. Filter exterior shall be provided with all valves, fittings and Schedule 80 PVC pipe to make a complete unit or battery leading from inlet to outlet. All necessary face piping and valves shall be preassembled by the filter ow manufacturer. 7. The piping shall be so arranged to carry out all of the operations of on filtering, backwashing, and drainage. All valves 3" and larger shall be wafer valves with mechanite iron body, bronze disc, 316 stainless steel stem with Buna-N rubber seat for between flange mounting. 8. All interior surfaces of the stainless steel filter tanks shall be cleaned. External coating of filter, face piping, fittings, and valve shall be one (1) ow coat of an appropriate primer after assembly by filter manufacturer with approved finish enamel touched up in field after installation. 9. The filter system must be listed as approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and bear the National Sanitation Foundation "Seal of Approval". The filter must have an engraved metal data plate permanently affixed on the face of the system which describes operational data and instructions and indicates start-up date. , „ SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-13 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL The Pool Subcontractor shall start the system, demonstrate its proper operation to the Owner's representative, instruct the Owner's representative in the proper care and maintenance of the pool system and stay with the project until the pool is acceptable for use in accordance with State and Local Health Code requirements. C. Guarantee: 1. The filter manufacturer shall guarantee the filter, will maintain water clarity in the pool to the standards of the local and state health code regulations under all maximum allowable conditions of pool use, if the filter is installed and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. The manufacturer must also provide the Owner with a second separate, written three (3) year warranty against defective materials or workmanship. Said warranty must describe in detail inclusions and exclusions. 3. If the filter system does not perform as specified herein, said filter system with a unit which will provide the specified performance. D. Filter System: 1. Filter shall be pressure sand type consisting of one vertical tank with three cells to provide capacity for processing 530 G.P.M at a filtration rate not to exceed 5.5 GPM per square foot of filtration surface area. Filter shall be listed by National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.) at filtration rate as furnished. 2. Tanks shall be 78" in diameter and fabricated of type 304L stainless steel. Side shell thickness not less than 3/16". Standard dished heads not less than 3/16". All welding shall be "inert gas" process. Tanks shall be hydrostatically tested to 75 p.s.i. 3. Each filter cell will be equipped with the necessary flanges and connections for the exterior and interior piping. Each filter tank will be provided with a manhole having an opening of not less thank 11" x 15". 4. Filter underdrains in each filter cell shall be factory installed including SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-12 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL „ comparable synthetic bristles set in a synthetic brush back and attached to an anodized aluminum handle bracket. Brush shall be furnished complete with a 1- 1/4” OD anodized aluminum pole 16' in length. K. Vacuum Cleaner (One required): Furnish a submersible self-propelled vacuum cleaner equal to "Aqua King" by Aqua-Vac Systems of Boca Raton, Florida with 150' cord and caddy cart or equal. L. Patient Lifter (One required): „�. Spec Nolan water-hydraulic lift or approved equal. M. Transfier Tier and Entry Steps (One Required): Furnish "Aqua-Aid" fiberglass stairway with therapy stabilizers to accommodate pool features such as copings and skimmers, as manufactured by Northern Plastics Corp., East Syracuse, N.Y., or approved equal. N. Storage Benches (Four required): Furnish deck storage benches as manufactured by Recreonica, Inc., Indianapolis, Indiana, or approved equal. Catalog No. 14-362 2.03 SWIMMING POOL FILTRATION AND TREATMENT SYSTEM A. General: It is the intent of this section that all of the equipment specified herein shall be *� furnished by a single Pool Subcontractor who has specialized in the installation of public and institutional swimming pool systems and equipment. The Pool Contractor shall assume TOTAL responsibility for the equipment guarantees as required by these specifications and shall be responsible for a properly integrated system of components, each designed to function with all others so that the total system will perform in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and applicable design codes and standards. B. Start-up and Instruction: �„ SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-11 ow ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL OD by .065 wall thickness x 7'-6" high. E. Recall (False start) Stanchions (Two required): Recall Posts shall be identical to backstroke posts with a height of 4'-6". ^ 1. Backstroke/Recall Anchorage(6) shall be cast bronze or stainless steel and shall be located as required by competitive regulations. F. Racing Lines (Seven required): Racing lines shall be anti-turbulent type which have quelling floats and stainless steel cable. Floats shall be of injection molded polyethylene not less than 4" in diameter and colors shall be contrasting solid color at each end of line for the final 15 feet. Racing lines shall be furnished as completely assembled unit for 25 yard pool with stainless steel tensioning springs, turnbuckles, anchor hooks, lines shall be as manufactured by Kiefer-McNeil, "Competitor" Model or equal. G. Racing Line Storage Reel (One required): Storage Reel to be "Stor-Lane" Catalog #200-350 by Kiefer-McNeil or approved equal. MW H. Life Preserver and Line (Four required): Each life preserver shall be a 24" OD vinyl clad PVC foam ring buoy with a 60 feet attached throwing line of 1/2" polyethylene rope. Preserver shall be USOG approved. Furnish stainless steel brackets for attaching to natatorium walls. I. Life Hook (Two required): Life hook shall consist of an anodized aluminum 3/8" OD "Shepherd's Crock" with a 1 1/8" OD handle attachment suitable for a 1-1/4" pole. Hook shall be furnished complete with a pole 16' in length. Furnish stainless steel brackets for attaching to natatorium walls. J. Wall Brush (One required): Wall brush shall be 18" in width with four rows of 1-2/4" long nylon or SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-10 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL caulking compound. 2022 DECK EQUIPMENT oft It is intended that the Swimming Pool Equipment specified herein shall be installed by the Pool Subcontractor and that all anchors shall be grounded in accordance with Article 680 of the National Electrical Code by the Electrical Contractor. A. Diving Stands (One Meter - one required) The one meter diving stand shall be of heavy cast aluminum frame work finished with two coats of baked epoxy enamel. Stand shall be designed for mounting to the deck with 9 cast bronze anchors to be set in deck concrete. Stand shall be fitted with a foot adjustable fulcrum and stainless steel guard rails on both sides extending to the edge of the deck. Arcadia Catalog #70-231-400. (one meter) (Cat. #70-231-300). Springboard shall be a 16 foot extruded aluminum equal to "Duraflex" catalog #66-231-326 Arcadia Products Co. B. Starting Platforms (Six required) Platforms shall be manufactured entirely of T304 stainless steel. Platform tops and step shall include anti-skid finish. A regulation backstroke bar shall be provided. Platforms shall be numbered #1 through #6 with numerals a minimum , ► of 4" high and clearly visible. Platforms shall mount in stainless steel anchorage assemblies installed and grounded by the manufacturer, at the deep end of the pool only. Starting platforms shall be Whitten Corporation model. C. Pool Ladders (Four required); (2) 3 tread; (2) 4 tread. Ladders shall be Type 304 satin finish stainless steel tubing 1/90 OD by .065 wall thickness. Handrails and treads shall be of T304 stainless steel. Bottom legs shall curve in to meet pool and shall be fitted with rubber bumpers. Ladders shall mount in bronze anchorage assemblies. D. Backstroke Marker Stanchions (Four required) Backstroke stanchions shall be of Type 304 satin finish stainless steel tubing 1.90 SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-9 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL inlets, and rope anchors shall be readily accessible and removable for inspection, repair or replacement. .� 8. The system shall be provided with a control device which will aft automatically maintain the pool water level to within 1/16" of the overflow lip of the gutter at all times in accordance with the recommendations and requirements of N.C.A.A. swimming rules. sm 9. Gutter systems designed to operate with skimming weirs or water levels lower than the top of the gutter overflow lip shall not be required as no external surge tank is provided. 10. For the operation of the pool water level control system, the gutter system „w, supplier shall: a. Supply and install a one inch solenoid valve for installation in the Im water makeup by pass piping. 11. The gutter system shall be installed by experienced factory-trained welders .,t and welding shall be established by the American Standards Association. All exposed weld beads shall be cleaned and polished to a uniform, non- corrodible finish in accordance with the manufacturers's standard installation procedures. 12. The recirculating system supplied under this Section shall be cleaned and left in perfect condition ready for use. Installation shall include a two (2) day start-up and instructional service and proper hydraulic balancing adjustments to the system by a factory representative. 13. The manufacturer must provide the Owner with a separate, written three (3) year warranty of the recirculating gutter system describing in detail its .® inclusion and exclusions. The manufacturer must also provide the Owner with a separate, written (5) year warranty on the gutter grill system. D. Grouting 1. After the stainless steel recirculating system has been installed and leveled on the pool wall, this Contractor shall place a one-to-two mixture of non- shrink concrete group between the stainless steel gutter channel and the pool wall and shall caulk the grout of stainless joint with an approved SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-8 ..,� low ew ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Systems grating, the grating shall provide open area at least to accommodate two times the specified recirculation rate evenly distributed around perimeter, shall be constructed entirely of non-corrodible materials and shall be a product with successful field experience on at least five similar installations. Grating shall be attached with non-corrodible tamper proof fasteners readily removable for inspection and maintenance. 3. The depth for the gutter drainage channel from overflow lip to bottom of channel shall be not less than 8.5" and total cross-sectional area available for drainage flow shall be at least 70 square inches, exclusive of gutter restriction due to filtered water conduit. 4. Gutter profile shall be semi-recessed on side walls with 6" elevation from water level to edge of finished deck and fully recessed on end walls with 12 inches elevation to deck curb. 5. The entire gutter channel shall be fabricated of Type 304L stainless steel with a No. 3 finish on all exposed surfaces and shall be mounted on the pool wall with corrosion-resistant anchors. All joints between stainless steel sections shall be welded; bolted joints are not acceptable. Thickness of materials and methods of construction and installation shall be such as to insure a permanent, durable, and rigid gutter channel. Overflow rim to be leveled by the manufacturer to a tolerance not to exceed plus or minus 1/16" around the entire pool perimeter. This level to be certified in writing by the Project Inspector. 6. There shall be incorporated into the gutter system, one gutter supply and drainage convertor which shall be supplied and installed under this Section. The convertor shall be incorporated into the gutter and shall be fabricated of 12 gauge 304L stainless steel and shall provide all necessary pipe stub connections for interconnection to filter piping. Supply connection to be 6". Drainage connection to be 8". 7. The system shall have incorporated into its design the complete system of pool supply piping and inlet fittings and all rope anchors as shown on the drawings. Pipe and fitting shall be non-corrodible materials suitable for use in potable water systems and size of pipe shall be sufficient to insure flow velocities.not to exceed 10' per second at specified pool recirculation rate. Supply systems shall be designed to insure an equal and adequate distribution of filtered water to all areas of the pool. All supply fittings, SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-7 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL the Architect's representative shall again remark the water level. If the measurement between the initial (first) water level and the final (third) mark is ~" no greater than 1/4". IF the pool structure is found to be losing water beyond the specified tolerance, the Contractor shall drain the structure(s) and make the necessary repairs to correct the condition. The pool and surge tank shall be retested in accordance with the above until the Architect is satisfied that the structure(s) are watertight. 1.09 Interior Finish Swimming Pool A. The Tile Contractor shall furnish all materials and labor to install a ceramic tile finish to the interior surfaces of the pool structure. Tile shall be certified by the Tile Council of America (TCA) to be equal to or in excess of Standard Grade Requirements of ANSI A137.1. Grouting and setting materials shall be as manufactured under TCA. B. License and formula Identification shall be indicated on each container. All materials shall be obtained from a single source in order to minimize variations in appearance and quality. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS No 2.01 Perimeter Overflow System: so A. A continuous stainless steel gutter and recirculation system shall be furnished and installed on the swimming pool wall. The complete system shall be the product of a manufacturer with a minimum of five (5) years continuous experience in the „ field installation of prefabricated perimeter overflow systems. B. To guarantee compliance with these Base Bid Specifications, and assume TOTAL responsibility for the three (3) years warranty: the system shall be completely installed by the manufacturer with his own factory-trained personnel. C. Material/Design 1. The system shall provide overflow skimming around the entire perimeter of the pool at all times and under all conditions of pool use, and shall be capable of removing at least 100% of the recirculation system flow rate from the pool to the surge tank. .. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-6 OR D ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. SCHOOL 4. Equipment standard of National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.) Start-Up and Engineering Services A. Pool Contractor shall include the services of an experienced swimming pool operator/instructor for a period of not less than two (2) days after the pool has been filled and initially placed in operation. During this period, the Owner's designated representatives shall be thoroughly instructed in all phases of the r pool's operation. Pool Subcontractor shall deliver three (3) complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals, and all component equipment. Prior to his leaving the job, he shall obtain written certification from the Owner's designated representative acknowledging that the instruction period has been completed and all necessary operating information provided. 1.06 Concrete Pool Shell - Not the Work of Pool Contractor A. Swimming pool shall be constructed of reinforced concret 3 p.s.i.) in accordance with specifications for concrete, as set forth in ection 3 . Concrete to be monolithically placed to c�nct �ctlon joints or extl�i�n jn;mss as �Pr ;tP�t on the drawing, and PVC waterstops shall be installed at all joints to insure a watertight structure. Dimensions are critical and tolerances shall not exceed one inch plus or zero inch minus on depths, length, and width. All walls must be laterally straight and true. 1.07 Concrete Surge Tank - Not the Work of the Pool Subcontractor A. Surge tank to be constructed of reinforced concrete (3000 p.s.i.) in accordance with specifications for concrete as set forth in Section 3A. Concrete to be monolithically placed in as far as possible with PVC waterstops to be installed at joints between floor, top slab and walls to insure a watertight structure. Pipe penetrations to be accomplished in a manner to insure watertight construction. 1.08 Leak Test - Not the Work of the Pool Contractor A. The pool and surge tank shall be filled with water by the General Contractor and the level marked by the Architect's representative. The water shall be allowed to stand in the pool for 12 hours. At the end of the 12 hour period, the water level shall be remarked by the Architect's representative and any measurement between the initial mark and the second mark shall be duly noted. The pool shall then be allowed to stand a second 12 hours. At the end of the second 12 hours, SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-5 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Insure that installation of specialized swimming pool equipment and systems be required for the operation of a competiti mAyve swimming pool 25 yards long by 45 feet wide containing approximately 197,7 allons of water is in accordance with applicable codes and requirements. , The Pool Subcontractor must have had sufficient experience in the gutter and filter equipment installations and servicing of swimming pools similar to this project and must list at least ten (10) pools of this type each with a water surface area of not less than this pool, which he has equipped and which, upon investigation, would be found to be completed in a satisfactory manner and in operation. B. The equipment, products, and methods of HydroTech Systems, Ltd., Cohoes, New York; Paddock Pool Equipment Company, Rock Hill, South Carolina; and Neptune/Benson, West Warwick, RI are acceptable provided they meet the performance and material specifications specified herein. „ The Owner reserves the right to reject anY Pool Subcontractor if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such .. Contractor is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of this contract and to complete the work described, or if the Contractor does not meet the qualifications stated herein. C. The listing of manufacturers and/or suppliers in the paragraph is not intended to imply prequalification or blanket approval of any products which might be proposed. It is intended only as a reference to bidding contractors for soliciting quotes. Acceptance will be predicated on the Consultant's determination of conformance to quality and performance standards, as detailed in the .M specifications. Verification of NSF listing of filter system proposed must be furnished prior to approval of the sub-bidder. 1.04 CODE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pool Contractor shall be responsible for equipment conformance with the following requirements: 1. Current Massachusetts Sanitary Code (105 CMR 435.00). 2. Current High School Swimming & Diving Rules. 3. Current Massachusetts Plumbing Code. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-4 ON ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and piping. f. Backwash waste cystern. " 2. By the Plumbing Contractor a. Pool deck drains and piping. b. Connect supply water at Automatic water make-up assembly. C. Waste water piping from filter room to approved disposal. d. Filter Room floor drains. e. Backwash cystern drain. 3. By the Electrical Contractor a. Provide panels, disconnects, conduit and wiring, as required for power to pool equipment. b. Electrical bonding of stainless steel gutter system to equipment in accordance with Art. 680 N.E.C. C. Install pool underwater lights. 4. By the H.V.A.C. Contractor a. Furnish and install pipe, fittings, valves, as required to provide hot water to pool water heat exchanger, install controls, sensing devices, pumps, as furnished by Pool Equipment Supplier. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Swimming Pool Contractor must have a proven record of competence and experience in the installation of similar institutional facilities. The following requirements have been go established to insure that only properly qualified contractors will be considered. The Pool Subcontractor Qualification Form included with the documents must be completed and submitted with the general construction bid. A" so SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-3 w. .,. ..W ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 7. Provide the services of a competent and experienced pool operator to start and balance the pool recirculation system and instruct the Owner's "' designated representative in its operation and maintenance (minimum 2- days). am 8. Furnish and install pool water heat exchanger, pipe, valves, and fittings as required to connect to pool recirculation system. Heat source connections by HVAC contractor. 4W 9. Furnish underwater pool lights (to be installed by electrical contractor). 00 10. Furnish and grout gutter. 11. Provide three (3) bound sets of operating and maintenance manuals. 12. Furnish written guarantees to the Owner in accordance with the terms of these specifications. 13. Furnish and install pipe; fittings and valves as required for an operable pool recirculation system from air cap connections to fresh water supply and waste water disposal. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. By the General Contractor a. Concrete pool shell, caulking and interior finish. (Pool structure shall be constructed to "Official High School" standards for pool length and shall be certifiable for completion). b. Concrete surge tank C. Pool decks and finish -Install Deck Anchors for Diving Stands and Patient Lifter. (Anchors furnished by Pool Equipment Supplier). d. Filter room floor slabs, sumps, concrete pads for equipment and surge tank. e. Concrete cutting and patching and embedment of all fittings and equipment anchorage in concrete, as required for pool equipment SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-2 im- ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL *" SECTION 11300 - SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT See INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS and Division 1, GENERAL CONDITIONS, as they are binding on this section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 INTENT A. The Contractor under this section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment required for swimming pool systems and equipment work, in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this section includes all items shown on plans and described herein, including, but not limited to: 1. Furnish drawings, equipment cuts, design and dimension details, specifications, and performance calculations as will be required by the Architect and other Contractors to integrate the work of this section into the project and secure the permits and approvals of appropriate regulatory agencies. 2. Coordinate his work and delivery schedules to assure orderly progress of the project. 3. Furnish and install pool water filtration and chemical treatment equipment. 4. Furnish and install prefabricated perimeter overflow system. 5. Furnish and install swimming pool deck equipment including diving stands starting platforms, ladders, stanchion posts, lane lines, pennant lines, anchor sockets, storage reels, pool vacuum cleaner, deck storage benches. 6. Furnish deck access grate for surge tank and backwash system. ,M. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 11300-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL General Contractor. B. Following completion, and before final acceptance by the Owner, clean finished surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and leave specified work free of imperfections. 3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect specified work from damage during transportation to the project site, storage at the site, during installation and after completion until acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect adjacent work under other contracts during installation until completion of specified work. After completion, the Contractor for other work shall be + "► responsible for the protection of this work until acceptance by the Owner. C. Damaged work, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired or replaced as determined by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 11250 BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. FORWARD-FOLD BACKSTOPS (SIDE COURTS) SIX (6) REQUIRED Location: Gymnasium 1169 low Make & Model: Recreation Equipment Corp., #112-SR, back-braced, forward-fold backstops as described elsewhere herein, with rectangular wood backboard, stationary goal, safety edge am and electric winch with remote-control operation. Description: Backstops shall be suspended from building steel above, by means of a full drop cradle, designed complete with all necessary attaching hardware, cross-bracing and fittings to provide a rigid, vibration-free installation. Side court an backstops shall be parallel to steel trusses above-which are 21'-10" on-centers per floor plan. Approximate dimensions from finished floor to bottom of trusses shall be Am approximately 24'-0". Refer to structural drawings for location and size of all building steel members. .A Power: 3/4 H.P., 110V/60C/1 Phase Note: This Equipment Subcontractor shall familiarize himself with all building Im conditions to coordinate this installation of backstops with all ductwork, lighting and structural steel. Refer to related drawings for other trades. am PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examination and Acceptance 1. Examine space in which specified work is to be installed to assure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of specified work. Report in writing to the Architect any deficiency in the work of other contractors, affecting specified work. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of space conditions. 2. This Subcontractor shall obtain and verify all measurements and conditions on the job, and shall assume all responsibility in respect to same. 3.02 CLEAN-UP A. All debris and surplus materials resulting from installation work shall be removed promptly as work progresses by this Subcontractor, to a location indicated by the BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-6 so ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Winches shall be individual remote-control type, equal to Model #191-C, automatic electric hoist, equipped with 3/4 H.P., 110-Volt motor with overload protection, 15 Amp. Hoist shall have both chain and worm gear reduction; limit 0+ switch, adjustable for both up and down positions; and key and reversing switch included for remote operation. Winch shall be prewired with 54" lg. flex conduit with twist-lock grounded type plug attached. Matching flange type receptacle shall be mounted in 4" square box cover (box by Electrical Subcontractor). B. Each motor assembly shall be provided with one (1) key-operated switch for remote operation of back stop. Wiring of all electrical components to include all conduit, junction boxes and components not specified herein shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. 2.05 ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED Note: Items A & B, specified herein, shall be located in the J.F. Middle School Gymnasium. A. FORWARD-FOLD BACKSTOPS (MAIN COURT) TWO (2) REQUIRED Location: Gymnasium 1169 Make & Model: Recreation Equipment Corp., #112-SR, back-braced, forward-fold backstops as described elsewhere herein, with rectangular Herculite glass bank, pressure-release goal, safety edge and electric winch with remote-control operation. Description: Backstops shall be suspended from building steel above, designed complete with all necessary attaching hardware, cross-bracing and fittings to provide a rigid, vibration-free installation. Main court backstops shall be perpendicular to steel trusses above-which are 21'-10" on-centers per floor plan. Approximate dimensions from finished floor to bottom of steel truss members shall be approximately 24'- 0". Refer to structural drawings for location and size of all building steel members. Power: 3/4 H.P., 110V/60C/1 Phase Note: This Equipment Subcontractor shall familiarize himself with all building conditions to coordinate this installation of backstops with all ductwork, lighting and structural steel. Refer to related drawings for other trades. BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL O.D. slide rod. The entire assembly shall be self-aligning, and so designed that the rigid brace shall be self-locking in the down position and self-releasing at the beginning of the folding cycle. 5. Backstop shall be raised and lowered through swivel pulleys by 1/4" diameter x 7 x 19 galvanized aircraft cable which is automatically retracted when backstop is lowered without the use of springs or shock .� cord. Hinge points shall be located as high as possible. 6. All goals shall be adjustable in height from 8'-0" to 10'-0" above the finished floor. Adjustment assembly shall be of unitized construction with ball-bearing screw adjustment operated with removable crank from the floor. ,. 2.02 RECTANGULAR GLASS BACKBOARD WITH GOALS A. Backboards shall be official, 4' x 6', rectangular Herculite glass, 1/2" thick. Backboard border and center target to be fired with brilliant white vitreous enamel. Glass shall be set in an extra heavy welded and bolted steel frame and shall be cushioned with vinyl channel molding between the glass and framework. B. Provide backboards with #ADP safedge padding of 1-1/2" thick x 2" wide shock absorbing vinyl foam pad. C. Goals shall be "Toss-Back", #TB-107, official NBA/CBA approved pressure release type with standard nylon net. D. Goals shall be constructed utilizing a positive lock mechanism, completely enclosed, and continuous weld throughout. 00 2.03 RECTANGULAR WOOD BACKBOARD A. Backboards shall be official, 4' x 6', rectangular, solid wood core constructed of `» 1-5/8" exterior grade, 9-ply, U.S. plywood. Provide "Lebonex" surface on both sides of finished with two (2) coats of eggshell white, non-glare enamel. B. Provide backboards with #ADP safedge padding of 1-1/2" thick x 2" wide shock absorbing vinyl foam pad. C. Goal shall be stationary, official size, with 7" square back plate. 2.04 WINCHES BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-4 40 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment, so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Conditions regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced. D. Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ! ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Superstructure 1. Backstops shall be suspended from 3" I.D. pipe anchored to building/steel by means of certified malleable iron beam clamps. 2. 2" I.D. vertical drop pipes shall be spaced to accommodate backstop backboard. These drop pipes shall be cross braced with 1/4" x 1" straps to assure positive tension. 2" I.D. and 1-1/2" horizontal pipes shall be used on each end of rods giving entire unit box-like strength and rigidity. These drop pipes shall be also attached to offset hangers 4" behind pivot point to assure that unit will lock in playing position without use of ropes, latches or springs. 3. The double slide rod assemblies shall be 1-1/2" I.D. (1-7/8" O.D.) steel pipe. Unitized frame shall be cross braced with two sets of 1/4" x 1 steel straps. There shall be one 1-1/2" I.D. (1-7/8" O.D.) horizontal pipe located midway. 4. The slide rod mechanism shall have steel slide bushing traveling on 1-5/8" BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-3 an ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions and in the manner described therein. B. The drawings shall be 1/4" scale and shall show the layout of all equipment, all electrical connections as required by the equipment. 1/2" scale drawings shall be submitted for all fabricated or shop made equipment. 4W C. The exact location of all connections shall be dimensioned for all equipment and labeled with the necessary information. This Contractor shall obtain and verify all dimensions, measurements and conditions, and shall assume all responsibility so in respect to same. D. No fabrication, shipment, or installation shall take place until drawings and Am manufacturer's cuts have been approved and returned to the Equipment Subcontractor. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit samples of all materials requested by the Architect. B. Samples shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with requirements of the .. General Conditions. 1.06 PERMITS, LAWS, ORDINANCES AND CODES A. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of all local, state and federal + authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the local electrical code. 1.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Instruct to the Owner's satisfaction such persons as the Owner designates, in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and their parts. B. Furnish in accordance with General Conditions, operating and maintenance manuals and forward same to the Architect for each piece of equipment. C. For maintenance purposes, provide Shop Drawings, parts lists, Specifications and manufacturer's maintenance bulletins for each piece of equipment. BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-2 00 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ow SECTION 11250 - BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INTENT via A. The Contractor, under this section, shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment required for completion of the Basketball Backstops, in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish basketball backstops listed in this specification and/or shown on the drawing. Include delivery to building, unpacking, setting in place, levelling and attachment to structure, as required for complete installation. B. Removal all debris, dirt and rubbish accumulated as a result of this installation, and leave the premises clean and ready for use. C. Verify and confirm all building dimensions relative to equipment to be furnished and installed by taking actual field measurements at the job site prior to equipment fabrication. D. Become familiar with job conditions and building measurements to coordinate the planning, design, delivery and installation of equipment furnished under these specifications, with all other related trades and associated work during the term of this contract. E. The Equipment Contractor shall supply an installation of equipment that is equal to or exceeding the quality and function described in this minimum requirement specification and shown on the drawing. F. Furnish power operated basketball backstops complete with motors, ready for operation and final electrical connection by the Electrical Subcontractor. 1.03 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Final connection to motors of power operated basketball backstops. B. Furnishing of all building conduit, wiring, junction boxes and components to accommodate services called for in the specifications and shown on the drawings. BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS 11250-1 a ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ,f, C. Workmanship: 1. Erect casework straight, level and plumb, and securely anchor in place. 00 Scribe and closely fit to adjacent work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, etc. 04 2. Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts to operate properly. 3. Leave surface clean and free from defects at time of final acceptance. Aw D. Guarantee: all materials to be guaranteed for a period of one year from manufacturer's defects and workmanship. E. Clean-Up: remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc. and leave spaces clean and all casework ready for Owner's use. 3.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Furnish shop drawings for work under this section in accordance with General Requirements. END OF SECTION 11200 ON CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Cabinet Ends a. High pressure plastic laminate particle board, 3/4-inch thick with phenolic, neutral colored backer sheet on concealed side. Holes fto drilled for adjustable shelves, 2-inches on center, for standard cabinetry. b. Exposed edges shall be high-impact extruded plastic,T-edge, black or putty in color. 3. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves r a. High pressure, plastic laminate on both face of 3/4-inch particle board. Leading exposed edge of shelves to be edged with high impact extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. •� D. Countertops Aw 1. High pressure, plastic laminate, bonded to particle board core. Thickness as shown on plans and specifications. Interior side to be properly balanced with heavy gauge, neutral colored backing sheet. Edges shall be high pressure plastic laminate to match horizontal surface color. Furnish counter tops in design as shown on plans. *� 2. Provide continuous tops for counter type cabinets fixed in a line. .r PART 3 - EXECUTION am 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Storage and Protection: ow 1. Casework shall be protected in transit. Store under cover in a ventilated building not exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes. Do " not store or install casework in building until concrete, masonry and plaster work is dry. B. Workmen: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative, with factory-trained journeymen, authorized by the manufacturer. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-6 �w ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL b. Sides and back of drawers to be 1/2-inch thick, putty colored, polyester laminated fiberboard; sub-front same, except 5/8-inch thick. C. Fiberboard to be of uniform density and meet the following minimum standards: 1. Internal Bond: 90 psi 2. Modulus of Rupture: 3,000 psi 3. Modulus of Elasticity: 300,000 psi 4. Screw Holding Power: 325 lbs d. Exposed top edge to be PVC edge, putty in color. e. Drawer bottom shall be prefinished putty color, 1/4-inch thick hardboard, housed and glued into front, sides and back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms as required with intermediate spreaders. 7. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers a. Putty colored, polyester laminated particle board, 3/4-inch thickness. Secured in cabinet with molded plastic clips. Edges to be high impact plastic, T-edge. Putty in color. w C. Open Cabinets 1. Cabinet Top and Bottom: a. Base cabinet bottoms to be high pressure plastic laminate particle board, 3/4-inch thick, with phenolic neutral colored backer sheet on concealed side. b. Solid sub-top shall be furnished for all lower base cabinets to be phenolic overlay, neutral color. C. Exposed edges shall be High-Impact, extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-5 04 WNW ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Cabinet Ends a. Putty colored, polyester laminated particle board, interior side, 3/4-inch thick with phenolic, neutral colored backer sheet on concealed side. Library stack end panels 1-inch thick. Holes drilled for adjustable shelves, 2-inches on center, for standard cabinetry. Library shelving, 1-inch on center. b. Exposed edges shall be High-Impact, extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. " C. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with high pressure plastic laminate. 3. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves a. Putty colored, polyester laminated particle board two sides. Leading exposed edge of shelves to be edged with high impact, extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. b. Thickness: 3/4-inch standard shelving to 36-inches wide. One inch shelving, 36 inches wide and over. 4. Cabinet Backs: Standard cabinet back to be 1/4-inch thick, putty colored, prefinished board. Rear, unexposed side of back to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between back and sides/top/bottom for sealing against moisture and vermin, and further contribute to case rigidity. 5. Doors and Drawer Fronts a. Plastic laminated doors and drawer fronts to be 13/16-inch thick for all doors. Core material to be 3/4-inch thick, 45 pound density particle board, bonded on exterior with high pressure laminate and with putty colored heavy gauge balancing sheet on interior face. b. Exposed door and drawer fronts shall be edged with high impact, plastic T-edge. Black or putty in color. 6. Drawers a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to drawer sub-front. High pressure plastic laminate, exterior side with heavy gauge putty colored backing sheet on interior face. Total thickness, 13/16-inch. All edges shall be High-Impact, extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-4 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Pulls a. Satin Chrome, wire pull, 3-1/2 inch, LH-321. 3. Drawer Glides a. Standard Drawers: National Lock Co., with positive in-stop. Nylon bearing rollers, both front and rear. Minimum 100 pound load rating. 4. Locks a. Disc tumbler locks, keyed alike. 5. Catches a. LH-340 Magnetic catch for base cabinets. Minimum 6 pound pull. 6. Adjustable Shelf Clips a. LH-352, Heavy duty shelf support clip with positive locking pin for back two supports on all adjustable shelves. Molded of natural nylon. 2.02 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS FOR CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Sub Base: Continuous base of 3/4-inch unfinished fir plywood. B. Closed Cabinets 1. Cabinet Top and Bottom a. Base cabinet bottoms to be putty colored, polyester laminated particle board, interior side, 3/4-inch thick with phenolic, neutral colored backer sheet on concealed side. b. Solid sub-top shall be furnished for all lower base cabinets to be phenolic overlay, neutral color. C. Exposed edges shall be High-Impact, extruded plastic, T-edge, black or putty in color. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Plastic Laminate: 0.50 thickness high pressure laminate, satin or texture finish all locations. Cabinet doors, end panels, the interior of open cabinets shall be the same color. Provide phenolic backer sheet as required. aw C. Particle Board: 1. 45 lb Density board shall be of balanced construction with moisture content not to exceed 8%. All particle board shall meet or exceed the requirements for its type and classification under Commercial Standard CS-236-66 or Federal Specifications LLL-B-800A. "` 2. Polyester laminate shall be 9 to 11 mils in thickness, 62% resin content, colorfast and shall meet or exceed ASTM D-L-300 and NEMA Test LSI- 2.06. Color shall be putty. Enclosed cabinets and drawers only. D. Hardboard: Drawers Only 1. Hardboard shall meet or exceed Commercial Standards CS-251 and Federal Specifications LLL-B-00810. 2. Hardboard exposed one side to be 1/4 inch thick, refinished in putty color to match cabinet interior. Opposite face prefinished with neutral color balance coating. E. Polyethylene Edges: Extruded, barbed "T" design of size to suit material thickness. Color to be black or putty, finish is satin. Use for all cabinet, door and drawer edges, and shelf edges. F. Hardware 1. Hinges a. Heavy duty, five knuckle, 2-1/2 inch institutional type hinge. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full wrap around type of tempered steel, 0.093 inch thick. Each hinge to have minimum seven screws #8, 5/8-inch F.H.S.M. , to assure positive door action and alignment. b. One pair per door to 8 inch height and allow 270 degree swing. C. Finish to be LH-301, Dull Chrome. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-2 ur ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 11200 - CLASSROOM CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INTENT A. The Contractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment necessary for completion of the Classroom Casework, in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings indicated as stock cabinets and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all items of casework (stock cabinets) listed in this specification and/or , ► shown on the drawings. Include delivery to the building, unpacking, setting in place, leveling and scribing to walls and floors, as required. B. Furnish and install counter tops on cabinets. C. Field cutting opening for sink. D. Verify and confirm all building dimensions relative to equipment to be furnished and installed by taking actual field measurements at the job site prior to equipment fabrication. E. Work not included: 1. Furnishing and installing sinks. 2. Vinyl bases. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Drawings and specifications are based upon casework as manufactured by LSI Corporation of American, Inc., 2100 Xenium Lane, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55441. Construction and design shall be L-55 series, full inset door design. CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11200-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - 7.F.K MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 11160 - DOCK BUMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of dock bumpers is indicated on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOCK LEVELERS: A. General: dock levers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 1. Kelly "Type L" model bumper 6" thick x 12" width x length as shown on drawings. 2. Mount externally to existing concrete docks per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 11160 DOCK BUMPERS 11160-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide coverings as required to protect installed accessories. END OF SECTION 10810 Aw Am Ak Toilet Accessories 10810-6 far ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ,P C. Recess Mounted Accessories: Design accessories to provide concealed anchorage when closed. Weld all joints. Precisely miter corners where indicated. Use full-length stainless steel piano-type hinges for access doors and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the Architect in writing of any conflicts concerning product placement, for resolution. Do not proceed without resolution. B. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of accessory installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive accessories. Protect surrounding elements from damage during accessory installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Provide plumb, level accessory installations. C. Securely attach accessories to substrate. • D. Accessories Installed for Use by Handicapped Persons: Install as indicated on drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING ! ► A. Adjust accessories as required to provide smooth operation and trouble free servicing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories using accessory manufacturer's ' "" T 10810-5 Toilet Accessories ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. One piece construction of bright polished stainless steel for sueface mounting to wall;furnish with mounting clamps or lugs appropriate for wall construction indicated. J. Towel Pin: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-932. a. Stainless steel;Bright polish finish K. Mirror 1 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-290. a. Stainless steel-framed mirror,standard duty. b. Laminated glass,1/4 inch thick with galvanized steel back. L. Mirror 2 : 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-294. a. Adjustable Tilting Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units:Fabricate frame with 3/4" x 3/4" angle of type 304 stainless steel,satin finish,with square corners carefully mitered to hairline joints,welded and ground smooth.Furnish continuous stainless steel piano hinge at bottom of unit and adjustable elbow hinge at each side to permit pivot ranging from vertical to not less than 7 inches outward at top. M. Shower Curtain Hooks: *■ 1. Basis of design: Model No. 204-1. a. Chrome plated or stainless steel spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners,sized to accomodate curtain rod size specified. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Mounting Devices and Fasteners: Provide toilet accessory manufacturer's recommended items for substrates and conditions indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name and Model Number: For each accessory provide manufacturer's name and accessory model number on stamped plate or waterproof label securely affixed to unexposed surface of accessory. B. Surface Mounted Accessories: Where possible, design accessory to provide concealed R„ anchorage when installed. Precisely-fit seams and joints. Roll exposed edges unless indicated otherwise. Use full-length stainless steel piano-type hinges for access doors and panels. Toilet Accessories 10810-4 . W ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL location and sizes. '! a. Stainless Steel Type:Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 gage(.050 inch) and as follows: b. 1. Mounting:Exposed,manufacturers standard flanges and anchorages. C. 2. Clearance:l-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. d. 3. Gripping Suraces:peened grip. OF e. 4. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-270. a. Surface -Mounted Type: Fabricate of 22 gauge,type 304 stainless steel,satin finish with seamless exposed walls,tightly self closing top cover and locking bottom panel with continuous stainless steel piano hingr. E. Soap Dispenser: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-132. a. Powdered Soap Dispenser: Fabricate for surface mounting,sized for 32 oz. minimum capacity.Provide stainless knobs,agitator spring,and discharge mechanism that dispenses measured quantity of powder.Provide cover and container of Type 304 stainless steel,satin finish. F. Shower Curtain Rod: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-6107 a. Shower Curtain Rod: Heavy Duty, 1-inch O.D.,20 gage(.040-inch) stainless steel,satin finish with 3 inch O.D.,minimum 20-gage stainless steel flanges with satin finish,designed for exposed fasteners. G. Shower Curtain: 1. Basis of design: Model No. 204-2. a. Vinyl Shower Curtain: 42 inches wide by 72 inches high by minimum.008 inches thick,opaque matte vinyl material with hemmed edges and corrosion-resistant grommets at a minimum 6 inches on center through top hem. Furnish in white color unless other wise indicated. H. Folding Shower Seat: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-5191. a. Seat is constructed of four durable,water resistant,ivory-colorwed,solid phenolic slats,5/16"x3".Frame and mounting brackets are type 304 stainless steel with self-locking mechanism.Set measures 18 inches wide,projects 16" from wall. I. Surface-Mounted Soap Dish: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-680. "' Toilet Accessories 10810-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ' 1.4 COORDINATION A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for products specified. In a timely manner, distribute the following to affected installers of related work: 1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for incorporation into other work. * 2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for cutouts and installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. For each distinct type of toilet accessory, provide accessories fabricated by a single manufacturer. B. All model numbers specified are products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc. C. Equivalent products of the following other manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Bradley Corporation. 2. McKinney/Parker, Inc., a Subsidiary of Essex Industries, Inc. 2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-274. a. Stainless steel, satin finish,with vandal proof trim. B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-3944. a. Stainless steel,satin finish,combination unit fabricated for nominal 4-inch wall depth and with seamless 1-inch wall flange.Provide towel compartment in upper portion of unit,designed to dispense not less than 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels;double panel door with continuous piano hinge and tumbler lock.Waste receptacle in lower portion , of unit minimum 12-gallon capacity,secured in place by tumbler lock. C. Grab Bar: 1. Basis of design: Model No. B-6206.99X various lengths-see Drawings for .a Toilet Accessories 10810-2 ADDITIONS/RENOVATION-J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL Aw 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet paper dispensers. 2. Combination towel dispenser/waste receptacles. 3. Grab bars. 4. Sanitary napkin disposal units. 5. Soap dispensers. 6. Shower curtain rods. 7. Shower curtains. 8. Folding shower seats. 9. Soap dishes, surface-mounted. 10. Towel pins. 11. Mirrors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Written technical information for each accessory specified. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit rough-in drawings. Include the following details and all other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with contract documents: a. Dimensions. b. Rough-in requirements. C. Required clearances. d. Methods of assembling components. e. Anchorages. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store products in manufacturer's original shipping containers. Toilet Accessories 10810-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. The Contractor will contract with an independent testing agency to conduct in-field tests of operable partitions for which noise isolation class (NIC) is required. 2. Noise isolation test method: Comply with ASTM E 336. 3. NIC rating calculation: Comply with ASTM E 413. 4. Installer shall make field adjustments of partitions in nonconformance with performance criteria. 5. Cost of re-testing will be responsibility of the Contractor. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Check and readjust operating hardware so that latches close accurately without forcing and binding. B. Adjust and lubricate partition movable parts to achieve smooth, easy, and quiet • operation, without warping or binding. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean operable partitions and adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces before final �* acceptance. Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by partition manufacturer. B. Remove operable partition work debris from project site. C. Protect partitions against damage or dirt after installation and until date of substantial 'w completion. N! 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation procedures and explain maintenance instructions for each ow operable partition type to the Owner's designated personnel, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. 4W END OF SECTION 10652 MP Panel Operable Partitions 10652-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL OR 2.6 FABRICATION A. Panel Construction: 1. 24 gage (0.0239 inch) minimum continuous steel face panel welded to 18 gage (0.0478 inch) steel channel frame. 2. Reinforce panel as necessary to adequately support panel from suspension mechanism. 3. Insulate and construct panel to achieve specified acoustical performance criteria. B. Tolerances: 1. Sound transmission classification (STC): Actual STC acoustical ratings shall be within plus or minus 1 STC of specified ratings, in accordance with OWMA/NSSEA requirements for acoustical performance, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review site at which partitions will be installed for installation conditions acceptable to manufacturer. B. Correct unacceptable substrates before start of partition installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Complete substrate construction and adjacent finish surfaces, including painting, before start of operable partition installation. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. C. Install partitions in stacking configurations indicated on the drawings. D. Sequence individual panels of operable partitions for color and pattern, matching panels as instructed by manufacturer. E. Correction of Defective Work: Replace broken, chipped, deformed, or otherwise damaged partitions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Panel Operable Partitions 10652-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am .. B. Suspension System: 1. Galvanized steel track and trolley system supported overhead with adjustable steel hanger rods; sized to withstand static and dynamic loads of partition size and operation. 2. Support panels from trolleys using adjustable bolts. 3. Trolley type: a. Four-wheel ball-bearing assemblies. 2.4 COMPONENTS & ACCESSORIES A. Work Surfaces, Where Indicated: "■ 1. Surfaces: a. (3) Chalkboard, on each side of partition. b. (2) Tack board, on each side of partiiton. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. B. Eraser pockets: Manufacturer's standard, located under each work surface, on each side of partition. C. Recessed chalk trays: continuos tray at bottom edge of each work surface, on each side of partition. D. Pass door shall be of the same consruciton and thickness as the panels, H shall be equipped with friction latch and flush pulls for panic operation. Pass door trim shall be dark bronze finish. No threshold shall be required and door shall be equipped with fixed extruded vinyl floor seals. Provide one (1) pass door in each partition. E. Accessories shall be included on ALL classroom partitions, each side of partition. 2.5 ACCESSORIES op A. Sound Seals: 1. Vertical seal: Tongue and groove interlocking joint with full length vinyl seal. am 2. Horizontal top seal: Continuous extruded vinyl. 3. Horizontal bottom seal: a. Continuous vinyl-faced retractable pressure seal. am b. Clearance when seal is retracted: 1-1/2 inches. C. Fabricate bottom seals to open immediately when partition moves. d. Seal pressure when closed: 20 pounds, nominal. B. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard for type of partition required. Panel Operable Partitions 10652-4 00 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Instructions: For installed units, including instructions for cleaning exposed surfaces, repairing damaged components, and operating instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Operable Panel Partitions: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Hufcor Airwall. b. Modernfold, Inc. C. Panelfold, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. Sheet steel: ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Operable Panel Partitions: 1. Top-supported, rigid panels in arrangement indicated. a. Sequence of center stacking, paired panels. 2. Sound transmission class (STC): Not less than 50. 3. Noise isolation class (NIC): No less than 42. 4. Panel weight: 9 to 12 pounds per square foot as necessary for panel size, STC rating, and accessories required. 5. Panel thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, as required to achieve specified STC rating. 6. Finish surface: a. Vinyl: Reinforced vinyl with woven backing weighing not less than 16 ounces per lineal yard. 7. Backing sheet: Provide backing sheet Rigid backing and interior insulation to provide acoustical and structural integrity. 8. Panel operation: a. Manual operation: Maximum operating force, 25 pounds. Panel Operable Partitions 10652-3 dW ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test reports: a. For review and approval, submit independent testing agency test reports for the following: 1. NIC rating. "" E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Submit for each type of operable partition. a" 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING "' A. Follow manufacturer's directions for handling products and materials from factory to project site. B. Packing and Shipping: Pack materials for delivery in manufacturer's standard coverings to protect products from damage during shipping and storage. C. Storage and Protection: After delivery and before installation store panels on edge and above floor on blocking in a dry and ventilated area, protected from high humidity and temperature extremes. we 1.5 COORDINATION A. Provide coordination data to affected installers of related work. 1. Include location template drawings for items supported by or anchored to substrate construction. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule operable partition installation to occur after substrate construction is .a complete to protect against partition damage from ongoing adjacent construction. 1.7 INSTALLATION WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer, guaranteeing to .. correct failures in product and workmanship which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. B. Warranty Period: 2 years; starting from date of substantial completion. Panel Operable Partitions 10652-2 "" 40 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10652 - PANEL OPERABLE PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Paired panel type operable partitions at classrooms. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Sound transmission class (STC): Provide operable partition assemblies that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 by an NSSEA accredited acoustical laboratory, and rated for the STC value indicated. 2. Interior finishes, facing materials: Provide materials with the following surface burning characteristics, as tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. a. Class A. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information and installation instructions which demonstrate that products comply with contract documents for each type of operable partition. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings describing materials, fabrication, and installation, including layout plans, elevations, and large scale details. Include details of overhead support structure, anchorages, and accessories. C. Samples: ,., 1. For color selection, submit manufacturer's full range of available finish material, color and texture samples for the following: a. Vinyl fabric. ""� Panel Operable Partitions 10652-1 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. Exposed hinges: Finish to match door. 2.03 SUPPLEMENTARY IDENTIFICATION A. At each extinguisher and cabinet location, identify with red letter decals spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size, style,and location as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Install extinguishers in locations indicated to comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install cabinets at locations indicated to comply with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install cabinets at heights indicated to comply with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install extinguishers. Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and bracket mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, furnish install as per the direction of local Fire Marshall. END OF SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-3 4W ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL b. Fire extinguisher cabinet manufacturer. C. Larsen's manufacturing Co. B. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Rating: 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b. nominal capacity. 2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate). .. a. Store pressure type. 3. Cabinet mounted. 4. Heavy duty steel cylinders, rugged metal valves and siphon tubes, replaceable molded valve stem seals, corrosion and impact resistant polyester/epoxy paint finish, pull pin-upright squeeze grip operation and approved to 65 degrees F. .. C. Mounting Brackets 1. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of .. extinguishers, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated. Brackets shall be Larsen's B-2, or equal. 2. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 2.02 CABINETS AND CABINET ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers" Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Cabinets and accessories: a. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. b. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico. C. Potter-Roemer Division/Smith Industries, Inc. B. Cabinets: 1. Basis of design: #3525 Clear Vu-1516G-25; J.L. Industries, Inc. •� a. Products of other manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be acceptable. C. Hinges: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware with exposed door pull and friction latch, provide hinges for each door: concealed or continuous type; allow full 180 degree opening of door. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-2 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: furnishing & installing, where shown on drawings or described herein. 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA. 10. B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labelled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion. B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Fire extinguishers: a. Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Install accessory components with flush, tight joints using concealed fasteners. D. Anchor benches to floor. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and latches for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean and touch up finishes; if finish cannot be restored to original appearance, replace locker. B. Use only cleaning and touch-up materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10505 w. Metal Lockers 10505-7 ■w .. ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Doors: Fabricate with flanged edges, reinforced if required for stiffness, and designated to open and close without stringing. 1. Fabricate sheet steel doors of one piece. 2. Provide extra stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide. D. Expanded Metal Components: Weld edges to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center; enclose sharp edges with frame. E. Miscellaneous Components: Provide all parts, filler panels, closures, clips and fasteners required for a complete installation. F. Finishing: Pretreat and finish all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, except stainless steel, chrome and aluminum. 1. Factory-finish all accessory components to match. 2. Pretreatment: Remove scale, rust and contaminates; chemically degrees and phosphatize. w„ 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel. 4. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard range. a. Several different colors will be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION no 3.01 EXAMNATION A. Examine floors and bases; report surfaces that are not satisfactory for installation. Im 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from under and behind lockers before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION .. A. Install lockers plumb and level. B. Anchor lockers securely to substrates in manner recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use reinforcing plates and spacers as required to prevent metal distortion. 2. Provide anchors at not more than 48 inches on center. 3. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Metal Lockers 10505-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Pedestals: Steel with same baked enamel finish as lockers; 6 feet on center, maximum. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, leveled mild steel. B. Expanded Metal Mesh: Steel, with 3/4-inch flattened mesh gages as indicated. C. Fasteners: Zinc-, cadmium, or nickel-plated steel or stainless steel. 1. Exposed bolt heads: Tamperproof type. 2. For fastening moving components: Use lock washers or self-locking nuts. D. Hinges: 5-knuckle, nonremovable-pin hinges, of loop style with 2 full thicknesses in each leaf; minimum 2 inches high. 1. Minimum of 2 hinges per door. 2. Doors over 42 inches high: Three hinges. E. Recessed Door Handles: Stainless steel recess containing combination latch lifter and padlock hasp, designed so that built-in locks will not protrude beyond face of door; pry-resistant. F. Interior Fittings: Cadmium or zinc plated steel or cast aluminum, except shelves. G. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel; raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8 inch high. 1. Number lockers as directed by the Architect. 2. Fasten to doors, centered near the top, using 2 fasteners. 2.05 FABRICATION - ALL LOCKERS A. Factory-fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping. B. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces. 1. Exposed metal edges: Smooth off sharp edges and corners. 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush. 3. Door and frame fronts: No exposed bolts or rivet heads. 4. Where exposed holes for built-in locks are not used, cover holes neatly using permanent materials. Metal Lockers 10505-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL and locking mechanism. 8. Door handles to consist of zinc-alloy die cast case and handle 40,000 PSI minimum tensile strength, chrome plated. Handle to be pulled out to move up latch bar and open door in one motion, and to be equipped with a tamper-proof rubber bumper to reduce noise when handle is released. Padlock eye to be an integral part of handle and to be so located that extension of handle forms a padlock strike. Attachment to latch bar shall be tamperproof and concealed within the channel inside the door. The case shall be kick proof type, shielding the movable part and provide a padlock strike to prevent scratching and marring of door. Doors to have Am latch clip engaging the door frame at three points on single tier and two points on double tier. Locking device to be positive, automatic type, whereby locker door may be locked when opened, then closed without unlocking. One rubber silencer shall be provided at each latch hook and shall firmly be secured in the frame and retained by the latch hook. Latch hook to have a bevel on upper edge to allow latch clip to ride up slop as door is closed. Latch clip to be of nylon for low coefficient of friction for long life and quiet operation. Clip to be easily removable from latch bar for replacement, but shall be retained under pressure and concealed. 9. Louvers: Louvers to be provided at top and bottom of doors in groups of 6 louvers for single tier and 4 louvers for double tier lockers. 10. Door handle: Recessed type. 11. Latching mechanism: Concealed in door, designed so that door can be closed while locked, with spring-loaded latches engaging beveled strikes on frame. a. Doors over 36 inches high: Three-point latching, minimum. b. Doors between 18 and 36 inches high: Two-point latching, minimum. C. Miscellaneous Components and Trim: 18 gage steel sheet, minimum. D. Fabrication: Weld all joints between frame members and weld sheet members to frame; weld latching mechanism and hinges to doors and frames, where applicable. MW 2.03 LOCKER ROOM BENCHES A. Benches: Locker manufacturer's standard products. as 1. Tops: Hardwood, solid or glued-laminated; approximately 9 inches wide; finished with clean varnish. ow Metal Lockers 10505-4 go Im No ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4. Two-tier. 5. Height: 30 inches 6. Width: 12 inches " 7. Depth: 12 inches 8. Doors: Solid with louvers. 9. Sides and vertical dividers: Solid 10. Shelves: Expanded metal mesh. 11. Top: Sloped 12. Door handles. 13. Three single-prong wall hooks and one double prong ceiling hook. 14. Provide matching filler panels. 2.02 HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS A. Provide all heavy-duty lockers and accessories by one manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. DeBourgh Mfg. Company b. List Industries, Inc. C. Penco Vanguard B. Components: 1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum. a. Vertical members to have an additional flange to provide a continuous door strike. Intermembering parts to be electrically welded together in a rigid assembly capable of resisting strains. 2. Tops: Steel sheet; 24 gage. 3. Bottoms: Steel sheet; 24 gage. 4. Horizontal dividers: Steel sheet; 24 gage. 5. Solid and louvered sides and vertical dividers: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 6. Backs: 24 gage 7. Solid doors: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum; 14 gage for full height doors. a. Suitable flanged on all four edges to provide strength and stiffness. All doors to have channel formation on vertical edges. Single tier lockers and double tier lockers shall have handle locking device Metal Lockers 10505-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL fabrication. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive lockers are clean and dry. B. Protect lockers from damage. .W PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKER CONFIGURATIONS AND COMPONENTS , A. Locker Type 1: 1. Location: Corridor lockers and Gym & Pool Instructors Rooms. 2. Knock down construction. 3. Heavy duty. .. 4. Single-tier. 5. Height: 60 inches 6. Width: 9 inches 7. Depth: 12 inches 8. Doors: Solid with louvers. 9. Sides and vertical dividers: Solid. 10. Shelves: Solid 11. Top: Sloped (Existing lockers to be replaced - recessed with standard straight top) 12. Door handles. 13. Shelf. 14. 3 single prong wall hooks and one double prong ceiling hook. •.. 15. Provide matching filler panels. B. Locker Type 2: 1. Location: Gym Locker/Shower Rooms, Pool Locker/Shower Rooms, Kitchen Area. .. 2. Fully welded construction. 3. Heavy duty. Metal Lockers 10505-2 A ON ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL + + 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Heavy duty metal lockers, as shown on plans and specified herein. 2. Locker-room benches, as shown on plans and specified herein. B. Work Not Included: 1. Padlocks: Provided by Owner. C. Related Sections: 1. Concrete locker bases: Division 3. 2. Wood sleepers: Division 6. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Heavy Duty: This term is used to designate a particular type of locker specified in this section, regardless of individual manufacturer designations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, dimensions, trim, fillers, and accessories. 1. Indicate installation and anchoring methods. 2. Show verified field measurements. 3. Show locker numbering scheme. C. Samples for Color Selection: Locker manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Maintenance Data for Lockers: Manufacturer's instructions for adjustment, repair and replacement of doors and latching mechanisms. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Fit lockers neatly to actual construction; take field measurements before Metal Lockers 10505-1 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL W 1. Comply with ADAAG Sec 4.30.2 through 4.30.6 for size, tyle, clor, finish, contrast, mounting heights and locations, etc. 2. Provide architect with samples of each type and style for approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION w� 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide signage for each application specified. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNAGE 10425-3 4r, ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am PART 2 - PRODUCTS am 2.01 MATERIALS A. Door Signage: Numbers and letters to be painted, color selected by Architect, Mkk Paint shall be Benjamin Moore's flat enamel or equal. 1. Lettering of room numbers and names shall be executed after final coat Am of paint is applied on walls adjacent to doors and after final coat on doors in accordance with a plan to be furnished by the Owner. am 2. Letters to be neatly spaced, 2" high, 3/8" stroke, submit samples of lettering for approval before painting on doors. Color as selected by the Architect. 3. Numbers to be neatly spaced, 3" high, 1/2" stroke, color to be as selected by architect. B. Building Signage: Cast aluminum letters, 50-10" high characters, as manufactured by A.R.K. Ramos Co., "Optima No. 530, or approved equal. Dark bronze, flush mount. Manufacturer's approved fasteners appropriate to exterior application. Location and exact verbage to be determined on site, by Architect. .h C. Plaque: Bronze plaque approximately 39" wide by 27" high, complete with raised border, beveled inner/outer border, with raised "Futura", or similar type letter. The face or border and letters shall be polished. The entire plaque shall be hand-chased with backgrounds properly finished and oxidized. Spraying of entire plaque shall be with lacquer or other approved oxidation retardant. Drill " holes and furnish rosettes and all devices for appropriate attachment. Location to be determined in field by Architect. Background to be a medium pebble texture. 1. Names, final instructions, and general layout will be furnished by the Architect at a later date. 2. All names of individuals will include the first name in full, middle initial(s) and the last name. 3. The plaque shall be fabricated by an experienced manufacturer as approved by the Architect. A shop drawing or "rub" will be furnished to the Architect for approval. D. ADA Signage: Furnish and install "permanent signage" in conformance with ADA AG Sec. 4.1.2(7), 4.1.3(16)(a), as well as "Directional/Informational/ Regulatory Signage in conformance with ADAAG Sec. 4.1.2(7), 4.1.3(16)(b) SIGNAGE 10425-2 OR ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 00 SECTION 10425 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing all materials for the signage work shown on Drawings and/or described herein, including, but not limited to: 1. Provide room numbers on all doors, per schedule, except for closet doors. 2. Provide 16 character words on all doors, or adjacent wall surfaces except for closet doors and cross corridor doors. 3. Building signage. 4. Dedication plaque. 5. Furnish and install signage in compliance with ADA requirements for directional and permanent signage. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, *■ dimensions of individual components, profiles and finishes for type of sign required. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout and installation details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. SIGNAGE 10425-1 40 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not tiles. C. Compartments: 1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets at wall connections. Clearances exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level, plumb installation. 2. Floor-anchored, overhead-braced compartments: Anchor pilasters to floor using manufacturer's recommended leveling-and-anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install overhead bracing using a minimum of 2 fasteners per pilaster. Install panels. D. Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with manufacturer'[s instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 40 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed components from damage until project completion. aw END OF SECTION 10170 00 SHOWER/DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES ow 10170-5 W Aft Imm ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL continuous wall brackets maybe used.) AM B. Headrail shall be heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5 ALLOY) bright dip finish with anti-grip configuration weighing no less than .758 lbs. per linear foot with integral curtain track. C. Shower hooks to be stainless steel with self-lubricating nylon 66 slides. (Shower curtains to be supplied by others.) D. Headrail brackets shall be 16 gauge stainless steel. E. Provide one (1) coat hooks/bumper per compartment. Heavy duty Sarmac chrome plated with rubber bumper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXANIINATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies. D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work, have been properly installed and aligned. ., E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions. B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated. Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable. 1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where possible, place brackets so ' that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not masonry units. 2. Panels attached to tile-faced walls: Where possible, place brackets so that SHOWER/DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES 10170-4 ,,.� V ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ■ job site with special protective plastic covering. C. Construction 1. Single component construction of solid Poly-Mar HD in colors that extend from the surface throughout the entire thickness of the panels, doors and pilasters. 2. Shower partitions and pilasters and seats shall be 1" thick and all edges machined to a radius of .250" and all exposed edges to be free of saw marks. 3. Dividing panels shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above finished floor. Aluminum edging strips shall be fastened to the bottom edge of all panels full length. 4. Pilasters shall be 82" high and fastened to 3" high Polymer resin shoes with theft proof sex bolts. w 5. Finish of shower doors and pilasters shall be similar and equal to Santana Products, Inc. "Plasti-Glaze 280". Colors to be selected from Deluxe 1000 Series. D. Hardware 1. Shower/Dressing Compartment hardware shall be as follows: a. Wall brackets shall be aluminum (6463-T5 Alloy) bright dip anodized fabricated from extrusion weighing not less than 1.685 lbs per linear foot similar or equal to SANTANA PRODUCTS CO., INC. SECTION #58992. Quantities as follows: Panel to Pilaster (3) Brackets Pilaster to Wall (3) Brackets Panel to Wall (3) Brackets Wall brackets shall be thru-bolted to panels and pilasters with one- way sex bolts. Attachment of brackets to adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with No. 5 plastic anchors and No. 14 x 1 1/4" stainless steel Phillips head screws. (If required, SHOWER/DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES 10170-3 aw Im ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4W 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: If possible determine field measurements before shop fabrication. Wherever field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide components capable of adjustment during installation. .° 1.05 COORDINATION A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system components and anchorage devices provided by panel ' manufacturer for incorporation into other work. B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for panel system assemblies. Include information necessary to properly coordinate work of this section with other work. Distribute to affected installers of related work. go PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPARTMENT SYSTEMS am A. Compartments: provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: AN 1. Polymer resins under high pressure forming single component section which is water proof and non-absorbent, floor-anchored and overhead- "m braced. 2.02 MATERIALS `m A. Shower/Dressing Compartments shall be floor-mounted, overhead braced with non-corrosive panels and pilasters, and shower seats similar and equal to Poly- �. Mar HD partitions as manufactured by Santana Products, Inc., Scranton, PA or comparable products with hardware as specified herein. .� B. Shower/Dressing Partitions and pilasters and shower seats shall be fabricated from Polymer resins under high pressure forming a single component section which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marking with pens, pencils or other writing utensils. All panels and pilasters to arrive at SHOWER/DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES 10170-2 00 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10170 - SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compartments a. Shower/Dressing compartments and Compartment Seats. 2. Hardware and Accessories for compartments. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated. Include data on hardware, accessories, leveling and anchorage devices, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing construction of compartments. 1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and accessories. 2. Include details showing panel connections, anchorage, and support systems, and locations for wood blocking in walls to be provided by others for proper securement of the finished work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard samples for the following: 1. Panel color samples: Submit for each distinct type of panel system required. 2. Submit sample of each, item of hardware for Architect's approval. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Products and finished installations to be used by handicapped persons must comply with requirements of Massachusetts Handicapped Code, CMR 521 and Federal ADA Regulations. SHOWER/DRESSING COMPARTMENTS & ACCESSORIES 10170-1 HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed components from damage until project completion. 3.06 Alternates A. Refer to Division Alternates, as they affect this section. END OF SECTION 10165 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-7 W .sM HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ... C. Compartments: 4M 1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets ,m at wall connections. Clearances exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level, plumb installation. 2. Floor-anchored, overhead-braced compartments: Anchor pilasters to floor using manufacturer's recommended leveling-and-anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install overhead bracing using a minimum of 2 fasteners per pilaster. Install panels. a. Compartments with doors: Properly align door. Top edge of closed compartment door must be parallel with overhead bracing member. D. Screens: 1. Form solid connection between panel system and building structure using manufacturer's recommended devices for conditions indicated. Anchorage ., must be designed to support weight of panels without damaging bating finishes. Provide level, plumb installation. Provide screens capable of resisting impacts and stresses imposed during anticipated use and ,. maintenance. E. Hardware and Accessories: 1. Mount items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operating Hardware: „® 1. In-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully close position when door is not latched. 2. Out-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-6 HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL finish in anti-grip configuration weighing not less than 1.188 lbs. per linear foot similar and equal to Santana Products, Inc. section #58993. Headrail shall be fastened to tops of pilasters and headrail brackets by thru-bolting with one way sex bolts. 5. Headrail brackets shall be of 16 gauge stainless steel. 6. Compartment seal mounting brackets shall be heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5-Alloy) as per manufacturers specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMNATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies. D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work, have been properly installed and aligned. E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system ± + installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions. B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated. Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable. 1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not masonry units. 2. Panels attached to tile-faced walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not tiles. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-5 .w HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL low surface mounted and thru-bolted to doors and pilasters with one- way sex bolts. Hinges will be factory set to a full close position unless otherwise noted. (3) per door. b. Each door shall be furnished with (1) coat hook/bumper of heavy chrome plated Zamak with rubber bumper. (Handicapped doors also include (1) door pull and (1) wall stop). C. Door strike and keeper shall be fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5-Alloy) with clean anodized finish with wrap around flange surface mounted and thru-bolted to pilaster with one- way sex bolts. d. Door latch housing shall be fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5 Alloy) with clean anodized finish, surface mounted and thru-bolted to door with one-way sex bolts. Slide .» bolt and button shall be heavy aluminum with "Touch-Coat Black" finish. 2. Pilaster shoes shall be made from Polymer resin formed under high .ft pressure and be made of single construction with color throughout. Pilaster shoes shall be anchored to finish floor with No. 5 Plastic Anchors „ and No. 14 stainless steel phillips head screws. 3. Full length continuous wall brackets shall be made from polymer resin formed under high pressure and be made of single construction with color throughout. Solid plastic continuous wall bracket weighing not less than .83 lbs. per linear foot similar or equal to Santana Products, Inc., shall be used for all panels to pilaster, pilaster to wall and panel to wall connections. Wall brackets shall be predrilled by manufacturer with holes spaced every 5" along full length of brackets. Wall brackets shall be thru- .� bolted to panels and pilasters with one-way sex bolts. Attachment of brackets to adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished by (1) theftproof Xamac mushroom nail in head anchor directly behind the .� vertical edge of panels and pilasters at every 12" along the full length of bracket and (2) No. 5 plastic anchors and No. 14 x 1 1/4" stainless steel phillips head screws at each 12" interval alternately spaced between anchor connections. 4. Headrail shall be heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5-Alloy) with mill TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-4 ,g, ,m 40 !p HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL manufactured by Santana Products, Inc., Scranton, PA or comparable products with hardware as specified herein. B. Panels, doors and pilasters shall be fabricated from Polymer resins under high " pressure forming a single component section which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marking with pens, pencils or other writing utensils. All panels, doors and pilasters to arrive at jobsite with special protective plastic covering. C. Construction: 1. Single component construction of solid Poly-Mar HD in colors that extend from the surface throughout the entire thickness of the panels, doors and pilasters. 2. Doors, panels and pilasters and sets shall be 1" thick and all edges machined to a radius of .250" and all exposed edges to be free of saw marks. 3. Diving panels shall be 55" high and mounted at 14: above finished floor. Aluminum edging strips shall be fastened to the bottom edge of all panels full length. 4. Doors shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above finished floor. Aluminum edging strips shall be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors full width. 5. Pilasters shall be 82" high and fastened to 3" high Polymer resin shoes with theft-proof sex bolts. 6. Finish of doors, panels and pilasters shall be similar and equal to Santana Products, Inc. "Plasti-Glaze 280". Colors to be selected from Deluxe 1000 Series. D. Hardware: 1. Door hardware shall be as follows: a. Hinges shall be fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6643- ,� T5 ALLOY) with clear anodized finish with wrap around flanges, TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-3 HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL Handicapped Code, CMR 521, and Federal ADA Regulations. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: if possible, determine filed measurements before beginning shop fabrication. Wherever field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide components capable of adjustment during installation. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system components and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation into other work. B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for panel system assemblies. Include information necessary to properly coordinate work of this .. section with other work. Distribute to affected installers of related work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Am 2.01 COMPARTMENT SYSTEMS A. Compartments: provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: , 1. Polymer resins under high pressure forming single component section which is waterproof and non-absorbent, floor-anchored and overhead- braced. B. Screen Systems: Provide screens erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: 1. Polymer resins under high pressure forming single component section which is waterproof and non-absorbent, wall-hung and floor-anchored. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toilet partitions shall be floor-mounted, overhead braced with non-corrosive panels, doors and pilaster similar and equal to Poly-Mar HD partitions as .. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-2 HADLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ~ SECTION 10165 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUNEWARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compartments a. Toilet compartments and compartment doors. 2. Screens a. Urinal screens and entry partitions. 3. Hardware and Accessories for compartments and Screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated. Include date on hardware, accessories, leveling and anchorage devices, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings detailing construction of compartments. 1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and accessories. 2. Include details showing panel connections, anchorage, and support systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard samples for the following: 1. Panel color samples: Submit for each distinct type of panel system required. 2. Submit sample for each, item of hardware for Architect's approval. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Products and finished installations to be used by handicapped persons must comply with requirements of Massachusetts TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SC .a. D. Screens: 1. Form solid connection between panel system and building structure using manufacturer's recommended ** devices for conditions indicated. Anchorage must be designed to support weight of panels without damaging building finishes. Provide level, plumb installation. Provide screens capable of resisting impacts and stresses imposed during anticipated use and maintenance. E. Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. no 3 . 03 ADJUSTING Am A. Operating Hardware: 1. In-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically , bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. 2 . Out-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. *» 3 . 04 CLEANING .m A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. ow 3 . 05 PROTECTION WM A. Protect installed components from damage until project completion. END OF SECTION 10162 Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies. D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work, have been properly installed and aligned. E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system installation. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's So instructions, except where more restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions. err B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated. I* Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable. 1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where 4" possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not masonry units. 2 . Panels attached to tile-faced walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate *0 joints, not tiles. 00 C. Compartments: 1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets 0 at wall connections. Clearances exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level , plumb installation. so 2 . Floor-anchored, overhead-braced compartments: Anchor pilasters to floor using manufacturer's recommended leveling-and-anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install overhead bracing using a minimum of 2 fasteners per pilaster. Install panels. a. Compartments with doors: Properly align door. a Top edge of closed compartment door must be parallel with overhead bracing member. Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-5 ON ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J .F.K. FIDDLE"" C. The Sanymetal Products Company, Inc. 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES .." A. General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to properly install panel systems indicated. 1. Hinge: Self-closing, pivot type hinge, recess-mounted within door; adjustable to permit door to rest at any angle. Aft 2 . Latch for nonhandicapped compartments: Surface-mounted type, with emergency access feature. Provide stop and keeper with rubber bumper. 3 . Latch for handicapped compartments: Surface-mounted sliding latch (for inner side of compartment doors) , with emergency access feature, designed for use by handicapped persons. 4 . Door pull for handicapped compartments (for outer side of compartment doors) : Suitable for use by handicapped persons. .. 5 . Combination coat hook with rubber bumper: Provide unit of sufficient length to prevent compartment door from striking installed toilet accessories. 6 . Leveling-and-anchorage devices: Rust-resistant steel devices as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels in conditions indicated. 7 . Pilaster shoes: ASTM A 167 (Type 302/304) minimum 20 gage stainless steel, finish to match compartment hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches. 8 . Fasteners: Tamper-resistant rust-proof, exposed fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels and hardware in conditions indicated. Finish to match hardware. 9 . Overhead bracing: Antigrip headrail bracing fabricated from continuous extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION " 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-4 ON A')DITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J .F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. General : Provide manufacturer's standard panels fabricated for installations indicated. Provide internal reinforcement as required for hardware and accessories. Premachine panels for field installation. B. Steel over Honeycomb Core - Baked Enamel Finish: 1. Steel sheets: ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, galvanized - bonderized: a. Minimum sheet thickness for panels: 20 gage. b. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 20 gage (overhead-braced application) . C. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 16 gage. d. Minimum sheet thickness for doors: 22 gage. 2 . Core material : Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb. 3 . Panel fabrication: Use single steel sheet for each face plate and laminate both face plates under pressure to core material. At full length of panel perimeter, form edges of each face plate to interlock eww directly with opposing face plate, or form edges to receive additional molding strip. If molding strip is used, provide one continuous molding strip for each panel edge. Provide manufacturer's standard neatly-made and finished corners. a. Minimum finished thickness: 1. Panels: 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch. 3 . Doors: 1 inch. b. Internal anchorage reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 12 gage. C. Internal tapping reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 14 gage. d. Finish: 1. Provide baked, rust-inhibiting prime coat and a minimum of 2 electrostatically-applied coats of thermosetting baked enamel . 4 . Panel colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's complete set of standard colors. 5. Hardware, accessories, and mounting brackets: Manufacturer's standard styles. The following materials will be acceptable: a. Chromium-plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") . b. Extruded aluminum, anodized and polished. 6. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Global Steel Products Corporation. b. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-3 M ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS — J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOC*" Code, CMR 521,and Federal ADA Regulations 'M 1. 04 PROJECT CONDITIONS am A. Field Measurements: If possible, determine field measurements before beginning shop fabrication. Wherever '"" field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide components capable of adjustment during installation. M* 1. 05 COORDINATION ow A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely AM manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system components and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation into other work. wo B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for panel system assemblies . Include information necessary to "" properly coordinate work of this section with other work. Distribute to affected installers of related work. MK PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 PANEL SYSTEMS "" A. Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: 1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, woo floor-anchored and overhead-braced. B. Screen Systems: Provide screens erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: 1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, ,,,, wall-hung. 2 . 02 PANEL MATERIALS am ON Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-2 AnnTTTnNC/RFNn\/ATjnNC _ J F K MIDDLE SCOOL SECTION 10162 - BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS �w. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compartments. a. Toilet compartments. 2 . Screens. a. Urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10. 1. 02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated. Include data on „w hardware, accessories, leveling-and-anchorage devices, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing construction of compartments. 1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and accessories. 2 . Include details showing panel connections, anchorage, and support systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard samples for the following: 1. Panel color samples: Submit for each distinct type of panel system required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Products and finished installations to be used by handicapped persons must comply with requirements of Massachusetts Handicapped Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10162-1 4" ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL RW 1. Fabricate each board from a single panel of material. Panel joints will not be permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: 1. Install units as instructed by manufacturer. 2. Provide any necessary installation accessories, including blocking, backing, anchors, etc. 3. Joint parts forming neatly fitted hairline joints. 3.03 CLEANING AND BREAKING IN CHALKBOARDS A. Porcelain-Enamel Chalkboards: Clean and break-in surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Cover completed work with building paper or other covering recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect boards from damage until substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10100 Visual Display Boards 10100-5 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL anchoring devices. Screen fabric to be flame retardant and mildew resistant with White Magic glass bead picture .� surface. Complete with three position control switch in box with cover plate. Locate in cafetorium, at platform soffit. now 3. Quantity: Provide 1 (One) F. Aluminum Alloy Finish: 1. Color anodized finishes: Satin finish, AA-A42 (integrally AM colored architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). G. Colors of boards and trim: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors. .. H. Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer for the materials and , substrates to be joined. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Classroom Chalkboard and Taakboard Units. Construct as follows: 1. Writing surface: Porcelain-enamel chalkboard. 2. Tack board: Natural cork. 3. Trim: Aluminum alloy. B. Bulletin Boards, Construct as follows: 1. "Model 402B; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 2. Tack board: Natural cork. 3. Trim: Aluminum alloy. C. Display Case. Construct as follows: 1. "Model 376; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Display Cases. 2. Cases shall have aluminum front with dull bronze finish with cork back panel, glass shelves (2) per case, 12 inch depth, and 1/4 inch tempered glass doors with lock with reflective fluorescent light. ••� 3. Tack board: Natural cork. 4. Trim: Aluminum alloy. 40 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly - Porcelain-Enamel Boards: No Visual Display Boards 10100-4 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Music Rm. 1109, Music Rm.112 and Band Rm 116 to have Music Staff lines 50%. C. Natural Cork Tack Boards: 1. Seamless, 1/4-inch thick cork sheet, laminated to 1/4 inch thick hardboard. D. Aluminum Alloy Frame: 1. Field-applied, screw-on type. 2. Minimum thickness: 0.062 inch. 3. Single-length units without joints except as approved otherwise. 4. Metered corners with hairline joints. E. Accessories: 1. Map rail: Aluminum alloy. a. Model No. 86200; Denoyer-Geppert or approved equal. b. Display rail: Continuous cork insert, integral with map rail. 2. Map rail accessories: a. End stops: Aluminum alloy, two per each map rail. b. Map hooks: Aluminum alloy. 1. Model No 86210; Denoyer-Geppert or approved equal. 2. Quantity: 1 per 2 feet of rail. C. Flag holder: Aluminum alloy. 1. Quantity: 1 per room d. Projection Screen: 1. "Model C"; Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. 2. 84-inch x 84-inch, wall mounted projection screen with heavy steel angle No. 11 extension bracket. Screen fabric to be flame retardant and mildew resistant with White Magic bead picture surface. Including, but not limited to All classrooms, special education, art, music, computer, reading, SPED rooms, speech, library, community room, administration conference room, science, technology 40 education, home economics, etc. Provide ceiling mounted brackets where indicated on Drawings. 3. Quantity: Provide 1 per unit e. Projection Screen: 1. "Boardroom Electrol"; Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. 2. Automatic electric projection screen, 10' x 10', wall mounted with manufacturers recommended brackets and Visual Display Boards 10100-3 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL equilibrium moisture and temperature approximating that of normal occupied conditions. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the manufacturer listed below form the basis of the contract Aw documents. 1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. B. Products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made only by one of the following will be considered acceptable as substitutes: 1. Carolina Chalkboard 2. Greensteel Division/Information Display Technology, Inc. 3. Lemco, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Porcelain-Enamel Chalkboards: High-pressure-laminated composite construction. " 1. Facing sheet: a. Steel: Special quality enameling iron or steel, low metalloid and copper content for temperature over 1,400 degrees suitable for coating porcelain on steel for architectural purposes; chemically bathed and rinsed before enameling. Porcelain writing surface: «, Nickel cobalt primer 0.002 inches minimum thickness, writing surface 0.0025 inches minimum thickness. Opposite surface: Nickel cobalt ground coat 0.002 inches minimum thickness for silica spray coat for lamination adhesion. Total finish thickness 0.004 inches minimum. Panel edges at butt joints porcelain coated. b. Minimum thickness: 24 gage. C. Chalkboard cover coat: 1. Manufacturer's standard matte finish. 2. Core: 1/4 inch minimum thickness hardboard. 3. Backing sheet: 0.015 inch minimum thickness aluminum foil. B. Graphic Designs: Where indicated, provide graphic designs of size, shape, style, and color indicated. Design shall be silk-screened onto board surface. 1. Image shall be fused to porcelain enamel. Visual Display Boards 10100-2 ADDITIONS/ALTERATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 - GAL 1.01 SUNEWARY A. Section Includes furnishing and installing: 1. Wall-mounted units, as shown on plans and described herein. 2. Tack boards, as shown on plans and described herein. 3. Projection Screens, as shown on plans and described herein. 4. Manufactured Display Unit, surface and recessed, as shown on plans and described herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical data. 2. Manufacturer's installation and breaking-in instructions. 3. Color charts showing full range of standard colors. 4. Test reports demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide dimensioned elevations of each configuration of board. 2. Show sections of trim members. Key to elevations. 3. Show anchorage and any necessary grounds. 4. Show layout and installation details. C. Samples: 1. Submit samples of each type of surface, color, and finish. 2. Surface sample size, each: 5 by 8 inches. 3. Trim sample size, each: 6 inches long. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Install boards only when interior air and substrates have reached �. Visual Display Boards 10100-1 HVAC NI01A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HI01B 50UTHUIEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H10IC SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1.11010 NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR W102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W2O1 DETAILS W2O2 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL EI01A NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01B 50UTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR MID NORTHEA5T LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 0% E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWEST POWER 4 5Y5TEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B 5OUTHWE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR ON E201C S0UTHEA5T POWER i SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201D NORTHEAST POWER 4 5Y5TEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER 4 SY5TEM5 PLAN - 5ECCND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAM5 #A E401 SITE ELECTRICAL 00 wr 40 A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS ,4415 POOL SECTIONS A416 POOL FILTRATION DETAILS * A501 NEW STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Arool PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A603 PLAN DETAILS A604 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS A606 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A601 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A606 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A801A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A601D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQuIPrIEN . EQI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT E03 EQUIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT PCUNCATIGN FI01A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST(ART s COMMUNITY) FI01B FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY / ADMINISTRATION) F101C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) F101D FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST(GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART t COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 52015 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY s ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301C, 5OUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRXI PLAN .e 5301D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING PI01A NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 101015 SOUTHWEST PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 101010 NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROCM PLANS 4 DETAILS -- COVER SWEET GOI GENERAL NFOWATION SYMBOLOGY,DWG.LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LDOI SITE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. 1-101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL Lro0i SITE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L602 SITE DETAILS, STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL Ri01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS RI02 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS 10H101 PHASING PLAN ADOIA DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR ADOIC DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR ADOID DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF ! " AD04 DEMOLITION WALL SECTIONS AIOIA FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART A COMMUNITY) 41015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH BLEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) AIOIC FLOOR PLAN - SOUTW EAST (CAFETORILM) AIOID FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN OF A104 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FNISW SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FNISW SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A206 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A40ro WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A409 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. One coat P & L Primer and Back Primer 2. Two coats P & L Aqua Royal Latex -r B. Galvanized Steel shall be give: RM 1. One coat P & L Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 2. Two coats P 7 L Effecto Enamel '40 C. Ferrous Metal shall be given: 1. One coat Tnemec 37 Chem-Prime AW 2. One coat Tnemec, Series 73 Endura-Shield 3.11 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.12 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH OR CERTIFIED CHECK OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the CITY OF NORTHAMPTON in the amount stipulated int he INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings. END OF SECTION 09900 .W PAINTING 09900-14 "M III1� ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. One coat P & L Paste Filler 2. One coat P & L Tonetic Wood Stain 3. Two coats P & L 38 clean finish satin. 4. Natatorium Benches - 4 coats - polyurethane. D. Woodwork where not to receive stain or varnish shall be given: 1. One coat flat latex primer. 2. Two coats satin luster enamel. E. Ferrous Metals, steel and hollow metal doors and frames shall be given: 1. One coat series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 2. One coat Tnemec Series 73 Endura Shield. F. Metal deck, exposed steel and exposed mechanical items shall be given: One fog coat Tnemec 15 UNI-BOND One finish coat Tnemec 15 UNI-BOND Note: All mechanical items must be in place before painting except for light fixtures, operating parts of valves or any item affected by paints. Painter shall touch-up items, as required, to complete job. Walls shall be finished at head to bottom of beams or joist with the same material around entire perimeter. Existing Unit Ventilator to be electrostatically painted per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.09 SCHEDULE OF COATING FOR INTERIOR TRAFFIC SURFACES A. Concrete shall be given: 1. Two coats Series 67 Tnemec Tnemec-Tread 3.10 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR NON TRAFFIC SURFACES A. Wood shall be.given: PAINTING 09900-13 MIA ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ,mow 4. Backprime concealed surfaces and cut edges of exterior wood trim prior to installation. 3.06 FINISH COATS ov A. Number of Coats and Minimum Coating Thickness: A* 1. Apply not less thai the number of coats indicated. 2. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner, when necessary to achieve complete hiding, uniform texture, or uniform sheen and appearance. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent materials and empty containers. If requested, turn over to the Architect all empty coatings containers used during the course of each day. 2. Remove all traces of coatings from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be coated. Remove by appropriate methods that do not damage surfaces. 3. Touch-up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color sheen, or texture, recoat entire surface. 3.08 A. GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND PLASTER SHALL BE GIVEN: 1. One coat Primer Tnemec 51-792 PVA Sealer. 2. Two coats Tnemec Series 83 Ceramlon II. , B. Concrete and Masonry Walls shall be given: 1. One coat Primer Tnemec 54-660 Filler. 2. Two coats Tnemec Series 83 Ceramlon 11. C. Woodwork: Trim Doors, Millwork, Cabinet Interiors, including shelving shall be given: PAINTING 09900-12 «.� ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Of a. Piping and supports. No b. Ducts and insulation. C. Existing unit ventilators. d. Others as indicated on drawings. 10 5. Paint the following electrical items: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Others as indicated on drawings. ON. 3.05 PRIME COATS :" A. General: 1. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract documents require shop coating of ferrous metals. 2. Where first coat shows signs of suction spots, or poorly sealed areas, reapply first coat material to adequately seal surface before proceeding with successive coats. 3. Apply block fillers using manufacturer's recommended application techniques and achieving a pinhole-free surface. 4. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field primed promptly after arrival at the site or shall be stored away from the effects of weather. 5. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved, compatible primer. B. Primers for Catalyzed Coating: Where catalyzed bottom coatings are scheduled form metal surfaces, standard "shop primers" will not be accepted; apply only the wo coatings schedule in this section. Either field apply the scheduled coatings to bare, properly prepared metal or arrange with suppliers of these items to shop-apply the scheduled coating to bare, properly prepared metal (unless shop or field application only is specifically indicated). C. Primers for Wood and Wood Products: 1. Apply first coat to wood upon receipt at the site and before wood is exposed to sun or rain. 2. Before installation, prime both concealed and exposed surfaces of interior wood, including cut ends. 3. Finish tops, bottoms, edges, and cutouts of exterior wood doors, as scheduled, for exterior face. PAINTING 09900-11 The *N.; ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ilia of surfaces to be coated. 2. Employ only application equipment that is clean, properly adjusted, in good working order, and of the type recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3. Apply successive coats after adequate cure of the preceding coat and within the recommended recoating time. 4. Apply each coat to achieve the dry file thickness per coat recommended by the coating manufacturer. Applications rates in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of coats than specified will not be accepted. ,. 5. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs, sags, variations in color, lap or brush marks, holidays and skips. 6. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this section and as otherwise indicated. Coat all similar surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically exempted. a. Ensure that all surfaces receive a dry film thickness equivalent to those of flat surfaces. 7. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers, access panels, and grilles. Apply fully finish coats behind movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. Apply prime coat only behind non- movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. 8. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings. , B. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification, reclean and re-prepare surfaces as specified, and apply coatings to comply with the contract documents. , C. Scheduling: 1. Apply first coat of material to properly prepared surfaces without delay. a. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer. 00 D. Mechanical and Electrical Items: 1. Paint electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms. 2. Paint mechanical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms. 3. Color-code items in accordance with color schedules. 4. Paint the following mechanical items: Wk PAINTING 09900-10 tw to ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. K. Insulated Coverings: 1. Remove dire, grease, and oil from canvas, cotton and other insulated coverings to be painted. 40 3.03 MIXING AND THINNING A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any containers where skin comprises 2 percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add thinner except as specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer for proper coating application under the circumstances prevailing at the project site when application equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of thinner recommended. B. Mix materials using mechanical mixers in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. Agitate mixed materials during application, if recommended by manufacturer. C. Combine multi-component paints in quantities needed for use within the A manufacturer's recommended pot life at the anticipated application temperatures. Discard remaining mixed material after pot life has expired. D. Strain pigmented coatings after mixing except where mechanical application equipment is provided with effective strainers. E. Tinting: Except where coating materials cannot be tinted, tint each successive coat of paint a sufficiently contrasting color to facilitate identification of complete coating coverage. 3.04 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and using application method best suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage PW PAINTING 09900-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL mineral spirits. Seal any knots and pitch pockets with a suitable product , recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand rough spots. Remove dust. 1. After first coat has dried, fill holes, cracks, or depressions with a suitable wood filler recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand filler when dry. 2. Sand surfaces lightly between successive coats. Remove dust. E. Ferrous Metal: 1. Clean and prepare surface profile in accordance with the applicable SSPC specifications for hand tool or power tool cleaning. 2. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled inlieu of hand or power tool cleaning. 3. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue, and salts by solvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean surfaces if necessary. 4. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, reprepare damaged surfaces. F. Galvanized Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC specifications. G. Aluminum Scheduled for Painting: Remove protective clear coating or plastic film where present. Clean substrate in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H. Gymsum Board: 1. Latex-fill minor defects. 2. Spot-prime defects after repair. I. Plaster: 1. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. 2. Match smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 3. Wash and neutralize high-alkali surfaces. J. Mildew: PAINTING 09900-8 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL degree Baume muriatic acid to 2 to 4 parts potable water) using low pressure pray equipment. b. When bubbling action begins to subside, remove salt formations, loose material, and spent solution by scrubbing with stiff bristle broom and flushing with water under moderate pressure. Repeat rinsing operation until pH test papers yield a pH of 7 or higher on the surface. 6. Brush-off blast cleaning: Prepare surface profile and remove laitance and solid contaminants from surface by abrasive blast !* cleaning. After blast cleaning, surface shall be free from curing compounds, surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, and foreign material of any kind. a. Perform blasting operation so as to open any surface voids, bugholes, etc., and to remove curing compounds, surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material and foreign material of any kind, but without exposing underlying aggregate or fracturing aggregate surfaces. b. Use only dry, oil-free air and clean media, unless other blast cleaning methods are approved. C. After blast cleaning, completely remove dust and loose particles by vacuuming; brushing or blowing will not be permitted. d. Patch surface voids, bugholes, etc., in an approved manner, and allow to cure before applying coatings. 7. Allow substrate to dry thoroughly. Test for moisture in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations before applying coatings. C. Masonry: 1. Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces that are at least 28 days old. 2. Perform any required surface repairs before applying coatings. Remove any fins or protrusions from surface. Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner. Verify the joints are struck flush or concave unless otherwise specifically required. 3. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants. Use appropriate detergents and hot water. Thoroughly flush cleaning agents from surface. D. Wood: Scrape and remove any sap or pitch deposits from surface and clean with PAINTING 09900-7 .w ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified. ., Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare surface for proper texture necessary to optimum coating adhesion and intended finished appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations ► to avoid contamination of freshly coated surfaces. 1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment, fire- resistance ratings, etc. 2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings. 3. Provide protection for non-removable items not scheduled for coating. After application of coatings, install removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and replacement of such items. 4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect any surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated. to B. Concrete: 1. Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces that are at least 28 days old. Wo 2. Perform any required surface repairs before applying coatings. Remove any fins or protrusions from surface. Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner. 3. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants before preparing surface profile. Use appropriate detergents and pressurized hot water. Thoroughly flush cleaning agents from surface. 4. Surface profile, horizontal surfaces; Acid etch or brush-off blast to remove laitance and to prepare surface profile. New surfaces that have been cured using membrane-forming curing compounds shall be prepared by brush-off blast method. 5. Acid etching: Prepare surface profile by uniformly etching surface to a fixture, to touch, of 100 grit sandpaper; do not over-etch surface. After etching, surface shall be free from surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, etching solutions, and foreign material of any kind. a. After detergent cleaning and while floor is in a saturated but surface dry condition, apply acid solution (1 part 20 " PAINTING 09900-6 , ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint shall be first quality, products of Pratt and Lambert, Benjamin Moore, PPG, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, Tnemec Co. or Devol & Reynolds Company. B. Manufacturers' product names and numbers are given as a standard. Products from other manufacturers listed above will be acceptable subject to compliance with the specification of the indicated product. All suppliers must furnish certificate that his material in compliance. All prime and top coats shall be by the same manufacturer. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Colors: 1. The Architect will furnish a schedule of colors for each room and surfaces. 2. There shall be no limit as to the number of colors. 3. The primary coat and all undercoats shall be the same shade as the final coat. 4. Painting Contractor shall prepare samples for Architect's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prior to commencement of work, examine surfaces scheduled to be finished. 1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing. 2. Do not apply coatings to unsatisfactory substrates. 3. Beginning painting work on an area will be deemed construed acceptance of surfaces in that area. PAINTING 09900-5 an .r. ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. Store materials in an orderly fashion and in clean, well-closed .� containers with labels intact. 2. Maintain above 40 degrees F. Do not allow materials to freeze. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS .. A. Apply coatings only under the following environmental conditions: 00 1. Air and surface temperatures are between 50 and 100 degrees F, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point. 3. Relative humidity is less than 85 percent. B. Do not apply coatings during inclement weather except within enclosed, , conditioned spaces. 1. Provide temporary lighting to achieve a well-lit surface with a level of at least 80 foot candles measured mid-height. 2. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes and to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after application of finishes, or longer if required to obtain fuel cure as indicated by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 COORDINATION A. General: Perform work in proper sequence with work of other trades to ,■, avoid damage to finished work. B. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop coatings specified in other sections, coordinate work of such other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible primers are applied. 1. Furnish the Architect with product data on both coatings demonstrating coating compatibility. 1.09 MAINTENANCE STOCK .. A. At time of completing application, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish not less than one properly labeled and sealed 1- gallon can of each type of finish coat of each color, taken from lots furnished for the work. PAINTING 09900-4 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets for each coating. 1. Material analysis including vehicle type and percentage by weight and by volume of vehicle, resin and pigment. 2. Application instructions including mixing, surface preparation, compatible primers and topcoats, recommended wet and dry film thickness, recommended application methods. B. Color and Texture Samples: 1. Provide for each coating system, color,a nd texture and applied to representative substrate samples. a. Prepare samples to show bare, prepared surface and each successive coat. b. Label each sample with coating name and color. 2. Miscellaneous substrates: 12 by 12 inch hardboard. 3. Concrete: 8 inch square samples. 4. Masonry: 8 by 16 inch samples; include mortar joint. 5. Concrete masonry: 8 by 16 inch samples; include mortar joint. 6. Wood: 8 inch square samples for surfaces; 8 inch long samples for trim. 7. Metal: 5 by 7 inch samples. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: 1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise required or approved. B. Applicator: Firm with successful experience in painting work similar in scope to work of this project. 1. Maintain throughout duration of the work, a crew of painters who are fully qualified to satisfy requirements of the specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers bearing coating name and color, material composition data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and mixing, thinning, and application instructions. B. Storage: PAINTING 09900-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL exterior hollow metal doors and frames, the exposed surfaces of steel lintels, pipe railing, tree grates, tree guards, metal roll up doors, pipe bollards, wood and wood trim, exposed structural steel, and all miscellaneous items. Inclusive of miscellaneous items, but not limited to, ornamental iron fence, exterior pipe handrails, and wood post and rail system, all as defined in Section 2E, Site Improvements, Division 2 - Site Work. 7. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. 8. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in , "schedules", except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or �» surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. B. WORK NOT INCLUDED 1. The following surfaces are not to be painted: . a. New prefinished items such as connectors and light fixtures, case work, distribution cabinets, finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Acoustical ceiling. C. Metal backstop piping specified under Section 11250-1. C. Related Sections: 1. Shop priming of ferrous metal: Division 5 2. Painting of mechanical work: Division 15 3. Painting of electrical work: Division 16 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. DFM (dry film mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state. 1.04 SUBMITTALS PAINTING 09900-2 w. ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09900 - PAINTING (FILED SUB-BIDS REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 See INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS and DIVISION 1, GENERAL CONDITIONS, as they are binding on this section. A. INTENT The Contractor under this section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment required for painting work, complete in accordance with this section ! of the specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section consists of furnishing all materials, labor and equipment for the painting work as shown on the drawings and or described herein, including, but not limited to: 1. Paint finish all wood, metal, drywall plaster, exposed structural steel and masonry surfaces in the area of the work under contract, except those indicated as stained wood finish. 2. Paint all exposed metal, piping, ductwork, conduit, hollow metal doors and frames, roll-up doors, radiators and electric items in the area of the building under contract except those indicated. Electrostatic painting of existing unit ventilators to match new. 3. Paint all areas and materials called for in the Room Finish Schedule. 4. Miscellaneous items of painting such as electrical switch receptacle covers, wire and plug mold, all items of miscellaneous metal, interior and exterior, and as herein specified. 5. Paint high voltage electric conduits. 6. Exterior - Paint all exterior metal work, including, but not limited to, all PAINTING 09900-1 an on H VAC NIOIA NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HIM SOUTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR w HIM SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HIM NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR 142O1 DETAILS ®w W2O2 HvAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL PM EI01A NORTHWE5T LIGHTING PLAN - FIR5T FLOOR EI01B SOUTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101D NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2015 5OUTHEE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER 1 SY5TEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201D NORTHEAST POUTER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER s 5Y5TEM5 PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAMS E401 SITE ELECTRICAL �w .m A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS op A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A41ro POOL FILTRATION DETAILS .� A501 NEW STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXI5TMG STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A601 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A(o02 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS AfoO3 PLAN DETAILS ACo04 PLAN DETAILS A4o05 PLAN DETAILS ... AroOro ENLARGED TOILET PLAN5 AND ELEVATIONS AroOl ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A&08 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A'101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A801A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801 D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT • EQI EQUIPMENT EQ2 EQUIPMENT EM ECU MIENT E04 EQUIPMENT E05 EQUIPMENT POUNDATION FIOIA FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART t CO MtAIITY) F10115 FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY i ADMINISTRATION) F101- FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) FIOID FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST(GYMNA51UM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F501 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART i COMPIINITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY i ADMM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301- SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN .. 5301D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE $501 FRAMING DETAILS 5502 FRAMING DETAILS #" PLUMBING PI01A NORTW EST PLLrlBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI01B SOUTHWE5T PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P101C SOUTHEAST PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PIOID NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLLMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLLMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS P203 PLLMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS COVER SWEET Cs01 GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,DIG.LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. L101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SiTE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L601 SITE DETAILS - 5TORM,SANITARY,AND WATER Lr002 SITE DETAILS, STORM,M15C. ARCHITECTURAL R101 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS R102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS PI—II01 PHASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITION PLAN5 15T FLOOR a.s AD01C DEMOLITION PLAN5 15T FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2N1) FLOOR 14D03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF w� 4p03 DEMOLITION WALL 5ECTION5 A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t CCMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) AI01G FLOOR PLAN - 5OUTN EAST (CAFETORIUM) A1010 FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN �w A104 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A206 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS 4201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS ,4401 WALL SECTIONS A408 WALL SECTIONS A409 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.07 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.08 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter.Ed.), Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. THe time an dplace for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsbile bank or trust company, payable to the CITY OF NORTHAMPTON, in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings. END OF SECTION 09680 Carpet 09680-8 ""° ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4P 3.04 INSTALLATION - GLUE-DOWN CARPET A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. 00 Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges. B. Apply even layer of adhesive to substrate, using trowel of carpet manufacturer's recommended notch size. C. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions. 1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of bulges. 2. Apply seaming cement to butted edges. D. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. E. After installation, lightly roll carpet as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove carpet remnants which are not usable; comply with Owner's instructions for final disposition of usable remnants. B. Use commercial-quality vacuum cleaner to thoroughly clean installed carpeting; trim loose yarns where required. C. Eliminate stains; Contractor shall pay for and replace carpet from which stains cannot be eliminated using carpet manufacturer's recommended products and methods. ±* 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installation with a nonstaining building paper. Do not use a moisture barrier such as plastic film. B. Do not permit foot traffic or place furniture on glued-down carpet for a minimum of 48 hours after installation. 1. Do not wet-clean any glued-down carpet within 60 days of installation. C. Ensure that carpet will be clean and without deterioration or damage at date of substantial completion. Carpet 09680-7 am ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL D. Perform moisture and acidity tests on concrete surfaces where recommended by carpet manufacturer. .. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that each substrate .R is properly prepared to receive carpeting. Fill all cracks, gaps, and depressions using carpet manufacturer's recommended materials and methods. 1. Glue-down installation: Maximum variation in substrate 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 1„ B. Level off all high spots or ridges to prevent uneven carpet wear. an C. Determine whether substrates are susceptible to dusting. Apply sealer where required to prevent formation of dust. D. Vacuum-clean substrates thoroughly, just prior to beginning installation. E. Maintain temperature of floor and relative humidity of rooms where carpet materials „ are to be installed at levels and for periods recommended by carpet manufacturer before, during, and after installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams. 2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases. ••� 3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for cutting carpet, using tools designed to cut type of carpet materials being installed. B. Provide noncombustible carpet separator wherever carpet materials are to be installed on both sides of a fire door. C. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be located directly underneath door in closed position. Carpet 09680-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL zone of inhibition. i. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours exposure. j. Density: 5689.6 oz. yd, - 6500 oz yd, B. Walk-Off Mat: 1. Location: Unless otherwise indicated, all Vestibules. 2. Color/Texture/Pattern: To be slected from Manufacturer's Standards. 3. Construction: Tightly needled-rib. 4. Pile Fiber: Heavy denier solution-dyed polypropylene. 5. Pile Weight: 38 oz.; Pile Height: 3/8" - 3/16". 6. Backing: High density foam. 7. Flammability: Flame spread - 22 (Class A/DOC-FF-1-70). 8. Static Performance: 0.5-step; 0.8-scuff. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Vinyl or Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated, colors selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. C. Noncombustible Carpet Separator: Extruded aluminum; finish to match other exposed accessories. D. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recomended water-resistant adhesive manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying wit fire performance requirements indicated for carpet. Adhesive shall contain no solvent, alcohol or toher hazardous materials per OSHA CFR 1910:1200 V.O.C. shall be zero grams per liter of material (calculated) and non-photochemically reactive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Verify that substrates are completely dry, free of harmful substances, and in satisfactory condition to receive carpeting materials. B. Notify the Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. C. Start of installation work constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. Carpet 09680-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ow MW PART 2 - PRODUCTS ow 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain all of each different material from a single manufacturer. B. Carpet: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following: 1. Patchcraft Commercial Carpets Matinee 2. Crossley Carpets Ltd. so 3. Harbinger Company Fantasia. 4. Mats Inc. .m 2.02 MATERIALS .o A. Carpet: 1. Location: See drawings for locations. 2. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's standards. so 3. Carpet construction: 12' wide textured loop broadloom. 4. Pile fiber: Nylon. a. Fiber shall be commercially available, non-reprocessed fiber, produced " and warranted by an established fiber producer. 5. Style: Textured loop. 6. Pile weight: Minimum 25 ounces per square yard. 7. Total weight: 64.39 oz/yd, min. 8. Dye method: Solution. 9. Installation method: Direct glue-down. .� 10. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 11. Performance characteristics: a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): 1. Class A: Flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450. b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter. C. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Microbial resistance: Bacterial reduction (AATCC 100): Minimum 90 „ percent. g. Microbial resistance: Fungal growth (AATCC 30): Maximum 20 percent. ,W h. Microbial resistance: Diffusion in moisture (AATCC 147): Develops no Carpet 09680-4 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a 1.05 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS W A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL(Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from lying in direct contact with the ground. B. Allow carpet materials to reach room temperature or minimum temperature recommended by manufacturer before installation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this section with other work to ensure that installed carpeting materials are not damaged or soiled. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, installer, and the Contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in carpeting which occur within 10 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which Owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship or faulty materials. Correction may include repair or replacement. 40 1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: After carpet installation has been completed, deliver to the Owner replacement carpeting in quantities not less than 2 percent for each distinct carpet , . color, pattern, and type installed. Extra materials furnished must precisely match materials installed, must be wrapped in suitable packaging, and must be clearly labeled. '"' Carpet 09680-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL on ,o Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 1991. .. I. ASTM E 662-92 -- Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; 1992. am J. NFPA 253-1990 -- Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 1990. "" K. NFPA 255-1990 -- Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 1990. 4" L. UL 723 -- Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1983 (with 1987 Revision). I' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory indicated. 1. Include information which specifically details physical properties and performance characteristics. 2. Include information which details installation methods for substrates indicated. B. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. C. Certification: go 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials furnished comply with requirements indicated. Include official results from independent testing agency which establish that materials meet or exceed test requirements indicated. am 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4W A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service conditions, for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. Carpet 09680-2 `�' ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09680 - CARPET (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Broadloom carpet. 2. Carpet accessories. 3. Walk-off mat. B. Related Sections: �A 1. Resilient flooring: Division 9. 1.02 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR, Chapter 11, Part 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs (FF 1-70); Code of Federal Regulations; 1988. B. AATCC Test Method 30-1989 -- Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1989. C. AATCC Test Method 100-1989 -- Antibacterial Finishes on Textile Materials: Assessment of; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1989. D. AATCC Test Method 134-1991 -- Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1991. E. AATCC Test Method 147-1988 -- Antibacterial Activity Assessment of Textile Materials: Parallel Streak Method; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1988. F. AATCC Test Method 16-1990 -- Colorfastness to Light: Water-cooled Xenon-Arc Lamp, Continuous Light; 1990. G. ASTM E 84-91a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991. H. ASTM E 648-91a -- Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Carpet 09680-1 ow HVAC po H101A NORTHWEST HYAG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HI01B SOUTHWEST WvAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 14101C SOUTHEAST HvAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR on HIM NORTHEAST HYAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR W102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W2O1 DETAILS „sw W2O2 HvAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL all E101A NORTHWEST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101B 5OUT14WEST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR we EICID NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTNG PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWE5T POUTER A 5YSTEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B 5OITHWE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR !go E201C SOUTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2011) NORTHEAST POUTER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER 4 SYSTEM5 PLAN - 5ECOND FLOOR ON E301 DIAGRAMS E401 51TE ELECTRICAL a�A A a�w ,o. A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS ., A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS ,4415 POOL SECTIONS A41(o POOL FILTRATION DETAILS oft A501 NEW STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Aro01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS „u A&02 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS Aro03 PLAN DETAILS A604 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS A60ro ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS AroOZ ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A608 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A'101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A-102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS ASOIA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR .w■ A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A602 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR ECUIPMENT �* EQI EQUIPMENT EQ2 EQUIPMENT EM ECLIiPMEN't E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION FI01A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART t C0111UNITY) FI01B FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY ! ADMINISTRATION) FI01C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) FiOID FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY s ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301C SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORILfl)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN $3010 NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS ,m 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING am PIOIA NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P10115 SOUTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOCK go PI01D NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS a` P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS COVER SHEET Ail Cs01 GENERAL INFOR'1ATICN SYMBOLOGY,DW3.LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY w. LD01 51TE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. L.101 51TE LAYOUT PLAN L201 51TE GRADING PLAN L301 51TE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L601 SITE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L602 51TE DETAILS, STORM,MI5C. ARCHITECTURAL R101 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS OVA RI02 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS PI4101 PHASING PLAN ,4D01,4 DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR ow AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR ,4D02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF so AD04 DEMOLITION WALL 5ECTICN5 A10IA FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t COMh'UNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) sip A101C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETCRIUM) A101D FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNA5IUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN A104 ROOF - DETAILS ,4201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ,4202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20ro DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS ! w A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS �w A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL 5ECTION5 go ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL P4 by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this Section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings: s■ END OF SECTION 09660 no •o so 00 .A 4m apt r . Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-7 110 am ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.07 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Edge Strips: At locations shown on drawings, or where otherwise required to protect edge of resilient flooring, install resilient edge strips securely with recommended adhesive, to achieve tightly butted joint. 3.08 CLEANING A. Initial Cleaning: Remove excess and waste materials promptly, and sweep or vacuum clean resilient flooring as soon as installation has been completed in each area. After adhesive has had adequate time to set, mop each area with damp mop and mild , detergent. B. Final Cleaning: Remove scuff marks, excess adhesive, and other foreign substances, using only cleaning products and techniques recommended by manufacturer of resilient products. 4W 3.09 PROTECTION A. Construction Period: Cover traffic routes across completed resilient flooring with plywood, hardboard, or other durable material to protect against damage from loaded dollies and other construction traffic. 1. Polish: Apply protective polish to clean resilient flooring surfaces, unless manufacturer of resilient product recommends otherwise. B. Final Protection: Cover resilient floor surface with nonstaining building paper until .. substantial completion in each area. 4W 3.10 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. • 3.11 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter.Ed.), Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, *" CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-6 "" ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL tightly to fixtures, pipes, and other obstructions, as well as to walls and partitions. B. Access Covers: Install resilient flooring tightly to removable access covers in field of flooring, taking care that pattern will match when covers are in closed position. C. Tightly adhere resilient flooring to substrate with no open joints or cracks, and without raised or blistered areas. Spread adhesive evenly, so that final installation will be without telegraphed markings from adhesive or substrate. MO 3.04 TILE INSTALLATION on A. Layout: Establish center of each space and lay tile from center point, so tiles at each edge will be not less than 1/2 tile and equal in width. *00 B. Matching: In each space, use tiles from same production run, and lay tiles in same sequence as removed from cartons. Discard broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged tiles. ON 1. Lay tile square to room axis. 2. Lay tile to achieve monolithic appearance, with pattern in all tiles oriented in same direction. OPS C. Installation: Apply adhesive with notched trowel, following manufacturer's instructions. Install tile only after adhesive has developed sufficient tack, firmly butting tiles to achieve hairline joints. Roll each area of installation at regular so intervals, to assure firm bonding of tiles to substrate. 00 3.05 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE A. Apply base securely in locations indicated, using maximum lengths available to ■■ minimize joints. Adhere to substrate with full spread of adhesive, assuring continuous contact with vertical and horizontal surfaces. Site-fabricate corners, coping or mitering inside corners and heat-forming outside corners using manufacturer-approved 40 device, or provide preformed corner units. 1. At irregular vertical surfaces where top edge of resilient base does not make continuous contact, fill voids with manufacturer's recommended adhesive 40 compound. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF STAIR ACCESSORIES A. General: Install accessories as shown on the drawings, following manufacturer's recommended procedures for a secure, fully adhered application. 1. Adhere stair accessories over entire surface, fitted accurately to achieve hairline joints. Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-5 so ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .W manufacturer of resilient flooring product. MM E. Sealers or Polishes: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer and have low level volatile organic compounds as required for floor products for this Project. 2.05 COLORS AND PATTERNS am A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard product line, and as shown on Drawings. so PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXANUNATION go A. General: Inspect substrates and conditions of installation to verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Concrete Substrates: Perform manufacturer's recommended moisture tests before „m beginning installation, to verify that concrete surfaces have cured sufficiently to allow adhesive bond to resilient flooring. 40 C. Existing substrates: Inspect substrate to ensure that existing VAT is not textured or embossed enough to show through new installation. That existing VAT is completely and firmly bonded and shows no evidence moisture, akaline salts or hydrostate Im pressure. 3.02 PREPARATION ow A. Substrates: Fill minor depressions, cracks, and other irregularities with patching compound. 1. Remove paint, curing compounds, and other materials that could interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Sweep or vacuum clean substrate immediately prior to beginning installation in each area. 3. Apply primer to concrete substrates prior to application of adhesive, following manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Remove waxes and other finishes from existing VAT with a commercial wax stripper approved by manufacturer. aw 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation in each area, extending resilient flooring into spaces which are partially concealed. Cut and fit Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-4 '�" ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Tarkett, Inc., "Singals Collection". 2. Composition 1: Free of asbestos. 3. Gage: 1/8 inch. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type 1, and as follows: 40 1. Height: 4 inches. 2. Style: Standard toe base. 3. Corners: At Contractor's option, provide prefabricated units matching base in color and finish, or site-fabricate corners, using heat-forming tool acceptable to manufacturer. 2.03 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Stair Treads: FS RR-T-650, Composition A, single units for full width of stair or equal lengths if stair width exceeds maximum length available from manufacturer. 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch overall, nontapered. 3. Nose design: Square nose. B. Resilient Risers: Coved base, nomina1.080 or 1/8-inch thickness, matching stair treads; single units for full width of stair or equal lengths if stair width exceeds maximum length available from manufacturer. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile, nominally 1 inch in width and 1/8 inch in thickness. 1. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard product line. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific substrate conditions; however, in no case shall the volatile organic compounds in the adhevior be in excess of those present in the following adhesives: Azrock Type L Cove Base Adhesive or Tarkett FB 10 Wall Base Adhesive, or Armstrong S-515 clear thin-spread adhesive . C. Primer: Type recomended by manufacturer of resilient product for appliction to concrete substrates, and have low level volatile organic compounds as required for floor products for this Project. D. Patching Compound: Latex leveling and patching compound acceptable to Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. ,m 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each type of product required, including adhesives, cleaning compounds, and other accessories, provide the same product by one manufacturer throughout the project. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS .m A. Environmental Requirements: At least 48 hours prior to beginning work, move Im resilient flooring materials to areas of installation and maintain at minimum 70 degrees F until 48 hours after completing installation and at minimum 55 degrees F thereafter. B. Sequencing: In areas where movable partitions are required, install resilient flooring am before beginning partition work. C. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of resilient flooring products until painting has MW been completed for each area. D. Existing Conditions: Do not install resilient flooring on concrete substrates until so testing has been conducted to assure that moisture levels are acceptable. Notify Owner as to areas of existing VAT that require removal to ensure acceptable substrate am for new vinyl composition. 1.06 MAINTENANCE 00 A. Extra Materials: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance materials to the Owner. Furnish products matching those actually installed, packaged „w for storage and clearly labeled. 1. Resilient tile: 1 percent of each variety installed. 2. Resilient base: 1 percent of each variety installed. am 3. Resilient stair accessories: 1 percent of each variety installed, in full-width components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches by 12 inches. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Standard "Excelon" Imperial Texture. b. Azrock "Custom Cortina". Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-2 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient tile flooring. ` a. Vinyl composition tile on concrete subtrate and over existing VAT. 2. Resilient base. 3. Resilient stair accessories. B. Products Installed but Not Furnished under This Section: 1. Electrical floor cover plates with recess for resilient flooring. C. Related Sections: 1. Carpet: Division 9. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS RR-T-650D -- Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; 1988. B. FS SS-T-312B -- Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, and Vinyl Composition; 1974 (Amendment-1(YD) 1979 and Reapproved 1990). C. FS SS-W-40A -- Wall Base: Rubber, and Vinyl Plastic; 1966 (Amended 1970 and Corrected 1974). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data from each manufacturer of resilient products required. B. Initial Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color selection samples for resilient products required, including all available colors and patterns. C. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient R. product required, as follows: 1. Actual tiles. 2. Cut sections of resilient flooring accessories, not less than six inches in length. 3. Other materials requested by Architect. Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-1 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ,fir 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect flooring from moisture at all times. B. Field-Finished Floors: 1. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and before completion of finish system, except for installers applying finishes. 2. Cover sanded floor with building paper to provide access for application of first finish coats. C. Cover completed flooring until substantial completion with heavy kraft paper or other material capable of fully protecting flooring and finish. D. Prohibit nonessential traffic on completed floors. END OF SECTION 09550 """ Wood Flooring 09550-5 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL W AM, C. Verify that substrates and working conditions are in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. .. D. Correct unsatisfactory substrates and working conditions before proceeding with installation. UK E. Concrete Slabs: 1. Test for dryness using a 3 percent solution of phenolphthalein in grain alcohol. Apply a few drops on concrete at several representative locations; if drops turn red within a few minutes, slab is too wet to proceed with installation. 2. Perform other dryness tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. .w 3.02 PREPARATION A. Acclimatization: Place packages or bundles of flooring in areas scheduled to receive �► flooring; open packaging and allow flooring to acclimatize for at least 5 days prior to installation, unless flooring manufacturer specifically recommends against acclimatization. B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Wood Flooring Products: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. ' 3.04 EXPANSION SPACE .� A. Provide expansion space where shown on the drawings. 1. Width: 1/2 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Just prior to substantial completion, remove protective coverings, remove all traces of dust and dirt, and buff floors to the required sheen. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct the Owner in proper care of floors and in use of floor care products. Wood Flooring 09550-4 4W ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL e. Surface: 1. Nonbeveled edges. f. Field finished as indicated. 2. Flooring shall be 25/32" x 2 1/4' continuous tongue and groove,end matched. 3. Vapor barrier shall be 6 mil polyethylene. 4. Sleepers shall be 2" x 3" x 4'(Nominal) Fir,Pine,KD,treated with WOODLIFE preservative. 5. Resilient pads shall be 3/8" x 2 1/4" x 3", attached 12"O.C.. 6. Subfloor Panels shall be 5/8" x 4'-0" x 8'-0" C-D exterior plywood. 7. Fasteners shall be 2-in. barbed cleat or equilalent. 8. Perimeter Base shall be 4" x 3" heavy duty GYM COVE molded,vented base with pre-molded outside and inside corners, "Black". 9. Suitable for use of manufacturer's recommended installation methods on project substrates. B. Comparable products of the following manufacturers will be considered for substitution: 1. Connor/AGA Inc. 2. Robbins Flooring Inc. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. As recommended or required by manufacturer. B. Underlayment: Polyethylene sheeting, 6 mils thick, minimum. C. Gym Floor Sleeves: Provide and install minimum twenty four (24) floor sleeves #00872-000 and cover plate #10872-800 as manufactured by Porter Equipment Co., or equal. Final locations to be determined in field. 2.03 FIELD-APPLIED FINISHES 40 A. Field-applied finishes such as stains, varnishes, and paints are specified elsewhere in Division 9. on PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Iva A. Examine substrates and working conditions. OR B. Verify that substrates comply with flooring manufacturer's recommended surface tolerances. Wood Flooring 09550-3 40 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Manufacturer's representative shall visit the site during initial phases of installation ®„ for purposes of assistance and troubleshooting. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect from excessive loss or gain of moisture during shipment and before, during, and after installation. B. Deliver in unopened packaging and store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation; maintain average moisture content recommended by manufacturer. C. Do not deliver to project unless HVAC system is operational. . D. Do not deliver materials to project or install materials until moisture-producing work has been completed and has dried to equilibrium. .. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: For at least 5 days prior to, during, and for at least 3 days after installation and finishing of wood flooring, continuously mainttain relative humidity at 50 percent, or as otherwise anticipated during actual occupancy, and maintain ambient temperature between 65 and 70 degrees F. Store flooring in conditioned spaces, and open and loosen packaging to allow moisture content of -" flooring to adjust to environmental conditions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FLOORING '" A. The design is based on the following products: 1. Solid wood strip flooring: a. Manufacturer: Horner Flooring Co. b. "Thrust-A-Cushion Sleeper System". C. Species: Northern Hard Maple. d. Grade: First Grade. Wood Flooring 09550-2 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09550 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUNEWARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior wood flooring at Gymnasium: a. Solid wood strip. b. Gym floor sleeves. C. Field Finishing and stripping B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete substrates: Division 3. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Detailed technical product data. B. Shop Drawings: Show pattern, species, size, and jointing of each type or shape of flooring, transition piece, and accessory item. C. Samples: 1. Submit samples for each species, pattern, and type of finish, demonstrating full range of variation to be anticipated in finished work. 2. Furnish at least 3 pieces per sample, each not less than 12 inches. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's finishing recommendations. a. List of finishing products recommended by flooring manufacturer. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 4W 1. Operations and maintenance data: a. Manufacturer's maintenance recommendations. b. List of maintenance products recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: A company specializing in the installation of wood flooring and whose installations have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. "" Wood Flooring 09550-1 H VAC 14101A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HI01B 50UTI4UEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 14101C SOUTHEAST HvAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR NIOID NORTHEAST HYAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H102A HYAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR H201 DETAILS H202 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL E101A NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI0IB SOUTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EIOIC SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR po MID NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWEST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B SOUTHWEST POWER I SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER t SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2011) NORTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER s 5Y5TEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR w E301 DIAGRAMS E401 SITE ELECTRICAL �r ew go oft A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGNT am A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A416 POOL FILTRATION DETAILS am A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A601 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS .. A603 PLAN DETAILS ,4604 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS .w A606 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A601 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A608 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A'101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS No A-102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A801A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR Im A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR ,4802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR w EQUIPMENT EQI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT EM EQJIPMENT *+� E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FCUNDATICN F1O1A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART 4 COM`AJrIITY) F1O15 FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY t ADMINISTRATION) F1O1C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) +o FIVE) FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F5O1 FOUNDATION DETAILS F5O2 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 52O1A NORTHWEST - (ART t COM"ITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY t ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN $3O1A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 53010 SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 93O1D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE $501 FRAMING DETAILS 5502 FRAMING DETAILS aw PLUMBING oft PIOIA NORTHIIIEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 101015 SOUTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PIO1C SOUTHEAST PLUMBMG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR MO1D NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR °` P1O2A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P2O1 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P2O2 PLUMBING DETAILS m, P2O3 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS COVER SWEET Cs01 GENERAL K-OWATION SYMBOLOGY,DWG.LI5T LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 51TE SURVEY LD01 51TE PREPARATION,51TE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. 1-101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN 40 L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 517E LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL go L502 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL 1-503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L&OI SITE DETAILS - STOW,SANITARY,AND WATER ,w L(o02 SITE DETAILS,STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL m RI01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS RIO2 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS F$4101 PWASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR 14001C DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR ADO3 -DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF ADO-, DEMOLITION WALL 5ECTION5 AI01A FLOOR PLAN - NORTW WEST (ART 4 COMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTW WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) A101C FLOOR PLAN - 50UTW EAST (CAFETORIUM) AI01D FLOOR PLAN - NORTW EAST (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR 4W 4103 ROOF PLAN AI04 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FINISW SCWEDULE 14202 ROOM FNISW SCWEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCWEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20ro DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A20-1 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS ,4220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIO45 A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS 40 A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A4015 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ..a ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL submission of sub-bids shall be set forth under ^ INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. C. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be , accompanied by BID BOND, CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the Town of Lenox, in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings: Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-10 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. Molding and trim attachment: Space screws not more than 16 inches on center and within 3 inches of ends of each trim-piece being installed. Install moldings and trim level with suspension system and within tolerance specified for suspension system. 2 . Edge moldings: Before installing molding, apply acoustical sealer in uniform bead to vertical molding ± edge which will be concealed after installation. 3 . Miter corners and align butt joints carefully to form tight hairline joints. 4 . Face-riveting of trim and moldings is not allowed. 3 .05 LAY-IN PANEL INSTALLATION wa A. Panel Installation: Install acoustical panels for accurate fit with suspension system and trim members. Scribe and cut panels at ceiling perimeter and at obstructions to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Square-edge panel installation: Provide installation with panel edges which are hidden from view, by suspension members or trim. 3 . 06 ADJUST AND CLEAN so A. Use ceiling manufacturer's recommended methods and materials to clean and touch-up exposed components of ceiling system. B. Replace ceiling system components which are discolored or damaged in any way, in a manner which results in the ceiling system showing no evidence of replacement work. 3 .07 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.08 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter.Ed. ) , Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-9 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Layout: Position ceiling components to maximize use of full-sized acoustical units and to provide border units which are equal in size and shape at opposing ceiling edges. Use of acoustical units which are smaller than 1/2 full-width is prohibited at ceiling perimeters. Conform to reflected ceiling plans to greatest extent possible. 3 . 03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General : 1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 636, manufacturer's installation instructions, and governing regulations. 2 . Install hangers plumb and supported solely by building structure or carrying channels. Do not allow hangers to contact any objects or materials in ceiling plenum which are not actual components of ceiling system. a. Splay hangers only where necessary to avoid obstacles. Provide countersplaying, bracing, or other acceptable devices to compensate for lateral stresses caused by splayed hangers. 3 . Space hangers at not more than 48 inches on center and within 6 inches of ends of each direct-hung runner or .� carrying channel, unless indicated otherwise. 4 . Loop and tie wire hangers securely to building's structural members; to attachment devices indicated; or, where not indicated, to devices suitable for substrate and capable of permanently supporting ceiling weight without failure or deterioration. 5. Level ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 „ inch in 12 feet, with cumulative tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch. Bending or kinking of hangers is not allowed. B. Exposed (Lay-in) Grid Installation: Install grid members square, with ends of members securely interlocked. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 3 . 04 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install edge moldings and trim units at acoustical ceiling borders, at locations indicated, and where required to cover acoustical unit edges. Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-8 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ` Intermediate-Duty System. 3 . Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. 2. 06 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM "E" e A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM E 1264, Type XI, Form 2 ; manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 5/8 inch thick. 2 . Size: 24 by 48 inches. 3 . Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 35. 4 . Finish: Polyester film (mylar) , edge cemented to field panels, fully adhered to edge and cut panels. 5. Color: White. 6. Face: Plain, unperforated. 7 . Light reflectance coefficient: Minimum LR 0. 75. „s 8. Products with properties specified, which are comparable in appearance to the following, will be considered: a. "Mylar" #884 Border Units, #882 Field Units,Fire Guard;Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Grid: Extruded aluminum with painted finish. 1. Profile: Single-web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2 . Structural classification (ASTM C 635) : �s Intermediate-Duty System. 3 . Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. 2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Sealer: Resilient type, nonshrinking, nonstaining, nondrying, nonhardening, nonsag. Provide sealer which is suitable for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be installed and verify that the work properly may commence. Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-7 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 5/8 inch thick. 2 . Size: 24 by 48 inches. 3 . Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 40. ,..� 4 . Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.55. 5. Finish: Perforated vinyl film. 6. Color: White. 7. Light reflectance coefficient: Minimum LR 0.75. 8. Products with properties specified, which are comparable in appearance to the following, will be considered: ..� a. "Ceramaguard" #602A;Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Grid: Extruded aluminum with painted finish. ..� 1. Profile: Single-web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2 . Structural classification (ASTM C 635) : Intermediate-Duty System. .� 3 . Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. 2 . 05 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM "B" A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM E 1264 , Type III, o„6 Form 2 ; manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 5/8 inch thick. 2 . Size: 24 by 24 inches. 3 . Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 35. 404 a. Provide foil or other noncombustible backing on panels if standard with manufacturer or if required to achieve specified CSTC value. ow 4 . Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0. 55. 5. Edge profile: Square. 6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint. 7. Color: White. ' 8. Light reflectance coefficient: Minimum LR 0.75. 9. Products with properties specified, which are comparable in appearance to the following, will be .w considered: a. "Minaboard Cortega", #769A, ceiling panel, 24" x 24 x 5/8" thick, white finish; Armstrong World WK Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Grid: Formed steel with painted finish. aw 1. Profile: Single-web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2 . Structural classification (ASTM C 635) : no Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-6 .w 0 ADDITION/RENOV. J. F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Aft E. Edge Moldings and Trim: 1. Extruded plastic or metal; provide molding for edges and ceiling penetrations indicated. Provide profiles ON suited to edge profiles of acoustical units and suspension members. +0 F. Locations: refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans and Room Finish Schedule. 2 . 03 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM "A" A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM E 1264, Type III, �. Form 2 ; manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 5/8 inch thick. 2 . Size: 24 by 48 inches. 3 . Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 35. a. Provide foil or other noncombustible backing on panels if standard with manufacturer or if required to achieve specified CSTC value. 4 . Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0. 60. 5. Edge profile: Square. 6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint. 7. Color: White. 8 . Light reflectance coefficient: Minimum LR 0.75. 9. Products with properties specified, which are comparable in appearance to the following, will be considered: a. "Minaboard Cortega" #769A ceiling panel 24"x48"x5/8" thick,white finish;Armstrong World �. Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Grid: Formed steel with painted finish. 1. Profile: Single-web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2 . Structural classification (ASTM C 635) : Intermediate-Duty System. 3 . Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. +! 2. 04 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM "D" A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM E 1264 , Type X; Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-5 so ..e ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL levels have been reached and will be maintained. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: After ceiling installation has been completed, deliver to the Owner replacement materials for materials installed. Furnish products which precisely match installed products. Protect with appropriate packaging and provide clear, legible labels. * 1. Acoustical lay-in panels: Furnish full-sized panels in quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity of panels installed. s PART 2 - PRODUCTS .W 2 . 01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL ON A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. am 2 . 02 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - GENERAL ■m A. Provide suspension systems conforming to specified requirements and to requirements of ASTM C 635. B. Colors: Provide indicated colors. Where color is not indicated, provide colors as selected by the Architect „ from manufacturer's complete set of standard colors. C. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard shop-applied finishes. D. Attachment Devices for Suspension System: 1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes capable of sustaining 5 times the load-carrying capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" column. 2 . Hanger wire: Zinc-coated (galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, with Class 1 coating, minimum 12 gage (0. 106 inch diameter) . Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-4 of ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Verification samples: a. Acoustical units: 12-inch-square samples of each type required. b. Exposed suspension and trim elements: 12-inch-long samples of each type and finish required. 1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE �w A. Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. Surface burning characteristics: Provide products having the following characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 : a. Maximum flame spread: 25. b. Maximum smoke developed: 50. 1. 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination Data: Prepare and distribute to affected installers, data necessary for coordination with related work. Include setting diagrams showing placement of 4w attachment devices for acoustical ceiling hangers. B. Coordinate ceiling system installation with work of other sections as required, including the following: 1. Light fixtures. 2 . HVAC equipment. 3. Fire suppression system components. 4 . Loudspeakers. 5. Partitions. 6. Overhead structural C. Within each space to receive specified products, do not begin installation until the following conditions are met: 1. Work above ceilings has been finished, tested, and approved. 2 . Space to receive ceiling system is properly enclosed and protected from weather. 3 . Any wet work within the space is dry. D. Do not begin installation of ceiling system until building's normal operating temperature and humidity 40 Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-3 .f, ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991. G. ASTM E 795-92 -- Standard Practices for Mounting Test ,. Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests; 1992 . H. ASTM E 1264-90 -- Standard Classification for Acoustical .� Ceiling Products; 1990. up 1. 03 DEFINITIONS A. NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) : The weighted average ,w sound absorption coefficient of the ceiling materials when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 , with mounting No. E-400 (ASTM E 795) . ,W B. CSTC (Ceiling Sound Transmission Class) : The numerical 4W rating of sound attenuation for the ceiling system between two rooms when installed over a barrier with a common plenum above and tested in accordance with AMA-I-II-1967. C. LR (Light Reflectance Coefficient) : As determined by ASTM E 1264 . AM 1. 04 SUBMITTALS 00 A. Product Data: Submit data for each distinct suspension system and acoustical unit type indicated. 4M B. Coordination Drawings: Submit reflected ceiling plans No showing correlations as necessary between work of this section and work of other sections. 1. Minimum drawing scale: 1/8 inch equals 1 foot. 2 . Show the following: 0M a. Ceiling suspension elements. b. Hanger type and method of attachment to structure. C. Light fixtures. d. HVAC equipment. e. Fire suppression system components. f. Loudspeakers. g. Partitions. h. Overhead structural Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-2 A" ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILINGS �r (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL IAN 1. 01 SUMMARY ;ate A. Section Includes: 1. Exposed suspension system. w 2 . Trim and accessories. 3 . Acoustical lay-in panels. 1. 02 REFERENCES A. AMA-I-II-1967 -- Ceiling and Sound Transmission by Two-Room Method; Acoustical Materials Association (AMA) ; Adopted by Ceilings & Interior Systems Contractors 40 Association (CISCA) ; 1967 . B. ASTM A 641-92 -- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated 40 (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 1992 . w C. ASTM C 423-90a -- Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 1990. D. ASTM C 635-91 -- Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 1991. E. ASTM C 636-91 -- Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 1991. F. ASTM E 84-91a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Acoustical Lay-In Ceilings 09511-1 ADD/RENOV . - J. F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL ^" B . Construction traffic, including foot traffic, is strictly prohibited on completed surface . C . Maintain protection until final completion unless terrazzo is put into service at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09410 a wa Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-8 ON ADD/RENOV . - J.F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL 24-hour basis during curing period. Do not permit partial drying of any part of surface . 3 . 06 FINISHING OF POLISHED TERRAZZO w A. Grind terrazzo only under well-lighted conditions . Provide adequate temporary lighting if necessary. B. Rough Grindin g: Grind with stones of 24 grit or finer, or with comparable diamond plates . Follow with stones of 80 grit or finer . C . Grouting: 1 . Remove grinding residue from surface with clean water, and rinse thoroughly . 2 . Remove excess rinse water, and grout surface using identical portland cement and pigments (if any) used in topping mixture; fill all voids . 3 . Install curing material and maintain at least 72 hours . D. Fine Grinding: 1 . Schedule fine grinding to occur after completion of construction operations that might mar or contaminate completed surface . 2 . Grind with stones of 80 grit or finer, removing all grout from surface . 3 . When completed, aggregate shall comprise not less than 70 percent of the surface . E . Cleaning: 1 . Wash surface with a neutral cleaner . 2 . Clean with a fine abrasive where necessary to remove OWN any stains or cement smears . 3 . Thoroughly rinse with clean water . F . Sealing: Apply sealer to the clean, dry surface in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions . 3 . 07 PROTECTION 40 A. Cover terrazzo surface, and protect from soiling, staining, marring, scratching, and other damage . Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-7 ..t ADD/RENOV . - J . F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL movement, locate strips in precise alignment with joints in substrate . 3 . 03 PREPARATION FOR TERRAZZO TOPPING A. Apply bonding agent only to such area as can be covered with topping within working time of bonding agent . If working time is exceeded, remove by sandblasting and reapply . a. 1 . Portland cement paste : Saturate surface with water in advance of application, and allow to dry . There shall be no free water at time of application. The surface shall be dry to allow for some absorption of the paste . Apply a thin coating, scrubbing thoroughly to ensure that the entire surface receives an even coating without collecting in pockets . 3 . 04 TOPPING INSTALLATION A. Ground and Polished Topping : 1 . Place topping mix . 2 . Trowel to achieve a true, uniform surface, level with joint strips . 3 . Seed surface with additional chips in the proportions as contained in the terrazzo mix . 4 . Trowel and roll with heavy rollers until all excess water has been extracted. 5 . Trowel to achieve a true, uniform surface displaying lines of joint strips . 6 . Place topping to achieve final topping depth and required finished floor elevations, as shown on drawings . B . Install curing material, and maintain until topping Ao develops sufficient strength to allow finishing without lifting or pulling of chips . so 3 . 05 CURING Am A. Apply curing materials as soon as practicable without marring surface . B. Moist Curing Materials : Maintain continuously wet on a Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-6 NO ADD/RENOV . - J .F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL �I► E . Sealer for Polished Terrazzo : pH between 7 and 10; nonyellowing, noncoloring; penetrating type formulated for +! polished terrazzo. Flash point (ASTM D 56) : 80 degrees F, minimum. 2 . 04 MIXES A. Neat Portland Cement Paste : Pigment to match topping color where used to bond pigmented topping. B . Terrazzo Mixture : 1 . Comply with matrix pigment and quantity, percent , color, and gradation of aggregates in accordance with NTMA plates indicated on the drawings or on schedules . 2 . Quantity of pigment shall not exceed 2 pounds per bag of cement . 3 . Proportion and mix in accordance with NTMA recommendations . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Verify condition of substrates . 1 . Surfaces to receive terrazzo topping : a. Flatness tolerance : 1/8 inch maximum depression between high spots when measured with a 10-foot straightedge . 00 B . Report unsatisfactory conditions, including but not �r limited to those listed. C . Correct deficiencies before beginning installation. 3 . 02 JOINT STRIPS A. Install strips in proper elevation, alignment, and pattern, straight , true, and level . B. Where joints are provided in substrate to accommodate Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-5 �w am am ADD/RENOV . - J.F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 . Absorption after 24 hours ' immersion in water: 0 .75 *�* percent , maximum. 4 . Free of deleterious and foreign matter . 5 . Dust content : Less than 1 percent by weight . 6 . Packaged in bags identified with type and size of aggregate . E. Matrix Pigments : Pure mineral or synthetic pigments formulated for cementitious terrazzo; nonfading, alkali-resistant . 2 . 02 JOINT STRIPS A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable : 1 . Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip Company, Inc . B . Material : 1 . Half-hard brass . C . Depth and style suitable for terrazzo type and thickness and as otherwise indicated. 1 . Strip width: 12 gage 1/8 inch 2 . 03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Admixtures - General : Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixtures which result in more than 0 . 1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are not permitted. B . Water-Reducing Admixture : ASTM C 494, Type A. C . Curing Materials : 1 . Continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric . D. Cleaner : Non-ionic neutral detergent ; biodegradable; phosphate free; pH between 7 and 10; recommended by sealer ,, manufacturer . Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-4 so ADD/RENOV . - J. F.K . MIDDLE SCHOOL 1 . Installer shall have not less than 5 years of experience installing terrazzo of the type specified. B. Mock-ups : Construct mock-up not less than 4 feet by 4 feet , showing colors, textures, dividing strips, and other features . Mock-up shall serve as a standard by which other work may be judged. Remove mock-up at completion of work. 1 . 07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a clean, dry, protected location. "! 1 . 08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : Maintain ambient and substrate temperature between 50 and 95 degrees F . Placement of cementitious materials outside of these limits will be permitted only if the Contractor demonstrates strict conformance with recommendations of ACI 305R and 306R and obtains prior approval . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A 2 . 01 TERRAZZO MATERIALS A. Portland Cement : 1 . Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I and the following: a . Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) ; 2800 psi, minimum, at 3 days and 4000 psi, minimum, at 7 days . b. Color (for topping) : Either white or gray, as required to achieve specified mixture colors . �w B . Sand: ASTM C 33 , fine aggregates . C . Water : Potable . 40 D. Terrazzo Aggregates : 1 . Marble chips . 2 . Abrasive hardness value (ASTM C 241) : 10 . 4M Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-3 10 low ADD/RENOV . - J.F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL H. ASTM D 56-87 -- Standard Test Method for Flash Point by ' Tag Closed Tester; 1987 . I . Terrazzo Information Guide; The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc . (NTMA) ; 1993 . 1 . 03 DEFINITIONS A. NTMA: The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc . 1 . 04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION w A. Design Requirements : 1 . Select joint strip profiles and spacings in accordance with NTMA and manufacturer ' s recommendations to provide for expansion, contraction, crack control, and grounds for terrazzo. Include dividing strip, control strip, and expansion strip types as necessary . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each material or product , demonstrating compliance with specified requirements . B. Shop Drawings : 1 . Joint strip layout and details . Show relationship with adjacent finish materials, adjacent construction, .. and building structure . C . Samples : am 1 . Submit 6- by 6-inch samples for each color and type of terrazzo. am D. Contract Closeout Submittals : 1 . Manufacturer ' s cleaning and maintenance instructions . 1 . 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-2 -IWO ADD/RENOV . - J. F .K . MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09410 - PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Cast-in-place flooring. B . Related Sections : 1 . Concrete : Division 3 . 2 . Unit prices - Section 01026 3 . Form of General Bid - Section 00400 1 . 02 REFERENCES A. ACI 305R-91 -- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991 . B . ACI 306R-88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988 . C . ASTM C 33-93 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1993 . ow D. ASTM C 109-93 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm we Cube Specimens) ; 1993 . so E. ASTM C 150-92 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement ; 1992 . F. ASTM C 241-90 -- Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic; 1990 . G. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992 . Portland Cement Terrazzo 09410-1 ON HVAC HI01A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 14101B SOUTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR N101C SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR im H1010 NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR W102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W201 DETAILS to W202 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL OR EI01A NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01B SOUTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101D NORTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWEST POWER t SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2015 SOUTHWEST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201D NORTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER 4 5Y5TEM5 PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAMS E401 51TE ELECTRICAL w A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A4* POOL FILTRATION DETAILS A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Aro01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS ACo03 PLAN DETAILS Aro04 PLAN DETAILS A(oO5 PLAN DETAILS AroOro ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS AroOl ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A(o08 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A'101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A-102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A60IA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 14802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR aw EQUIPMENT No EQI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT EQ3 EQJIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION FI01A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART t CC{'11ILNITY) FI01B FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY i ADMINISTRATION) F101- FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) MID FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMMUNITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN rr 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY s ADMN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 6301A WEST - ROOF FRAMNG PLAN 5301- SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAM NG PLAN a $3010 NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 6501 FRAMING DETAILS Im 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING oft PI01A NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PIOIB SOUTPIrE5T PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P101C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A MID NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS am P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS -- COVER SWEET G01 GENERAL NOWATION SYMBOLOGY,DM L15T LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATION, SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. L101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADNG PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL Lh01 SITE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER Lro02 SITE DETAILS, STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL R101 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS R102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS f=H101 PHASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITION PLANS 1ST FLOOR AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD00 DEMOLITION PLANS I5T FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF AD04 DEMOLITION WALL SECTIONS A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST TART t COMMNITY) AI015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMNI5TRATION) A101C FLOOR PLAN • SOUTH EAST (CAFETORIUM) A1010 FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EA5T (GYMNASIUM) A102 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AI03 ROOF PLAN A104 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FNISW SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20ro DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A20'1 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS '! A40ro WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS ,4409 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL WW 1. Wipe latex-portland cement residue from tile with a damp cloth or sponge as soon as possible after tile installation. aw B. Replace any broken, chipped, marred, or otherwise damaged tile before final acceptance. 40 C. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile manufacturer. Overlay completed file installation with kraft paper for , protection from subsequent construction activities. 1. Do not allow any traffic on completed tile floors for minimum 7 days after completion. , 2. Remove protection, rinse, and dry tile installations before final review and acceptance. 10 3.06 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, for alternate prices required. 3.07 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter. Ed.) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for ,. submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH, OR CERTIFIED CHECK, OR A TREASURER'S CHECK OR CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of Northampton in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. .. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract documents. Work to be done under this section is shown on the following drawings. END OF SECTION 09300 Tile 09300-10 .» ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 5. Preparation by Tile Trade: a. Inspect tank for requirements included in Preparation by Other Trades above. b. Check dimensions before starting tile work. ' C. Report any defects to Architect in writing. d. Submit shop drawing for all details, lettering and markings. e. After approval of the concrete tank, wash with hose under high pressure and sweep with a stiff broom. Surface to be free of grease, oil, wax or other coatings. 6. Expansion Joint location and details on drawings are as follows: a. Directly over any points in the concrete tank. b. Installation Specifications. C. Tile - ANSI A108.1 d. Grout ANSI A108-10 7. Expansion Joints a. Provide expansion joints at following locations. E. Tile work more than 12'-0" in one direction 1. Where tilework abut restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings and where changes occur in backing materials. 2. All expansion, control, construction, cold and seismic joints in the structure should continue through the tilework. 3. Joints through tilework directly over structural joints must never be narrower than the structural joint. F. Joint Width 1. Joint width shall be 3/8" or same width as grout joint in quarry tile. 2. Joint width shall be 1/4" or same width as joint in ceramic wall and floor tile. G. Materials 1. Back-up strip shall be a flexible and compressible type of closed-cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber, rounded at surface to contact sealant, as shown in details and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. It must fit neatly into the joint without compacting and to such a height to allow a sealant depth of 1/2 the width of the joint. Sealant must not bond to the back-up material. 2. Silicone sealants should comply to Federal Specifications TT-S-001543a or TT-S-00230C. 3. Provide layout drawing of all expansion joint for Architect review prior to commencing with work. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete. Tile 09300-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL b. Install fluid-applied/adhesive type waterproof membrane in accordance with TCA F121. C. Mortar bed: Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.1. d. Bond coat: The following thin-set mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5. 1. Latex-portland cement. 3. Grout: Latex-portland cement. B. Interior Floor, Thin-Bed: 1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic. 2. Installation method: a. Fluid-applied/adhesive waterproof membrane installation method: TCA F122. b. Bond coat (use only over cured waterproof membrane/adhesive): Latex-portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. 3. Grout: Dry-set portland cement. 40 C. Interior Wall, Thin-Bed: 1. Tile: Glazed wall. 2. Installation method: a. Masonry: TCA W202. b. Bond coat: Latex-portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. 3. Grout: Latex-portland cement. D. Pool Tile Application 1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic. 2. Installation method: a. Tile set in accordance with T.C.A. Specifications P601-90. 3. Materials: a. Tile - ANSI A137.1 and certified by manufacturer for use in pools. b. Portland cement - ASTM C-150 Type 1. C. Sand ASTM C -144. d. Lime - ASTM C-206 Type S or ASTM C-207 Type S. e. Water - potable. f. Mortar bed (pool bottom)and natatorium floor cement, 4 parts damp sand by volume. g. Scratch coat and mortar bed (pool walls and gutter) - 1 part Portland cement, 1/2 part lime, and 4 parts dry sand or 5 parts damp sand; or 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts dry sand or 4 parts damp sand. h. Bond coat - Portland cement paste. i. Grout - ANSI A118.6, specify type, Portland Cement. . j. Metal lath - 3.4 lb. galvanized diamond mesh tied to reinforcing rods. 4. Work by Others a. Concrete tank to be finished with medium rough bush hammer finish or .. with aggregate exposed. Tile 09300-8 "' .. ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed. B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of applications indicated. C. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions as necessary to result in a watertight installation. D. Install tile under or behind equipment and fixtures. E. Carefully cut, drill, and grind tile to fit around items projecting through tile surface, so that escutcheons or cover plates conceal cut edges. F. Joint Patterns: Lay out tile according to patterns indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in a grid pattern with floor joints aligning with wall and trim joints. Install joints straight and of uniform width. G. Sealant-Filled Joints: Install expansion, control, and isolation joints where indicated on drawings. Saw-cut joints are unacceptable. 1. Expansion joint installation method: TCA EJ 171. H. Grout Installation Standards: 1. Ceramic tile grouts(sand-portland cement, dry-set,commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement): ANSI A108.10. I. Stone Thresholds: Install at locations indicated, with same setting material as adjacent field tile. 1. Install with thinset mortar where thick mortar bed would be exposed above adjacent floor finish. J. Edge Strips: Install where indicated and where exposed edge of tile meets other finishes flush with top of tile. 3.04 TILE APPLICATIONS A. Interior Floor, Thick-Bed: (Shower Rooms) 1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic. 2. Installation method: a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F112. ; ► Tile 09300-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2.06 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A 118.6. 1. Colors: Selected by Architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: One-component dry grout mix, field-mixed with water; or two-component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field-mixed; '° complying with ANSI A118.6. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Colors: Selected by Architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Edge strips; fabricated from the following material with 1/8 inch wide exposed edge, and means for securing strip to substrate: 1. Zinc alloy. B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to file manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. 2.08 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mix mortar and grout to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's mixing procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION an 3.01 EXAIVIINATION A. Verify with the installer that substrate areas where file is to be installed have been prepared correctly, and that all backing materials have been installed. Correct , unacceptable conditions before start of tile work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Factory-Blending: Before start of installation verify that file with an anticipated range of colors has been correctly blended to achieve a uniform color range from file package to tile package. Tile 09300-6 !? ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503. 1. White, honed marble; Marble Institute of America Group "A." 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: One-component dry grout mix, field-mixed with water; or two-component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field-mixed; complying with ANSI A118.4. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Shower Membrane - Use One of the Following: 1. Sheet Membrane a. Material: Minimum 30 mil, polyvinyl chloride sheet, marked every 16 to 24 inches with manufacturer's name and mil thickness. b. Form and fit in place. C. Place 30 pound, Type 30, asphalt saturated felt or 1/2 inch thick layer of sand under pan. 2. Waterproofing Membrane a. Liquid rubber and powdered, job mixed,c old-applied with reinforcing fabric, seamless, trowel applied. b. Service Life - minimum 10 years. C. Tensile Strength - 2000 pounds per linear foot. d. Compressive Strength - 2000 psi. e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete International, Model 301/335. 2. Bolardi Products, Model Elastiment 300. 3. American Olean, Model Tile Tile. B. Waterproofing Admixture: 1. Latex mortar additive for factory prepared grout. 2. Service Life - Minimum 10 years. 3. Compressive Strength - 3000 psi. 4. Bond Strength - 500 psi. 5. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Laticrete International, Model 3701. b. Bolardi Products, Model Elastiment 150. " Tile 09300-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 46 2. Nominal facial dimensions: 8 inches by 8 inches. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch, nominal. 4. Surface configuration: Plain, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Colors: Selected, after contract award, by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated, coordinated with size and coursing of adjacent flat tile, where applicable: 1. Cove base, internal, external corners. 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Dal-Tile Corporation. C. Summitville Tiles, Inc. C. Glazed Wall Tile; Flat Tile: 1. Nominal facial dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 3. Surface configuration: Plain with square edges. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. 5. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated; coordinated with indicated size and coursing of adjacent tile, where applicable: 1. Corner bead. 2. Bullnose. 3. Surface bullnose. 4. Cove. 5. Base. 6. Curb. 6. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Dal-Tile Corporation. C. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. d. International American Ceramics. e. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 2.03 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to size to provide transition between tile floor and adjacent floor surface. A Tile W300-4 ! ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1. 1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise. B. Tile Installation Materials Standard: ANSI standard referenced for setting and grouting materials. 1. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. C. Color Blending: Factory-blend tile products which have a natural color range so products taken from one box will have the same range as products from a separate box. 2.02 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory-Mounted Flat Tile: 1. Tile body: Natural clay. 2. Surface finish: Without abrasive content. 3. Nominal facial dimensions: 2 inches by 2 inches. 4. Thickness(es), nominal, where indicated: a. 1/4 inch. 5. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edge. 6. Colors: Selected by Architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. 7. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard as indicated; coordinated with adjacent flat tile, where applicable: 1. Corner bead, internal and external. 2. Cove. 3. Surface bullnose. 8. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Dal-Tile Corporation. C. United States Ceramic Tile Company. d. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Company. B. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Square-edged flat tile: 1. Surface finish: Slip-resistant with abrasive surface. Tile 09300-3 A ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Written product information which demonstrates materials to be used on the project comply with contract documents. , B. Samples - Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color selection boards of actual tile materials including a complete selection of available tile colors and finishes for each tile type indicated. Include samples of accessory materials requiring color selection. C. Qualifications Documentation: Written confirmation that companies executing work in this section comply with experience requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Source: Furnish each type, finish, and color of tile product and accessory materials from a single supplier. B. Installer: A company with not less than 10 installations of tile work similar in size and complexity to the work of this project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store tile products and setting materials in manufacturer's sealed . , packages. Protect material from damage and store in dry location. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Provide temperatures in tiled areas during installation and after completion as required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions, but not less than 50 degrees F. B. If necessary to use temporary heaters, vent units to exterior to protect tile work from carbon dioxide accumulation. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver supply of maintenance materials to the Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from same lot as materials installed, and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. 1. Furnish not less than 5 5 percent of total product installed maintenance stock for each type, color, pattern, and size of tile product installed. + Tile 09300-2 "" ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL *• SECTION 09300 - TILE (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: �+ 1. Floor Tile, unglazed ceramic mosaic tile and quarry tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Pool tile, including lane numbers and other markings. 4. Marble Thresholds 5. Floor & wall tile trim, glazed and unglazed. B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealers: Division 7. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.1-1985 -- American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement Mortar; 1985. B ANSI A108.5-1985 -- Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1985. C. ANSI A108.10-1985 -- Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1985. D. ANSI A118.4-1985 -- American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1985. E. ANSI A118.6-1985 -- American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts; 1985. F. ANSI A137.1-1988 -- American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 1988. G. ASTM C 503-89 -- Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior); 1989. H. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA) 1992. Tile 09300-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.07 CLEANING G. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating. �u END OF SECTION 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3. Install moisture-resistant gypsum backing board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for installation, including minimum clearances and sealing of penetrations and edges. Do not install water-resistant backing board on ceilings or over vapor retarders. , 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Corner Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omission at specific locations. C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise would be exposed. 3.06 FINISHING A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Do not mix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by ..w manufacturer. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish, except where indicated otherwise on the drawings: 1. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose. 1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas roughened by sanding process. D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound. Gypsum Board Systems 09260-8 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for adequate support of wall-mounted items installed as work of other sections. D. Wall Furring: 1. General: Install wall furring members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ' a. Spacing: As permitted by ASTM C 754 for thickness of gypsum board. 2. On solid walls, install furring members vertically. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints. 2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near center of ceiling area. 3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. 4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards. 5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. 6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges at right angles to framing members in non-fire-rated construction may be left unsupported. 7. In double-layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. 8. In double-layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. E. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring: 1. Single-layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment. a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum board is attached to open end of stud flange first. 2. For fire-rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the tested assembly. F. Installation of Backing Board: 1. At locations indicated for double-layer gypsum board, backing board may be installed as base layer. 2. At "wet" locations such as shower stalls and tub surrounds, install moisture-resistant gypsum backing board. Gypsum Board Systems 09260-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4W 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 except where exceeded by other requirements. A, B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength of hanger can be achieved. a. Install ceiling channels at spacing indicated or required, but not greater than permitted by ASTM C 754. 2. Secure furring members by means of screws, clips, or wire ties, as appropriate to substrate. Space furring members as follows: a. As permitted by ASTM C 754 for span of furring member and thickness 406 of gypsum board. 3. Grid suspension system: Secure perimeter angles to walls at designated ceiling height. Install hangers at 48 inches on center along main beams spaced at 48 inches on center; secure cross-furring members to main beams and perimeter low angles at the following spacing: a. As permitted by ASTM C 754 for thickness of gypsum board. 4. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, or to a higher tolerance if required by specific project conditions. 5. Level soffits to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, or to a higher tolerance if required by specific project conditions. 6. Reinforce openings and interruptions in horizontal framing system with additional furring channels. Ensure that entire suspension system is laterally braced. 7. Install additional bracing at exterior soffits as indicated, or as required to resist wind uplift. C. Steel Studs: 1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: a. Stud spacing: As permitted by ASTM C 754 for partition height and for thickness of gypsum board. 01M 2. Bulkhead partitions: Extend studs as indicated above ceiling height to underside of floor or roof construction. 3. Partial height partitions: Extend studs to height indicated, bracing as required to assure stability. Gypsum Board Systems 09260.6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2.03 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions. B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper type. C. Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type, for the following applications: 1. Exterior use: Prefilling and topping. Ok 2. Interior use: a. Taping and prefilling. D. Joint Compound: Vinyl-based ready-mixed type for interior use, and as follows: 1. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping compound. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum products. B. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Exterior applications: Cadmium-plated. C. Sealing: At water-resistant gypsum backing board, provide Type I organic adhesive per ANSI A 136.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation of work of this section. Gypsum Board Systems 09260-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL �. 3. C-shaped studs, in locations indicated. G. Furring Fasteners/Connectors: Manufacturer's recommended system for specific application indicated, complying with ASTM C 754. H. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Dale/Incur. 2. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 3. USG Corporation. 4. Georgia-Pacific 5. Flintkote 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available. 1. Fire-resistant type(Type X or equivalent), where required for fire-resistant rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, except as otherwise shown. B. Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 442 backing board or ASTM C 36 wallboard; .w maximum lengths available. C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630; maximum lengths «M available. 1. Fire-resistant type(Type X or equivalent), where required for fire-resistant rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Square, for installation without joint treatment. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, except as otherwise shown. D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 79; maximum lengths available. 1. Type: Fire-resistant (Type X or equivalent) where required for fire-resistant rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Square, (vertical application), V-Shaped (horizontal application). 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch except as otherwise shown. E. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 2. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 3. USG Corporation. .,. Gypsum Board Systems 09260-4 "` ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL damage to ends and edges. D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, 0 distortion, or other mechanical damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Maintain temperature in areas of installation between 50 and 70 degrees F for at least 24 hours before installation begins and for not less than 48 hours after joint finishing has been completed. B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent excessively fast drying of joint compound. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated. 1. Maximum deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per square foot. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 40 1. Nominal depths: As indicated on drawings. C. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel, with rust-inhibitive 00 finish. D. Grid Suspension System: Manufactured steel ceiling suspension system with 0 interlocking components, complying with requirements of ASTM C 645. E. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 0 1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 8 gage wire. 2. Furring channel ties: Minimum 18 gage wire. F. Furring Members: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 1. Hat-shaped except as otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated as "resilient" or "acoustical," or where required for STC ratings indicated, provide manufacturer's special type designed for attachment by one flange for reduced sound transmission. 09260-3 Gypsum Board Systems ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ' H. ASTM C 754-88 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum; 1988. I. ASTM C 840-88 -- Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 1988. J. ASTM C 79 -- Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Sheathing; 1992. K. ASTM C 1002-89 -- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases; 1989. L. ASTM E 119-88--Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 1988. M. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1992. N. Gypsum Construction Handbook; USG Corporation; 1992. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for systems required, including installation instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements. .® 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire-rated assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies as listed in the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory." B. Al fabrication and erection of metal framing components shall be done by a specialist who has not less than five (5) years experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. WX C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or Gypsum Board Systems 09260-2 1W ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal support systems. 2. Steel stud framing of exterior building fascia and overhangs. 3. Steel framing components for suspended gypsum drywall ceilings. 4. Steel framing components for walls, partitions, fascias, soffits and overhangs interior/exterior. 5. Gypsum wallboard. 6. Exterior gypsum sheathing for fascia/soffits. 0• 7. Water-resistant gypsum backing board. 8. Drywall finishing. to B. Related Sections: 1. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. 2. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A136.1-1985 -- American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 1985. B. ASTM A 641-92 --Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 1992. C. ASTM C 36-92 -- Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1992. D. ASTM C 442-92-- Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard; 1992. E. ASTM C 475-89 -- Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 1989. F. ASTM C 630-92 -- Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing 00 Board; 1992. G. ASTM C 645-88 -- Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board; 1988. Gypsum Board Systems 09260-1 �, HvAG HI01A NORTI4JEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HIOIB SOUTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HIM SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR om HIM NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR H2O1 DETAILS H2O2 HVAC SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL EI01A NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EI01B 50UTHUJE5T LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E1010 NORTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E201A NORTHWEST POUTER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2015 50UTWM5T POMR 4 5YSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER A SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201D NORTHEAST POWER t SY5TEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A PGU,ER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOCR an E301 DIAGRX'15 E401 SITE ELECTRICAL �w A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS ,4415 POOL SECTIONS ... A41ro POOL FILTRATION DETAILS A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS Afo01 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A603 PLAN DETAILS Aro04 PLAN DETAILS A&05 PLAN DETAILS A&O& ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS AroOl ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A&06 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS 4w 4,101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS ASOIA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR ASOIB REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR �. A601C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR ASOID REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILNG PLAN - SECOND FLOOR no so EQU!PP'IENT EQI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT 4m E,23 EQUIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT E05 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION FI01A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART i COMILNITY) F1015 FOLINDATION PLAN - 50UTWWE5T(LIBRARY t ADMINISTRATION) F101C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST(CAFETORIU l) FI01D FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST(GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL •• 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART i COMP9 LAITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMNG PLAN 52015 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY i ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 53010 SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORP M)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 53010 NORTHEAST - (GYI A51UM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMIWj DETAILS we 5502 FRAMING DETAILS PLUM15ING PIOIA NORTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P10115 SOUTHWEST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PIOIC SOUTHEAST PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST RACR P101D NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLITIBNG SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS -- COVER SHEET Ca01 GENERAL INFOWATION SYMBOLOGY,DWG. LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LXOI SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 51TE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. 1-101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN 1-501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL ! ' L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL 1-503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L&01 SITE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L602 SITE DETAILS, STORM,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL RI01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS RI02 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS PHI01 PHASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITICN PLANS 15T FLOOR AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 -DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF AD04 DE!",CLITICN WALL SECTIONS A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART t COMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) A101C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETORIUM) A101D FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) AI02 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN AI04 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ■* A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20& DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS u A201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws ! " (Ter.Ed.) Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. OF B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of Northampton in the ON amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings: END OF SECTION 08800 Glazing 08800-9 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .w .o 3. Use primer where required for proper adhesion. 4. Tool sealant, eliminating air pockets, with a definite slope away from glazing. D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement. 1. Install so they fit tightly at corners, allowing for stretch during installation. 2. Do not use joints in gaskets, except at corners. 3. Miter-cut corners and seal joint with sealant. 4. Install gaskets so they protrude slightly past face of framing. E. Structural Adhesive Glazing: Perform glazing in strict accordance with instructions of structural glazing adhesive manufacturer and additional requirements elsewhere in the contract documents. F. Lock-Strip Gasket Glazing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .A A. Immediately after installing glazing in frames, apply warning tape or bands across opening without touching glazing. oft B. Do not apply tape or labels to glazing; remove temporary labels. C. Protect glazing during subsequent construction operations; remove dirt, contaminants, staining agents and other deposits promptly using manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1. Inspect glazing below and near exterior concrete and masonry frequently but not less than monthly. 2. Clean off excess sealants as work progresses using methods which will not damage glazing. D. Replace glazing that is damaged. E. Wash both sides of glazing, using manufacturer's recommended procedures, not more than 4 days before inspection for substantial completion. 3.3 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.4 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS Glazing 08800-8 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine frames and rabbets in which glazing is to be installed for conditions that could be detrimental to the longevity of the glazing. In particular, check for conditions that would void the manufacturer's warranty. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive glazing just before installation of glazing. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL C. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing +*' Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation. E. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance or diminish appearance. F. Install glass so that visual characteristics, such as pattern, bow, and roll wave distortion, are uniform. 3.1 GLAZING IN FRAMES A. Permanently adhere setting and edge blocks to frame. B. Do not block weep holes. C. Sealants: 1. Remove applied coatings from surfaces, unless such coatings have been tested ' to show acceptable adhesion and compatibility. 2. Use continuous spacers. a. Exception: For lights of less than 100 united inches, non-continuous spacers may be used, with backer rods to form proper sealant shape. �. Glazing 08800-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure, without air pockets or contaminants between plies. 1. Interlayer for all-glass units: Polyvinyl butyryl sheet, specifically designed for lamination and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual properties under installed conditions. .�. D. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8. 1.. Fire-resistance rated where indicated. .. 2.04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact. B. Exterior Glazing Sealant: Non-acid curing silicone complying with ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Type S or M, Class 25, Uses NT, A, and G. �** 1. Demonstrate compatibility and adhesion by preconstruction testing. 2. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Interior Glazing Sealant: Clear, non-sag silicone sealant. D. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions complying with ASTM C 542, with zipper lock strips. 1. Fabricate with molded corners. 2. Color: Black. .� 3. Shape and size: Manufacturer's standard. E. Dense Compression Gaskets: Preformed EPDM, complying with ASTM C 864. 1. Select style and size so that soft gasket will be compressed at least 25 percent when glazing is fully installed. F. Soft Compression Gaskets: Black, preformed closed-cell neoprene, complying with ASTM C 509, Type II; shape and density to maintain seal. G. Glazing Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone. 1. Setting blocks: 80 to 90 Shore A hardness. 2. Spacers: As required to provide face and edge clearances recommended by FGMA "Glazing Manual," unless greater clearances are recommended by glazing manufacturer. H. Backer Rods: Flexible, nonabsorbent, compressible polyurethane foam, either open-cell or non-gassing closed-cell, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; preformed to appropriate size and shape. .. Glazing 08800-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2. Thickness of plies: 5 mm. 3. All plies: Heat-strengthened float glass. 4. Color: a. Outer ply: Clear. b. Inner ply: Clear. 5. Interlayer thickness: 0.015 inch. 6. Light transmittance: 78 percent (daylight). 7. Shading coefficient: 0.95. 8. Acceptable glazing methods: a. Sealant, both sides. b. Compression gaskets, both sides. C. Sealant one side, compression gasket other side. d. Structural adhesive glazed. e. Lock-strip gasket glazed. 9. All exterior doors. E. Glass Type S - 4: Transparent Mirror Glass 1. Nominal thickness: 1/4 inch 2. Glass Substrate: Grey 3. All plies: Laminated with coated side out. 4. Visible transmittance: 12% 5. Visible reflectance: 60% 6. Recommended light ratio (subject side) 10:1 (observer side) 7. Mirror coating - subject side. 8. At Gym Officer 1153 & 1157 - Windows toward Gymnasium. 2.03 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory-assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers forming air-tight, dehydrated air space(s). 1. ASTM E 774, Class A. 2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Exception: For structural adhesive glazed units use only a dual seal system, using materials determined by structural adhesive manufacturer to be compatible with structural adhesive. 4. Spacer corner construction: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Drying agent: Manufacturer's standard. �,. B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Heat-strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I. 10. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I. a. Tong marks are not permitted on any piece. '* Glazing 08800-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL "m go Manufacturer's standard. 4. Spacer Material; Aluminum. 5. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard;either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 6. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard. 7. All exterior insulated window glazing to be Low Emissivity Coated Glass. Provide clear, non-reflective transparent soft coat (sputter coat) silver metallic coating on number surface of insulating glass units to meet the minimum requirements: Coating shall impact to clear glass 48% visible light transmittance with 16% reflectance, V-valve of 0.30 and a shading coefficient of .44. Coating shall be equal to VEI-55, as manufactured by Viracon, or approved equal. 2. Exterior pane: Transparent float glass, fully tempered. a. Color: Clear. 3. Interior pane: Transparent float glass, fully tempered. a. Color: Clear. 4. Acceptable glazing methods: �^ a. Sealant, both sides. b. Compression gaskets, both sides. C. Sealant one side, compression gasket other side. d. Structural adhesive glazed. 5. All aluminum entrances, side lights, transcoms, etc. C. Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass. 1. Fire-resistance rated. 2. Product: "Square Mesh"; ASAHI Co.,Inc. 3. Acceptable glazing methods: a. Sealant, both sides. b. Compression gaskets, both sides. C. Sealant one side, compression gasket other side. d. Structural adhesive glazed. 4. All labelled doors, all door sidelights and transoms of cross corridor doors, all stair hall doors, and all doors leading from corridors. D. Glass Type S - 2 : Float glass. " 1. Fully tempered. 2. Color: Clear. 3. Acceptable glazing methods: a. Sealant, both sides. b. Compression gaskets, both sides. w. C. Sealant one side, compression gasket other side. d. Structural adhesive glazed. e. Lock-strip gasket glazed. 4. All remaining openings to be glazed. E. Glass Type S - 3 : Laminated glass. 1. Two-ply. Glazing 08800-4 0 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4W wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost. B. Install bulk sealants only at air and substrate temperatures above 40 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Manufacturers - General: 1. Obtain materials from only one manufacturer or fabricator for each type; obtain tinted primary glass (if any) used for each type from only one manufacturer. 2. Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be considered for substitution. B. Manufacturers: +�* 1. Insulating glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. HGP Industries, Inc. C. Viracon, Inc. d. Libby Owens Ford,Inc. 2. Wired glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Any manufacturer of UL listed wired glass. 2.02 GLASS TYPES A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated. 1. Select products to comply with performance requirements indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Interior glass thickness: 6 millimeter (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fabricate glass with bite and edge clearance dimensions, including tolerances, as recommended by manufacturer and FGMA "Glazing Manual." 5. Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering. 6. Cut or drill holes in laminated units. B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units. �r 1. Product: "TWINDOW IG UNIT";PPG Industries,Inc., or approved equal. 1. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4" 2. Air Space: 1/2" 3. Sealing System: Glazing 08800-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am no conditions, deflections, and breakage probability, in accordance with that manufacturer's recommendations. am B. Deterioration includes: 1. For insulating glass: op a. Moisture or dirt between panes. b. Development of condensation between panes. C. Damage to internal coating, if any. d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure. 2. For laminated glass: Development of visible delamination. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data, describing product characteristics, installation instructions and recommendations, and maintenance procedures. B. Samples of Glass: 12-inch-square samples, of: •. 1. All glass types. C. Certification by Contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass '■�' thickness and heat treatment have been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural performance requirements; provide for all exterior glass furnished by manufacturer other than the one specified as the basis of design. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 00 A. Standard for Fire-Resistance Rated Glass: ASTM E 163; each piece labeled by: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). .. B. Sealed Insulating Units for Structural Adhesive Glazing: Perform testing, or provide samples to entity performing testing, to demonstrate compatibility between seal materials and structural adhesive; see additional requirements in framing system ON section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING """ A. Protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; specifically, avoid damage to glass edges; prevent damage due to temperature changes, sunlight, "o and moisture. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS No A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install glazing when either air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by manufacturer or when substrate is No Glazing 08800-2 .o ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08800 - GLAZING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithic glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing gaskets. 4. Glazing sealants. 5. Glazing accessories. B. Types of work in this section include work for: 1. Interior windows. 2. Exterior storefront. �. 3. Aluminum entrances. 4. Exterior doors. 5. Interior doors. C. Related Sections: 1. Aluminum Entrances: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Shading Coefficient: Fraction of total solar energy transmitted when compared to that transmitted by 3 mm clear glass. B. Light Transmittance: Percent of visible daylight transmitted, unless otherwise indicated. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ern A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration. 1. Design to accommodate thermal movement resulting from: a. Air temperature range of 120 degrees F. b. Material temperature range of 180 degrees F. 2. Basis of design: Glass has been selected in accordance with the recommendations of PPG Industries,Inc. for wind load design; when a different manufacturer's products are used, provide glass selected for equivalent loading w Glazing 08800-1 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL HW-37 1 pair butts 1 lock UT5251 (ANSI F 40 x 3;" STK) Essex Design 1 kick plate 1 stop 3 silencers HW-3 8 3 D. A. Hinge 3029 - 6" 2 push plates 2 armor plates 36" high x 35" wide 1 pile astragal 369AW HW-39 1 pair butts wo 1 lock UT5255 (ANSI F 42 x 34 " STK ) Essex Design 1 door closer 4111 -CUSH 1 kick plate •m 1 stop 3 silencers WAR HW-40 1 pair butts 1 lock UT5210 (ANSI F 36 x 31, " STK) Essex Design 1 stop 3 silencers HW-41 1 lock - function F-86 x ASA STK Balance of hardware existing HW-4 2 1 lock - function F44 Balance of hardware existing HW-43 1 pair butts 1 lock - function F37 1 door stop 3 silencers MW 4W FINISH HARDWARE 08710-16 MW ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 40 HW-31 ( Pair of doors and single door) 4 pairs butts 1 lock - function F05 ( single door ) 1 mortise deadlock DL3060 x ANSI STK (active leaf of pair) 2 flush bolts ( inactive leaf of pair) 3 0 . H . holders DH5202 2 door pulls (pair of doors ) 5 silencers ( 3 on single door - 2 on pair ) HW-32 1 continuous hinge 1 lock - function F13 1 door closer 4111 -H-CUSH 1 armor plate 36" high x 40" wide - US32D 1 lock guard ± 1 threshold 1 weatherstrip ,0 HW-33 p 1 11 r . butts FBB 168 - 4;1 x 4; - 26D 1 door closer 4111 -H-CUSH - AL 1 door pull 1 armor plate 36" high x 40" wide - US32D 3 silencers so HW-34 11, butts 1 deadlock DL 3017 1 door closer 4011 of 1 push plate 1 door pull 1 kick plate 1 stop 1 threshold 1 weatherstrip ' HW-3 5 1 continuous hinge 1 lock - function F21 1 door closer 4111 -H-CUSH 1 lock guard 1 threshold 1 weatherstrip HW-36 1 pair butts 1 lock - function F21 1 door closer 4011 1 threshold 1 weatherstrip FINISH HARDWARE 08710-15 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K.MIDDLE SCHOOL HW-26 3 pairs butts 1 lock - function F05 1 door closer 4111 -ICUSH (active leaf ) w 2 flush plates 2 kick plates 1 soundproof 1 astragal 357DR (mount push side inactive door) HW-2 7 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827L-F 2 door closers 4111 -CUSH 2 kick plates °A 1 threshold 2 silencers HW-28 3 pairs butts 1 lock - function F01 1 door closer 4111 ( active leaf ) '° 2 automatic flush bolts 359B 2 stops 2 silencers ** HW-29 1 pair butts ,M 1 lock - function F05 1 door closer 4111 1 kick plate 1 door alarm 1 stop 3 silencers HW-30 15 it butts 1 lock - function F05 1 door closer 4111 -CUSH 1 kick plate 1 soundproof FINISH HARDWARE 08710-14 .m ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.I . MIDDLE SCHOOL HW-20 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827L 2 door closers 4111 -H-CUSH 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers HW-21 ON 3 pairs butts 1 lock - function 05 2 flush bolts 1 weatherstrip 1 threshold 1 astragal HW-22 1 pair butts 1 lock - function F07 1 door closer 4111 3 silencers HW-23 1i butts 1 lock - function FO1 1 door closer 4111 on 1 kick plate 1 stop 3 silencers HW-24 11 butts 1: lock - function FO1 wr 1 door closer 4111 - 180° 1 kick plate 1 wall magnet SEM 840 P" 3 silencers HW-25 1 pair butts 40 1 lock - function F01 1 stop 1 soundproof FINISH HARDWARE 08710-13 on ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K.RIDDLE SCHOOL HW-14 2 continuous hinges 2 exit devices 9827-EO 2 closers 4111 -H-CUSH 2 kick plates 1 weatherstrip 1 astragal 1 threshold HW-1 5 3 pairs butts 2 door closers 4111 -CUSH 2 push plates 2 door pulls 2 kick plates 2 silencers HW-16 1 'j butts 1 lock - function 05 1 stop 3 silencers F.1w- 1 i �s TIT- air butts 1 lock - function 04 1 stop ... 3 silencers HW-18 weR 3 pairs butts 1 lock - function 05 2 flush bolts 1 astragal *" 2 door stops 2 silencers HW-19 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827-F-EO 2 closers 4111 -CUSH 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers ., FINISH HARDWARE 08710-12 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K.MIDDLE SCHOOL HW-8 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827E 2 door closers 4110SE 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers HW-9 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827L-F-BE 2 door closers 4110SE 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers ` HW-1 0 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827L-F-BE 2 door closers 4110SE 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers i alarm HW-11 3 pairs butts 2 door closers 4110SE 2 push plates 2 door pulls 2 kick plates 2 silencers go HW-1 2 3 pairs butts 2 exit devices 9827L-F 2 door closers 4110SE 2 kick plates 1 threshold 2 silencers HW-13 2 continuous hinges 2 exit devices CD9827-L 2 door closers 4111-H-CUSH 2 kick plates 1 weatherstrip 1 astragal 1 threshold FINISH HARDWARE 08710-11 ow ADDITION%RENOVATIONS - J.F.K, MIDDLE SCHOOL 3.03 SCHEDULE ... 24 . HARDWARE SETS Hardware sets as listed on the Door Schedule drawings shall be as follows : HW-1 All hardware by door supplier .�. HW-2 1 lock cylinder to fit hardware furnished by door supplier. ,. HW-3 1 pair butts 1 lock - function E6090 (mount 60" above finished floor) 1 door closer 4111 1 push plate 1 door pull 1 kick plate 1 door stop 3 silencers HW-4 TIT air butts 1 lock - function. F02 1 door stop 3 silencers HW-5 1 pair butts 1 lock - function F01 1 door stop 3 silencers HW-6 1 pair butts 1 lock - function F05 1 door closer 4111 -CUSH 1 kick plate 3 silencers HW-7 3 pairs butts 2 sentronic closers 4110SE 2 push plates 2 door pulls 2 kick plates 2 silencers FINISH HARDWARE 08710-10 00 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL door width. Threshold is to be trimmed to fit by installer. B. Thresholds for labelled corridor and stair doors shall be type 172A, as manufactured by PEMKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, or equal and shall function as the bottom strike for exit devices. 2.21 LOCK GUARDS A. Lock guards shall be type 1625 by PRECISION, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. 10 B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, 10 coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. ui. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-9 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL devices they shall be 5" less than door width. B. Kick plates used on the interior of toilets shall be 18 gauge stainless steel, US32D finish. 2.15 DOOR STOPS ow A. Wherever possible, door stops shall be the wall type with combination fastener type 402 as manufactured by H.B. IVES or equal. Where wall type cannot be effectively used, furnish floor type 436, or equal. B. Door stops and holders as required shall be type 495 as manufactured by H.B. IVES, or equal. 2.16 DOOR ALARMS A. Door alarms shall be Detex EA500 with two (2) door switches as manufactured by DETEX CORPORATION, or equal. Lock cylinders for alarms shall be furnished by hardware supplier. 2.17 ASTRANGALS A. Where astrangals are called for on pairs of storage doors they shall be type 357D- 84". as manufactured by PEMKO MFG. CO., or equal and shall be supplied to the push side of the inactive leaf on doors opening in and shall be applied to the pull side of the active leaf on doors opening out. Where astrangals are required on exterior doors they shall consist of one (1) type 351D and one(1) type 351DW as manufactured by PEMKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, or equal. 2.18 SOUNDPROOFING A. Soundproofing, where called for, shall consist of type 319DN applied to frame head and jambs with automatic door bottom 412DN applied to bottom of door. Catalog numbers are from PEMKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, or equal. 2.19 WEATHERSTRIP A. Weatherstrip for exterior doors shall be type 303DS for head and jambs with 315 DN door sweep at door bottom as manufactured by PEMKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, or equal. A. 2.20 THRESHOLD A. Threshold for all exterior doors shall be type 200-5AV, as manufactured by .� PEMKO MANUFACTURING COMPANY, or equal and shall be 4" longer than FINISH HARDWARE 08710-8 i!t ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL NO 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS ON A. All door closers shall have cast iron bodies with malleable iron arms equal to Series 4000 as manufactured by LCN CLOSERS, INC. or equal, type and function as listed in hardware sets. B. The hardware supplier or his manufacturers representative must inspect all closers for proper installation and adjust all closers for proper operation prior to the architect's final inspection. C. All closers for hollow metal doors shall be furnished with thru bolts to fasten the closer in the door. D. Closers for corridor doors shall be sentronic type 41 10S to hold open at 90o and be connected to the smoke alarm system by the electrician. This supplier shall verify the proper voltage with the electrical contractor. E. All closers shall have adjustable spring power and all closers for kindergarten and pre-kindergarten rooms shall be set for minimum spring power. 2.12 PUSH PLATES A. All push plates shall be wrought bronze, .050 thick, size 4" wide x 16" high. B. Push plates on corridor doors to pupils' toilets shall be .050 thick, size 20" wide x 16" high. C. All push plates shall be mounted 50" above the finished floor to the center of the .w plate. 2.13 DOOR PULLS so A. All pulls for push/pull doors shall be type 102 x 70C as manufactured by ROCKWOOD COMPANY or equal. 4• B. Pulls which occur in toilet rooms shall be stainless steel US32D. C. Pulls shall be mounted 50" above finished floor to center of pulls. D. All pulls furnished with thru bolts shall be installed with the bolt head countersunk under the push plate. 2.14 KICK PLATES A. Kick plates shall be .050 thick wrought bronze with bevelled edges and be 8" high and 2" less than door width. When used on doors with vertical rod exit FINISH HARDWARE 08710-7 air ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. The hardware supplier must tag all keys, complete all cross-file indices (using the owner's final room numbers), hang all keys in the key cabinet and explain the proper use of the key control system to the Owner. 2.06 VISUAL KEY CONTROL A. All lock cylinders shall be stamped with the keying symbol. B. All keys shall be stamped with the bitting number. 2.07 REQUIREMENTS A. All items of hardware must comply with the regulations as established by the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the Public Safety Code an the Handicap Access Requirements of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. 2.08 BUTTS A. All butt hinges shall be type FBB179 as manufactured by STANLEY WORKS or equal. B. All butt hinges shall be 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations to suit job conditions. C. All exterior hollow metal doors shall have continuous hinges type FM60OHD (dark bronze anodized) finish as manufactured by MARKAY PRODUCTS, INC, or equal. 2.09 LOCKS .0 A. All locks and latches shall be ANSI type 1000-Grade 1 mortise type with cast bronze levers and wrought brass escutcheon plate type CSM as manufactured by „o P & F CORBIN or equal. Lock function shall be as listed int he hardware sets. Where locks are required on existing doors and/or existing frames, they shall match existing door and frame preparation. .R 2.10 EXIT DEVICES No A. All exit devices for exterior hollow metal doors shall be equal to ANSI grade 1- type 2 vertical rod with pullman latch bolts at top and bottom and furnished with sex bolts. Function to be listed in the hardware sets. B. Exit devices for all labelled doors shall be furnished with sex bolts. Function to be as listed in the hardware sets. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL or use sex screw fasteners. 40 F. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 1 G. Locksets shall be heavy-duty cylindrical type Sargent Lock Co.. All locks to be master keyed to the existing Sargent system. H. Key Quantity: Furnish 2 change keys for each lock; 2 master keys for each master system; and 2 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1. Deliver permanent keys to Architect by registered mail. I. All items of hardware shall be as scheduled, with no substitutions. 2.03 FINISH A. Finish of all exposed hardware shall be US10 (dull bronze). B. Finish of al exposed hardware on the interior of all toilets and kitchen area shall be US26D (dull chrome). C. All hardware for stainless steel doors shall be of stainless steel base metal where possible. All other exposed items shall be dull chrome (US26D) finish. 2.04 KEYING A. All locks and lock cylinders shall be keyed, master-keyed, and/or grand master- keyed as directed by the architect and/or owner. B. All lock cylinders shall be construction master-keyed. C. Furnish five (5) keys per lock. D. Furnish twelve (12) master keys. E. Furnish twelve (12) grand-master keys. F. Furnish six (6) construction keys. 2.05 KEY CONTROL CABINET A. Furnish one (1) key control cabinet C300 as manufactured by LUND EQUIPMENT COMPANY or equal. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5 4M ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ow B. Responsibilities of Contractor: 1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for Finish Hardware in same manner as submittals for other work. 2. Construction Schedule: cooperate with Finish Hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for submittals and delivery of templates and finish hardware. 3. Coordination: Coordinate finish hardware with other work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier. 4. Product Handling: Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the .� site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. Any hardware items lost, damaged or stolen after being accepted by Contractor shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. „ B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A 156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do .. not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, .. generally prepared for machine screw installation. D. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where thru-bolt installations are required for fire rated doors. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt FINISH HARDWARE 087104 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL r 1. All items of hardware shall be packed separately and shall be complete with all trimmings and fasteners for the particular items and shall be labelled and numbered so they may be readily identified and checked from the hardware schedule. 2. All locks shall be marked with the architectural door number to ensure the correct key control. E. General Contractor shall provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RESPONSIBILITY A. Responsibilities of Finish Hardware Supplier: 1. Submittals: Provide through Contractor required Final Hardware Schedule as specified in Part 1 - General of this section, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor at earliest possible date of estimated times and dates to process submittals, to furnish templates, to „w deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing Finish Hardware for purposes of including in construction progress schedule and then comply with this schedule. 3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations. 4. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory hardware as specified in Part 1 - General of this section. 5. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of hardware selection, furnish proper types, finishes, and quantities of finish hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools; and furnish or replace any items of finish hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items, at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials. 6. Verify voltage for Sentronic closers and smoke detectors. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3 .m ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL aw organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc., contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project .b construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. .� B. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, .w check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of hardware, is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. .� C. Delivery: 1. All hardware shall be delivered promptly in such manner and at such time as required to avoid delay in the execution of the work. D. Packing: FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2 ADDITION/RENOVATIONS - J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 INTENT A. The General Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment required for the installation of finish hardware to be furnished in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing and delivering to the site, all finish hardware required to complete the work including butts, locks, closers, exit devices, door trim, and all related items complete with all fasteners. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings, schedules or so specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 ,� HvAC W101A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H1015 SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H101C SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1-11010 NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H101A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR H2O1 DETAILS H2O2 HvA,G 5C14EDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN ELECTRICAL E101A NORTHWEST LKsHTNCs PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101B SOUTHEA5T LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101C SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101D NORTHEAST LIGHTNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E102A LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E2" NORTHWE5T POUTER i SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2015 SOUTHWEST POUTER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POUTER i SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201D NORTHEA5T POWER l SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER = SYSTEMS PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAMS E401 SITE ELECTRICAL A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A41(o POOL FILTRATION DETAILS *► A501 NEW STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A601 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A602 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A603 PLAN DETAILS A604 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS A60(o ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A601 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A606 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A-101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS " A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A801A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A8015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801C: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A802 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT .� EQI EQUIPMENT E02 ECUIPMENT EM EQUIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION F101A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHWEST (ART 4 CG1M INITY) F101B FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY 4 ADMINISTRATION) F101C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST (CAFETORIUM) FI01D FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYI"1r1451LM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 52018 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY 4 ADMIN)LOU) ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5301- SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN .�. 5301D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE $501 FRAMING DETAILS $502 FRAMING DETAILS no PLUMBING PI01A NORTHWEST PLLMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1010115 SOUTHWEST FLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLUOR PI01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR MID NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR PI02A PLLMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLLMBNG SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLU 15M DETAILS P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLAN5 4 DETAILS COVER SHEET Cs01 GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,DWG.LIST LANCSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 1-X01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. L101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN 1-501 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL 1-502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L&V SITE DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L&02 SITE DETAILS,STOW,MISC. ARCHITECTURAL RI01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS R102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION, SYMBOLS FI4101 PHASING PLAN AD01A DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR AD02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR AD03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF A004 DEMCLITION WALL 5ECT!ON5 A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART 4 COMMUNITY) A1015 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMINISTRATION) A101C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETORIUM) A101D FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) AI02 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AI03 ROOF PLAN A104 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A20& DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS 4201 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS A220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.05 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter.Ed.), Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the CITY OF NORTHAMPTON, in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. C. Each sub-bid submitted for the work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract Documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the following drawings: END OF SECTION 08521 Aluminum Windows 08521-8 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 3. Frame construction: Minimum wall thickness of 0.040-inch, with joints mitered or coped and fastened with concealed fasteners. 4. Anchor screen fabric with removable plastic or rubber splines. 5. Finish: To match window. 6. Screen Fabric: Aluminum wire fabric complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII. a. Mesh size: 18 by 14, 18 by 16, or 18 by 18. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXANIINATION A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions exist. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square. C. Support properly and securely anchor. D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals. E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated. G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated. H. Coordinate with wall-flashing installation. I. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable ventilators/sash and hardware to operate smoothly and close tightly. 3.04 ALTERNATES Aluminum Windows 08521-7 ADDITIONSIRENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL oft an F. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials. 1. For nonworking, metal-to-metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant • conforming to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800. 2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application. 3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide ." products specified in Division 7. 4. For glazing: Provide products specified elsewhere. G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive coating. H. Glazing: Glass shall be factory glazed using marine vinyl. Standard factory glazing shall be 1" overall using 1/4" each pane with 1/2" air space, exterior pane of fully tempered clear float glass and interior pane of fully tempered clear float glass. All insulated glass shall be CBA SIGMA rated. All exterior insulated window glazing to be Low Emissivity Coated Glass. Provide clear, non-reflective transparent soft coat (sputter coat) silver metallic coating on number 2 surface of insulating glass units to meet the following minimum requirements: Coating shall impact to clear glass 48% visible light transmittance with 16% reflectance, V-Value of 0.30 and a shading coefficient of .44. Coating shall be equal to VE1-55 as manufactured by Viracon, or approved equal. 1. Trim members include glazing beads, screen frames, weatherstrip retainers, panning, flashing and similar items, not functioning as prime structural members. Provide units of extruded aluminum, formed sheet aluminum, or stainless steel. 2.05 HARDWARE A. General: Corrosion-resistant material. B. Counterbalances: Block-and-tackle type complying with AAMA 902.2; concealed in jamb. C. Limit Device: To prevent operation of ventilator/sash beyond limits indicated. Limiting mechanism removable by use of simple tool. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Insect Screens: Formed or extruded aluminum frames with screen fabric. 1. Design to fit tightly, but be removable, using as few exposed fasteners or latches as possible. 2. Do not use wickets for access to window-operating hardware, unless absolutely necessary; make wickets hinged or sliding, with the same type of frames as screens, and tight-fitting. Aluminum Windows 08521-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1. Style: The design is based on "8225T-P1" series; Kawneer Co. Inc. 4* 2. Glazing Method: Compression gas heat/sealant tape; glazing stops. 3. Grade: DH-HC40 4. Hardware: Furnish and install the following on each window: a. Hanging hardware shall be heavy duty 4-bar hinges conforming to AAMA 904.1. Hinges shall have a positive stop and an adjustable function shoe. b. Locking hardware, strikes, keepers and pole rings shall be cast white bronze. All hardware fasteners penetrating frame on inside plane of window shall be factory sealed with resilient non-hardening compounds. 5. Finish: Color I color anodized. a. Color and sheen: Medium Bronze 6. Insert Screens a. Provide at all operable windows. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing corrosion resistance, and as required for strength. 1. Anodized finish: a. Color anodized: Comply with AAMA 606.1 or 608.1. 1. Class I: AA-C22A42/A44 (medium matte etched chemical finish; integral or electrolytically deposited color, architectural Class I r anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except when unavoidable. 1. Hardware fasteners: Match finish of members to which they are fastened. 2. Exposed fasteners: Match finish of member being fastened. 3. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors. 4. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion-resistant material that is compatible with materials being fastened. C. Exposed Anchors: One of the following: 1. Aluminum, finished to match windows. 2. Stainless steel, 300 series. D. Concealed Anchors (one of the following): 1. Aluminum. 2. Steel, cadmium plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 766, Class 8. 3. Steel, zinc electroplated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 633. 4. Stainless steel. E. Pile Weatherstripping: Woven polypropylene, wool, or nylon pile; complying with AAMA 701. Aluminum Windows 08521-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am F. Glazing Stops: Aluminum to match windows, screwed or snapped on. 2.02 FIXED WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: Same as adjacent operating windows. B. Fixed Windows: 1. Style: Same sight line and general configuration as frames for operable units. *" 2. Glazing method: Same as for operable units. 3. Grade: F, same grade and class as operable units. 4. Finish: Same as for operable units. a. Color and sheen: Same as operable units. 2.03 HUNG & PROJECTED WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: b. EFCO Corporation. C. Graham Architectural Products Corporation. d. Milco Division/Apogee Wausau Group. e. Kawneer Co., Inc. B. Hung Windows: Vertically sliding sash, with counterbalances. 1. Style: *� a. Single-hung: The design is based on "8425T-SH/FX series";Kawneer Co.,Inc. 2. Glazing method: Compression gasket/sealant tape; glazing stops. 3. Grade: DH-HC40. 4. Counterbalances: One on each side of each operable sash. 5. Hardware: a. Locks: Cam lock on meeting rail. 1. Pole-operated cam lock on meeting rail, when lock location is over 6 feet above the floor. b. Lift handles: Manufacturer's standard. C. Pull-down handles: Manufacturer's standard. d. Provide socket or groove for pole operator on inside face of top rail. e Limit stop at 36 inches. 6. Finish: Class I color anodized. a. Color and sheen: Medium Bronze. so 7. Insect screens. a. Provide at all operable windows. ,m C. Projected Windows: Inwarding projected, hinging hardware. aw Aluminum Windows 08521-4 no ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL fabrication. Show record measurements on final Shop Drawings and coordinate with Contractor and other Sub-Trades fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units with other building components and systems. r 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which Owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include wu faulty workmanship, failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear. PART 2 - PRODUCTS �w. 2.01 WINDOWS - GENERAL A. Windows - General: Frame and ventilator/sash members of extruded aluminum, complete with all hardware, accessories, sub-frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or required; complying with AAMA 101. 1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members. B. Window Design: 1. Where glazing stops are indicated, design for reglazing without removal or + dismantling of ventilator/sash or frames. 2. Operable ventilator/sash: Design so ventilator/sash can be removed from inside. * 3. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior. 4. Where insulating glass or laminated glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate water standing in glazing channels. so 5. Provide weatherstripping on all operable ventilator/sash in exterior wall. C. Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and compatibility with other materials. D. Weatherstripping: Continuous weatherstripping at all points where frame of operable ventilator/sash or ventilator contacts frame of window. 1. Use pile weatherstripping at sliding contacts. E. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame and ventilator/sash members with concealed, structural, load-bearing, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use at least 3 years. Do not bridge thermal gap with any fasteners or hardware. Aluminum Windows 08521-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL �. 1. Elevations. 2. Cross-sections of all typical members. 3. Anchors. 4. Hardware. 5. Operators. 6. Accessories. 7. Glazing methods. 8. Sealants. D. Samples for Color Selection of Anodized Finishes: Manufacturer's standard range on aluminum sections. Submit at least 2 pieces for each color showing full range of color variation. E. Samples for Verification of Anodized Finishes: For each color, submit 12-inch long samples of extrusions. Submit at least 2 pieces for each color showing full range of color variation. V0 F. Samples of Hardware Items. G. Warranty. IM 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Methods - General: 1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration test shall precede water .� resistance test. 2. Concentrated load tests may be performed on separate ventilators/sash of identical size and design as used for air, water, and uniform load tests. 3. Test each size of each type of window. 4. Provide certified test reports containing all information called for by test method specified. B. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully assembled, and glazed. 1. Minimum size: As specified in AAMA 101. C. Air, Water, and Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. D. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS ., A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to ..r Aluminum Windows 08521-2 w ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08521 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applications: a. Individual window units, factory glazed. b. Windows in continuous horizontal runs with mullions, factory glazed. 2. Operating styles: a. Single-hung windows. C. Projected windows. b. Fixed windows. 3. Other work included: a. Sealants around perimeters of windows; exterior panning and trim as detailed on Drawings. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or deterioration. Failure includes the following: 1. Exterior assemblies: a Excessive deflection. b. Excessive water leakage. C. Excessive air infiltration. d. Failure of perimeter sealant. e. Failure of glazing. B. Performance Requirements: As specified in AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and class indicated. C. Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A" A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing, hardware, and accessories, and installation and handling recommendations. B. Test reports showing compliance with performance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following: Aluminum Windows 08521-1 HvAc HI01A NORTHWEST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HI01B SOUTWMST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 14101C SOUTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR HIM NORTHEAST HVAC PLAN - FIRST FLOOR H102A HVAC PLAN - SECOND FLOOR W2O1 DETAILS W2O2 HvX SCHEDULE AND BOILER ROOM PLAN E��craica� EVA NORTHWEST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101B 50UTHWE5T LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E101G SOUTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EIOID NORTHEAST LIGHTING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EVA LIGHTING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E20LA NORTHWEST POWER 4 5Y5TE`15 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201B SOUTHUE5T POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E201C SOUTHEAST POWER A SYSTEMS PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E2010 NORTHEAST POWER 4 SYSTEM5 PLAN - FIRST FLOOR E202A POWER 4 SYSTEMS PLAN - 5ECOND FLOOR E301 DIAGRAMS E401 51TE ELECTRICAL > no A411 WALL SECTIONS A412 WALL SECTIONS A413 WALL SECTIONS - SKYLIGHT 'w A414 ENLARGED POOL PLANS AND DETAILS A415 POOL SECTIONS A41ro POOL FILTRATICN DETAILS �* A501 NEW STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A502 EXISTING STAIR PLANS,SECTIONS AND DETAILS A601 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A&02 PLAN DETAILS - EXTERIOR WALLS A603 PLAN DETAILS Aro04 PLAN DETAILS A605 PLAN DETAILS A(o06 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS AroOl ENLARGED TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS Afo08 ENLARGED POOL AND GYM LOCKER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS A101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A'102 CASEWORK AND DETAILS A601A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A6015 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A601C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A801D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR Aa02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR EQUIPMENT EQI EQUIPMENT E02 EQUIPMENT EQ3 EQUIPMENT E04 EQUIPMENT EQ5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION F101A FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTWWEST (ART t CV"Q'il9NITY) F1016 FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHWEST (LIBRARY 4 ADMINISTRATION) F101C FOUNDATION PLAN - SOUTHEAST(CAFETORIUM) F1010 FOUNDATION PLAN - NORTHEAST (GYMNASIUM) F501 FOUNDATION DETAILS F502 POOL DETAILS AND SECTIONS r STRUCTURAL 5201A NORTHWEST - (ART 4 COMIA NITY)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN ` $2015 SOUTHWEST - (LIBRARY s ADMIN)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301A WEST - ROOF FRAMING PLAN 53010 SOUTHEAST - (CAFETORIUM)LOW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5301D NORTHEAST - (GYMNASIUM)LCW ROOF AND 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 5401 COLUMN SCHEDULE 5501 FRAMING DETAILS $502 FRAMING DETAILS " PLUMBING .. PIOIA NORr lUE5T PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR M0115 SOUTHWEST PLUMBNG PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P01C SOUTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR MID NORTHEAST PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P102A PLUMBING PLAN - SECOND FLOOR P201 PLUMBING SCHEDULE AND DETAILS P202 PLUMBING DETAILS *■ P203 PLUMBING: BOILER ROOM PLANS 4 DETAILS COVER SWEET Cs01 GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLOGY,DIXr. LIST LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE LX01 SITE SURVEY LX02 SITE SURVEY LX03 SITE SURVEY LD01 SITE PREPARATION,SITE DEMO,EROSION CNTRL. L101 SITE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SITE GRADING PLAN L301 SITE UTILITIES PLAN - STORM,SANITARY,WATER L302 517E UTILITIES PLAN - STORM L401 SITE LANDSCAPE PLAN L501 51TE DETAILS - GENERAL L502 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L503 SITE DETAILS - GENERAL L601 517E DETAILS - STORM,SANITARY,AND WATER L602 517E DETAILS,STORM,MISC. an ARCHITECTURAL RI01 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,5YMBOL5 R102 KEY PLAN - FIRE SEPARATION,SYMBOLS PNI01 PHASING PLAN 14DO1A DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD01C DEMOLITION PLANS 15T FLOOR AD01D DEMOLITION PLANS IST FLOOR ,4D02 DEMOLITION PLANS 2ND FLOOR 14D03 DEMOLITION PLANS - ROOF AD04 DEMOLITION WALL 5ECTION5 A101A FLOOR PLAN - NORTH WEST (ART 1 COMM]NITY) A101E5 FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH WEST (LIBRARY AND ADMNI5TRATION) AI01C FLOOR PLAN - SOUTH EAST (CAFETORIUM) A101D FLOOR PLAN - NORTH EAST (GYMNASIUM) AI02 FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A103 ROOF PLAN A104 ROOF - DETAILS A201 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A202 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A203 WALL TYPES A204 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE A205 HOLLOW METAL FRAME TYPES AND DETAILS A206 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS 420-1 DOOR AND FRAME DETAILS ,4220 WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A221 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DETAILS A222 WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A301 ELEVATIONS A302 ELEVATIONS A303 ELEVATIONS A304 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A305 SMALL SCALE BUILDING SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A402 WALL SECTIONS A403 WALL SECTIONS A404 WALL SECTIONS A405 WALL SECTIONS A406 WALL SECTIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS A408 WALL 5ECTION5 A40S WALL SECTIONS A410 WALL SECTIONS ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .W C. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. D. The listing of the Contract Drawings below does not limit the responsibility of the Subcontractor for determining the full extent of his work as required by all Contract documents. Work to be done under this Section is shown the following drawings: END OF SECTION 08410 Aluminum Entrances 08410-8 "` ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL instructions. F. Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers. 00 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust each operable unit for correct function and smooth, free operation and so doors close tightly. B. Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to finishes. 3.04 SWINGING DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Provide the following for each swinging aluminum door: Roton 782-112HD 1 Exit Device - CR-90 Kawneer Paneline exterior doors and G3 pulls 1 Cross rail push Kawneer Paneline interior doors and G3 pull 2 Closers 402-Ax 4020-18-LCN 2 Cylinders (Furnished under Section 08710 exterior doors 1 Threshold 200-5AV - Reese 1 Weatherstrip 1 Sill sweep strips 3.05 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, for Alternate price required. 3.06 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS «� A. Sub-bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provision of the General Laws (Ter.Ed.), Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44L, as amended. The time and place for submission of sub-bids shall be as set forth under INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. B. Each sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority must be accompanied by BID BOND, CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the CITY OF NORTHAMPTON in the amount stipulated in the INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. A SUB-BID ACCOMPANIED BY ANY OTHER FORM OF BID DEPOSIT THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, WILL BE REJECTED. Aluminum Entrances 08410-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional variation allowed. B. Framing System: Pre-cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. 2. Select members for fabrication so that adjacent anodized extruded aluminum • members do not have color or texture variation greater than half of the range indicated in the submitted samples. C. Doors: Factory-fabricate doors and factory-install all hardware except surface-mounted items. 1. Perform fabrication required for hardware before finishing. + D. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. E. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." F. Avoid damage to finishes. .� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION ,.. A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely anchor. C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. E. Install surface-mounted hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's Aluminum Entrances 08410-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL F. Hardware for Aluminum Doors: Provide all hardware as required for proper operation, in accordance with the schedule located at the end of this section. 1. Finish: To match doors. G. Mortise Lock Cylinders: Furnished elsewhere in Division 8. H. Door Closers: 4024-H x 4020-18-LCN. I. Thresholds: 200-5A- Reese. ! 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. 1. Class I color anodized finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44(nonspecular, as-fabricated mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; integral or electrolytically deposited color, architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). a. Match colors to other color anodized finishes visible from the same point of view, within color range of approved samples. B. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Exposed fasteners: Match finish of members being fastened. W a. Use exposed fasteners only for installation of hardware. b. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws. C. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.032 inch minimum. D. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High-strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. E. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. J. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. 2.01 FABRICATION Aluminum Entrances 08410-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL ~' 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the Architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. �- 3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years. 4. Glazing method: Provide for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. -� 5. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. 1. Color: Medium bronze. B. Aluminum Door Frames: See drawings; either mechanical or welded joints. 1. Finish: .� a. Class I color anodized finish. 1. Color: Medium bronze. 2.03 SWINGING DOORS A. Stile and Rail Doors: Glazed doors with tubular extruded aluminum frame members. 1. Frame joints: Either concealed mechanically fastened, using tie rods or j-bolts and reinforcing plates; or welded. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 3. Stile width: 3-1/2 inches nominal. 4. See drawings for design. 5. Glazing stops: Snap-on extruded aluminum, designed to allow replacement of glazing without disassembly of frame. Provide nonremovable exterior stops. 6. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. L Color: Medium bronze. B. Weatherstripping: 1. At fixed stops: Replaceable, compression type molded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM rubber complying with ASTM C 864 or of polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287. 2. At other edges: Replaceable woven polypropylene, wool, or nylon pile, with aluminum or nylon fabric backing, complying with AAMA 701. 3. At door bottom: Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep, continuously contacting threshold; concealed mounting. 4. Provide weatherstripping on all exterior doors. E. Silencers: Neoprene bumpers. 1. Provide on all interior doors. Aluminum Entrances 08410-4 "' P ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Where product brand names are given, the design is based on the products indicated. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amarlite Architectural Products, Inc. b. Atlas Architectural Metals, Inc. C. CMI-Cronstroms, Inc. d. Kawneer Company, Inc. e. PPG Industries, Inc. f. Tubelite Architectural Products Division/Indal, Ltd. C. Aluminum Door Frames: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amarlite Architectural Products, Inc. b. Atlas Architectural Metals, Inc. C. CMI-Cronstroms, Inc. d. Kawneer Company, Inc. e. PPG Industries, Inc. D. Glazed Aluminum Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amarlite Architectural Products, Inc. b. Atlas Architectural Metals, Inc. C. CMI-Cronstroms, Inc. d. Kawneer Company, Inc. e. PPG Industries, Inc. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Kawneer Trifab 451 Series at exterior;Kawneer Trifab 450 Series at interior. "'0 Aluminum Entrances 08410-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am E. Air Infiltration: 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area. a. Measure at 6.24 psf. F. Water Penetration: 1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psf. 1.03 SUBMITTALS .. A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. D. Samples for Color Selection of Anodized Finishes: Manufacturer's standard colors on aluminum. Submit at least 2 pieces for each color showing full range of color variation. E. Samples for Verification of Anodized Finishes: For each type and color of anodized finish, submit 12-inch-long sections of extrusions and formed sections and 6-inch-square sheets. Submit at least 2 pieces for each color showing full range of color variation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. .� B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company manufacturing products specified in this ..� section which have performed satisfactorily for a period of 5 years. E. Installer Qualifications: Storefront shall be installed by a firm that has no less than •� 5 years successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS Aluminum Entrances 08410-2 "� ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY " A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed aluminum swinging doors. 2. Aluminum door frames. 3. Aluminum framing system. B. Products Installed but Not Furnished under This Section: 1. Mortise lock cylinders: Furnished elsewhere in Division 8, but installed in this section. C. Related Sections: 1. Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. 2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Glazing sealants and gaskets: Elsewhere in Division 8. 4. Mortise cylinders: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re-radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than 1/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Use the following loads as base design value at 30 feet above ground level and adjust as specified in Massachusetts State Building Code, Exposure B. ,�. 1. Inward: 20 psf. 2. Outward: 35 psf. """"' Aluminum Entrances 08410-1 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Comply with manufacturer's directions and approved submittal information. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Test and adjust doors to operate easily and be weather sealed when closed. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean door assembly surfaces, removing dust, dirt, and grease before final acceptance. 3.05 PROTECTION A. After installation and before final acceptance, protect coiling door assembly surfaces from scratches, dents, and other damage. B. Replace parts damaged during construction before final acceptance. END OF SECTION 08332 "" Coiling Doors 08332-7 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 4. Close hood ends at surface-mounted installations. 5. Intermediate support brackets: Furnish as required for deflection-free installation. 6. Hood material: Fabricate from type, thickness and finish indicated. w. H. Manual Operators: 1. Manual push operation: am a. Overhead curtain, lift-up operation force: 25 pounds, maximum. b. Design operating mechanism to allow curtain operation to stop and start at any curtain position. am C. Where indicated, furnish lift handle and slide bolt lock on inside of bottom bar. 2. Chain hoist operator: an a. Endless steel hand chain with geared reduction unit providing curtain operation with 35 pound maximum pull. b. Design chain hoist to allow curtain to be stopped and started again at any point along the curtain's path. C. Hand chain: Steel alloy with chain holder at operator guide. 2.,0,, FABRICATION A. Door Curtain: 1. Interlocking slats continuous for entire door width; designed to resist indicated wind loads. PART 3 - EXECUTION an 3.01 EXAMINATION .m A. Examine openings to receive coiling doors. go ow B. Correct substrate conditions which could prohibit proper installation or operation before starting installation work. am 3.02 INSTALLATION Coiling Doors 08332-6 "' ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL angles. 2. Bottom bar, overhead coiling counter doors: Tubular bar; match curtain finish. a. Bottom seal: Replaceable vinyl or neoprene bumper. D. Curtain Guides (doors): 1. Construct door guides from steel angles of a size and in configuration necessary to support curtain loads. 2. Use minimum 3/16-inch-thick galvanized steel sections, with slotted holes for installation tolerance. 3. Fasten angle to substrate with minimum 3/8-inch diameter bolts at 30 inches on center maximum. 4. Support coil mechanism from top of guide rails. 5. Curtain stops: Furnish removable brackets at guide ends to prohibit curtain overrun. E. Weatherstripping: 1. Vinyl or neoprene strips. 2. Provide 1/8-inch-thick sheet weather protection fastened to coil hood. 3. Fasten 1/8-inch-thick strip to exterior face of jamb guide. 4 F. Counterbalance Mechanism: 1. Adjustable steel helical torsion spring, on a steel shaft. 2. Provide lubricated bearings for operational parts. 3. Spring barrel: Structural quality steel pipe, sized to support curtain and limit barrel deflection to 0.03 inch per span foot maximum, when curtain is fully loaded. 4. Counterbalance: Structural quality carbon steel welded or seamless pipe, sized to support curtain weight and movement, and limit barrel deflection to maximum 0.03 inch per span foot when fully loaded. 5. Spring balance: Heat-strengthened steel helical torsion springs; sized to counterbalance curtain weight. 6. Counterbalance shaft: Case-hardened steel; designed to retain spring ends and resist torsional forces. 7. Brackets: Gray cast iron, ASTM A 48, or cold-rolled steel plate. Furnish with flared guide end for curtain. G. Hood: 1. Enclose curtain coil and counterbalance mechanism with sheet metal hood. 2. Fabricate hood to align with end brackets. 3. Return hood edges for stiffness. Coiling Doors 08332-5 Ell ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL .w b. Finish: Baked-on polyester prime coat. 5. Operator: Manual chain and gear. 6. Locking device: Cylinder lock; cylinders furnished elsewhere in Division 8, master-keyed to other building locks. 7. Furnish the following manufacturer's optional accessories: a. Extruded tubular polychloroprene (neoprene) bottom edge astragal. b. Weatherstripping at door jambs and head. B. Overhead Coiling Doors at Natatorium & Equipment Rooms: 1. Wind resistance: 20 pounds per square foot. .. 2. Curtain: a. Material: Stainless steel. b. Gage: 22. C. Slat profile: Manufacturer's standard flat-faced slat. d. Finish: No. 4 bright polished. 3. Guides: a. Material: Aluminum. b. Finish: Clear anodized. 4. Provide manufacturer's standard integral jamb and sill trim. .. 5. Hood: a. Material: Stainless steel, minimum 24 gage. b. Finish: Match curtain finish. •. 6. Operator: Manual push-up with lift handle. 7. Locking device: Slide bolt with thumb turn. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. End Locks (doors): Galvanized iron castings, ASTM A 48; fasten to each end of curtain at about 24 inches on center to resist lateral force. *� B. Wind Locks: Galvanized iron castings, ASTM A 48, spaced 24 inches on center along each side of curtain. 1. Provide wind locks on doors as required to withstand wind loads indicated. 2. Furnish on doors wider than 16 feet. �^ C. Bottom Bar: 1. Bottom bar, overhead coiling doors: 2 angles, minimum 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch thick; match curtain material and finish. a. Bottom seal: Replaceable vinyl or neoprene gasket between bottom bar Coiling Doors 08332-4 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Atlas Roll-Lite Door Corporation. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. C. Dynamic Closures Corporation. d. Kinnear/North American, Divisions of Wayne-Dalton Corporation. e. Windsor Door, A United Dominion Company. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063. ! B. Iron Castings: ASTM A 48. C. Steel: ASTM A 446, structural quality, cold-rolled steel sheets, Grade A. 1. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525, G90 coating. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Overhead Coiling Service Door: 1. Wind resistance: 40 pounds per square foot. 2. Curtain: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Gage: 20. C. Slat profile: Manufacturer's standard flat-faced. d. Finish: Baked-on polyester finish coat over metallic silver epoxy primer. e. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard foam insulation installed between exterior and interior slats. 1. Thermal performance: U-factor, 0.16. 3. Guides: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Finish: Baked-on metallic silver epoxy primer. 4. Hood: a. Material: Galvanized steel, minimum 24 gage. Coiling Doors 08332-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL B. Quality Control Submittals: -! 1. Wind resistance certification: For information only, manufacturer's written certification statement. C. Contract closeout submittals: 1. Manufacturer's standard operating instructions and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE *' A. Provide one manufacturer's coiling door assemblies, complete with operating accessories and installation hardware. B. Supply all required coiling door assemblies from a single manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have installation experience with the type of products included in this section. D. Certifications: 1. Wind resistance: Furnish manufacturer's written certification that coiling doors have been designed and constructed to meet or exceed specified wind resistance criteria. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule and coordinate installation of anchors in masonry for support of coiling doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS an 2.01 MANUFACTURERS .p A. Coiling Doors: .m 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with Coiling Doors 08332-2 No ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08332 - COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 01_ SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overhead coiling service doors. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Supply: Masonry anchors for coiling doors. 2. Furnish location drawings and installation instructions for placement of anchors. C. Related Sections: 1. Installation of inserts and anchorages in masonry: Division 4. 2. Door schedule: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Field painting: Division 9. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loading: Provide door assemblies which have been designed and constructed to withstand the specified wind load pressure. 2. Thermal performance: Where insulated coiling doors are indicated, furnish doors which have been tested and shown to comply with the specified thermal performance in accordance with ASTM C 236. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Written technical information and installation instructions for each coiling door type, which demonstrate that products comply with contract documents. Coiling Doors 08332-1 am .. ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 2 . Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch. mom 3 . Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 1/4 inch. 4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering .. surface or finish (where threshold is not indicated) : 1/8 inch. 5. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch. 3 . 03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for proper operation; coordinate with hardware adjustment; replace doors which cannot be properly adjusted. B. Restore door finishes damaged during installation, in a manner which results in the door showing no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors, refinished door must be replaced at the Contractor's expense. C. Protect installed work. END OF SECTION 08211 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-6 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL hardware schedule, hardware templates, and door frame shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect door frames and doors before beginning door installation. 1. Verify that frames are properly installed and aligned and are capable of providing trouble free support for doors throughout range of door swing. 2 . Do not install damaged or defective doors. B. Submit written report describing examination that has been performed and any conditions not conforming to requirements. C. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this section. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware Installation: Elsewhere in Division 8. B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standard. 1. Fire-rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements. C. Prefit Doors: Minimize field fitting to those procedures which are necessary to complete work unfinished during factory prefitting and to provide trouble free operation. D. Fitting of Doors: 1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing. E. Clearances: 1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/8 inch. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-5 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL a. Species: Red oak. *� b. Cut: Plain sliced,grain running vertical and parallel. 3. Finish: Transparent finish specified elsewhere. 4 . Grade: AWI Premium. 5. Construction: 7 ply. 6. Prime-painted metal stops. .m B. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they so comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. No C. Benton Doors, Inc. d. Eggers Industries. e. Fenestra Corporation. no f. G1enMar Door Manufacturing Company. g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation. h. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. i. Weyerhaeuser Company. 00 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES wo A. Stops for Glazing and Louvers: 1. For fire rated doors: Cold-rolled sheet steel of gage am approved by testing agency for installation in fire-rated doors indicated. 2 . Prime-painted steel: Shop prime to receive finish 4W specified elsewhere. 2. 04 FABRICATION .w A. Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as "` indicated. 1. Hinge and lock edges: Provide 1/8-inch standard bevel at edges, unless standard bevel would not precisely on match hardware bevel ; provide proper bevel for hardware. 2. Make neat mortises and cutouts for door hardware indicated. *p 3. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim doors to size at factory to coordinate with frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule. ,o 4 . Premachining: Make all mortises and cutouts required for hardware at the factory to conform to approved no Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-4 no ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not deliver or install products of this section before building's design temperature and humidity levels have been achieved and will be maintained at those levels. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer guaranteeing to correct failures in products which occur within the warranty period indicated below, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship; stile, rail, or core show-through (telegraphing) ; and warp (including bow, cup, and twist) . Correction may include repair or replacement. Correct failures which occur within the following warranty period(s) after substantial completion: 1. Solid core wood-faced interior doors: Life of original installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 WOOD DOORS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS rw A. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Conform to testing agency requirements .s for indicated fire rating. 2. Fire rated doors with 45-minute or greater rating: Provide the following: a. Edges: Laminated edge (stile) designed for use with mortise hinges and appropriate for indicated fire resistance rating. b. Pairs of fire rated doors: Provide steel astragals and steel meeting edges. 3. Labels: Permanently affixed to hinge stile. 2. 02 SOLID CORE WOOD-FACED DOORS A. Description: 1. Labeled fire door. 2. Faces: Veneers for transparent finish. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-3 WNW ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL "Part 3 . " 1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flush Doors: Conform to the following, hereinafter referred to as referenced standard(s) : 1. NWWDA I.S. 1: "Wood Flush Doors, " National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA) . 2 . "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide �. Specifications and Quality Certification Program, " including Section 1300, "Architectural Flush Doors, " Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) . �. a. Where the AWI standard indicates requirements that conflict with the NWWDA standard, comply with AWI. B. NWWDA Hallmark: Each door must bear the NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark. 00 C. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Provide doors which are precise duplicates of doors tested as part of fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements of ASTM E 152 . 2 . Acceptable testing and inspection agencies: a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. .. D. Manufacturer: Member of AWI. 1. 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations, requirements of referenced standard, and recommendations of NWWDA I.S. 1, Appendix, "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors. " B. Clearly label each door with opening number where door will be installed. Use removable, temporary labels or mark on door surface which will be concealed from view after installation. 1. Coordinate door identification with shop drawing designations. .., Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-2 ADDITION/RENOV. J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08211 - SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid core wood-faced doors. 2 . Prefitting by manufacturer. * 3 . Premachining by manufacturer. s� B. Related Sections: 1. Metal door frames: Elsewhere in Division 8. 2 . Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1. 02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information for each distinct product specified in this section. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit shop drawings showing all relevant information, including: 1. Dimensions and location of each product specified. 2. Construction details for each distinct product type. 3. Dimensions and location of blocking for hardware. 4. Fire ratings. C. Samples: Submit samples for the following: 1. Door construction: Show faces, edges, and core; minimum size 6 inches by 6 inches. 2. Glazing stops: For each type and finish, provide minimum 5-inch-long sample. D. Certification: Submit AWI "Architectural Quality Certification Program" Inspection Service Report; on-site inspection is not required. E. Preinstallation Report: Submit report indicating compliance with examination requirements specified in Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08211-1 MW ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings. B. Frame Installation: 1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105. 2. Place welded frames prior to construction of enclosing elements, braced securely ° to achieve plumb, planar installation. Remove braces after anchorages have achieved final set, leaving frames in smooth, undamaged condition. 3. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18 gage base anchors. 4. Openings at in-place masonry: Fasten frames securely to masonry with machine screws and masonry anchorages. 5. Fire-rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: 1. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100. 2. Fire-rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances. D. Fixed Panel Installation: 1. Install fixed panels with concealed fasteners. 3.01 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch-Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand smooth and spray-apply compatible primer. B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors, making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and undamaged. END OF SECTION 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-6 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL items. 2. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings. N. Shop Painting: 1. Preparation: Clean surfaces thoroughly before beginning painting operations, removing rust, scale, oil, grease, and other contaminants. 2. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces. W O. Natatorium Locations: 1. Fabricate both doors and frames from stainless steel. 2.04 STEEL DOORS A. General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100. B. Interior Doors: 1. Grade III - Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 1 - Full Flush. C. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade III - Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 1 - Full Flush. D. Fixed Panels: 1. Provide fixed panels of same fabrication as doors. 2.05 STEEL FRAMES A. General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using concealed fasteners. 1. Minimum thickness: 14 gage. 2. Construction: Mitered and welded corners. B. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive silencers, except on frames scheduled for weatherstripping. 1. Provide 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames. 2. Provide 2 silencers on heads of frames for pairs of doors. 3. Provide 2 silencers on heads of frames for double egress doors. C. Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout, plaster, or other materials might interfere with hardware operation. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-5 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL am E. Fasteners and Inserts: Units standard with manufacturer. 1. Exterior walls: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized, Class C or D. -- F. Paint: 1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish coatings specified. 2.03 FABRICATION MW A. General: Shop-fabricate assemblies to greatest extent possible, assuring that installed units will be without warp, twist, bow, or other defect in appearance or function. B. Exposed Panel Faces: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel. .R C. Exposed Door Faces: Fabricate from cold-rolled steel. D. Frames: Fabricate from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. *" E. Edge Channels, Stiffeners, and Reinforcement: Fabricate from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. " F. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from hot-dip galvanized steel. G. Seal top and bottom edges integrally with door construction, or use minimum 16 gage steel channels to form flush closure. H. Interior Doors: Fabricate from hot-dip galvanized steel. I. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel. " J. Interior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel. K. Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips-head fasteners. L. Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance. 1. Maximum U-value: 0.24 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F. M. Hardware Preparation: Comply with DHI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation, using final hardware schedule and templates from hardware supplier. 1. Reinforcement: Reinforce doors and frames for field-installed exposed hardware Steel Doors and Frames 08110-4 •• ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL A. Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site. B. Replace items damaged in delivery, unless damage is minor and can be repaired to match intact items, as determined by Architect. C. Store products under cover, raised above ground level, and stacked to prevent warping and to promote air circulation. 1. Prevent moisture from accumulating and remove saturated packaging before products can be damaged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Allied Steel Products, Inc. 2. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 3. Benchmark Commercial Door Products. 4. Ceco Door Products, a Division of United Dominion. 5. Copco Door Company. 6. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Inc. 7. Fenestra Corporation. 8. Kewanee Corporation. 9. Mesker Door, Inc. 10. Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industries, Inc. 11. Premier Products. 12. Republic Builders Products Division/DFSCO. 13. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries. 14. Trussbilt, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheets, Hot-Rolled: ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, pickled and oiled. B. Steel Sheets, Cold-Rolled: ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, matte finish exposed, oiled. C. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 525, commercial quality, A60 zinc-iron or G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage. "'"' Steel Doors and Frames 08110-3 ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL -- sm I. DHI A115 Series -- Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; 1980-91. J. NFPA 80 -- Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1990. ..� K. SDI 100-1991 -- Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute; 1991. .. L. SDI 105-91 -- Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames; Steel Door Institute; 1991. no 1.04 SUBMITTALS •w A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product information indicating compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames, including the following information: 1. Details of construction, joints, and connections. 2. Details of each frame type, including anchorage. 3. Elevations of each opening type. 4. Conditions at openings, including coordination with glass and glazing requirements. 5. Location and installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements. 6. Schedule of openings coordinated with numbering system used in contract documents. C. Quality Assurance Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that products have been constructed and tested in full compliance with ANSI/SDI 100. As applicable, include test reports for core construction and reinforcing methods not specifically designated as acceptable by ANSI/SDI 100. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with SDI 100. B. Labeled Assemblies: At all locations where fire-rated door and frame assemblies are required, provide assemblies which comply with NFPA 80 and have been tested and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 by agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-2 am ADDITIONS/RENOVATIONS J.F.K. MIDDLE SCHOOL SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard steel doors and frames. 2. Assemblies for fire-rated openings. 3. Insulated doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Anchoring and grouting frames in masonry: Division 4. 2. Wood doors for installation in steel frames: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. go 4. Glass and glazing: Elsewhere in Division 8. 5. Finish painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 153-82(87) --Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987). B. ASTM A 366/A 366M-91 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality; 1991. C. ASTM A 525-91b --Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1991. D. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. E. ASTM A 568/A 568M-92 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For; 1992. F. ASTM A 569/A 569M-91a -- Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality; 1991. G. ASTM C 236-89 -- Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989. H. ASTM E 152-81a -- Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1981. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 I 006,3 A DDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TO JeFeKe Middle School 1 • 100 Bridge Road Northampton , Massachusetts 0 L U M E 2 TESSIER ASSOCIATES, INC. ARCHITECTURE and INTERIOR DESM 1578 Riverdale Street Ste. 2 ' West Springtiald, Massachusetts 01089 JUNE 1994 7L7 Telephone 413 736-5857 Fax 413 736-2757